17. m Commands

17.1. ma-index-range

ma-index-range

Syntax 
ma-index-range start ma-index end ma-index
no ma-index-range
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-cfm>md-auto-id ma-index-range)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-cfm md-auto-id ma-index-range
Description 

This command specifies the range of indexes used by SROS to automatically assign an index to ETH-CFM associations that are created in model-driven interfaces without an index explicitly specified by the user or client.

An association created with an explicitly-specified index cannot use an index in this range. In classic CLI and SNMP, the ID range cannot be changed while objects exist inside the previous or new range. In MD interfaces, the range can be changed, which causes any previously existing objects in the previous ID range to be deleted and re-created using a new ID in the new range.

The no form of this command removes the range values.

See the md-auto-id command for further details.

Parameters 
start ma-index
Specifies the lower value of the index range. The value must be less than or equal to the end value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

end ma-index
Specifies the upper value of the index range. The value must be greater than or equal to the start value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

17.2. mac

mac

Syntax 
mac ieee-address
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host>host-ident mac)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp>host>host-ident mac)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host host-identification mac
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp host host-identification mac
Description 

This command specifies the MAC address to match.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers.

mac

Syntax 
[no] mac ieee-mac-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if mac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6>vrrp mac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>vrrp mac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if mac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nw-if mac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface ipv6 vrrp mac
configure service vprn interface mac
configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep mac
configure service vprn interface vrrp mac
configure service vprn network-interface mac
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface mac
Description 

This command assigns a specific MAC address to a VPRN IP interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default 

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface on which the SAP is configured.

Parameters 
ieee-mac-address—
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mac

Syntax 
[no] mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>ppp mac)
Full Contexts 
debug service id ppp mac
Description 

This command shows PPP packets for the specified MAC address.

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Enables debugging for the specified MAC address.

mac

Syntax 
[no] mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mac-protect mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mac-protect mac
Description 

This command specifies the 48-bit IEEE 802.3 MAC address.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default 

none

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers.

mac

Syntax 
mac ieee-address
no mac [ieee-address]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if mac)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface mac
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface mac
Description 

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an IES IP interface.

For Routed Central Office (CO), a group interface has no IP address explicitly configured but inherits an address from the parent subscriber interface when needed. For example, a MAC will respond to an ARP request when an ARP is requested for one of the IPs associated with the subscriber interface through the group interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default 

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface that the SAP is configured on (the default MAC address assigned to the interface, assigned by the system).

Parameters 
ieee-address —
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff, where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mac

Syntax 
mac ieee-address
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mcr-default-gtw mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mcr-default-gtw mac
Description 

This command relates to a system configured for Dual Homing in L2-TPSDA. It defines the MAC address used when the system sends out a gratuitous ARP on an active SAP after a ring heals or fails in order to attract traffic from subscribers on the ring with connectivity to that SAP.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

no mac

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Specifies the address in xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx format (cannot be all zeros).

mac

Syntax 
mac ieee-address
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel mac)
[Tree] (config>lag mac)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet mac)
[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path mac)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group mac)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3 mac)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group mac)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e3 mac)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-tunnel mac
configure lag mac
configure port ethernet mac
configure port sonet-sdh path mac
configure port tdm ds1 channel-group mac
configure port tdm ds3 mac
configure port tdm e1 channel-group mac
configure port tdm e3 mac
Description 

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an Ethernet port, Link Aggregation Group (LAG), Ethernet tunnel, or BCP-enabled port or sub-port.

Only one MAC address can be assigned to a port. When multiple mac commands are entered, the last command overwrites the previous command. When the command is issued while the port is operational, IP will issue an ARP, if appropriate, and BPDUs are sent with the new MAC address.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address to the default value.

Default 

A default MAC address is assigned by the system from the chassis MAC address pool.

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mac

Syntax 
mac ieee-address
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel>ethernet mac)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-tunnel ethernet mac
Description 

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an Ethernet port, Link Aggregation Group (LAG), Ethernet tunnel, or BCP-enabled port or sub-port.

Only one MAC address can be assigned to a port. When multiple mac commands are entered, the last command overwrites the previous command. When the command is issued while the port is operational, IP will issue an ARP, if appropriate, and BPDUs are sent with the new MAC address.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address to the default value.

Default 

no mac

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses6-byte unicast mac-address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) of the MEP. Using the all zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

mac

Syntax 
[no] mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>proxy-arp-nd>mac-list mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service proxy-arp-nd mac-list mac
Description 

This command configures the proxy ARP or ND MAC address information.

The no form of the command deletes the MAC address.

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Specifies the MAC address added to the list. The MAC list can be empty or contain up to 10 addresses.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

 

mac

Syntax 
mac ieee-address [create] black-holemac ieee-address [create] sap sap-id monitor {fwd-status}
mac ieee-address [create] spoke-sdp sdp-id:vc-id monitor {fwd-status}
no mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>static-mac mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls static-mac mac
Description 

This command assigns a conditional static MAC address entry to an SPBM B-VPLS SAP/spoke-SDP allowing external MACs for single and multi-homed operation.

For the 7450 ESS or 7750 SR, this command also assigns a conditional static MAC address entry to an EVPN VPLS SAP/spoke-SDP.

Static MACs are used for PBB Epipe and I-VPLS services that may terminate external to SPBM. If this is configured under a Control B-VPLS the interface referenced will not use IS-IS for this neighbor. This may also be configured under a User B-VPLS where the corresponding interface is not supported under the Control B-VPLS.

Parameters 
ieee-address —
Specifies the static MAC address to an SPBM/sdp-binding interface
Values—
6-byte mac-address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) Cannot be all zeros.

 

sap-id—
Specifies the SAP identifier
sdp-id—
Specifies the SDP identifier
Values—
1 to 17407

 

vc-id—
Specifies the virtual circuit identifier
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

create—
This keyword is mandatory while creating a static MAC
fwd-status —
Specifies that this static mac is based on the forwarding status of the SAP or spoke-SDP for multi-homed operation.
black-hole—
Specifies for TLS FDB entries defined on a local SAP the value 'sap', remote entries defined on an SDP have the value 'sdp'.

mac

Syntax 
[no] mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service ipipe sap mac
Description 

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an Ipipe SAP.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the SAP to the default value.

Default 

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface where the SAP is configured.

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers.

mac

Syntax 
mac mac-filter-id
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>template>epipe-sap-template>egress>filter mac)
[Tree] (config>service>template>epipe-sap-template>ingress>filter mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service template epipe-sap-template egress filter mac
configure service template epipe-sap-template ingress filter mac
Description 

This command associates an existing MAC filter policy with the template.

This command is only supported in 'classic' configuration-mode (configure system management-interface configuration-mode classic).

Parameters 
mac-filter-id—
Specifies the MAC filter policy. The specified filter ID must already exist within the created MAC filters. The filter policy must already exist within the created MAC filters.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

mac

Syntax 
mac name
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>template>epipe-sap-template>egress>filter-name mac)
[Tree] (config>service>template>epipe-sap-template>ingress>filter-name mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service template epipe-sap-template egress filter-name mac
configure service template epipe-sap-template ingress filter-name mac
Description 

This command associates an existing IP filter policy with the template.

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the MAC filter policy name, up to 64 characters.

mac

Syntax 
mac ieee-address [mask six-byte-mask]
no mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>mac-list mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service mac-list mac
Description 

This command adds a protected MAC address entry.

The no form of this command removes the protected MAC address entry.

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Specifies the address in xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx format (cannot be all zeros), up to 30 characters.
six-byte-mask—
Specifies the mask address in xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx format (cannot be all zeros), up to 30 characters.

mac

Syntax 
mac ieee-address
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>interface mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls interface mac
Description 

This command assigns a specific MAC address to a VPLS IP interface.

For Routed Central Office (CO), a group interface has no IP address explicitly configured but inherits an address from the parent subscriber interface when needed. For example, a MAC will respond to an ARP request when an ARP is requested for one of the IPs associated with the subscriber interface through the group interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default 

mac

Parameters 
ieee-address —
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.
Default—
The system chassis MAC address.

mac

Syntax 
mac name
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template>egress>filter-name mac)
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template>ingress>filter-name mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service template vpls-sap-template egress filter-name mac
configure service template vpls-sap-template ingress filter-name mac
Description 

This command associates an existing IP filter policy with the template.

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the MAC filter policy name, up to 64 characters.

mac

Syntax 
[no] mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>arp-host mac)
Full Contexts 
debug service id arp-host mac
Description 

This command displays ARP host events for a particular MAC address.

Parameters 
mac-address —
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx (cannot be all zeros)

 

mac

Syntax 
[no] mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>igmp-snooping mac)
Full Contexts 
debug service id igmp-snooping mac
Description 

This command shows IGMP packets for the specified MAC address.

The no form of this command disables the MAC debugging.

mac

Syntax 
[no] mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>mld mac)
Full Contexts 
debug service id mld-snooping mac
Description 

This command shows MLD packets for the specified MAC address.

The no form of this command disables the MAC debugging.

mac

Syntax 
[no] mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>host-connectivity-verify mac)
Full Contexts 
debug service id host-connectivity-verify mac
Description 

This command displays Subscriber Host Connectivity Verification (SHCV) events for a particular MAC address.

Parameters 
mac-address —
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx (cannot be all zeros)

 

mac

Syntax 
mac mac-address
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>vrrp mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface ipv6 vrrp mac
Description 

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an IES IP interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default 

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface that the SAP is configured on (the default MAC address assigned to the interface, assigned by the system).

Parameters 
mac-address —
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mac

Syntax 
mac mac-address
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>vrrp mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface vrrp mac
Description 

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an IES IP interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default 

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface that the SAP is configured on (the default MAC address assigned to the interface, assigned by the system).

Parameters 
mac-address —
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff, where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mac

Syntax 
mac mac-filter-id entry entry-id [interval seconds] [repeat repeat] [{absolute |rate}]
Context 
[Tree] (monitor>filter mac)
Full Contexts 
monitor filter mac
Description 

This command monitors the counters associated with the specified entry of the specified MAC filter policy.

Parameters 
mac-filter-id—
The MAC filter policy ID. Values can be expressed in different formats. The following only shows decimal integer format values.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

entry-id—
Specifies the filter policy entry to monitor, as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 2097151

 

seconds—
Configures the interval for each display in seconds.
Default—
10 seconds
Values—
3 to 60

 

repeat—
Configures how many times the command is repeated.
Default—
10
Values—
1 to 999

 

absolute—
Displays the raw statistics without processing. No calculations are performed on the delta or rate statistics.
rate—
Displays the rate-per-second for each statistic instead of the delta.
Default—
absolute

mac

Syntax 
mac mac-filter-id entry entry-id [interval seconds] [repeat repeat] [absolute |rate]
Context 
[Tree] (monitor>filter mac)
Full Contexts 
monitor filter mac
Description 

This command enables MAC filter monitoring. The statistical information for the specified MAC filter entry displays at the configured interval until the configured count is reached.

The first screen displays the current statistics related to the specified MAC filter. The subsequent statistical information listed for each interval is displayed as a delta to the previous display. When the keyword rate is specified, the rate-per-second for each statistic is displayed instead of the delta.

Monitor commands are similar to show commands but only statistical information displays. Monitor commands display the selected statistics according to the configured number of times at the interval specified.

Parameters 
mac-filter-id—
Specifies the MAC filter policy ID.
Values—
filter-id | filter-name
filter-id: 1 to 65535
filter-name: 64 chars max

 

entry-id—
Displays information on the specified filter entry ID for the specified filter ID only.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

seconds
Configures the interval for each display in seconds.
Values—
3 to 60

 

Default—
10 seconds
repeat—
Configures how many times the command is repeated.
Values—
1 to 999

 

Default—
10
absolute—
Displays raw statistics, without processing. No calculations are performed on the delta or rate statistics.
rate—
Displays rate-per-second for each statistic instead of the delta.
Output 

The following output is an example of filter mac information.

Sample Output
A:ALA-1>monitor>filter# mac 50 entry 10 interval 3 repeat 3 absolute
===============================================================================
Monitor statistics for Mac filter 50 entry 10
===============================================================================
At time t = 0 sec (Base Statistics)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ing. Matches: 0                                Egr. Matches    : 0
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
At time t = 3 sec (Mode: Absolute)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ing. Matches: 0                                Egr. Matches    : 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
At time t = 6 sec (Mode: Absolute)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ing. Matches: 0                                Egr. Matches    : 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
At time t = 9 sec (Mode: Absolute)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ing. Matches: 0                                Egr. Matches    : 0
===============================================================================
 
 
A:ALA-1>monitor>filter# mac 50 entry 10 interval 3 repeat 3 rate
===============================================================================
Monitor statistics for Mac filter 50 entry 10
===============================================================================
At time t = 0 sec (Base Statistics)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ing. Matches: 0                                Egr. Matches    : 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
At time t = 3 sec (Mode: Rate)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ing. Matches: 0                                Egr. Matches    : 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
At time t = 6 sec (Mode: Rate)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ing. Matches: 0                                Egr. Matches    : 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
At time t = 9 sec (Mode: Rate)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ing. Matches: 0                                Egr. Matches    : 0
===============================================================================
A:ALA-1>monitor>filter#

mac

Syntax 
mac ieee-address
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>if mac)
Full Contexts 
configure router interface mac
Description 

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an IP interface. Only one MAC address can be assigned to an IP interface. When multiple mac commands are entered, the last command overwrites the previous command.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default 

no mac

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the IP interface in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff, where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mac

Syntax 
mac mac-address
no mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>if>vrrp mac)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6>vrrp mac)
Full Contexts 
configure router interface ipv6 vrrp mac
configure router interface vrrp mac
Description 

This command sets an explicit MAC address used by the virtual router instance overriding the VRRP default derived from the VRID.

Changing the default MAC address is useful when an existing HSRP or other non-VRRP default MAC is in use by the IP hosts using the virtual router IP address. Many hosts do not monitor unessential ARPs and continue to use the cached non-VRRP MAC address after the virtual router becomes master of the host’s gateway address.

The mac command sets the MAC address used in ARP responses when the virtual router instance is master. Routing of IP packets with mac-address as the destination MAC is also enabled. The mac setting must be the same for all virtual routers participating as a virtual router or indeterminate connectivity by the attached IP hosts will result. All VRRP advertisement messages are transmitted with mac-address as the source MAC.

The command can be configured in both non-owner and owner vrrp nodal contexts.

The mac command can be executed at any time and takes effect immediately. When the virtual router MAC on a master virtual router instance changes, a gratuitous ARP is immediately sent with a VRRP advertisement message. If the virtual router instance is disabled or operating as backup, the gratuitous ARP and VRRP advertisement message is not sent.

The no form of the command restores the default VRRP MAC address to the virtual router instance.

Default 

no mac — The virtual router instance uses the default VRRP MAC address derived from the VRID.

Parameters 
mac-address—
The 48-bit MAC address for the virtual router instance in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC, and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mac

Syntax 
mac entry entry-id [interval seconds] [repeat repeat] [absolute |rate]
Context 
[Tree] (monitor>cpm-filter mac)
Full Contexts 
monitor cpm-filter mac
Description 

This command displays monitor command statistics for MAC filter entries.

Parameters 
entry-id
Displays information on the specified filter entry ID for the specified filter ID only.
Values—
1 to 2048

 

seconds
Configures the interval for each display in seconds.
Values—
3 to 60

 

Default—
10 seconds
repeat—
Configures how many times the command is repeated.
Values—
1 to 999

 

Default—
10
absolute—
Displays raw statistics, without processing. No calculations are performed on the delta or rate statistics.
rate—
Displays rate-per-second for each statistic instead of the delta.

mac

Syntax 
mac entry-id [interval seconds] [repeat repeat] [absolute |rate]
Context 
[Tree] (monitor>management-access-filter mac)
Full Contexts 
monitor management-access-filter mac
Description 

This command monitors statistics for the MAF MAC filter entry.

Parameters 
entry-id
Specifies an existing IP MAF entry ID.
Values—
1 to 9999

 

seconds
Configures the interval for each display in seconds.
Values—
3 to 60

 

Default—
10
repeat
Configures how many times the command is repeated.
Values—
1 to 999

 

Default—
10
absolute—
Displays raw statistics, without processing. No calculations are performed on the delta or rate statistics.
rate—
Displays rate-per-second for each statistic instead of the delta.

mac

Syntax 
mac index name mac-name
no mac index
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>client-mac-list mac)
[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>server-mac-list mac)
Full Contexts 
configure system security ssh client-mac-list mac
configure system security ssh server-mac-list mac
Description 

This command allows the user to configure SSH MAC algorithms for SR OS as an SSH server or an SSH client.

The no form of this command removes the specified mac index.

Default 

no mac index

Parameters 
index—
Specifies the index of the algorithm in the list.
Values—
1 to 255

 

mac-name—
Specifies the algorithm for calculating the message authentication code.
Values—
Table 82 lists the default client/server algorithms used for SSHv2.

 

Table 82:  SSHv2 Default client/server algorithms

index

mac-name

200

hmac-sha2-512

210

hmac-sha2-256

215

hmac-sha1

220

hmac-sha1-96

225

hmac-md5

230

hmac-ripemd160

235

hmac-ripemd160-openssh-com

240

hmac-md5-96

17.3. mac-address

mac-address

Syntax 
[no] mac-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>auth-policy>include-radius-attribute mac-address)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>acct-plcy>include-radius-attribute mac-address)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt radius-accounting-policy include-radius-attribute mac-address
configure subscriber-mgmt authentication-policy include-radius-attribute mac-address
Description 

This command enables the generation of the client MAC address RADIUS attribute.

The no form of this command disables the generation of the client MAC address RADIUS attribute.

mac-address

Syntax 
mac-address ieee-address
no mac-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>wlan-gw>ue-query mac-address)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt wlan-gw ue-query mac-address
Description 

This command enables matching on UEs with the specified MAC address.

The no form of this command disables matching on the MAC address.

Default 

no mac-address

Parameters 
ieee-address—
Specifies the ethernet MAC address.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

 

mac-address

Syntax 
mac-address mac-address
no mac-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-ring>path>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel>path>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-ring path eth-cfm mep mac-address
configure eth-tunnel path eth-cfm mep mac-address
Description 

This command specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

The no form of this command reverts the MAC address of the MEP back to that of the port (if the MEP is on a SAP) or the bridge (if the MEP is on a spoke SDP).

Parameters 
mac-address—
Specifies the MAC address of the MEP.
Values—
6-byte unicast mac-address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) of the MEP. Using the all zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

 

mac-address

Syntax 
mac-address mac-address
no mac-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>lag>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
[Tree] (config>router>if>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
Full Contexts 
configure lag eth-cfm mep mac-address
configure port ethernet eth-cfm mep mac-address
configure router interface eth-cfm mep mac-address
Description 

This command specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

The no form of this command reverts to the MAC address of the MEP back to the default, that of the port, since this is SAP based.

Default 

no mac-address

Parameters 
mac-address—
Specifies the MAC address of the MEP.
Values—
6-byte unicast mac-address (xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) of the MEP. Using the all zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

 

mac-address

Syntax 
mac-address mac-address
no mac-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
Full Contexts 
configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep mac-address
Description 

This command specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

The no form of this command reverts the MAC address of the MEP back to that of the port (if the MEP is on a SAP) or the bridge (if the MEP is on a spoke).

Parameters 
mac-address—
Specifies the MAC address of the MEP.
Values—
6-byte mac-address in the form of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx of the MEP. Must be unicast. Using the all zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

 

mac-address

Syntax 
mac-address mac-address
no mac-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls eth-cfm mep mac-address
configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mep mac-address
configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mep mac-address
configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep mac-address
Description 

This command specifies the MAC address of the MEP.

The no form of this command reverts the MAC address of the MEP back to that of the port (if the MEP is on a SAP) or the bridge (if the MEP is on a spoke).

Parameters 
mac-address—
Specifies the MAC address of the MEP
Values—
6-byte mac-address in the form of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx of the MEP. Must be unicast. Using the all zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

 

mac-address

Syntax 
mac-address mac-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep mac-address)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm mac-address)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep mac-address
configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep mac-address
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mac-address
Description 

This command assigns a specific MAC address to an IP interface.

The no form of this command returns the MAC address of the IP interface to the default value.

Default 

The physical MAC address associated with the Ethernet interface that the SAP is configured on.

Parameters 
mac-address—
Specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Allowed values are any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses.

mac-address

Syntax 
[no] mac-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>aaa>isa-radius-plcy>acct-include-attributes mac-address)
[Tree] (config>aaa>isa-radius-plcy>auth-include-attributes mac-address)
Full Contexts 
configure aaa isa-radius-policy acct-include-attributes mac-address
configure aaa isa-radius-policy auth-include-attributes mac-address
Description 

This command enables the generation of the client MAC address RADIUS attribute.

Default 

no mac-address

mac-address

Syntax 
mac-address mac-address
no mac-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>satellite>eth-sat mac-address)
[Tree] (config>system>satellite>tdm-sat mac-address)
Full Contexts 
configure system satellite eth-sat mac-address
configure system satellite tdm-sat mac-address
Description 

This command configures the MAC address for the associated satellite chassis. This MAC address is used to validate the identity of an satellite that attempts to associate with the local host.

The no form of the command deletes the MAC address for the associated satellite.

Parameters 
mac-address
Specifies the MAC address of the associated satellite chassis; do not use a broadcast or multicast MAC. Enter the MAC address in either of the following formats: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.

17.4. mac-advertisement

mac-advertisement

Syntax 
[no] mac-advertisement
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn mac-advertisement)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls bgp-evpn mac-advertisement
Description 

The mac-advertisement command enables the advertisement in BGP of the learned macs on SAPs and SDP bindings. When the mac-advertisement is disabled, the local macs will be withdrawn in BGP.

Default 

mac-advertisement

17.5. mac-criteria

mac-criteria

Syntax 
[no] mac-criteria
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress mac-criteria)
Full Contexts 
configure qos sap-ingress mac-criteria
Description 

The mac-criteria based SAP ingress policies are used to select the appropriate ingress queue and corresponding forwarding class for matched traffic.

This command is used to enter the node to create or edit policy entries that specify MAC criteria.

Router implementation will exit on the first match found and execute the actions in accordance with the accompanying action command. For this reason, entries must be sequenced correctly from most to least explicit.

The no form of this command deletes all the entries specified under this node. When mac-criteria entries are removed from a SAP ingress policy, the mac-criteria is removed from all services where that policy is applied.

17.6. mac-da-hashing

mac-da-hashing

Syntax 
[no] mac-da-hashing
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only mac-da-hashing)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters mac-da-hashing
Description 

This command specifies whether subscriber traffic egressing a LAG SAP has its egress LAG link selected by a function of the MAC destination address instead of the subscriber ID.

This command is only meaningful if subscriber management is enabled and can be configured for a VPLS service.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

mac-da-hashing

Syntax 
mac-da-hashing
no mac-da-hashing
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>sub-sla-mgmt mac-da-hashing)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap sub-sla-mgmt mac-da-hashing
Description 

This command specifies whether subscriber traffic egressing a LAG SAP has its egress LAG link selected by a function of the MAC destination address instead of the subscriber ID.

The no form of this command reverts to the default setting.

17.7. mac-duplication

mac-duplication

Syntax 
mac-duplication
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn mac-duplication)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls bgp-evpn mac-duplication
Description 

This command enables the context to configure the BGP EVPN MAC duplication parameters.

17.8. mac-filter

mac-filter

Syntax 
mac-filter mac-filter-id entry entry-id [entry-id]
no mac-filter mac-filter-id [entry entry-id]
Context 
[Tree] (config>mirror>mirror-source mac-filter)
Full Contexts 
configure mirror mirror-source mac-filter
Description 

This command enables mirroring of packets that match specific entries in an existing MAC filter.

The mac-filter command directs packets which match the defined list of entry IDs to be mirrored to the mirror destination referenced by the mirror-dest-service-id of the mirror-source.

The MAC filter must already exist in order for the command to execute. Filters are configured in the config>filter context. If the MAC filter does not exist, an error will occur. If the filter exists but has not been associated with a SAP or IP interface, an error is not be generated but mirroring will not be enabled (there are no packets to mirror). Once the filter is defined to a SAP or MAC interface, mirroring is enabled.

If the MAC filter is defined as ingress, only ingress packets are mirrored. Ingress mirrored packets are mirrored to the mirror destination prior to any ingress packet modifications.

If the MAC filter is defined as egress, only egress packets are mirrored. Egress mirrored packets are mirrored to the mirror destination after all egress packet modifications.

An entry-id within a MAC filter can only be mirrored to a single mirror destination. If the same entry-id is defined multiple times, an error occurs and only the first mirror-source definition is in effect.

By default, no packets matching any MAC filters are mirrored. Mirroring of MAC filter entries must be explicitly defined.

The no mac-filter command, without the entry keyword, removes mirroring on all entry-id’s within the mac-filter-id.

When the no command is executed with the entry keyword and one or more entry-id’s, mirroring of that list of entry-id’s is terminated within the mac-filter-id. If an entry-id is listed that does not exist, an error will occur and the command will not execute. If an entry-id is listed that is not currently being mirrored, no error will occur for that entry-id and the command will execute normally.

Parameters 
mac-filter-id—
Specifies the MAC filter ID whose entries are mirrored. If the mac-filter-id does not exist, an error will occur and the command will not execute. Mirroring of packets will commence once the mac-filter-id is defined on a SAP.
entry-id
Specifies the MAC filter entries to use as match criteria for packet mirroring. The entry keyword begins a list of entry-id’s for mirroring. Multiple entry-id entries may be specified with a single command. Each entry-id must be separated by a space. Up to 8 entry IDs may be specified in a single command.

Each entry-id must exist within the mac-filter-id. If the entry-id is renumbered within the MAC filter definition, the old entry-id is removed from the list and the new entry-id will need to be manually added to the list if mirroring is still desired.

If no entry-id entries are specified in the command, mirroring will not occur for that MAC filter ID. The command will have no effect.

mac-filter

Syntax 
[no] mac-filter mac-filter-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>li-filter-block-reservation>li-reserved-block mac-filter)
Full Contexts 
configure li li-filter-block-reservation li-reserved-block mac-filter
Description 

This command configures to which normal MAC filters the entry reservation is applied.

This command is only supported in 'classic' configuration-mode (configure system management-interface configuration-mode classic).

Parameters 
mac-filter-id—
The filter identification identifies the normal MAC filters.
Values—
{filter-id | filter-name}

filter-id:

1 to 65535

filter-name:

up to 64 characters (filter-name is an alias for input only. The filter-name gets replaced with an id automatically by SROS in the configuration).

 

mac-filter

Syntax 
[no] mac-filter mac-filter-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>li-filter-assoc>li-mac-fltr mac-filter)
Full Contexts 
configure li li-filter-associations li-mac-filter mac-filter
Description 

Specifies the MAC filter(s) into which the entries from the specified li-mac-filter are to be inserted. The li-mac-filter and mac-filter must already exist before the association is made. If the normal MAC filter is deleted then the association is also removed (and not re-created if the MAC filter comes into existence in the future).

The no form of this command removes the MAC filter ID from the configuration.

Parameters 
mac-filter-id—
Specifies a filter identification to identify the MAC filter.
Values—
1 to 65536, name: up to 64 characters

 

mac-filter

Syntax 
mac-filter mac-filter-id entry entry-id [entry-id] [intercept-id intercept-id [intercept-id]] [session-id [session-id] [[session-id]]]
no mac-filter mac-filter-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>li-source mac-filter)
Full Contexts 
configure li li-source mac-filter
Description 

This command enables lawful interception (LI) of packets that match specific entries in an existing MAC filter. Multiple entries can be created using unique entry-id numbers within the filter. The router implementation exits the filter on the first match found and executes the actions in accordance with the accompanying action command. For this reason, entries must be sequenced correctly from most to least explicit.

An entry may not have any match criteria defined (in which case, everything matches) but must have at least the keyword action for it to be considered complete. Entries without the action keyword will be considered incomplete and hence will be rendered inactive.

An entry-id within an MAC filter can only be intercepted to a single destination. If the same entry-id is defined multiple times, an error occurs and only the first definition is in effect.

The no form of this command removes the specified entry from the IP or MAC filter. Entries removed from the IP or MAC filter are immediately removed from all services or network ports where that filter is applied.

Parameters 
mac-filter-id—
Specifies the MAC filter ID. If the mac-filter-id does not exist, an error will occur and the command will not execute.
entry-id
The MAC filter entries to use as match criteria.
intercept-id
Specifies the intercept-id that is inserted into the packet header for all mirrored packets of the associated li-source entry. This intercept-id can be used (for example by a downstream LI gateway) to identify the particular LI session to which the packet belongs. For all types of li-source entries (filter, nat, sap, subscriber), when the mirror service is configured with ip-udp-shim routable encap, an intercept-id field (as part of the routable encap) is always present in the mirrored packets. If there is no intercept-id configured for an li-source entry, then the default value will be inserted. When the mirror service is configured with ip-gre routable encap, no intercept-id is inserted and none should be specified against the li-source entries.
Values—
1 to 4294967295 (32b) — For nat li-source entries that are using a mirror service that is not configured with routable encapsulation

 

Values—
1 to 1,073,741,824 (30b) — For all types of li-source entries that are using a mirror service with routable ip-udp-shim encapsulation and no direction-bit.

 

Values—
1 to 536,870,912 (29b) — For all types of li-source entries that are using a mirror service with routable ip-udp-shim encapsulation and with the direction-bit enabled.

 

session-id
Specifies the session-id that is inserted into the packet header for all mirrored packets of the associated li-source entry. This session-id can be used (for example by a downstream LI gateway) to identify the particular LI session to which the packet belongs. The session-id is only valid and used for mirror services that are configured with ip-udp-shim routable encap (config>mirror>mirror-dest>encap>ip-udp-shim). For all types of li-source entries (filter, nat, sap, or subscriber), when the mirror service is configured with ip-udp-shim routable encap, a session-id field (as part of the routable encap) is always present in the mirrored packets. If there is no session-id configured for an li-source entry, then the default value will be inserted. When a mirror service is configured with ip-gre routable encap, no session-id is inserted and none should be specified against the li-source entries.
Values—
1 to 4,294,967,295 (32b)

 

mac-filter

Syntax 
mac-filter mac-filter-id entry entry-id [entry-id]
no mac-filter mac-filter-id [entry entry-id]
Context 
[Tree] (debug>mirror-source mac-filter)
Full Contexts 
debug mirror-source mac-filter
Description 

This command enables mirroring of packets that match specific entries in an existing MAC filter.

The mac-filter command directs packets which match the defined list of entry IDs to be mirrored to the mirror destination referenced by the mirror-dest-service-id of the mirror-source.

The MAC filter must already exist in order for the command to execute. Filters are configured in the config>filter context. If the MAC filter does not exist, an error will occur. If the filter exists but has not been associated with a SAP or IP interface, an error is not be generated but mirroring will not be enabled (there are no packets to mirror). Once the filter is defined to a SAP or MAC interface, mirroring is enabled.

If the MAC filter is defined as ingress, only ingress packets are mirrored. Ingress mirrored packets are mirrored to the mirror destination prior to any ingress packet modifications.

If the MAC filter is defined as egress, only egress packets are mirrored. Egress mirrored packets are mirrored to the mirror destination after all egress packet modifications.

An entry-id within a MAC filter can only be mirrored to a single mirror destination. If the same entry-id is defined multiple times, an error occurs and only the first mirror-source definition is in effect.

By default, no packets matching any MAC filters are mirrored. Mirroring of MAC filter entries must be explicitly defined.

The no mac-filter command, without the entry keyword, removes mirroring on all entry-id’s within the mac-filter-id.

When the no command is executed with the entry keyword and one or more entry-id’s, mirroring of that list of entry-id’s is terminated within the mac-filter-id. If an entry-id is listed that does not exist, an error will occur and the command will not execute. If an entry-id is listed that is not currently being mirrored, no error will occur for that entry-id and the command will execute normally.

Parameters 
mac-filter-id—
The MAC filter ID whose entries are mirrored. If the mac-filter-id does not exist, an error will occur and the command will not execute. Mirroring of packets will commence once the mac-filter-id is defined on a SAP.
entry-id
The MAC filter entries to use as match criteria for packet mirroring. The entry keyword begins a list of entry-id’s for mirroring. Multiple entry-id entries may be specified with a single command. Each entry-id must be separated by a space. Up to 8 entry IDs may be specified in a single command.

Each entry-id must exist within the mac-filter-id. If the entry-id is renumbered within the MAC filter definition, the old entry-id is removed from the list and the new entry-id will need to be manually added to the list if mirroring is still desired.

If no entry-id entries are specified in the command, mirroring will not occur for that MAC filter ID. The command will have no effect.

mac-filter

Syntax 
mac-filter filter-id [create] [name name]
mac-filter {filter-id |filter-name}
no mac-filter {filter-id |filter-name}
Context 
[Tree] (config>filter mac-filter)
Full Contexts 
configure filter mac-filter
Description 

This command, creates a configuration context for the specified MAC filter policy.

The no form of the command deletes the MAC filter policy. A filter policy cannot be deleted until it is removed from all objects where it is applied.

Parameters 
filter-id—
Specifies the MAC filter policy ID expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

create—
This keyword is required to create the configuration context. After it is created, the context can be enabled with or without the create keyword.
name—
Configures an optional filter name, up to 64 characters in length, to a given filter. This filter name can then be used in configuration references, display, and show commands throughout the system. A defined filter name can help the service provider or administrator to identify and manage filters within the SR OS platforms.

To create a filter, you must assign a filter ID, however, after it is created, either the filter ID or filter name can be used to identify and reference a filter.

If a name is not specified at creation time, then SR OS assigns a string version of the filter-id as the name.

Filter names may not begin with an integer (0 to 9).

Values—
name: 64 characters maximum

 

filter-name—
A string of up to 64 characters uniquely identifying this MAC filter policy

mac-filter

Syntax 
[no] mac-filter
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>mgmt-access-filter mac-filter)
Full Contexts 
configure system security management-access-filter mac-filter
Description 

This command configures a management access MAC-filter.

mac-filter

Syntax 
[no] mac-filter
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>cpm-filter mac-filter)
Full Contexts 
configure system security cpm-filter mac-filter
Description 

This command enables the context to configure CPM MAC-filter parameters.

mac-filter

Syntax 
ip-filter src-filter-id [src-entry src-entry-id] to dst-filter-id [dst-entry dst-entry-id] [overwrite]
Context 
[Tree] (config>filter>copy mac-filter)
Full Contexts 
configure filter copy mac-filter
Description 

This command copies an existing filter entry for a specific filter ID to another filter ID. The copy command is a configuration level maintenance tool used to create new entries using an existing filter policy. If overwrite is not specified, an error will occur if the destination filter entry exists.

Parameters 
src-filter-id—
Identifies the source filter policy from which the copy command will attempt to copy. The filter policy must exist within the context of the preceding keyword (mac-filter).
dst-filter-id—
Identifies the destination filter policy to which the copy command will attempt to copy. If the overwrite keyword is not specified, the filter entry ID cannot already exist in the destination filter policy. If the overwrite keyword is present, the destination entry ID may or may not exist.
overwrite—
Specifies that the destination filter entry may exist. If it does, everything in the existing destination filter entry will be completely overwritten with the contents of the source filter entry. If the destination filter entry exists, either overwrite must be specified or an error message will be returned. If overwrite is specified, the function of copying from source to destination occurs in a “break before make” manner and therefore should be handled with care.

17.9. mac-filter-name

mac-filter-name

Syntax 
[no] mac-filter-name filter-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>li-filter-block-reservation>li-reserved-block mac-filter-name)
Full Contexts 
configure li li-filter-block-reservation li-reserved-block mac-filter-name
Description 

This command configures a MAC filter in which the reservation is done through name.

The no form of this command removes the MAC filter name.

Parameters 
filter-name—
Specifies the MAC filter name, up to 64 characters.

mac-filter-name

Syntax 
[no] mac-filter-name filter-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>li-filter-assoc>li-mac-fltr mac-filter-name)
Full Contexts 
configure li li-filter-associations li-mac-filter mac-filter-name
Description 

This command associates a MAC filter with a specified LI MAC filter through its name.

The no form of this command removes the MAC filter name.

Parameters 
filter-name—
Specifies the MAC filter name, up to 64 characters.

17.10. mac-format

mac-format

Syntax 
mac-format format
no mac-format
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host>match-radprox-cache mac-format)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host match-radius-proxy-cache mac-format
Description 

This command specifies the format of MAC address used for matching incoming DHCP DISCOVER against the RADIUS proxy cache.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

mac-format "aa:"

Parameters 
format—
Specifies the format string that specifies the format of MAC address.
Values—

mac-format: (only when match is equal to mac)

like ab: for 00:0c:f1:99:85:b8

or XY- for 00-0C-F1-99-85-B8

or mmmm. for 0002.03aa.abff

or xx for 000cf19985b8

 

mac-format

Syntax 
mac-format mac-format
no mac-format
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>gx mac-format)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>nasreq mac-format)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>gy mac-format)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy gx mac-format
configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy gy mac-format
configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy nasreq mac-format
Description 

This command configures the format of the MAC address when reported in Gx, Gy, or NASREQ application message AVPs such as Calling-Station-Id or User-Name.

The no form of this command resets the command to the default setting.

Default 

mac-format ab

Parameters 
mac-format—
Specifies the MAC address format.
Values—
like ab: for 00:0c:f1:99:85:b8
or XY- for 00-0C-F1-99-85-B8
or mmmm. for 0002.03aa.abff
or xx for 000cf19985b8

 

mac-format

Syntax 
mac-format mac-format
no mac-format
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>track-mobility mac-format)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>track-mobility mac-format)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range track-mobility mac-format
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range track-mobility mac-format
Description 

This command configures how the MAC address is represented by the RADIUS proxy server.

Default 

no mac-format "aa:"

Parameters 
mac-format—
Specifies how the MAC address is represented by the RADIUS proxy server.
Values—

mac-format

like ab: for 00:0c:f1:99:85:b8

or XY- for 00-0C-F1-99-85-B8

or mmmm. for 0002.03aa.abff

or xx for 000cf19985b8

 

17.11. mac-learning-options

mac-learning-options

Syntax 
[no] mac-learning-options
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host-mgmt mac-learning-options)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host-mgmt mac-learning-options)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host-mgmt mac-learning-options
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host-mgmt mac-learning-options
Description 

This command configures additional methods by which the BNG learns the subscriber host MAC.

17.12. mac-linking

mac-linking

Syntax 
mac-linking ip-address
no mac-linking
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host mac-linking)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host mac-linking)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host mac-linking
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host mac-linking
Description 

This command associates this IPv6 host to the specified IPv4 host through the learned MAC address. A learned MAC from the IPv6 host is associated with the IPv4 host and vice versa.

The no form of this command removes the IP address from the configuration.

17.13. mac-list

mac-list

Syntax 
mac-list name [create]
no mac-list name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>proxy-arp-nd mac-list)
Full Contexts 
configure service proxy-arp-nd mac-list
Description 

This command creates a list of MAC addresses that can be pointed at from the service for a specified IP. The list may contain up to 10 MAC addresses; an empty list is also allowed.

The MAC list allows on-the-fly changes, but a change in the list deletes the proxy entries for all the IPs using that list.

The no form of the command deletes the entire MAC-list. Deleting a MAC list is only possible if it is not referenced in the configuration.

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the name of the MAC address list, which can be up to 32 characters.
create—
Mandatory keyword to create a MAC list.

mac-list

Syntax 
mac-list name
no mac-list
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>proxy-arp>dynamic mac-list)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>proxy-nd>dynamic mac-list)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls proxy-arp dynamic mac-list
configure service vpls proxy-nd dynamic mac-list
Description 

This command associates a previously created MAC list to a dynamic IP. The MAC list is created using the config>service>proxy-arp-nd>mac-list command.

The no form of the command deletes the association of the MAC list and the dynamic IP.

Parameters 
name—
The name of the MAC list previously created using the config>service>proxy-arp-nd>mac-list command.

mac-list

Syntax 
mac-list name [create]
no mac-list name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service mac-list)
Full Contexts 
configure service mac-list
Description 

This command configures a MAC list name. The MAC list is composed of a list of MAC addresses and masks, which along with Auto-Learn Mac Protect (ALMP) can be used to exclude certain MACs from being protected in a given object. This is typically used on SAPs and spoke SDPs configured with ALMP where certain MACs must be able to move to other objects (for example, VRRP virtual MACs).

The no form of this command removes the MAC list name.

Parameters 
name —
Specifies the MAC list name, up to 32 characters.
create
Keyword used to create the MAC list.

17.14. mac-move

mac-move

Syntax 
[no] mac-move
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mac-move)
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-template mac-move)
Full Contexts 
configure service template vpls-template mac-move
configure service vpls mac-move
Description 

This command enters the context to configure MAC move attributes. A sustained high re-learn rate can be a sign of a loop somewhere in the VPLS topology. Typically, STP detects loops in the topology, but for those networks that do not run STP, the mac-move feature is an alternative way to protect your network against loops.

When enabled in a VPLS, mac-move monitors the re-learn rate of each MAC. If the rate exceeds the configured maximum allowed limit, it disables the SAP where the source MAC was last seen. The SAP can be disabled permanently (until a shutdown/no shutdown command is executed) or for a length of time that grows linearly with the number of times the specified SAP was disabled. You have the option of marking a SAP as non-blockable in the config>service>vpls>sap>limit-mac-move or config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>limit-mac-move contexts. This means that when the re-learn rate has exceeded the limit, another (blockable) SAP will be disabled instead.

The mac-move command enables the feature at the service level for SAPs and spoke-SDPs, as only those objects can be blocked by this feature. Mesh SDPs are never blocked, but their re-learn rates (sap-to-mesh/spoke-to-mesh or vice versa) are still measured.

The operation of this feature is the same on the SAP and spoke-SDP. For example, if a MAC address moves from SAP to SAP, from SAP to spoke-SDP, or between spoke-SDPs, one will be blocked to prevent thrashing. If the MAC address moves between a SAP and mesh SDP or spoke-SDP and mesh SDP combinations, the respective SAP or spoke-SDP will be blocked.

mac-move will disable a VPLS port when the number of relearns detected has reached the number of relearns needed to reach the move-frequency in the 5-second interval. For example, when the move-frequency is configured to 1 (relearn per second) mac-move will disable one of the VPLS ports when 5 relearns were detected during the 5-second interval because then the average move-frequency of 1 relearn per second has been reached. This can already occur in the first second if the real relearn rate is 5 relearns per second or higher.

The no form of this command disables MAC move.

17.15. mac-move-level

mac-move-level

Syntax 
mac-move-level {primary |secondary| tertiary}
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template mac-move-level)
Full Contexts 
configure service template vpls-sap-template mac-move-level
Description 

When a sap is instantiated using vpls-sap-template, if the MAC move feature is enabled at VPLS level, the command mac-move-level indicates whether the sap should be populated as primary-port, secondary-port or tertiary-port in the instantiated VPLS.

Default 

no mac-move-level; SAP is populated as a tertiary-port

17.16. mac-name

mac-name

Syntax 
mac-name name ieee-address
no mac-name name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>pbb mac-name)
Full Contexts 
configure service pbb mac-name
Description 

This command configures the MAC name for the MAC address. It associates an ASCII name with an IEEE MAC to improve the PBB Epipe configuration. It can also change the dest-BMAC in one place instead of 1000s of Epipe.

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the MAC name up to 32 characters in length.
ieee-address—
The MAC address assigned to the MAC name. The value should be input in either a xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx format.

17.17. mac-notification

mac-notification

Syntax 
mac-notification
Context 
[Tree] (config>service mac-notification)
Full Contexts 
configure service mac-notification
Description 

This command controls the settings for the MAC notification message.

The mac-notification message must be generated under the following events:

  1. When enabled in the BVPLS using no shutdown, a MAC notification will be sent for every active MC-LAG link. The following 3 cases assume no shutdown in the BVPLS.
  2. Whenever a related MC-LAG link becomes active (the related MC-LAG link has at least 1 SAP associated with the BVPLS) if the MC-LAG peering is initialized and the PE peers are synchronized.
  3. First SAP on an active MC-LAG is associated (via IVPLS/Epipe) with the BVPLS
  4. The link between IVPLS/Epipe and BVPLS is configured and there are I-SAPs configured on an active MC-LAG link.

The MAC notification is not sent for the following events:

  1. Change of source-bmac or source-bmac-lsb
  2. On changes of use-sap-bmac parameter
  3. If MC-LAG peering is not (initialized and in sync).

mac-notification

Syntax 
mac-notification
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mac-notification)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mac-notification
Description 

This command controls the settings for the MAC notification message.

The mac-notification message must be generated under the following events:

  1. When enabled in the BVPLS using no shutdown, a MAC notification will be sent for every active MC-LAG link. The following three cases assume no shutdown in the BVPLS.
  2. Whenever a related MC-LAG link becomes active (the related MC-LAG link has at least 1 SAP associated with the BVPLS) if the MC-LAG peering is initialized and the PE peers are synchronized.
  3. First SAP on an active MC-LAG is associated (via IVPLS/Epipe) with the BVPLS
  4. The link between IVPLS/Epipe and BVPLS is configured and there are I-SAPs configured on an active MC-LAG link.

The MAC notification is not sent for the following events:

  1. Change of source-bmac or source-bmac-lsb
  2. On changes of use-sap-bmac parameter
  3. If MC-LAG peering is not (initialized and in sync).

17.18. mac-ping

mac-ping

Syntax 
mac-ping service service-id destination dst-ieee-address [source src-ieee-address] [fc fc-name [profile {in |out}]] [size octets] [ttl vc-label-ttl] [count send-count] [return-control] [interval interval] [timeout timeout]
Context 
[Tree] (oam mac-ping)
[Tree] (config>saa>test>type mac-ping)
Full Contexts 
configure saa test type mac-ping
oam mac-ping
Description 

This command determines the existence of an egress SAP binding of a given MAC within a VPLS service.

A mac-ping packet is sent via the data plane.

A mac-ping is forwarded along the flooding domain if no MAC address bindings exist. If MAC address bindings exist, then the packet is forwarded along those paths, provided they are active. A response is generated only when there is an egress SAP binding for that MAC address or if the MAC address is a “local” OAM MAC address associated with the device’s control plan.

A mac-ping reply can be sent using the data plane or the control plane. The return-control option specifies the reply be sent using the control plane. If return-control is not specified, the request is sent using the data plane.

A mac-ping with data plane reply can only be initiated on nodes that can have an egress MAC address binding. A node without a FDB and without any SAPs cannot have an egress MAC address binding, so it is not a node where replies in the data plane are trapped and sent up to the control plane.

A control plane request is responded to via a control plane reply only.

By default, MAC OAM requests are sent with the system or chassis MAC address as the source MAC. The source option allows overriding of the default source MAC for the request with a specific MAC address.

When a source ieee-address value is specified and the source MAC address is locally registered within a split horizon group (SHG), then this SHG membership is used as if the packet originated from this SHG. In all other cases, SHG 0 (zero) is used. If the mac-trace is originated from a non-zero SHG, such packets do not go out to the same SHG.

Parameters 
service-id—
Specifies the service ID of the service to diagnose or manage.
Values—
1 to 2147483647
service-name: up to 64 characters

 

dst-ieee-address—
Specifies the destination MAC address for the OAM MAC request.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

 

src-ieee-address—
Specifies the source MAC address from which the OAM MAC request originates. By default, the system MAC address for the chassis is used.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

 

Default—
The system MAC address.
fc-name —
Specifies that the fc parameter be used to test the forwarding class of the MPLS echo request packets. The actual forwarding class encoding is controlled by the network egress LSP-EXP mappings.
Values—
be, l2, af, l1, h2, ef, h1, nc

 

Default—
be
profile {in |out}—
Specifies the profile state of the MPLS echo request encapsulation.
Default—
out
octets —
Specifies the MAC OAM request packet size in octets, expressed as a decimal integer. The request payload is padded to the specified size with a 6 byte PAD header and a byte payload of 0xAA as necessary. If the octet size specified is less than the minimum packet, the minimum sized packet necessary to send the request is used.
Values—
1 to 9198

 

vc-label-ttl—
Specifies the TTL value in the VC label for the OAM MAC request, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
255
send-count—
Specifies the number of messages to send, expressed as a decimal integer. The count parameter is used to override the default number of message requests sent. Each message request must either time out or receive a reply before the next message request is sent. The message interval value must be expired before the next message request is sent.
Values—
1 to 100

 

Default—
1
return-control—
Specifies the MAC OAM reply to a data plane MAC OAM request be sent using the control plane instead of the data plane.
interval—
Specifies the time, in seconds, used to override the default request message send interval and defines the minimum amount of time that must expire before the next message request is sent.

If the interval is set to 1 second where the timeout value is set to 10 seconds, then the maximum time between message requests is 10 seconds and the minimum is 1 second. This depends upon the receipt of a message reply corresponding to the outstanding message request.

Values—
1 to 10

 

Default—
1
timeout—
Specifies the time, in seconds, used to override the default timeout value and is the amount of time that the router waits for a message reply after sending the message request. Upon the expiration of message time out, the requesting router assumes that the message response is not received. Any response received after the request times out is silently discarded.
Values—
1 to 10

 

Default—
5

17.19. mac-pinning

mac-pinning

Syntax 
[no] mac-pinning
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap mac-pinning)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp mac-pinning)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp mac-pinning)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>endpoint mac-pinning)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls endpoint mac-pinning
configure service vpls mesh-sdp mac-pinning
configure service vpls sap mac-pinning
configure service vpls spoke-sdp mac-pinning
Description 

This command disables re-learning of MAC addresses on other SAPs within the VPLS. The MAC address will remain attached to a given SAP for duration of its age-timer.

The age of the MAC address entry in the FDB is set by the age timer. If mac-aging is disabled on a given VPLS service, any MAC address learned on a SAP or SDP with mac-pinning enabled will remain in the FDB on this SAP or SDP forever.

Every event that would otherwise result in re-learning is logged (MAC address; original-SAP; new-SAP).

The no form of the command enables re-learning of MAC addresses.

Note:

MAC addresses learned during DHCP address assignment (DHCP snooping enabled) are not impacted by this command. MAC-pinning for such addresses is implicit.

Default 

no mac-pinning — When a SAP or spoke SDP is part of a Residential Split Horizon Group (RSHG), MAC pinning is activated at creation of the SAP. Otherwise MAC pinning is not enabled by default.

mac-pinning

Syntax 
[no] mac-pinning
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>pw-template mac-pinning)
Full Contexts 
configure service pw-template mac-pinning
Description 

Enabling this command will disable re-learning of MAC addresses on other SAPs within the service. The MAC address will remain attached to a given SAP for duration of its age-timer.

The age of the MAC address entry in the FDB is set by the age timer. If mac-aging is disabled on a given VPLS service, any MAC address learned on a SAP or SDP with mac-pinning enabled will remain in the FDB on this SAP or SDP forever. Every event that would otherwise result in re-learning will be logged (MAC address; original-SAP; new-SAP).

Note:

For 7750 SR and 7450 ESS, MAC addresses learned during DHCP address assignment (DHCP snooping enabled) are not impacted by this command. MAC-pinning for such addresses is implicit.

Default 

When a SAP or spoke SDP is part of a Residential Split Horizon Group (RSHG), MAC pinning is activated at creation of the SAP. Otherwise MAC pinning is not enabled by default.

17.20. mac-policy

mac-policy

Syntax 
mac-policy mac-policy-id [create]
no mac-policy mac-policy-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>macsec mac-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure macsec mac-policy
Description 

This command configures MAC address policy groups.

The no form of this command removes the MAC address policy group configuration.

Parameters 
mac-policy-id—
Specifies the value of the MAC address policy.
Values—
0 to 4294967295

 

create—
Mandatory to create the configuration.

17.21. mac-populate

mac-populate

Syntax 
mac-populate {service-id |service service-name} mac ieee-address [flood] [age seconds] [force] [target-sap sap-id]
Context 
[Tree] (oam mac-populate)
Full Contexts 
oam mac-populate
Description 

This command populates the FDB with an OAM-type MAC entry indicating the node is the egress node for the MAC address and optionally floods the OAM MAC association throughout the service. The mac-populate command installs an OAM MAC into the service FDB indicating the device is the egress node for a MAC address. The MAC address can be bound to a SAP (the target-sap) or can be associated with the control plane in that any data destined to the MAC address is forwarded to the control plane (CPM). As a result, if the service on the node has neither a FDB nor an egress SAP, then it is not allowed to initiate a mac-populate.

The MAC address that is populated in the FDBs in the provider network is given a type OAM, so that it can be treated distinctly from regular dynamically learned or statically configured MACs. Note that OAM MAC addresses are operational MAC addresses and are not saved in the device configuration. An exec file can be used to define OAM MACs after system initialization.

The force option in mac-populate forces the MAC in the table to be type OAM in the case it already exists as a dynamic, static or an OAM induced learned MAC with some other type binding.

An OAM-type MAC cannot be overwritten by dynamic learning and allows customer packets with the MAC to either ingress or egress the network while still using the OAM MAC entry.

The flood option causes each upstream node to learn the MAC (that is, populate the local FDB with an OAM MAC entry) and to flood the request along the data plane using the flooding domain. The flooded mac-populate request is sent via the data plane.

An age can be provided to age an OAM MAC using a specific interval. By default, OAM MAC addresses are not aged and can be removed with a mac-purge or with an FDB clear operation.

When split horizon group (SHG) is configured, the flooding domain depends on which SHG the packet originates from. The target-sap sap-id value dictates the originating SHG information.

Parameters 
service-id—
Specifies the service ID of the service to diagnose or manage.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

service-name—
Specifies the name of the service to diagnose or manage. 64 characters maximum.
ieee-address—
Specifies the MAC address to be populated.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

 

flood—
Sends the OAM MAC populate to all upstream nodes.
seconds—
Specifies the age for the OAM MAC, in seconds, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

Default—
3600
force—
Converts the MAC to an OAM MAC.
sap-id—
Specifies the local target SAP bound to a service on which to associate the OAM MAC. By default, the OAM MAC is associated with the control place, that is, it is associated with the CPU on the router.

When the target-sap sap-id value is not specified the MAC is bound to the CPM or CFM. The originating SHG is 0 (zero). When the target-sap sap-id value is specified, the originating SHG is the SHG of the target-sap.

Values—

:null

port-id | bundle-id | bpgrp-id | lag-id | aps-id

dot1q

port-id | bundle-id | bpgrp-id | lag-id | aps-id | pw-id:[qtag1|cp-conn-prof-id]

qinq

port-id | bundle-id | bpgrp-id | lag-id | pw-id:[qtag1 cp-conn-prof-id].[qtag2 | cp-conn-prof-id]

cp

keyword

conn-prof-id

1 to 8000

atm

port-id | aps-id [:vpi/vci | vpi | vpi1.vpi2 | cp.conn-prof-id]

cp

keyword

conn-prof-id

1 to 8000

frame

port-id | aps-id:dlci

cisco-hdlc

slot/mda/port.channel

cem

slot/mda/port.channel

ima-grp

bundle-id [:vpi/vci | vpi | vpi1.vpi2 | cp.conn-prof-id]

cp

keyword

conn-prof-id

1 to 8000

port-id

slot/mda/port[.channel]

esat-id/slot/port

pxc-id.sub-port

bundle-id

bundle-type-slot/mda.-bundle-num

bundle

keyword

type

ima | fr | ppp

bundle-num

1 to 336

bpgrp-id

bpgrp-type-bpgrp-num

bgrp

keyword

type

ima | ppp

bgrp-num

1 to 2000

aps-id

aps-group-id[.channel]

aps

keyword

group-id

1 to 128

ccag-id

ccag-id.path-id[cc-type]:cc-id

ccag

keyword

id

1 to 8

path-id

a | b

cc-type

.sap-net | .net-sap

cc-id

1 to 4094

eth-tunnel

eth-tunnel-id[:eth-tun-sap-id]

id

1 to 1024

eth-tun-sap-id

0 to 4094

lag-id

lag-id

lag

keyword

id

1 to 800

pw-id

pw-id

pw

keyword

id

1 to 10239

qtag1

* | 0 to 4094

qtag2

* | null | 0 to 4094

vpi

0 to 4095 (NNI)

0 to 255 (UNI)

vci

1 | 2 | 5 to 65535

dlci

16 to 1022

tunnel-id

tunnel-id.private | public:tag

tunnel

keyword

id

1 to 16

tag

0 to 4094

 

17.22. mac-prefix

mac-prefix

Syntax 
mac-prefix mac-prefix
no mac-prefix
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>isa-svc-chain mac-prefix)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt isa-service-chaining mac-prefix
Description 

This command configures the unique MAC prefix per ISA and per outside service for all NAT group configured for service-chaining.

The no form of this command removes the MAC prefix from the configuration.

Parameters 
mac-prefix—
Specifies the MAC prefix, up to eight characters, including separators.
Values—
format AA:BB:CC

 

17.23. mac-protect

mac-protect

Syntax 
[no] mac-protect
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mac-protect)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mac-protect
Description 

This command indicates if this MAC is protected on the MAC protect list. When enabled, the agent will protect the MAC from being learned or re-learned on a SAP, spoke SDP or mesh SDP that has restricted learning enabled. The MAC protect list is used in conjunction with restrict-protected-src, restrict-unprotected-dst and auto-learn-mac-protect.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default 

none

17.24. mac-purge

mac-purge

Syntax 
mac-purge {service-id |service service-name} target ieee-address [flood] [force] [register]
Context 
[Tree] (oam mac-purge)
Full Contexts 
oam mac-purge
Description 

This command removes an OAM-type MAC entry from the FDB and optionally floods the OAM MAC removal throughout the service. A mac-purge can be sent via the forwarding path or via the control plane.

When sending the MAC purge using the data plane, the TTL in the VC label is set to 1.

A MAC address is purged only if it is marked as OAM. A mac-purge request is an HVPLS OAM packet, with the following fields. The Reply Flags is set to 0 (since no reply is expected), the Reply Mode and Reserved fields are set to 0. The Ethernet header has source set to the (system) MAC address, the destination set to the broadcast MAC address. There is a VPN TLV in the FEC Stack TLV to identify the service domain.

If the register option is provided, the R bit in the Address Delete flags is turned on.

The flood option causes each upstream node to be sent the OAM MAC delete request and to flood the request along the data plane using the flooding domain. The flooded mac-purge request is sent via the data plane.

The register option reserves the MAC for OAM testing where it is no longer an active MAC in the FDB for forwarding, but it is retained in the FDB as a registered OAM MAC. Registering an OAM MAC prevents relearns for the MAC based on customer packets. Relearning a registered MAC can only be done through a mac-populate request. The originating SHG is always 0 (zero).

Parameters 
service-id—
Specifies the service ID of the service to diagnose or manage.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

service-name—
Specifies the name, up to 64 characters, of the service to diagnose or manage.
ieee-address—
Specifies the MAC address to be purged.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

 

flood—
Sends the OAM MAC purge to all upstream nodes.
force—
Purges the entry regardless of the entry’s originating node.
register—
Reserves the MAC for OAM testing.

17.25. mac-refresh

mac-refresh

Syntax 
mac-refresh refresh interval
no mac-refresh
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap mac-refresh)
Full Contexts 
configure service ipipe sap mac-refresh
Description 

This command specifies the interval between ARP requests sent on this Ipipe SAP. When the SAP is first enabled, an ARP request will be sent to the attached CE device and the received MAC address will be used in addressing unicast traffic to the CE. Although this MAC address will not expire while the Ipipe SAP is enabled and operational, it is verified by sending periodic ARP requests at the specified interval.

The no form of this command restores mac-refresh to the default value.

Default 

mac-refresh 14400

Parameters 
refresh interval—
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between ARP requests sent on this Ipipe SAP.
Values—
0 to 65535

 

17.26. mac-subnet-length

mac-subnet-length

Syntax 
mac-subnet-length subnet-length
no mac-subnet-length
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mac-subnet-length)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mac-subnet-length
Description 

This command specifies the number of bits to be considered when performing MAC learning (MAC source) and MAC switching (MAC destination). Specifically, this value identifies how many bits, starting from the beginning of the MAC address are used. For example, if the mask-value of 28 is used, MAC learning only performs a lookup for the first 28 bits of the source MAC address when comparing with existing FDB entries. Then, it installs the first 28 bits in the FDB while zeroing out the last 20 bits of the MAC address. When performing switching in the reverse direction, only the first 28 bits of the destination MAC address are used to perform a FDB lookup to determine the next hop.

The no form of this command switches back to full MAC lookup.

Default 

mac-subnet-length 48

Parameters 
subnet-length—
Specifies the number of bits to be considered when performing MAC learning or MAC switching.
Values—
24 to 48

 

17.27. mac-trace

mac-trace

Syntax 
mac-trace service service-id destination ieee-address [source ieee-address] [fc fc-name [profile {in |out}]] [size octets] [min-ttl vc-label-ttl] [max-ttl vc-label-ttl] [probe-count send-count] [return-control] [interval interval] [timeout timeout]
Context 
[Tree] (oam mac-trace)
[Tree] (config>saa>test>type mac-trace)
Full Contexts 
configure saa test type mac-trace
oam mac-trace
Description 

This command displays the hop-by-hop path for a destination MAC address within a VPLS.

The MAC traceroute operation is modeled after the IP traceroute utility which uses ICMP echo request and reply packets with increasing TTL values to determine the hop-by-hop route to a destination IP. The MAC traceroute command uses Nokia OAM packets with increasing TTL values to determine the hop-by-hop route to a destination MAC.

In a MAC traceroute, the originating device creates a MAC ping echo request packet for the MAC to be tested with increasing values of the TTL. The echo request packet is sent via the data plane and awaits a TTL exceeded response or the echo reply packet from the device with the destination MAC. The devices that reply to the echo request packets with the TTL exceeded and the echo reply are displayed.

When a source ieee-address value is specified and the source MAC address is locally registered within a split horizon group (SHG), then this SHG membership is used as if the packet originated from this SHG. In all other cases, SHG 0 (zero) is used. Note that if the mac-ping is originated from a non-zero SHG, such packets do not go out to the same SHG.

Parameters 
service-id—
Specifies the service ID of the service to diagnose or manage.

This variant of the command is only supported in the classic configuration-mode (configure system management-interface configuration-mode classic).

Values—
{id | svc-name}

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

svc-name:

up to 64 characters

 

destination ieee-address
Specifies the destination MAC address to be traced.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

 

source ieee-address
The source MAC address from which the OAM MAC request originates. By default, the system MAC address for the chassis is used.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
All zeros and multicast is not allowed.

 

Default—
The system MAC address
fc-name —
Specifies the forwarding class to test the forwarding class of the ICMP echo request packets. The actual forwarding class encoding is controlled by the network egress LSP-EXP mappings.
Values—
be, l2, af, l1, h2, ef, h1, nc

 

Default—
be
profile {in |out}—
Specifies the profile state of the ICMP echo request encapsulation.
Default—
out
octets —
Specifies the MAC OAM request packet size in octets, expressed as a decimal integer. The request payload is padded to the specified size with a 6 byte PAD header and a byte payload of 0xAA as necessary. If the octet size specified is less than the minimum packet, the minimum sized packet necessary to send the request is used.
Values—
1 to 9198

 

min-ttl vc-label-ttl
Specifies the minimum TTL value in the VC label for the MAC trace test, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
1
max-ttl vc-label-ttl
Specifies the maximum TTL value in the VC label for the MAC trace test, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
4
send-count—
Specifies the number of MAC OAM requests sent for a TTL value, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 100

 

Default—
1
return-control—
Specifies the MAC OAM reply to a data plane MAC OAM request be sent using the control plane instead of the data plane.
interval—
Specifies the time, in seconds, used to override the default request message send interval and defines the minimum amount of time that must expire before the next message request is sent.

If the interval is set to 1 second, and the timeout value is set to 10 seconds, then the maximum time between message requests is 10 seconds and the minimum is 1 second. This depends upon the receipt of a message reply corresponding to the outstanding message request.

Values—
1 to 10

 

Default—
1
timeout—
Specifies the time, in seconds, used to override the default timeout value and is the amount of time that the router waits for a message reply after sending the message request. Upon the expiration of message time out, the requesting router assumes that the message response is not received. Any response received after the request times out is silently discarded.
Values—
1 to 60

 

Default—
5

17.28. mac-translation

mac-translation

Syntax 
[no] mac-translation
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext mac-translation)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext mac-translation)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext mac-translation
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext mac-translation
Description 

This command enables MAC address translation for HLE services.

The no form of this command disables MAC address translation for HLE services.

17.29. macsec

macsec

Syntax 
macsec
Context 
[Tree] (config macsec)
Full Contexts 
configure macsec
Description 

This command enables the context for MACsec configuration. The MACsec MKA profile can be configured under this command.

macsec

Syntax 
[no] macsec
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>dot1x macsec)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet dot1x macsec
Description 

This command configures MACsec under this port.

17.30. macsec-encrypt

macsec-encrypt

Syntax 
[no] macsec-encrypt
Context 
[Tree] (config>macsec>connectivity-association macsec-encrypt)
Full Contexts 
configure macsec connectivity-association macsec-encrypt
Description 

This command specifies that all PDUs are encrypted and authenticated (ICV payload).

The no form of this command specifies that all PDUs are transmitted with clear text, but still authenticated and have the trailing ICV.

Default 

macsec-encrypt

17.31. magic-number

magic-number

Syntax 
[no] magic-number
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ml-bundle>mlppp magic-number)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle mlppp magic-number
Description 

This command allows loopback detection to be enabled and disabled for MLPPP bundles. It is disabled by default. When the magic number option is disabled, the magic number option will not be requested when a member is trying to bring up the LCP layer on a member link; if the remote peer requests this option, it will be rejected. When transmitting echo-requests a magic number of 0 is used. When responding to echo-requests a magic number of 0 is sent.

The magic number option is sent to the remote peer during protocol negotiation. If this option is rejected by the remote peer, the router will bring the link up but will be unable to detect loopbacks since the router will always send a magic number of 0 in the echo messages. If this option is accepted by the remote peer, the router will send echo messages with randomly generated magic-numbers. If the SR receives a config-req with the same magic number that was sent out, the router will calculate a new magic number to use and send out another config-request. If the router is persistently seeing the randomly generated magic number in the received config-req, the router will declare a loopback.

The no form of this command disables the loopback detection.

Default 

no magic-number

17.32. main-ct-retry-limit

main-ct-retry-limit

Syntax 
main-ct-retry-limit number
no main-ct-retry-limit
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp main-ct-retry-limit)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template main-ct-retry-limit)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls lsp main-ct-retry-limit
configure router mpls lsp-template main-ct-retry-limit
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of retries the LSP primary path should be retried with the LSP Diff-Serv main Class Type (CT).

When an unmapped LSP primary path goes into retry, it uses the main CT until the number of retries reaches the value of the new main-ct-retry-limit parameter. If the path did not come up, it must start using the backup CT at that point in time. By default, this parameter is set to infinite value. The new main-ct-retry-limit parameter has no effect on an LSP primary path which retries due to a failure event.

An unmapped LSP primary path is a path which has never received a Resv in response to the first Path message sent. This can occur when performing a “shut/no-shut” on the LSP or LSP primary path or when the node reboots. An unmapped LSP primary path goes into retry if the retry timer expired or the head-end node received a PathErr message before the retry timer expired.

If the user entered a value of the main-ct-retry-limit parameter that is greater than the value of the LSP retry-limit, the number of retries will still stop when the LSP primary path reaches the value of the LSP retry-limit. In other words, the meaning of the LSP retry-limit parameter is not changed and always represents the upper bound on the number of retries. The unmapped LSP primary path behavior applies to both CSPF and non-CSPF LSPs.

The no form of this command sets the parameter to the default value of zero (0) which means the LSP primary path will retry forever.

Default 

no main-ct-retry-limit

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the number of times MPLS will attempt to re-establish the LSP primary path using the Diff-Serv main CT. Allowed values are integers in the range of zero (0) to 10,000, where zero indicates to retry infinitely.
Values—
0 to 1000, integer

 

17.33. maintenance-policy

maintenance-policy

Syntax 
[no] maintenance-policy maintenance-policy-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>segment-routing maintenance-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure router segment-routing maintenance-policy
Description 

This command configures a named maintenance policy that can be applied to SR Policy candidate paths that are either statically configured or imported via BGP. A maintenance policy is used to configure seamless BFD and protection for an SR Policy candidate path.

A maintenance policy must be administratively disabled in order to change any of the parameters.

A maintenance policy cannot be enabled unless a mode, bfd-enable, and bfd-template are configured.

If a maintenance-template is administratively disabled, then all candidate paths to which it is applied are deprogrammed from the data path.

The no form of this command removes the specified maintenance policy.

Parameters 
maintenance-policy-name—
Specifies the name of the maintenance policy, up to 32 characters and cannot start with a space or underscore.

maintenance-policy

Syntax 
[no] maintenance-policy maintenance-policy-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>segment-routing>sr-policies>static-policy maintenance-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure router segment-routing sr-policies static-policy maintenance-policy
Description 

This command applies a named maintenance policy to the static SR policy path. The maintenance policy must exist under the config>router>segment-routing context.

The no form of this command removes the specified maintenance policy.

Parameters 
maintenance-policy-name—
Specifies the name of the maintenance policy, up to 32 characters and cannot start with a space or underscore.

17.34. managed-configuration

managed-configuration

Syntax 
[no] managed-configuration
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>router-advert>if managed-configuration)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 managed-configuration)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv managed-configuration)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv managed-configuration)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if managed-configuration)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 managed-configuration)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv managed-configuration)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv managed-configuration)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>rtr-adv-plcy managed-configuration)
Full Contexts 
configure router router-advertisement interface managed-configuration
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 managed-configuration
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration
configure service ies subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration
configure service vprn router-advertisement interface managed-configuration
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 managed-configuration
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration
configure service vprn subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements managed-configuration
configure subscriber-mgmt router-advertisement-policy managed-configuration
Description 

This command sets or resets managed address configuration flag for this group-interface. This flag indicates that DHCPv6 is available for address configuration in addition to any address auto-configured using stateless address auto-configuration. See RFC 3315 for additional details.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

no managed-configuration

17.35. managed-routes

managed-routes

Syntax 
managed-routes
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host managed-routes)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>static-host managed-routes)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host managed-routes
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap static-host managed-routes
Description 

This command enables the context to configure managed route parameters.

17.36. managed-vlan-list

managed-vlan-list

Syntax 
managed-vlan-list
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap managed-vlan-list)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap managed-vlan-list
Description 

This command enables the context to configure VLAN ranges to be managed by a management VPLS. The list indicates, for each SAP, the ranges of associated VLANs that are affected when the SAP changes state.

This command is only valid when the VPLS in which it is entered was created as a management VPLS.

managed-vlan-list

Syntax 
managed-vlan-list
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap managed-vlan-list)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap managed-vlan-list
Description 

This command enters the context to configure VLAN ranges to be managed by a management VPLS. The list indicates, for each SAP, the ranges of associated VLANs that will be affected when the SAP changes state. This managed-vlan-list is not used when STP mode is MSTP in which case the vlan-range is taken from the config>service>vpls>stp>msti configuration.

This command is only valid when the VPLS in which it is entered was created as a management VPLS.

17.37. management

management

Syntax 
management [create]
no management
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn management)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn management
Description 

This command enters the node management configuration within VPRN.

Parameters 
create—
Creates a management server entry.

management

Syntax 
management
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security management)
Full Contexts 
configure system security management
Description 

This command enables the context to allow access to management servers.

17.38. management-access-filter

management-access-filter

Syntax 
management-access-filter
Context 
[Tree] (monitor management-access-filter)
Full Contexts 
monitor management-access-filter
Description 

This command enables the context to monitor management-access filters. These filters are configured in the config>system>security>mgmt-access-filter context.

management-access-filter

Syntax 
[no] management-access-filter
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security management-access-filter)
Full Contexts 
configure system security management-access-filter
Description 

This command creates the context to edit management access filters and to reset match criteria.

Management access filters control all traffic in and out of the CPM. They can be used to restrict management of the router by other nodes outside either specific (sub)networks or through designated ports.

Management filters, as opposed to other traffic filters, are enforced by system software.

The no form of this command removes management access filters from the configuration.

17.39. management-interface

management-interface

Syntax 
management-interface
Context 
[Tree] (config>system management-interface)
Full Contexts 
configure system management-interface
Description 

This command enables the context to configure management interface parameters.

management-interface

Syntax 
management-interface
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security management-interface)
Full Contexts 
configure system security management-interface
Description 

This command enables the context for choosing a management interface for hash configuration. The management interfaces are classic-cli, md-cli, netconf, or grpc.

17.40. manager

manager

Syntax 
manager manager-name [create]
no manager manager-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>remote-management manager)
Full Contexts 
configure system management-interface remote-management manager
Description 

This command configures a name for the manager. This name identifies the given SR OS node in the network.

The no form of this command removes the manager configuration.

Default 

system-name

Parameters 
manager-name—
Specifies the name of the manager, up to 32 characters.

17.41. manager-address

manager-address

Syntax 
manager-address ip-address |fqdn
no manager-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>remote-management>manager manager-address)
Full Contexts 
configure system management-interface remote-management manager manager-address
Description 

This command configures the destination IP address or FQDN of the manager.

The no form of this command removes the configured IP address or FQDN of the configured manager.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies the IP address, up to 255 characters.
fqdn—
Specifies the FQDN, up to 255 characters.

17.42. manager-port

manager-port

Syntax 
manager-port port
no manager-port
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>remote-management>manager manager-port)
Full Contexts 
configure system management-interface remote-management manager manager-port
Description 

This command assigns a destination TCP port to be used for opening gRPC connections to the specified manager.

The no form of this command reverts the destination TCP port for the manager to the default gRPC port (57400).

Parameters 
port—
Specifies the TCP destination port.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

Default—
57400

17.43. manual

manual

Syntax 
manual
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>system>bgp-evpn>eth-seg>service-carving manual)
Full Contexts 
configure service system bgp-evpn ethernet-segment service-carving manual
Description 

This command enables the context to manually configure the service-carving algorithm, that is, configure the EVIs or ISIDs for which the PE is DF.

17.44. manual-keying

manual-keying

Syntax 
[no] manual-keying
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel manual-keying)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel manual-keying)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tunnel manual-keying)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel manual-keying)
Full Contexts 
configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying
configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying
configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel manual-keying
Description 

This command configures Security Association (SA) for manual keying. When enabled, the command specifies whether this SA entry is created manually, by the user, or dynamically by the IPsec sub-system.

17.45. map

map

Syntax 
map start lsn-sub-address end lsn-sub-address to outside-ip-address
no map start lsn-sub-address end lsn-sub-address
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nat>inside>deterministic>prefix map)
[Tree] (config>router>nat>inside>deterministic>prefix map)
Full Contexts 
configure router nat inside deterministic prefix map
configure service vprn nat inside deterministic prefix map
Description 

This command is applicable to prefixes in deterministic NAT (LSN44 and DS-Lite) and static 1:1 NAT (LSN44). In deterministic NAT, its purpose is to split the number of subscribers within the configured prefix over available sequence of outside IP addresses. In static 1:1 NAT, its purpose it to statically map source IPv4 address of an LSN44 subscriber to a configured IPv4 address on the public side.

In deterministic NAT, there are several rules guiding the usage of the map statement:

  1. If the number of subscribers per configured prefix is greater than the subscriber-limit per outside IP parameter (2^n), then the lowest n bits of the map start <inside-addr-start> must be set to 0.
    Subscriber in LSN44 is equals to an inside IPv4 address, while in DS-Lite, the subscriber can be an IPv6 address or IPv6 prefix. If the subscriber-prefix-length command is set to 128, then the subscriber in DS-Lite is an IPv6 address. Otherwise it will be an IPv6 prefix with length in the range [32 to 64] as set by the subscriber-prefix-length command.
  2. If the number of subscribers per configured prefix is equal or less than the subscriber-limit per outside IP parameter (2^n), then only one map command for this prefix is allowed. In this case there is no restriction on the lower n bits of the map start lsn-sub-address. The range of the inside IP addresses in such map statement represents the prefix itself.
  3. outside-ip-address in the map statements must be unique amongst all map statements referencing the same pool. In other words, two map statements cannot reference the same outside-ip-address in a pool.

To modify map statements in classic CLI, the corresponding prefix must be in a shutdown mode.

In classic CLI, map statements can be configured automatically by the system, as soon as the prefix is enabled (no shutdown state) or they can be configured manually by the operator while the prefix is disabled.

In MD-CLI, the map statement must be configured by the operator, but the tools perform nat deterministic calculate-maps command can be used to produce system-generated maps. The calculate-maps command outputs a set of system-generated map statements. The map parameters can then be copied and pasted into an MD-CLI candidate configuration by the operator.

The following is an example of the map statement for the LSN44 case:

  1. The subscriber-limit in the pool is 128
  2. The pool has an address range 192.168.0.1 - 192.168.0.10
  3. The prefix is 10.0.0.0/24
  4. The map statement is configured as:
    map start 10.0.0.0 end 10.0.0.255 to 192.168.0.1

Since each outside IP address can accommodate only 128 hosts, the subscribers (IPv4 addresses in LSN44) from the 10.0.0.0/24 prefix will be split and mapped into two outside IP addresses

10.0.0.0 – 10.0.0.127 (10.0.0.0/25) - 192.168.0.1

10.0.0.128 – 10.0.0.255 (10.0.0.128/25) - 192.168.0.2

The first IP address range will be mapped to the ‘to’ address in the map statement => 192.168.0.1. The second IP address range will be mapped into the next consecutive IP address in the pool assuming that this IP address is free. In this case this consecutive address (192.168.0,2) would not be shown in the map statement.

For Deterministic DS-Lite, the example would be:

  1. The subscriber-limit in the pool is 128
  2. The pool has an address range 192.168.0.1 - 192.168.0.10
  3. The prefix is 2001:db8::/56
  4. The subscriber-prefix-length = 64
  5. The map statement is configured as:
    map start 2001:db8::/64 end 2001:db8::FF:0:0:0:0/64 to 192.168.0.1

There are 256 DS-Lite subscribers within the 2001:db8::/56 prefix. Each subscriber will be a /64 IPv6 prefix as dictated by the subscriber-prefix-length command.

Since each outside IP address can accommodate only 128 hosts, the subscribers from the 2001:db8::/56 prefix will be split and mapped into two outside IP addresses

2001:db8:: – 2001:db8:0:7F:: (2001:db8::/57) - 192.168.0.1

2001:db8:0:80:: – 2001:db8:0:FF::(2001:db8:0:FF::/57) - 192.168.0.2

The first IP prefix range will be mapped to the ‘to’ address in the map statement => 192.168.0.1. The second IP prefix range will be mapped into the next consecutive IP address in the pool assuming that this IP address is free. In this case this consecutive address (192.168.0,2) would not be shown in the map statement.

Default 

By default in classic CLI only, the system will automatically divide the prefix and create the map statements when the prefix command is enabled (no shutdown). However, this automatic map provisioning can be overruled by manual configuration in classic CLI, and must be provided in MD-CLI..

Parameters 
inside-ip-start —
Start IPv4/v6 address or IPv6 prefix on the inside.
inside-ip-end—
End IPv4/v6 address or IPv6 prefix on the inside. The number of subscribers (range of inside IPv4 addresses in LSN44 or IPv6 addresses or prefixes in DS-Lite) in the map statement does not have to be a power of 2. Rather it has to be a multiple of a power of two  m * 2^n, where m is the number of consecutive outside IP addresses to which the subscribers are mapped and the 2^n is the subscriber-limit per outside IP.
outside-ip-start—
The first outside IPv4 address in the pool to which the subscribers are mapped. In case that the number of subscribers in the map statement is larger than the subscriber-limit for the outside-ip address, the consecutive outside IP addresses will be used for additional mappings. Those additional (consecutive) outside IP addresses are not shown in the map statement (only the first address is shown in the map statement).

map

Syntax 
[no] map
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>nat>pcp-server-policy>opcode map)
Full Contexts 
configure service nat pcp-server-policy opcode map
Description 

This command enables/disables support for the map opcode.

Default 

no map

17.46. map-domain

map-domain

Syntax 
map-domain domain-name [create]
no map-domain
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>nat map-domain)
Full Contexts 
configure service nat map-domain
Description 

This command creates a MAP domain template, which is used to define MAP rules and parameters specific to the MAP domain. A MAP domain represents a set of CEs that share the same default gateway (BR's IPv6 prefix - DMR rule) and a set of basic MAP rules (BMRs). As a bordering node between the IPv6 and IPv4 realm, the BR performs stateless IPv4 and IPv6 translation based on MAP rules.

A MAP domain can be instantiated within a routing context by referencing an existing MAP domain template in the context.

Parameters 
domain-name—
Specifies the name of the MAP domain, up to 32 characters. The MAP domain name has local significance.

map-domain

Syntax 
map-domain domain-name
no map-domain domain-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nat>map map-domain)
[Tree] (config>router>nat>map map-domain)
Full Contexts 
configure router nat map map-domain
configure service vprn nat map map-domain
Description 

This command instantiates a MAP-T domain within a routing context, assuming that the MAP-T domain template is administratively enabled (no shutdown). When the MAP-T is instantiated, the forwarding for the MAP-T domain is enabled and its routes can be exported in routing protocols.

Multiple MAP-T domains can be instantiated within a routing context.

Interactions:

The referenced MAP domain is defined under the config>service>nat hierarchy.

Parameters 
domain-name—
Specifies the name of the MAP domain template, up to 32 characters.

17.47. mapping

mapping

Syntax 
mapping mapping
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3>atm mapping)
Full Contexts 
configure port tdm ds3 atm mapping
Description 

This command configures the ATM cell mapping for DS-3 channels. The mapping value specifies the cell mapping that is to be used on this ATM interface.

Default 

mapping direct

Parameters 
mapping—
The mapping value specifies the cell mapping that is to be used on this ATM interface.
Values—
direct — Specifies direct cell mapping. plcp — Specifies PLCP cell mapping.

 

17.48. mapping-limit

mapping-limit

Syntax 
mapping-limit limit
no mapping-limit
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>upnp>upnp-policy mapping-limit)
Full Contexts 
configure service upnp upnp-policy mapping-limit
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of UPnP mapping per subscriber.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default 

mapping-limit 256

Parameters 
limit—
Specifies the upper limit of the number of UPnP mappings per subscriber.
Values—
1 to 256

 

17.49. mapping-rule

mapping-rule

Syntax 
mapping-rule map-rule-name [create]
no mapping-rule map-rule-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>nat>map-domain mapping-rule)
Full Contexts 
configure service nat map-domain mapping-rule
Description 

This command provides a CLI context for configuring MAP rules.

Parameters 
map-rule-name—
Specifies the name of the MAP rule; the name has a local significance.

17.50. mapping-server

mapping-server

Syntax 
[no] mapping-server
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>isis>segment-routing mapping-server)
Full Contexts 
configure router isis segment-routing mapping-server
Description 

This command configures the context for the Segment Routing mapping server feature in an IS-IS instance.

SR mapping server enables the configuration and advertisement, via IS-IS, of the node SID index for IS-IS prefixes of routers which are in the LDP domain. This is performed in the router acting as a mapping server, which uses a prefix-SID sub-TLV within the SID/Label binding TLV in IS-IS.

The no form of this command deletes all node SID entries in the IS-IS instance.

mapping-server

Syntax 
[no] mapping-server
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>segm-rtng mapping-server)
Full Contexts 
configure router ospf segment-routing mapping-server
Description 

This command configures the context for the Segment Routing mapping server feature in an OSPF instance.

The mapping server feature allows the configuration and advertisement in OSPF of the node SID index for OSPF prefixes of routers which are in the LDP domain. This is performed in the router acting as a mapping server and using a prefix-SID sub-TLV within the Extended Prefix Range TLV in OSPF.

The no form of this command deletes all node SID entries in the OSPF instance.

17.51. maps-to

maps-to

Syntax 
maps-to fc fc-name profile profile
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>post-policer-mapping>fc maps-to)
Full Contexts 
configure qos post-policer-mapping fc maps-to
Description 

This command remaps the forwarding class and profile state of an egress policed packet that is to be mapped to another forwarding class and profile, where the profile state is that of the resulting profile after the packet has been processed by the egress policer.

The new forwarding class is used to select the egress queue on which the post-policer traffic is placed. The new profile is used to determine the congestion control handling in that queue, specifically the drop tail or slope that is applied to the traffic.

The maps-to command parameters can be overwritten by reissuing the command with a different FC or profile.

The traffic remarking is based on the marking configured for the forwarding class and profile of the traffic after being policed but before it is remapped.

Parameters 
fc-name—
Specifies one of the eight forwarding classes supported by the system.
Values—
be, l2, af, l1, h2, ef, h1, nc

 

profile—
Specifies one of the egress packet profile states.
Values—
exceed, in, inplus, out

 

17.52. mark

mark

Syntax 
mark entity high percentage-high low percentage-low
no mark entity
Context 
[Tree] (config>isa>wlan-gw-group>watermarks mark)
Full Contexts 
configure isa wlan-gw-group watermarks mark
Description 

This command enables a watermark notification. If the watermark is set, it generates a notification when the corresponding resource consumption goes above the high percentage. No additional notifications are sent until resource consumption goes under the low watermark, upon which, a notification is sent indicating the high watermark is no longer hit.

The no form of this command disables the watermark notification.

Parameters 
entity
Specifies which watermark to set.
Values—
user-equipment | bridge-domain | radius-proxy-client

 

percentage-high
Specifies the high watermark in percentage of total resources available.
Values—
1 to 100

 

percentage-low—
Specifies the low watermark in percentage of total resources available.
Values—
0 to 99

 

17.53. mask

mask

Syntax 
mask type match-type {[prefix-string prefix-string |prefix-length prefix-length] [suffix-string suffix-string |suffix-length suffix-length]}
no mask type match-type
mask type dhcp-match-type {[prefix-string prefix-string |prefix-length prefix-length] [suffix-string suffix-string |suffix-length suffix-length]}
no mask type dhcp-match-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp mask)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe mask)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe mask
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp mask
Description 

This command configures the IPoE mask.

The no form of this command removes the mask parameters from the configuration.

Parameters 
ppp-match-type—
Specifies the sub-option inserted by the PPPoE intermediate agent.
Values—
circuit-id, remote-id, sap-id, service-name, username

 

dhcp-match-type—
The data type represents the type of matching done to identify a DHCP host.
Values—
circuit-id, option60, remote-id, sap-id, string, system-id

 

prefix-string
Specifies a substring that is stripped of the start of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the value configured in the DHCP or PPPoE circuit ID.

This string can only contain printable ASCII characters. The “*” character is a wildcard that matches any substring. If a "\" character is masked, use the escape key so it becomes "\\".

Values—
up to 127 characters, “*”

 

prefix-length
Specifies the number of characters to remove from the start of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the value configured in the circuit ID.
Values—
1 to 127

 

suffix-string
Specifies a substring that is stripped of the end of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the value configured in circuit ID.

This string can only contain printable ASCII characters. The “*” character is a wildcard that matches any substring. If a "\" character is masked, use the escape key so it becomes "\\".

Values—
up to 127 characters

 

suffix-length
Specifies the number of characters to remove from the end of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the value configured in the circuit ID.
Values—
1 to 127

 

mask

Syntax 
mask mask-value [type {included |excluded}]
no mask
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>snmp>view>view-name mask)
Full Contexts 
configure system security snmp view view-name mask
Description 

The mask value and the mask type, along with the oid-value configured in the view command, determines the access of each sub-identifier of an object identifier (MIB subtree) in the view.

Each bit in the mask corresponds to a sub-identifier position. For example, the most significant bit for the first sub-identifier, the next most significant bit for the second sub-identifier, and so on. If the bit position on the sub-identifier is available, it can be included or excluded.

For example, the MIB subtree that represents MIB-II is 1.3.6.1.2.1. The mask that catches all MIB-II would be 0xfc or 0b11111100.

Only a single mask may be configured per view and OID value combination. If more than one entry is configured, each subsequent entry overwrites the previous entry.

The no form of this command removes the mask from the configuration.

Parameters 
mask-value—
The mask value associated with the OID value determines whether the sub-identifiers are included or excluded from the view. (Default: all 1s)

The mask can be entered either:

  1. In hex. For example, 0xfc.
  2. In binary. For example, 0b11111100.
Note:

If the number of bits in the bit mask is less than the number of sub-identifiers in the MIB subtree, then the mask is extended with ones until the mask length matches the number of sub-identifiers in the MIB subtree.

type —
Specifies to include or exclude MIB subtree objects.
Values—
included - All MIB subtree objects that are identified with a 1 in the mask are available in the view.
excluded - All MIB subtree objects that are identified with a 1 in the mask are denied access in the view.

 

Default—
included

17.54. mask-reply

mask-reply

Syntax 
[no] mask-reply
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>icmp mask-reply)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if mask-reply)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if mask-reply)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>icmp mask-reply)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nw-if>icmp mask-reply)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface icmp mask-reply
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface mask-reply
configure service vprn interface icmp mask-reply
configure service vprn interface mask-reply
configure service vprn network-interface icmp mask-reply
Description 

This command enables responses to Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) mask requests on the router interface.

If a local node sends an ICMP mask request to the router interface, the mask-reply command configures the router interface to reply to the request.

By default, the router instance replies to mask requests.

The no form of this command disables replies to ICMP mask requests on the router interface.

Default 

mask-reply — Specifies to reply to ICMP mask requests.

mask-reply

Syntax 
[no] mask-reply
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>git>ipv4>icmp mask-reply)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt group-interface-template ipv4 icmp mask-reply
Description 

This command enables responses to ICMP mask requests on the router interface. If a local node sends an ICMP mask request to the router interface, the router interface replies to the request.

By default, the router instance replies to mask requests.

The no form of this command disables replies to ICMP mask requests on the router interface.

Default 

mask-reply

mask-reply

Syntax 
[no] mask-reply
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>if>icmp mask-reply)
Full Contexts 
configure router interface icmp mask-reply
Description 

This command enables responses to ICMP mask requests on the router interface.

If a local node sends an ICMP mask request to the router interface, the mask-reply command configures the router interface to reply to the request.

The no form of this command disables replies to ICMP mask requests on the router interface.

Default 

mask-reply — Replies to ICMP mask requests.

17.55. master-int-inherit

master-int-inherit

Syntax 
[no] master-int-inherit
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>vrrp master-int-inherit)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface ipv6 vrrp master-int-inherit
Description 

This command allows the master instance to dictate the master down timer (non-owner context only).

Default 

no master-int-inherit

master-int-inherit

Syntax 
[no] master-int-inherit
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>vrrp master-int-inherit)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface vrrp master-int-inherit
Description 

This command allows the master instance to dictate the master down timer (non-owner context only).

Default 

no master-int-inherit

master-int-inherit

Syntax 
[no] master-int-inherit
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>vrrp master-int-inherit)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6>vrrp master-int-inherit)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface ipv6 vrrp master-int-inherit
configure service vprn interface vrrp master-int-inherit
Description 

This command allows the master instance to dictate the master down timer (non-owner context only).

Default 

no master-int-inherit

master-int-inherit

Syntax 
[no] master-int-inherit
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>if>vrrp master-int-inherit)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6>vrrp master-int-inherit)
Full Contexts 
configure router interface ipv6 vrrp master-int-inherit
configure router interface vrrp master-int-inherit
Description 

This command enables the virtual router instance to inherit the master VRRP router’s advertisement interval timer which is used by backup routers to calculate the master down timer.

The master-int-inherit command is only available in the non-owner nodal context and is used to allow the current virtual router instance master to dictate the master down timer for all backup virtual routers. The master-int-inherit command has no effect when the virtual router instance is operating as master.

If master-int-inherit is not enabled, the locally configured message-interval must match the master’s VRRP advertisement message advertisement interval field value or the message is discarded.

The no form of the command restores the default operating condition which requires the locally configured message-interval to match the received VRRP advertisement message advertisement interval field value.

Default 

no master-int-inherit — The virtual router instance does not inherit the master VRRP router’s advertisement interval timer and uses the locally configured message interval.

17.56. master-only

master-only

Syntax 
master-only {true |false}
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>ptp>port master-only)
Full Contexts 
configure system ptp port master-only
Description 

This command is used to restrict the local port to never enter the slave state. Use the command to ensure that the 7750 SR never draws synchronization from the attached external device.

This parameter is only effective when the profile is set to g8275dot1-2014.

Note:

The ITU-T G.8275.1 (07/2014) recommendation used the term notSlave for this functionality; however, the IEEE has added this capability into the next edition of the 1588 standard using the term masterOnly. These are equivalent.

Default 

master-only true

Parameters 
true—
Enables the master-only parameter of the PTP port.
false—
Disables the master-only parameter of the PTP port.

17.57. master-selection-mode

master-selection-mode

Syntax 
master-selection-mode mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>aarp master-selection-mode)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance aarp master-selection-mode
Description 

This command configures the AARP mode of operation with the peer instance. The modes affect the AARP state machine behavior according to the desired behavior. Minimize-switchover will change AARP state based on Master ISA failure, and be non-revertive in that when the priority ISA returns a switch does not occur, which is optimal for AA flow identification. Inter-chassis efficiency mode considers both priority (revertive) and the endpoint status of the AARP instance and will switch activity in case of EP failure in order to avoid sending all the traffic over the ICL. The priority-based-balance mode will be revertive after a priority master returns to service, but excludes EP status. The master-selection-mode configuration must match on both peer AARP instances, or the AARP operational status will stay down.

Default 

master-selection-mode minimize-switchovers

Parameters 
mode—
Specifies the AARP master selection mode.
Values—
minimize-switchovers — Optimal AA flow detection continuity by minimizing AARP switchovers.
inter-chassis-efficiency — Minimizes inter-chassis traffic.
priority-based-balance — AA load balance between AARP peers based on configured priority.

 

17.58. match

match

Syntax 
match {circuit-id |mac |remote-id}
match option [number] [option6 [number]
match option6 [number]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host>match-radprox-cache match)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host match-radius-proxy-cache match
Description 

This command specifies in what DHCPv6 option to retrieve the value to be used as lookup key in the RADIUS proxy cache.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

match mac

Parameters 
circuit-id—
Specifies to use the circuit Id to match against.
mac—
Specifies the MAC address to match against.
remote-id—
Specifies the remote ID to match against.
option number
Specifies the option number that the DHCP server uses to send the identification strings to the client.
Values—
1 to 254

 

option6 number
Specifies the DHCPv6 option to retrieve the value to be used as lookup key in the RADIUS proxy cache.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

match

Syntax 
match
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>isa-svc-chain>vas-filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt isa-service-chaining vas-filter entry match
Description 

This command enables the context to configure the match criterion for a VAS filter entry.

match

Syntax 
match [protocol protocol-id]
match [next-header next-header]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>ingr-ip>entry match)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>ingr-ipv6>entry match)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>egr-ip>entry match)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>egr-ipv6>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level egress-ip-filter-entries entry match
configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level egress-ipv6-filter-entries entry match
configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level ingress-ip-filter-entries entry match
configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level ingress-ipv6-filter-entries entry match
Description 

This command configures the match criteria for this IP filter entry.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
protocol-id—
Specifies the protocol ID or protocol name accepted in DHB.
Values—
protocol-number — [0 to 255]D
[0x0 to 0xFF]H
[0b0 to 0b11111111]B
protocol-name — none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp
* - udp/tcp wildcard

 

next-header—
Specifies the protocol numbers accepted in DHB for IPv6 filter entries
Values—
protocol-number — [1 to 42 | 45 to 49 | 52 to 59 | 61 to 255]D[0x0 to 0x2A, 0x2D to 0x31, 0x34 to 0x3B, 0x3D to 0xFF]H [0b0 to 0b101010, 0b101101 to 0b110001, 0b110100 to 0b111011, 0b111101 to 0b11111111]B
protocol-name — none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp
* - udp/tcp wildcard

 

match

Syntax 
match protocol {any |icmp |tcp |udp |gre}
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>entry match)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>ipv6>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt entry match
configure subscriber-mgmt ipv6 entry match
Description 

This command creates a match context for this entry. The protocol value specifies which Layer-4 protocol the packet should match.

The no form of this command removes the match context of this entry.

Default 

match protocol any

Parameters 
protocol
Specifies that the only supported match context is protocol.
any
Specifies to match any protocol.
icmp
Specifies to match ICMP packets in a v4 filter.
tcp
Specifies to match TCP packets.
udp
Specifies to match UDP packets.
gre
Specifies to match GRE over IP packets.

match

Syntax 
[no] match
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>mrp>mrp-policy>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure service mrp mrp-policy entry match
Description 

This command creates the context for entering/editing match criteria for the mrp-policy entry. When the match criteria have been satisfied the action associated with the match criteria is executed. In the current implementation just one match criteria (ISID based) is possible in the entry associated with the mrp-policy. Only one match statement can be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

match

Syntax 
match
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>dynamic-neighbor match)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn bgp group dynamic-neighbor match
Description 

This command configures match conditions for the dynamic neighbors.

match

Syntax 
[no] match
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>log>filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn log filter entry match
Description 

This command creates context to enter/edit match criteria for a filter entry. When the match criteria is satisfied, the action associated with the entry is executed.

If more than one match parameter (within one match statement) is specified, then all the criteria must be satisfied (AND functional) before the action associated with the match is executed.

Use the match command to display a list of the valid applications.

Match context can consist of multiple match parameters (application, event-number, severity, subject), but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Default 

no match

match

Syntax 
match
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>policy>aqp>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group policy app-qos-policy entry match
Description 

This command enables the context to configure flow match rules for this AQP entry. A flow matches this AQP entry only if it matches all the match rules defined (logical and of all rules). If no match rule is specified, the entry will match all flows.

match

Syntax 
match
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>sess-fltr>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group session-filter entry match
Description 

This command enables the context to configure session conditions for this entry.

match

Syntax 
match
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>transit-prefix-policy>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group transit-prefix-policy entry match
Description 

This command enables the context to configure transit prefix policy entry match criteria.

match

Syntax 
[no] match
Context 
[Tree] (debug>app-assure>group>traffic-capture match)
Full Contexts 
debug application-assurance group traffic-capture match
Description 

This command configures debugging for traffic match criteria.

match

Syntax 
match protocol ip-protocol
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>nat>nat-classifier>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure service nat nat-classifier entry match
Description 

This command configures an IP protocol to be used as a nat-classifier match criterion. When the match criteria have been satisfied the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

The no form of the command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Default 

match protocol udp

Parameters 
protocol ip-protocol
Specifies the text value representing the IP protocol to be used as a match criterion.
Values—
udp, tcp

 

match

Syntax 
match [frame-type frame-type]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>li-filter>li-mac-filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure li li-filter li-mac-filter entry match
Description 

This command enables the context to configure match criteria for the filter entry and specifies an Ethernet frame type for the entry.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured then all criteria must be satisfied (and function) for a match to occur.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry.

Parameters 
frame-type
Filters can continue to be edited by all users even when an li-source references an entry in that filter.
Values—
802dot3, 802dot2-llc, 802dot2-snap, ethernet_II

 

Default—
802dot3

match

Syntax 
match [protocol protocol-id]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>li-filter>li-ip-filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure li li-filter li-ip-filter entry match
Description 

This command enables context to enter match criteria for LI IPv4 filter and optionally allows specifying protocol value to match on.

If more than one match criterion are configured then all criteria must be satisfied for a match to occur (logical “AND”). Multiple criteria must be configured within a single match context for a given entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry.

Parameters 
protocol-id—
Configures the decimal value representing the IP protocol to be used as an IP filter match criterion. Well known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), UDP(17).
Values—
0 to 255 (values can be expressed in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary - DHB)
Keywords for the 7750 SR:
none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-frag, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, ipv6-route, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp
Keywords for the 7450 ESS:
none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp
* — udp/tcp wildcard

 

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Spanning Tree Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

match

Syntax 
match [next-header next-header]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>li-filter>li-ipv6-filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure li li-filter li-ipv6-filter entry match
Description 

This command enables context to enter match criteria for LI IPv6 filter and optionally allows specifying IPv6 next-header value to match on.

If more than one match criterion are configured then all criteria must be satisfied for a match to occur (logical “AND”). Multiple criteria must be configured within a single match context for a given entry.

The no form removes the match criteria for the entry.

Parameters 
next-header—
Specifies the IPv6 next header to match. Note that this parameter is analogous to the protocol parameter used in IP filter match criteria.
Values—
[0 to 42 | 45 to 49 | 52 to 59 | 61 to 255] — protocol numbers accepted in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary - DHB
Keywords: none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp
* — udp/tcp wildcard

 

match

Syntax 
match [protocol protocol-id]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>ip-criteria>entry match)
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>ip-criteria>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure qos sap-egress ip-criteria entry match
configure qos sap-ingress ip-criteria entry match
Description 

This command creates a context to configure match criteria for SAP QoS policy match criteria. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured, all criteria must be satisfied (AND function) before the action associated with the match is executed.

A match context can consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

It is possible that a SAP policy includes the dscp map command, the dot1p map command, and an IP match criteria. When multiple matches occur for the traffic, the order of precedence is used to arrive at the final action. The order of precedence is as follows:

  1. 802.1p bits
  2. DSCP
  3. IP quintuple or MAC headers

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters 
protocol protocol-id
Specifies an IP protocol to be used as a SAP QoS policy match criterion.

The protocol type such as TCP / UDP / OSPF is identified by its respective protocol number. Well-known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), UDP(17)

Table 83 lists the IP protocols and their respective IDs and descriptions.

Values—
The following values apply to the 7750 SR and 7950 XRS:
protocol-id: 0 to 255 protocol numbers accepted in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary
keywords: none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-frag, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, ipv6-route, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp

 

Values—
The following values apply to the 7450 ESS:
keywords: none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-frag, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, ipv6-route, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp
* — udp/tcp wildcard

 

Table 83:  IP Protocol Names

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for their IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Schedule Transfer Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

match

Syntax 
match [next-header next-header]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>ipv6-criteria>entry match)
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>ipv6-criteria>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure qos sap-egress ipv6-criteria entry match
configure qos sap-ingress ipv6-criteria entry match
Description 

This command creates a context to configure match criteria for ingress SAP QoS policy match IPv6 criteria. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured, all criteria must be satisfied (AND function) before the action associated with the match is executed.

A match context can consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

It is possible that a SAP ingress policy includes the dscp map command, the dot1p map command, and an IPv6 match criteria. When multiple matches occur for the traffic, the order of precedence is used to arrive at the final action. The order of precedence is as follows:

  1. 802.1p bits
  2. DSCP
  3. IP quintuple or MAC headers

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters 
next-header next-header
Specifies the next header to match.

On the 7750 SR and 7950 XRS, the protocol type such as TCP / UDP / OSPF is identified by its respective protocol number. Well-known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), UDP(17).

Values—
protocol numbers accepted in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary: 0 to 42, 45 to 49, 52 to 59, 61 to 255
keywords: none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp
* — udp/tcp wildcard

 

match

Syntax 
match [frame-type {802dot3 |802dot2-llc |802dot2-snap |ethernet-II |atm}]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>mac-criteria>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure qos sap-ingress mac-criteria entry match
Description 

This command creates a context for entering/editing match MAC criteria for ingress SAP QoS policy match criteria. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured, all criteria must be satisfied (AND function) before the action associated with the match will be executed.

A match context can consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters 
frame-type —
The frame-type keyword configures an Ethernet frame type or an ATM frame type to be used for the MAC filter match criteria.
Values—
802dot3, 802dot2-llc, 802dot2-snap, ethernet_II, atm

 

Default—
802dot3
802dot3—
Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.3.
802dot2-llc—
Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 LLC.
802dot2-snap—
Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 SNAP.
ethernet-II—
Specifies the frame type is Ethernet Type II.
atm—
Specifies the frame type as ATM cell. The user is not allowed to configure entries with frame type of atm and a frame type of other supported values in the same QoS policy. This parameter applies only to the 7750 SR ad 7950 XRS.

match

Syntax 
match [protocol protocol-id]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>network>ingress>ip-criteria>entry match)
[Tree] (config>qos>network>egress>ip-criteria>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure qos network egress ip-criteria entry match
configure qos network ingress ip-criteria entry match
Description 

This command creates a context to configure match criteria for a network QoS policy. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with it is executed.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured, then all criteria must be satisfied before the associated action with the match is executed.

A match context can consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

A network QoS policy can include the DSCP map command, the dot1p map command (ingress only), the prec map command (egress only), and an IP match criteria. When multiple matches occur for the traffic, the order of precedence is used to arrive at the final action. The order of precedence is as follows:

  1. 802.1p bits (ingress only)
  2. DSCP
  3. prec (egress only)
  4. IP quintuple

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry identifier.

Parameters 
protocol protocol-id
Specifies an IP protocol to be used as an ingress or egress network QoS policy match criterion.

The protocol type is identified by its respective protocol number. Well-known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), and UDP(17).

Values—
protocol-id: 0 to 255 protocol numbers accepted in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary
keywords: none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-frag, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, ipv6-route, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp
* — udp/tcp wildcard
Table 84 lists the protocols and their protocol IDs and descriptions.

 

Table 84:  Protocol ID Descriptions

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for their IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Schedule Transfer Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

match

Syntax 
match [next-header next-header]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>network>ingress>ipv6-criteria>entry match)
[Tree] (config>qos>network>egress>ipv6-criteria>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure qos network egress ipv6-criteria entry match
configure qos network ingress ipv6-criteria entry match
Description 

This command creates a context to configure match criteria for a network QoS policy match IPv6 criteria. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured, all criteria must be satisfied (AND function) before the action associated with the match is executed.

A match context can consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

A network policy can include the DSCP map command, the dot1p map command (ingress only), the prec map command (egress only), and an IPv6 match criteria. When multiple matches occur for the traffic, the order of precedence is used to arrive at the final action. The order of precedence is as follows:

  1. 802.1p bits (ingress only)
  2. DSCP
  3. prec (egress only)
  4. IP quintuple

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry identifier.

Parameters 
next-header next-header
Specifies the next header to match.

The protocol type is identified by its respective protocol number. Well-known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), and UDP(17).

Values—
protocol numbers accepted in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary: 0 to 42, 45 to 49, 52 to 59, 61 to 255
keywords: none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp
* — udp/tcp wildcard

 

match

Syntax 
match field-value instance instance-id
no match field-value
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>queue-group-redirect-list match)
Full Contexts 
configure qos queue-group-redirect-list match
Description 

This command configures the value of the field in the ingress or egress packet which, when matched, will cause the packet to be redirected to the specified queue group instance. The field-value is dependent on the setting of the type and therefore must be a valid VXLAN VNI.

A maximum of 16 match statements are supported in a queue group redirect list.

The no form of this command removes the match statement from the redirect list.

Parameters 
field-value —
Specifies the value of the field in the ingress or egress packet which, when matched, will cause the packet to be redirected to the specified queue group instance. Because the only permitted type is vxlan-vni, the field must be a valid VXLAN VNI. The VNI can be specified in any of the available formats but is always shown in decimal.
Values—
1 to 16777215 (Decimal)
0x1 to 0xFFFFFF (Hexadecimal)
0b1 to 0b111111111111111111111111 (Binary)

 

instance-id —
Specifies the instance of the queue group template to which the VXLAN traffic is redirected. The traffic can be redirected to the default instance, which is the instance specified with the QoS policy under the SAP ingress or egress.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

match

Syntax 
match [protocol protocol-id]
match protocol none
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>filter>ip-exception>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure filter ip-exception entry match
Description 

This command enables the context to enter match criteria for the filter entry. When the match criteria have been satisfied the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry. More precisely, the command can be entered multiple times but this only results in modifying the protocol-id. and does not affect the underlying match criteria configuration.

The no form of the command removes all the match criteria from the filter entry and sets the protocol-id of the match command to none (keyword). As per above, match protocol none is however not equivalent to no match.

Default 

match protocol none

Parameters 
protocol-id—
Configures and IP protocol to be used as an IP filter match criterion. The protocol type, such as TCP or UDP, is identified by its respective protocol number.
Values—
protocol-number: [0..255]D
[0x0..0xFF]H
[0b0..0b11111111]B
protocol-name:0 to 255 in decimal format. Values can also be specified in hexadecimal format, in binary format, or using the following keywords:
IPv4 filter keywords: none (default), icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp
IP exception filter keywords: none, icmp, igmp, ospf-igp, pim, rsvp, tcp, udp, vrrp
* — udp/tcp wildcard
Table 85:  Protocol ID Descriptions

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Spanning Tree Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

sctp

132

Stream Control Transmission Protocol

 

match

Syntax 
match [{protocol protocol-id |protocol-list protocol-list-name}]
match protocol none
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>filter>ip-filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure filter ip-filter entry match
Description 

This command enables the context to enter match criteria for the filter entry. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be created per entry. More precisely, the protocol command can be entered multiple times but this only results in modifying the protocol-id. Matching on more than one protocol can be achieved using the protocol-list match criteria in an IP filter policy.

The no form of the command removes all the match criteria from the filter entry and sets the protocol-id of the match command to none. However, match protocol none is not equivalent to no match.

Default 

match protocol none

Parameters 
protocol-id
protocol-number | protocol-name
protocol-number—
Specifies the protocol number value to be configured as a match criterion. The value can be expressed as a decimal integer, or in hexadecimal or binary format.
Values—
[0..255]D, [0x0..0xFF]H, [0b0..0b11111111]B

 

protocol-name—
Specifies the protocol name to be configured as a match criterion.
Values—
IPv4 filter keywords: none (default), icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, ipv6-route, ipv6-frag, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp
* — udp/tcp
Table 86:  Protocol ID Descriptions

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Spanning Tree Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

sctp

132

Stream Control Transmission Protocol

 

protocol-list-name—
Specifies the name of the protocol list, up to 32 characters.

match

Syntax 
next-header next-header
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>filter>ipv6-exception>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure filter ipv6-exception entry match
Description 

This command enables the context to enter match criteria for the IPv6 filter exception. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

The no form of the command removes all the match criteria from the IPv6 filter exception.

Parameters 
next-header
protocol-number | protocol-name
protocol-number—
The protocol number.
Values—
[1 to 42 | 45 to 49 | 52 to 59 | 61 to 255]D
[0x0 to 0x2A | 0x2D to 0x31 | 0x34 to 0x3B | 0x3D to 0xFF]H
[0b0 to 0b101010 | 0b101101 to 0b110001 | 0b110100 to 0b111011 | 0b111101 to 0b11111111]B

 

protocol-name—
The protocol name.
Values—
none, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-, ipv6-no-nxt, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp
Where udp and tcp are wildcards.
Table 87:  Protocol Name Descriptions

Protocol

Protocol number

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

Any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-

58

for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Spanning Tree Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

sctp

132

Stream Control Transmission Protocol

 

match

Syntax 
match [{next-header protocol-id |next-header-list protocol-list-name}]
match next-header none
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>filter>ipv6-filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure filter ipv6-filter entry match
Description 

This command enables the context to enter match criteria for the filter entry. When the match criteria have been satisfied, the action associated with the match criteria is executed.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be created per entry. More precisely, the next-header command can be entered multiple times, but this only results in modifying the protocol-id. Matching on more than one protocol can be achieved using the next-header-list match criteria.

The no form of the command removes all the match criteria from the filter entry and sets the protocol-id of the match command to none. However, match next-header none is not equivalent to no match.

Default 

match next-header none

Parameters 
next-header—
Specifies the IPv6 next header to match. This parameter is analogous to the protocol parameter used in IPv4 filter match command.

Default Value: none (keyword)

Values—
[1 to 42 | 45 to 49 | 52 to 59 | 61 to 255] — in decimal format. Values can also be specified in hexadecimal format, in binary format, or using the following keywords:
none, icmp, igmp, ip, tcp, egp, igp, udp, rdp, ipv6, idrp, rsvp, gre, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, iso-ip, eigrp, ospf-igp, ether-ip, encap, pnni, pim, vrrp, l2tp, stp, ptp, isis, crtp, crudp, sctp
* — udp/tcp wildcard

 

protocol-list-name
Specifies the name of the protocol list, up to 32 characters.

match

Syntax 
match [frame-type {802dot3 |802dot2-llc |802dot2-snap |ethernet_II}]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>filter>mac-filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure filter mac-filter entry match
Description 

This command creates the context for entering/editing match criteria for the filter entry and specifies an Ethernet frame type for the entry.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of the command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters 
frame-type—
The frame-type keyword configures an Ethernet frame type to be used for the MAC filter match criteria.
Default—
802dot3
Values—
802dot3, 802dot2-llc, 802dot2-snap, ethernet_II

 

802dot3—
Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.3.
802dot2-llc—
Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 LLC.
802dot2-snap—
Specifies the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 SNAP.
ethernet_II—
Specifies the frame type is Ethernet Type II.

match

Syntax 
[no] match
Context 
[Tree] (config>log>filter>filter-id>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure log filter filter-id entry match
Description 

This command creates context to enter/edit match criteria for a filter entry. When the match criteria is satisfied, the action associated with the entry is executed.

If more than one match parameter (within one match statement) is specified, then all the criteria must be satisfied (AND functional) before the action associated with the match is executed.

Use the application command to display a list of the valid applications.

Match context can consist of multiple match parameters (application, event-number, severity, subject), but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

match

Syntax 
match [frame-type frame-type]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>mgmt-access-filter>mac-filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure system security management-access-filter mac-filter entry match
Description 

This command configures math criteria for this MAC filter entry.

Parameters 
frame-type
Specifies the type of MAC frame to use as match criteria.
Values—
802dot3 | 802dot2-llc | 802dot2-snap | 802dot1ag | ethernet_II

 

Default—
802dot3

match

Syntax 
match [protocol protocol-id]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (cfg>sys>sec>cpm>ip-filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure system security cpm-filter ip-filter entry match
Description 

This command enables the context to enter match criteria for the filter entry. When the match criteria have been satisfied the action associated with the match criteria is executed. If more than one match criteria (within one match statement) are configured then all criteria must be satisfied (AND function) before the action associated with the match is executed.

A match context may consist of multiple match criteria, but multiple match statements cannot be entered per entry.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters 
protocol—
Configures an IP protocol to be used as an IP filter match criterion. The protocol type such as TCP or UDP is identified by its respective protocol number.
protocol-id—
Configures the decimal value representing the IP protocol to be used as an IP filter match criterion. Well known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), UDP(17). The no form the command removes the protocol from the match criteria.
Values—
1 to 255 (values can be expressed in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary) keywords - none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, idrp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-frag, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, ipv6-opts, ipv6-route, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, ospf-igp, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp, * — udp/tcp wildcard

 

Table 88:  IP Protocol Names

Protocol

Protocol ID

Description

icmp

1

Internet Control Message

igmp

2

Internet Group Management

ip

4

IP in IP (encapsulation)

tcp

6

Transmission Control

egp

8

Exterior Gateway Protocol

igp

9

any private interior gateway (used by Cisco for their IGRP)

udp

17

User Datagram

rdp

27

Reliable Data Protocol

ipv6

41

IPv6

ipv6-route

43

Routing Header for IPv6

ipv6-frag

44

Fragment Header for IPv6

idrp

45

Inter-Domain Routing Protocol

rsvp

46

Reservation Protocol

gre

47

General Routing Encapsulation

ipv6-icmp

58

ICMP for IPv6

ipv6-no-nxt

59

No Next Header for IPv6

ipv6-opts

60

Destination Options for IPv6

iso-ip

80

ISO Internet Protocol

eigrp

88

EIGRP

ospf-igp

89

OSPFIGP

ether-ip

97

Ethernet-within-IP Encapsulation

encap

98

Encapsulation Header

pnni

102

PNNI over IP

pim

103

Protocol Independent Multicast

vrrp

112

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

l2tp

115

Layer Two Tunneling Protocol

stp

118

Spanning Tree Protocol

ptp

123

Performance Transparency Protocol

isis

124

ISIS over IPv4

crtp

126

Combat Radio Transport Protocol

crudp

127

Combat Radio User Datagram

match

Syntax 
match [next-header next-header]
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>sys>sec>cpm>ipv6-filter>entry match)
Full Contexts 
config sys sec cpm ipv6-filter entry match
Description 

This command specifies match criteria for the IP filter entry. This command applies only the 775 SR and 7950 XRS.

The no form of this command removes the match criteria for the entry-id.

Parameters 
next-header—
Specifies the next header to match.

The protocol type such as TCP / UDP / OSPF is identified by its respective protocol number. Well-known protocol numbers include ICMP(1), TCP(6), UDP(17).

Values—

next-header:

1 to 42, 45 to 49, 52 to 59, 61 to 255 protocol numbers accepted in DHB

keywords:

none, crtp, crudp, egp, eigrp, encap, ether-ip, gre, icmp, drp, igmp, igp, ip, ipv6, ipv6-icmp, ipv6-no-nxt, isis, iso-ip, l2tp, spf-igp, pim, pnni, ptp, rdp, rsvp, stp, tcp, udp, vrrp

* — udp/tcp wildcard

 

match

Syntax 
match command-string
no match
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>profile>entry match)
Full Contexts 
configure system security profile entry match
Description 

This command configures a command or subtree commands in subordinate command levels are specified.

Because the OS exits when the first match is found, subordinate levels cannot be modified with subsequent action commands. More specific action commands should be entered with a lower entry number or in a profile that is evaluated prior to this profile.

All commands below the hierarchy level of the matched command are denied.

The no form of this command removes a match condition.

Parameters 
command-string—
Specifies the CLI command or CLI tree level that is the scope of the profile entry.

match

Syntax 
match
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>dynamic-neighbor match)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp group dynamic-neighbor match
Description 

This command configures match conditions for the dynamic neighbors.

17.59. match-circuit-id

match-circuit-id

Syntax 
[no] match-circuit-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>dhcp match-circuit-id)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>dhcp match-circuit-id)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>dhcp match-circuit-id)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface dhcp match-circuit-id
configure service vprn subscriber-interface dhcp match-circuit-id
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface dhcp match-circuit-id
Description 

This command enables Option 82 circuit ID on relayed DHCP packet matching. For routed CO, the group interface DHCP relay process is stateful. When packets are relayed to the server the virtual router ID, transaction ID, SAP ID, and client hardware MAC address of the relayed packet are tracked.

When a response is received from the server the virtual router ID, transaction ID, and client hardware MAC address must be matched to determine the SAP on which to send the packet out. In some cases, the virtual router ID, transaction ID, and client hardware MAC address are not guaranteed to be unique.

When the match-circuit-id command is enabled this as part of the key is used to guarantee correctness in our lookup. This is only needed when dealing with an IP aware DSLAM that proxies the client hardware MAC address.

The no form of this command disables Option 82 circuit ID on relayed DHCP packet matching.

17.60. match-list

match-list

Syntax 
match-list match-type-1 [match-type-2]
no match-list
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp match-list)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe match-list)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe match-list
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp match-list
Description 

This command specifies the type of matching done to identify a host. There are different match-types for PPPoE or IPoE hosts of which a maximum of four can be specified.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
match-type-x—
Specifies up to four matching types to identify a host.
Values—
For IPoE: circuit-id, derived-id, dual-stack-remote-id, encap-tag-range, encap-tag-separate-range, ip, mac, option60, remote-id, sap-id, service-id, string, system-id

 

Values—
For PPP: circuit-id, derived-id, remote-id, mac, sap-id, service-id, encap-tag-range, encap-tag-separate-range, service-name, username

 

Note:

The format of remote-id in IPv6 is different that the format of remote-id in IPv4; IPv6 remote-id contains enterprise-id filed that is also honored in matching.

circuit-id — Specifies to use the circuit ID to match against.

derived-id — Specifies the value extracted by Python script during processing of DHCP Discover/Solicit/Request/Renew/Rebind Messages (client to server bound messages). The value is stored in the DHCP Transaction Cache (DTC) in a variable named alc.dtc.derivedId. This value has a lifespan of a DHCP transaction (a single pair of messages exchanged between the client and the server, for example DHCP Discover and DHCP Offer).

dual-stack-remote-id — Specifies the enterprise-id in IPv6 remote-id is stripped off before LUDB matching is performed. Processing of IPv4 remote-id remains unchanged. This will allow a single host entry in LUDB for dual-stack host where host identification is performed based on the Remote-id field.

encap-tag-separate-range — Specifies the match encapsulation inner and outer tag in two separate ranges.

encap-tag-range — Specifies to match tag ranges for inner and outer tags.

ip — Specifies the source IPv4/IPv6 address of a data-trigger packet.

mac — Specifies to use the MAC address to match against.

option-60 — Specifies to use Option60 to match against.

remote-id — Specifies to use the remote ID to match against.

sap-id — Specifies the SAP ID on which DHCPv4 packet are received. The sap-id is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,4) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. This is enabled via configuration under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay. Since the dhcp-relay configuration is enabled under the group-interface CLI hierarchy, the group-interface and the service-id must be known before the sap-id can be used for LUDB match.

service-id — Specifies the service-id of the ingress SAP for DHCPv4 packets. The service-id is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,3) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. This is enabled via configuration under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay.

string — Specifies the custom string configured under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay. The string is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,5) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. Since the dhcp-relay configuration is enabled under the group-interface CLI hierarchy, the group-interface and the service-id must be known before the string can be used for LUDB match.

system-id — Specifies the system-id of the node name configured under the system>name CLI hierarchy. The system-id is inserted as ALU VSO (82,9,1) by the DHCPv4 relay in router. This is enabled via configuration under the vendor-specific-option CLI hierarchy of the DHCPv4 relay. Since the dhcp-relay configuration is enabled under the group-interface CLI hierarchy, the group-interface and the service-id must be known before the system-id can be used for LUDB match.

match-list

Syntax 
match-list
Context 
[Tree] (config>ipsec>client-db match-list)
Full Contexts 
configure ipsec client-db match-list
Description 

This command enables the match list context on a client database. The match list defines the match input used during IPsec’s tunnel setup. If there are multiple inputs configured in the match list, then they all must have matches before the system considers a client entry is a match.

match-list

Syntax 
match-list
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos match-list)
Full Contexts 
configure qos match-list
Description 

This command is used to enter the context to create or edit match lists used in QoS policies.

match-list

Syntax 
match-list
Context 
[Tree] (config>filter match-list)
Full Contexts 
configure filter match-list
Description 

This command enables the configuration context for match lists to be used in filter policies (IOM/FP and CPM).

17.61. match-peer-id-to-cert

match-peer-id-to-cert

Syntax 
[no] match-peer-id-to-cert
Context 
[Tree] (config>ipsec>ike-policy match-peer-id-to-cert)
Full Contexts 
configure ipsec ike-policy match-peer-id-to-cert
Description 

This command enables checking the IKE peer's ID matches the peer's certificate when performing certificate authentication.

Default 

no match-peer-id-to-cert

17.62. match-qinq-dot1p

match-qinq-dot1p

Syntax 
match-qinq-dot1p {top |bottom}
no match-qinq-dot1p
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p
configure service vpls sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p
Description 

This command specifies which dot1Q tag position dot1P bits in a QinQ encapsulated packet should be used to evaluate dot1P QoS classification.

The match-qinq-dot1p command allows the top or bottom PBits to be used when evaluating the applied sap-ingress QoS policy’s dot1P entries. The top and bottom keywords specify which position should be evaluated for QinQ encapsulated packets.

By default, the bottom-most service delineating dot1Q tag’s dot1P bits are used. Table 89 defines the default behavior for dot1P evaluation when the match-qinq-dot1p command is not executed.

Table 89:  Default QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

The no form of this command restores the default dot1p evaluation behavior for the SAP.

Default 

no match-qinq-dot1p (no filtering based on p-bits)

(top or bottom must be specified to override the default QinQ dot1p behavior)

Parameters 
top—
The top parameter is mutually exclusive to the bottom parameter. When the top parameter is specified, the topmost PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. Table 90 defines the dot1p evaluation behavior when the top parameter is specified.
Table 90:  Top Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ/QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

bottom—
The bottom parameter is mutually exclusive to the top parameter. When the bottom parameter is specified, the bottom most PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. Table 91 defines the dot1p evaluation behavior when the bottom parameter is specified.
Table 91:  Bottom Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ/TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

QinQ/QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

match-qinq-dot1p

Syntax 
match-qinq-dot1p {top |bottom}
no match-qinq-dot1p de
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)
Full Contexts 
configure service epipe sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p
configure service ipipe sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p
Description 

This command specifies which Dot1Q tag position Dot1P bits in a QinQ encapsulated packet should be used to evaluate Dot1P QoS classification.

The match-qinq-dot1p command allows the top or bottom PBits to be used when evaluating the applied sap-ingress QoS policy’s Dot1P entries. The top and bottom keywords specify which position should be evaluated for QinQ encapsulated packets.

The setting also applies to classification based on the DE indicator bit.

The no form of this command reverts the dot1p and de bits matching to the default tag.

By default, the bottom most service delineating Dot1Q tags Dot1P bits are used. Table 92 defines the default behavior for Dot1P evaluation.

Table 92:  Default QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Default 

no match-qinq-dot1p (no filtering based on p-bits)

(top or bottom must be specified to override the default QinQ dot1p behavior)

Parameters 
top—
The top parameter is mutually exclusive to the bottom parameter. When the top parameter is specified, the top most PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. Table 93 defines the dot1p evaluation behavior when the top parameter is specified.
Table 93:  Top Position QinQ dpt1p Evaluation Behavior 

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

bottom—
The bottom parameter and the top parameter are mutually exclusive. When the bottom parameter is specified, the bottom most PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. Table 94 defines the dot1p evaluation behavior when the bottom parameter is specified.
Table 94:  Bottom Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation 

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

Null

None

None

Null

Dot1P (VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

Null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

Null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

None (Default SAP)

None

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Table 95:  Egress SAP Types 

Egress SAP Type

Ingress Packet Preserved Dot1P State

Marked (or Remarked) PBits

Null

No preserved Dot1P bits

None

Null

Preserved Dot1P bits

Preserved tag PBits remarked using dot1p-value

Dot1Q

No preserved Dot1P bits

New PBits marked using dot1p-value

Dot1Q

Preserved Dot1P bits

Preserved tag PBits remarked using dot1p-value

TopQ

No preserved Dot1P bits

TopQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

TopQ

Preserved Dot1P bits (used as TopQ and BottomQ PBits)

TopQ PBits marked using dot1p-value, BottomQ PBits preserved

QinQ

No preserved Dot1P bits

TopQ PBits and BottomQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

QinQ

Preserved Dot1P bits (used as TopQ and BottomQ PBits)

TopQ PBits and BottomQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

The QinQ and TopQ SAP PBit/DEI bit marking follows the default behavior defined in the preceding table when qinq-mark-top-only is not specified.

The dot1p dot1p-value command must be configured without the qinq-mark-top-only parameter to remove the TopQ PBits only marking restriction.

A QinQ-encapsulated Ethernet port can have two different sap types:

For a TopQ SAP type, only the outer (top) tag is explicitly specified. For example, sap 1/1/1:10.*

For QinQ SAP type, both inner (bottom) and outer (top) tags are explicitly specified. For example, sap 1/1/1:10.100.

match-qinq-dot1p

Syntax 
match-qinq-dot1p {top |bottom}
no match-qinq-dot1p
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress match-qinq-dot1p)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap ingress match-qinq-dot1p
Description 

This command specifies which Dot1Q tag position Dot1P bits in a QinQ encapsulated packet should be used to evaluate Dot1P QoS classification.

The match-qinq-dot1p command allows the top or bottom PBits to be used when evaluating the applied sap-ingress QoS policy’s Dot1P entries. The top and bottom keywords specify which position should be evaluated for QinQ encapsulated packets.

The no form of this command restores the default dot1p evaluation behavior for the SAP.

By default, the bottom most service delineating Dot1Q tags Dot1P bits are used. Table 96 defines the default behavior for Dot1P evaluation when the match-qinq-dot1p command is not executed.

Table 96:  Dot1P Default Behavior

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

null

none

none

null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

null

Dot1Q PBits

null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

none (Default SAP)

none

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Default 

no match-qinq-dot1p - No filtering based on p-bits.

top or bottom must be specified to override the default QinQ dot1p behavior.

Parameters 
top—
The top parameter is mutually exclusive to the bottom parameter. When the top parameter is specified, the top most PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. Table 97 defines the dot1p evaluation behavior when the top parameter is specified.
Table 97:  Dot1P Evaluation Behavior

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

null

none

none

null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

null

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

none (Default SAP)

none

Dot1Q

Dot1P (Default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

TopQ PBits

bottom—
The bottom parameter is mutually exclusive to the top parameter. When the bottom parameter is specified, the bottom most PBits are used (if existing) to match any dot1p dot1p-value entries. The following tables define the bottom position QinQ and TopQ SAP dot1p evaluation and the default dot1p explicit marking actions.
Table 98:  Bottom Position QinQ and TopQ SAP Dot1P Evaluation

Port / SAP Type

Existing Packet Tags

PBits Used for Match

null

none

none

null

Dot1P (VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

null

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

null

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

null

TopQ (No BottomQ)

TopQ PBits

Dot1Q

none (default SAP)

none

Dot1Q

Dot1P (default SAP VLAN-ID 0)

Dot1P PBits

Dot1Q

Dot1Q

Dot1Q PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ

TopQ PBits

QinQ / TopQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

QinQ / QinQ

TopQ BottomQ

BottomQ PBits

Table 99:  Default Dot1P Explicit Marking Actions

Egress SAP Type

Ingress Packet Preserved Dot1P State

Marked (or Remarked) PBits

null

no preserved Dot1P bits

none

null

preserved Dot1P bits

preserved tag PBits remarked using dot1p-value

Dot1Q

no preserved Dot1P bits

new PBits marked using dot1p-value

Dot1Q

preserved Dot1P bits

preserved tag PBits remarked using dot1p-value

TopQ

no preserved Dot1P bits

TopQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

TopQ

preserved Dot1P bits (used as TopQ and BottomQ PBits)

TopQ PBits marked using dot1p-value, BottomQ PBits preserved

QinQ

no preserved Dot1P bits

TopQ PBits and BottomQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

QinQ

preserved Dot1P bits (used as TopQ and BottomQ PBits)

TopQ PBits and BottomQ PBits marked using dot1p-value

The dot1p dot1p-value command must be configured without the qinq-mark-top-only parameter to remove the TopQ PBits only marking restriction.

17.63. match-radius-proxy-cache

match-radius-proxy-cache

Syntax 
match-radius-proxy-cache
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host match-radius-proxy-cache)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host match-radius-proxy-cache
Description 

This command enables the context to configure RADIUS proxy cache match parameters.

17.64. max

max

Syntax 
max num-sessions
no max
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>nat>nat-policy>session-limits max)
[Tree] (config>service>nat>firewall-policy>session-limits max)
[Tree] (config>service>nat>up-nat-policy>session-limits max)
Full Contexts 
configure service nat firewall-policy session-limits max
configure service nat nat-policy session-limits max
configure service nat up-nat-policy session-limits max
Description 

This command configures the session limit of this policy. The session limit is the maximum number of sessions allowed for a subscriber associated with this policy.

Default 

max 65535

Parameters 
num-sessions—
Specifies the session limit.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

17.65. max-admin-down-time

max-admin-down-time

Syntax 
max-admin-down-time [[down-interval] |infinite]
no max-admin-down-time
Context 
[Tree] (config>lag>bfd>family max-admin-down-time)
Full Contexts 
configure lag bfd family max-admin-down-time
Description 

This command specifies the maximum amount of time the router will continue to forward traffic over a link after the micro-BFD sessions has transitioned to a Down state because it received an ADMIN-DOWN state from the far-end. This timer provide the administrator the configured amount of time to disable or de-provision the micro-BFD session on the local node before forwarding is halted over the associated link(s).

The no form of this command removes the time interval from the configuration.

Default 

max-admin-down-time 0

Parameters 
down-interval—
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds.
Values—
-1 to 3600

 

infinite—
Specifies no end time to forward traffic.

17.66. max-advertisement

max-advertisement

Syntax 
max-advertisement seconds
no max-advertisement
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv max-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 max-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv max-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if max-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv max-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 max-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv max-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>rtr-adv-plcy max-advertisement)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 max-advertisement
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements max-advertisement
configure service ies subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements max-advertisement
configure service vprn router-advert interface max-advertisement
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 max-advertisement
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements max-advertisement
configure service vprn subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements max-advertisement
configure subscriber-mgmt router-advertisement-policy max-advertisement
Description 

This command specifies the maximum time allowed between sending unsolicited router advertisements from this interface.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-advertisement 1800

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the maximum advertisement interval, in seconds.
Values—
900 to 1800

 

17.67. max-advertisement-interval

max-advertisement-interval

Syntax 
[no] max-advertisement-interval seconds
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if max-advertisement-interval)
[Tree] (config>router>router-advert>if max-advertisement-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure router router-advertisement interface max-advertisement-interval
configure service vprn router-advertisement interface max-advertisement-interval
Description 

This command configures the maximum interval between sending router advertisement messages.

Default 

max-advertisement-interval 600

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the maximum interval in seconds between sending router advertisement messages.
Values—
4 to 1800

 

max-advertisement-interval

Syntax 
max-advertisement-interval seconds
no max-advertisement-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>router-advert>if max-advertisement-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure router router-advertisement interface max-advertisement-interval
Description 

This command configures the maximum interval between sending router advertisement messages.

Default 

max-advertisement-interval 600

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the maximum interval in seconds between sending router advertisement messages.
Values—
4 to 1800

 

17.68. max-age

max-age

Syntax 
max-age max-age
no max-age [max-age]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp max-age)
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-template>stp max-age)
Full Contexts 
configure service template vpls-template stp max-age
configure service vpls stp max-age
Description 

This command indicates how many hops a BPDU can traverse the network starting from the root bridge. The message age field in a BPDU transmitted by the root bridge is initialized to 0. Each other bridge will take the message_age value from BPDUs received on their root port and increment this value by 1. The message_age therefore reflects the distance from the root bridge. BPDUs with a message age exceeding max-age are ignored.

STP uses the max-age value configured in the root bridge. This value is propagated to the other bridges via the BPDUs.

The no form of this command returns the max age to the default value.

Default 

max-age 20

Parameters 
max-age—
The max info age for the STP instance in seconds. Allowed values are integers in the range 6 to 40.

17.69. max-attempts

max-attempts

Syntax 
max-attempts count
max-attempts infinite
no max-attempts
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>gy>efh>interim-c max-attempts)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy gy extended-failure-handling interim-credit max-attempts
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of attempts made to establish a new Diameter Gy session with the Online Charging Server (OCS) when Extended Failure Handling (EFH) is active.

A new attempt is made when the volume or time interim credit of a rating group is consumed or when the validity time expires for a rating group.

When the maximum number of attempts is reached, the user session associated with the Diameter session is terminated (the corresponding subscriber hosts are deleted from the system).

The no form of this command resets the value to the default value.

Default 

max-attempts 10

Parameters 
count —
Specifies the maximum number attempts that is made to establish a Diameter Gy session with the OCS when EFH is active.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

infinite —
Specifies that an unlimited number of attempts is made to establish a Diameter Gy session with the OCS when EFH is active.

17.70. max-auth-req

max-auth-req

Syntax 
max-auth-req max-auth-request
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>dot1x max-auth-req)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet dot1x max-auth-req
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of times that the router will send an access request RADIUS message to the RADIUS server. If a reply is not received from the RADIUS server after the specified number attempts, the 802.1x authentication procedure is considered to have failed.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default 

max-auth-req 2

Parameters 
max-auth-request —
The maximum number of RADIUS retries.
Values—
1 to 10

 

17.71. max-avg

max-avg

Syntax 
max-avg percent
no max-avg
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>exceed-slope max-avg)
[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>highplus-slope max-avg)
[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>high-slope max-avg)
[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>low-slope max-avg)
Full Contexts 
configure qos slope-policy exceed-slope max-avg
configure qos slope-policy high-slope max-avg
configure qos slope-policy highplus-slope max-avg
configure qos slope-policy low-slope max-avg
Description 

Sets the exceed, low, high, or highplus Random Early Detection (RED) slope position for the shared buffer average utilization value where the packet discard probability rises directly to one. The percent parameter is expressed as a percentage of the shared buffer size.

The no form of this command restores the max-avg value to the default setting. If the current start-avg setting is larger than the default, an error will occur and the max-avg setting will not be changed to the default.

Default 

max-avg 100 - Highplus slope default is 100% buffer utilization before discard probability is 1.

max-avg 90 — High slope default is 90% buffer utilization before discard probability is 1.

max-avg 75 — Low slope default is 75% buffer utilization before discard probability is 1.

max-avg 55 — Exceed slope default is 55% buffer utilization before discard probability is 1.

Parameters 
percent—
The percentage of the shared buffer space for the buffer pool at which point the drop probability becomes one. The value entered must be greater or equal to the current setting of start-avg. If the entered value is smaller than the current value of start-avg, an error will occur and no change will take place.
Values—
0 to 100

 

17.72. max-bandwidth

max-bandwidth

Syntax 
max-bandwidth number-links
no max-bandwidth
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ml-bundle>ima max-bandwidth)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle ima max-bandwidth
Description 

This command specifies the number of links used to determine the maximum configurable bandwidth that is allowed to be used for this IMA group.

The maximum bandwidth is computed as:

Maximum Configurable ATM Bandwidth (MCAB) =

(number-links) * (M-1)/M * (2048/2049) * primary member link speed

Where:

M is the IMA frame size (128)

Primary member link speed is either E-1 — 1920 kb/s or DS-1 — 1539 kb/s. E-1 speed is used for a group with no members.

The total ATM bandwidth of services over shaped VCs cannot exceed the MCAB value as result of adding more services or removing member links.

The no form of this command resets the max-bandwidth to its default value.

Default 

max-bandwidth 8

Parameters 
number-links—
Specifies the number of links that determines the maximum configurable bandwidth that is allowed to be used for this IMA group.
Values—
1 to 8

 

max-bandwidth

Syntax 
max-bandwidth bandwidth-in-mbps
no max-bandwidth
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>auto-bandwidth max-bandwidth)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template>auto-bandwidth max-bandwidth)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls lsp auto-bandwidth max-bandwidth
configure router mpls lsp-template auto-bandwidth max-bandwidth
Description 

This command configures the maximum bandwidth that auto-bandwidth allocation is allowed to request for an LSP.

The LSP maximum applies whether the bandwidth adjustment is triggered by normal adjust-interval expiry, the overflow limit having been reached, or manual request.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

The max-bandwidth must be greater than the min-bandwidth.

Default 

max-bandwidth 100000

Parameters 
bandwidth-in-mbps—
Specifies the maximum bandwidth in Mb/s.
Values—
0 to 6400000

 

17.73. max-burst

max-burst

Syntax 
max-burst number
no max-burst
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>rsvp>msg-pacing max-burst)
Full Contexts 
configure router rsvp msg-pacing max-burst
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of RSVP messages that are sent in the specified period under normal operating conditions.

Default 

max-burst 650

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the maximum number of RSVP messages to be sent in increments of 10.
Values—
100 to 1000

 

17.74. max-bypass-associations

max-bypass-associations

Syntax 
max-bypass-associations integer
no max-bypass-associations
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls max-bypass-associations)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls max-bypass-associations
Description 

This command allows the user to set a maximum number of LSP primary path associations with each manual or dynamic bypass LSP that is created in the system.

By default, a Point of Local Repair (PLR) node will associate a maximum of 1000 primary LSP paths with a given bypass before using the next available manual bypass or signaling a new dynamic bypass.

Note that a new bypass LSP may need to be signaled if the constraint of a given primary LSP path is not met by an existing bypass LSP even if the max-bypass-associations for this bypass LSP has not been reached.

The no form of this command re-instates the default value of this parameter.

Default 

no max-bypass-associations

Parameters 
integer—
Configures the number of LSP primary path associations
Values—
1 to 131,072

 

17.75. max-bypass-plr-associations

max-bypass-plr-associations

Syntax 
max-bypass-plr-associations plr-value
no max-bypass-plr-associations
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls max-bypass-plr-associations)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls max-bypass-plr-associations
Description 

This command enables the configuration of the maximum number of Points of Local Repair (PLRs) per RSVP-TE bypass LSP.

A PLR summarizes the constraints applied to the computation of the path of the bypass LSP. It consists of the avoid link/node constraint, and potentially other TE constraints such as exclude SRLG, that are needed to protect against the failure of the primary path of the RSVP-TE LSP that is associated with this bypass LSP.

Additional PLRs with the same avoid link/node constraint are associated with the same bypass to minimize the number of bypass LSPs created. This command controls the maximum number of such PLRs.

Because MPLS saves only the PLR constraints of the first LSP that triggered the dynamic bypass creation, subsequent LSPs for the same avoid link/node and with the non-strict bypass SRLG disjointness enabled may be associated with the same bypass. This is even in cases where there exists a bypass LSP path that strictly satisfies the SRLG constraint.

When the maximum PLRs per bypass is configured with a value of 1, MPLS triggers the signaling of a new dynamic bypass LSP for each new PLR and saves each PLR constraint separately with its own bypass. As a result, when MPLS re-optimizes a bypass LSP it guarantees that SRLG disjointness of that PLR are checked and enforced.

The no form of this command returns the command to its default value.

Default 

max-bypass-plr-associations 16

Parameters 
plr-value—
Configures the number of LSP primary path associations
Values—
1 to 16

 

Default—
16

17.76. max-cells

max-cells

Syntax 
max-cells cell-count
no max-cells [cell-count]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>spoke-sdp>cell-concat max-cells)
Full Contexts 
configure service apipe spoke-sdp cell-concatenation max-cells
Description 

This command enables the configuration of the maximum number of ATM cells to accumulate into an MPLS packet. The remote peer will also signal the maximum number of concatenated cells it is willing to accept in an MPLS packet. When the lesser of (the configured value and the signaled value) number of cells is reached, the MPLS packet is queued for transmission onto the pseudowire. It is ensured that the MPLS packet MTU conforms to the configured service MTU.

The no form of this command sets max-cells to the value ‘1’ indicating that no concatenation will be performed.

Parameters 
cell-count—
Specifies the maximum number of ATM cells to be accumulated into an MPLS packet before queuing the packet for transmission onto the pseudowire.
Values—
1 to 128

 

Default—
1

17.77. max-cleared

max-cleared

Syntax 
max-cleared maximum
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>alarms max-cleared)
Full Contexts 
configure system alarms max-cleared
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of cleared alarms that the system will store and display.

Default 

max-cleared 500

Parameters 
maximum—
Specifies the maximum number of cleared alarms, up to 500.

17.78. max-completed

max-completed

Syntax 
max-completed unsigned
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>script-control>script-policy max-completed)
Full Contexts 
configure system script-control script-policy max-completed
Description 

This command is used to configure the maximum number of script run history status entries to keep.

Default 

max-completed 1

Parameters 
unsigned—
Specifies the maximum number of script run history status entries to keep.
Values—
1 to 1500

 

Default—
1

17.79. max-conn-prefix

max-conn-prefix

Syntax 
max-conn-prefix count
no max-conn-prefix
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam>twamp>server>prefix max-conn-prefix)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam twamp server prefix max-conn-prefix
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of control connections by clients with an IP address in a specific prefix. A new control connection is rejected if accepting it would cause either the prefix limit defined by this command or the server limit (max-conn-server) to be exceeded.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default 

max-conn-prefix 32

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the maximum number of control connections.
Values—
0 to 64

 

Default—
32

17.80. max-conn-server

max-conn-server

Syntax 
max-conn-server count
no max-conn-server
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam>twamp>server max-conn-server)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam twamp server max-conn-server
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of TWAMP control connections from all TWAMP clients. A new control connection is rejected if accepting it would cause either this limit or a prefix limit (max-conn-prefix) to be exceeded.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default 

max-conn-server 32

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the maximum number of control connections.
Values—
0 to 64

 

Default—
32

17.81. max-data-size

max-data-size

Syntax 
max-data-size bytes
Context 
[Tree] (config>sflow>receiver max-data-size)
Full Contexts 
configure sflow receiver max-data-size
Description 

This configures the maximum data size for sFlow UDP datagrams sent to the collector.

To restore default configuration, execute max-data-size 1400.

Default 

max-data-size 1400

Parameters 
bytes—
Specifies the data size.
Values—
200 to 1500

 

17.82. max-debounce-time

max-debounce-time

Syntax 
max-debounce-time max-debounce-time
no max-debounce-time
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy>mc>peer>mcr>ring>in-band-control-path max-debounce-time)
[Tree] (config>redundancy>mc>peer>mc>l3-ring>in-band-control-path max-debounce-time)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer multi-chassis l3-ring in-band-control-path max-debounce-time
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-ring ring in-band-control-path max-debounce-time
Description 

This command configures the inband control path maximum debounce time.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-debounce-time 10

Parameters 
max-debounce-time—
Specifies the maximum debounce time on the transition of the operational state of the inband control connection.
Values—
5 to 200 seconds

 

17.83. max-decrement

max-decrement

Syntax 
max-decrement {percent percent-of-admin-pir |rate rate-in-kilobits-per-second}
no max-decrement
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>adv-config-policy>child-control>offered-measurement max-decrement)
Full Contexts 
configure qos adv-config-policy child-control offered-measurement max-decrement
Description 

This command is used to limit how fast a child queue or policer can ‘give up’ bandwidth that it has been allotted from the virtual scheduler in a single iteration. If the child’s new offered rate has decreased by more than the maximum decrement limit, the system ignores the new offered rate and instead uses the old offered rate less the maximum decrement limit.

A possible reason to define a maximum decrement limit is to allow a child queue or policer to hold on to a portion of bandwidth that has been distributed by the parent virtual scheduler in case the child’s offered rate fluctuates in an erratic manor. The max-decrement limit has a dampening effect to changes in the offered rate.

A side effect of using a maximum decrement limit is that unused bandwidth allocated to the child queue or policer will not be given to another child as quickly. This may result in an underrun of the virtual scheduler’s aggregate rate.

The max-decrement limit has no effect on any increase in a child’s offered rate. If the rate increase is above the change sensitivity, the new offered rate is immediately used.

If the max-decrement command is used with a percent-based value, the decrement limit will be a function of the configured PIR value on the policer or queue. In this case, care should be taken that the child is either configured with an explicit PIR rate (other than max) or the child’s administrative PIR is defined using the percent-rate command with the local parameter enabled if an explicit value is not desired. When a maximum PIR is in use on the child, the system attempts to interpret the maximum child forwarding rate. This rate could be very large if the child is associated with multiple ingress or egress ports.

Except for the overall cap on the offered input into the virtual scheduler, the child’s administrative PIR has no effect on the calculated sensitivity if an explicit rate is specified.

If the child’s administrative PIR is modified while a percent based max-decrement is in effect, the system automatically uses the new relative maximum decrement limit value the next time the child’s offered rate is determined.

When the max-decrement command is not specified or removed, the virtual scheduler does not limit a decreasing offered rate to a specific limit.

The no form of this command is used to remove any currently configured maximum decrement limit for all child policers and queues associated with the policy.

Parameters 
percent-of-admin-pir—
When the percent qualifier is used, this parameter specifies the percentage of the child’s administrative PIR that should be used as the decrement limit to offered rate change. If a value of 100 or 100.00 is used, the system will interpret this equivalent to no max-decrement.
Values—
1.00 to 100.00

 

rate-in-kilobits-per-second—
When the rate qualifier is used, this parameter specifies an explicit rate, in kb/s, that should be used as the child’s offered rate change sensitivity value. If a rate sensitivity of 0 is specified, the system interprets this equivalent to no max-decrement.
Values—
0 to 100,000,000

 

17.84. max-delay

max-delay

Syntax 
max-delay delay-time
no max-delay [delay-time]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>spoke-sdp>cell-concat max-delay)
Full Contexts 
configure service apipe spoke-sdp cell-concatenation max-delay
Description 

This command enables the configuration of the maximum amount of time to wait while performing ATM cell concatenation into an MPLS packet before transmitting the MPLS packet. This places an upper bound on the amount of delay introduced by the concatenation process. When this amount of time is reached from when the first ATM cell for this MPLS packet was received, the MPLS packet is queued for transmission onto the pseudowire.

The no form of this command resets max-delay to its default value.

Parameters 
delay-time—
Specifies the maximum amount of time, in hundreds of microseconds, to wait before transmitting the MPLS packet with whatever ATM cells have been received. For example, to bound the delay to 1 ms the user would configure 10 (hundreds of microseconds). The delay-time is rounded up to one of the following values 1, 5, 10, 50, 100, 200, 300 and 400.
Values—
1 to 400

 

Default—
400

17.85. max-depth

max-depth

Syntax 
max-depth percent-of-queue-depth
no max-depth
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>hsmda-slope-policy>high-slope max-depth)
[Tree] (config>qos>hsmda-slope-policy>low-slope max-depth)
Full Contexts 
configure qos hsmda-slope-policy high-slope max-depth
configure qos hsmda-slope-policy low-slope max-depth
Description 

This command defines the ending queue depth point for a slope relative to the maximum depth of the queue-mbs value of the HSMDA slope policy. At the point the slope ends, it has risen from the starting queue depth value with a discard probability of zero. At max-depth, the slope will have risen to the discard probability defined by max-depth at which point the slope rises directly to a discard probability of 100%.

If the queue depth has reached the point defined by max-depth, all packets associated with the slope will be discarded.

The defined percent-of-queue-depth for max-depth is defined as a percentage of the queue-mbs value. The value defined as the maximum depth must be greater than or equal to the current percentage value for start-depth. If the defined value is less than start-depth, the max-depth command will fail with no change to the current value. If the start-depth value is greater than the desired max-depth value, first change start-depth to a value equal to or less than the desired max-depth.

The no form of this command restores the default ending point percentage value for the slope. The low and high slopes have different default values. If the default value is less than the current start-depth value, the no max-depth command will fail.

Parameters 
percent-of-queue-depth—
Specifies the max depth for the high or low slopes The percent-of-queue-depth parameter is required when executing the max-depth command. It is expressed as a percentage value with two decimal places (100th of a percent) accuracy. Specifying the fractional portion is optional.

17.86. max-description-size

max-description-size

Syntax 
max-description-size size
no max-description-size
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>nat>pcp-server-policy max-description-size)
Full Contexts 
configure service nat pcp-server-policy max-description-size
Description 

This command specifies the maximum length of mapping descriptions made by the PCP servers using this PCP policy.

Default 

max-description-size 64

Parameters 
size—
Specifies the maximum length of mapping descriptions made by the PCP servers.
Values—
1 to 64

 

17.87. max-drop-count

max-drop-count

Syntax 
max-drop-count count
no max-drop-count
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>sdp>keep-alive max-drop-count)
Full Contexts 
configure service sdp keep-alive max-drop-count
Description 

This command configures the number of consecutive SDP keepalive failed request attempts or remote replies that can be missed after which the SDP is operationally downed. If the max-drop-count consecutive keepalive request messages cannot be sent or no replies are received, the SDP-ID will be brought operationally down by the keepalive SDP monitoring.

The no form of this command reverts the max-drop-count count value to the default settings.

Default 

max-drop-count 3

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the number of consecutive SDP keepalive requests that are failed to be sent or replies missed, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 5

 

17.88. max-ecmp-routes

max-ecmp-routes

Syntax 
max-ecmp-routes max-routes
no max-ecmp-routes
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ldp max-ecmp-routes)
Full Contexts 
configure router ldp max-ecmp-routes
Description 

This command sets the maximum number of ECMP routes that LDP may use to resolve the next hop for a FEC.

Note:

The system-wide maximum number of ECMP routes is limited by the config>router>ecmp command. This command, under the LDP context, simply allows LDP to use more than 32 routes, if they are available in RTM or TTM. When configured, the actual number of ECMP routes used by LDP is therefore min[config>router>ecmp, config>router>ldp>max-ecmp-routes].

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

max-ecmp-routes 32

Parameters 
max-routes—
Specifies the maximum number of routes.
Values—
1 to 64

 

17.89. max-entries

max-entries

Syntax 
max-entries count
no max-entries
Context 
[Tree] (config>python>py-pol>cache max-entries)
Full Contexts 
configure python python-policy cache max-entries
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of Python cache entries that can be stored in the cache of this Python policy.

If the limit has been reached, a Python exception will be thrown when requested to store another data structure.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-entries 128000

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the maximum number of cache entries allowed.
Values—
1 to 1000000

 

max-entries

Syntax 
max-entries max-entries
no shutdown
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>evt-log max-entries)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group event-log max-entries
Description 

This command configures the number of entries in the buffer.

Default 

max-entries 500

Parameters 
max-entries—
Specifies the maximum number of entries for the event log.
Values—
1 to 100000

 

Default—
500

17.90. max-entry-lifetime

max-entry-lifetime

Syntax 
max-entry-lifetime [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
no max-entry-lifetime
Context 
[Tree] (config>python>py-pol>cache max-entry-lifetime)
Full Contexts 
configure python python-policy cache max-entry-lifetime
Description 

This command configures the maximum allowed lifetime for each entry of the Python cache of this Python policy.

When adding data to the Python cache the lifetime of the given object must always be specified. If the specified lifetime is bigger than the configured value, then the value of the max-entry-lifetime will be used instead of the lifetime that was specified.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-entry-lifetime days 1

Parameters 
days days
Specifies the maximum lifetime that can be set on a cache entry in days.
Values—
0 to 7

 

Default—
1
hrs hours
Specifies the maximum lifetime that can be set on a cache entry in hours.
Values—
0 to 23

 

min minutes
Specifies the maximum lifetime that can be set on a cache entry in minutes.
Values—
0 to 59

 

sec seconds
Specifies the maximum lifetime that can be set on a cache entry in seconds.
Values—
0 to 59

 

17.91. max-fail

max-fail

Syntax 
max-fail no-response-count
no max-fail
Context 
[Tree] (config>saa>test>type-multi-line>lsp-trace>sr-policy max-fail)
Full Contexts 
configure saa test type-multi-line lsp-trace sr-policy max-fail
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of consecutive MPLS echo requests that do not receive a reply before the trace operation fails for a TTL.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

max-fail 5

Parameters 
no-response-count—
Specifies the maximum number of consecutive MPLS echo requests, expressed as a decimal integer, that do not receive a reply before the trace operation fails for a TTL.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
5

17.92. max-files-number

max-files-number

Syntax 
max-files-number number
Context 
[Tree] (config>call-trace max-files-number)
Full Contexts 
configure call-trace max-files-number
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of files call trace can create.

Default 

max-files-number 200

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the maximum number of all call trace log files stored on all compact flash cards together.
Values—
1 to 1024

 

17.93. max-fragment-delay

max-fragment-delay

Syntax 
max-fragment-delay milliseconds
no max-fragment-delay
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>mlppp max-fragment-delay)
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>tunnel>mlppp max-fragment-delay)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>mlppp max-fragment-delay)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>tunnel>mlppp max-fragment-delay)
Full Contexts 
configure router l2tp group mlppp max-fragment-delay
configure router l2tp group tunnel mlppp max-fragment-delay
configure service vprn l2tp group mlppp max-fragment-delay
configure service vprn l2tp group tunnel mlppp max-fragment-delay
Description 

This command is applicable only to LNS. It determines the maximum fragment delay caused by the transmission that will be imposed on a link.

Fragmentation can be used to interleave high priority packet in-between low priority fragments on a MLPPPoX session with a single link or on a MLPPPoX session with multiple links to better load balance traffic over multiple member links.

Default 

no max-fragment-delay

Parameters 
milliseconds—
Specifies the interval, in milliseconds.
Values—
5 to 1000

 

17.94. max-groups

max-groups

Syntax 
max-groups max-groups
no max-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>grp-if max-groups)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>if max-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn igmp group-interface max-groups
configure service vprn igmp interface max-groups
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of groups for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new groups will not be allowed.

The no form of this command removes the value.

Parameters 
max-groups—
Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.
Values—
1 to 16000

 

max-groups

Syntax 
max-groups value
no max-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>if max-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn mld interface max-groups
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of groups for which MLD can have local receiver information based on received MLD reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than the currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new groups will not be allowed.

Default 

0 (no limit to the number of groups)

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.
Values—
1 to 16000

 

max-groups

Syntax 
max-groups value
no max-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim>if max-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn pim interface max-groups
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of groups for which PIM can have downstream state based on received PIM Joins on this interface. This does not include IGMP local receivers on the interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than the currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new groups will not be allowed. When this object has a value of 0, there is no limit to the number of groups.

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.
Values—
1 to 16000

 

max-groups

Syntax 
max-groups value
no max-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>igmp>group-interface max-groups)
[Tree] (config>router>igmp>if max-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure router igmp group-interface max-groups
configure router igmp interface max-groups
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of groups for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than the currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new groups will not be allowed. This command is applicable for IPv4 and IPv6.

The no form of the command sets no limit to the number of groups.

Default 

no max-groups

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.
Values—
1 to 16000

 

max-groups

Syntax 
max-groups [1..16000]
no max-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mld>group-interface max-groups)
[Tree] (config>router>mld>if max-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure router mld group-interface max-groups
configure router mld interface max-groups
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of groups for which MLD can have local receiver information based on received MLD reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than the currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. New groups are not allowed.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

max-groups 0 (no limit to the number of groups)

Parameters 
1..16000—
Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.
Values—
1 to 16000

 

max-groups

Syntax 
max-groups [value]
no max-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>pim>interface max-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure router pim interface max-groups
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of groups for which PIM can have local receiver information based on received PIM reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than the currently accepted number of groups, the groups that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new groups will not be allowed. This command is applicable for IPv4 and IPv6.

The no form of this command sets no limit to the number of groups.

Default 

no max-groups

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the maximum number of groups for this interface.
Values—
1 to 16000

 

17.95. max-grp-sources

max-grp-sources

Syntax 
max-grp-sources max-group-sources
no max-grp-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>grp-if max-grp-sources)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>if max-grp-sources)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>interface max-grp-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn igmp group-interface max-grp-sources
configure service vprn igmp interface max-grp-sources
configure service vprn mld interface max-grp-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources will not be allowed.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-grp-sources 0

Parameters 
max-grp-sources
Specifies the maximum number of group source.
Values—
1 to 32000

 

max-grp-sources

Syntax 
max-grp-sources value
no max-grp-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>igmp>group-interface max-grp-sources)
[Tree] (config>router>igmp>if max-grp-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure router igmp group-interface max-grp-sources
configure router igmp interface max-grp-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources will not be allowed.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default 

no max-grp-sources

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the maximum number of group sources.
Values—
1 to 32000

 

max-grp-sources

Syntax 
max-grp-sources [1..32000]
no max-grp-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mld>group-interface max-grp-sources)
[Tree] (config>router>mld>if max-grp-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure router mld group-interface max-grp-sources
configure router mld interface max-grp-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which MLD can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources will not be allowed.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-grp-sources 0 (no limit to the number of sources)

Parameters 
1 .. 32000
Specifies the maximum number of group source.
Values—
1 to 32000

 

17.96. max-held-sessions

max-held-sessions

Syntax 
max-held-sessions max-held-sessions
no max-held-sessions
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>gtp max-held-sessions)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt gtp max-held-sessions
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of GTP sessions to be held while their UE is disconnected.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-held-sessions 2000

Parameters 
max-held-sessions—
Specifies the maximum number of GTP sessions.
Values—
0 to 500000

 

17.97. max-history-esp-key-records

max-history-esp-key-records

Syntax 
max-history-esp-key-records max-records
no max-history-esp-key-records
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ipsec-gw max-history-esp-key-records)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-gw max-history-esp-key-records)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records)
Full Contexts 
configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records
configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records
configure service ies interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-esp-key-records
configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-esp-key-records
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel max-history-esp-key-records
Description 

This command enables the system to keep records of CHILD-SA keys for the corresponding ipsec-gw or ipsec-tunnel. There is a system wide limit of maximum number of IPsec tunnels that save keys. If the number of tunnel exceeds that limit, the system will not save keys for the new tunnels. Check with Nokia support for details of the limitation.

This command is ignored if the config>ipsec>no show-ipsec-keys command is configured.

The no form of this command prevents the system from keeping records.

Default 

no max-history-esp-key-records

Parameters 
max-records—
Specifies the maximum number of recent records.
Values—
1 to 48

 

17.98. max-history-ike-key-records

max-history-ike-key-records

Syntax 
max-history-ike-key-records max-records
no max-history-ike-key-records
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ipsec-gw max-history-ike-key-records)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-gw max-history-ike-key-records)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>manual-keying max-history-ike-key-records)
Full Contexts 
configure router interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel manual-keying max-history-ike-key-records
configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records
configure service ies interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-ike-key-records
configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-gw max-history-ike-key-records
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel max-history-ike-key-records
Description 

This command enables system to keep records of IKE-SA keys for the corresponding ipsec-gw or ipsec-tunnel.

This command is ignored if the config>ipsec>no show-ipsec-keys command is configured. There is a system wide limit of maximum number of IPsec tunnels that save keys. If the number of tunnel exceeds that limit, the system will not save keys for the new tunnels. Check with Nokia support for details of the limitation.

The no form of this command prevents the system from keeping records.

Default 

no max-history-ike-key-records

Parameters 
max-records—
Specifies the maximum number of recent records.
Values—
1 to 3

 

17.99. max-igmp-latency

max-igmp-latency

Syntax 
max-igmp-latency milli-seconds
Context 
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-info-plcy>video-policy>video-if max-igmp-latency)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy video-policy video-interface max-igmp-latency
Description 

After the subscriber requests a fast channel change using RTCP, the video ISA bursts the video content as unicast to the subscriber. When the unicasted content has caught up to the multicast, the video ISA sends a notification message using RTCP to the subscriber to switch over to multicast with an IGMP request. When the notification message from the video ISA is sent, the max-igmp-latency timer starts. The video ISA continues to send unicast video until the max-igmp-latency expires or until the subscriber, using RTCP, informs the video ISA of the exact sequence number to stop (whichever occurs first). The max-igmp-latency is the maximum delay that the multicast router takes to respond and deliver the multicast upon the subscriber IGMP request.

Parameters 
milli-seconds—
The maximum delay in milli-seconds.
Values—
10 to 1000

 

Default—
100

17.100. max-lanext-bd

max-lanext-bd

Syntax 
max-lanext-bd [value]
no max-lanext-bd
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw max-lanext-bd)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw max-lanext-bd)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw max-lanext-bd
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw max-lanext-bd
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of HLE BDs for this group interface.

The no form of this command disables HLE for the group interface.

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the maximum number of Bridged Domains for this interface.
Values—
1 to 131071

 

17.101. max-lease-time

max-lease-time

Syntax 
max-lease-time [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
no max-lease-time
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool max-lease-time)
Full Contexts 
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool max-lease-time
Description 

This command configures the maximum lease time.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-lease-time days 10

Parameters 
max-lease-time—
Specifies the maximum lease time.
Values—

days

0 to 3650

hours

0 to 23

minutes

0 to 59

seconds

0 to 59

 

17.102. max-lifetime

max-lifetime

Syntax 
max-lifetime hours
no max-lifetime
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>gx>ccrt-replay max-lifetime)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>diam-appl-plcy>gy>ccrt-replay max-lifetime)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy gx ccrt-replay max-lifetime
configure subscriber-mgmt diameter-application-policy gy ccrt-replay max-lifetime
Description 

This command specifies the maximum period of time that CCR-T messages for Diameter Gx or Gy sessions that belong to the Diameter application policy are replayed.

The no form of this command resets the maximum lifetime to the default value setting.

Default 

max-lifetime 24

Parameters 
hours
Specifies the maximum lifetime after which the CCR-T messages are no longer replayed.
Values—
1 to 24

 

Default—
24

17.103. max-links

max-links

Syntax 
max-links max-links
no max-links
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>mlppp max-links)
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>tunnel>mlppp max-links)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>mlppp max-links)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>tunnel>mlppp max-links)
Full Contexts 
configure router l2tp group mlppp max-links
configure router l2tp group tunnel mlppp max-links
configure service vprn l2tp group mlppp max-links
configure service vprn l2tp group tunnel mlppp max-links
Description 

This command is applicable only to LNS. It determines the maximum number of links that can be put in a bundle.

Any attempt of a session to join a bundle that is above the max-link limit will be rejected.

If interleaving is configured, it is recommended that max-links be set to 1 or a version of the command is used (no max-links). Both have the same effect.

The configuration under the tunnel hierarchy will override the configuration under the group hierarchy.

The no form of this command limits the number of links in the bundle to 1.

Default 

no max-links

Parameters 
max-links—
Specifies the maximum number of links in a bundle.
Values—
1 to 8

 

17.104. max-list-length

max-list-length

Syntax 
max-list-length unlimited
max-list-length count
no max-list-length
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>tunnel-selection-blacklist max-list-length)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>tunnel-selection-blacklistmax-list-length max-list-length)
Full Contexts 
configure router l2tp tunnel-selection-blacklist max-list-length
configure service vprn l2tp tunnel-selection-blacklistmax-list-length max-list-length
Description 

This command specifies the number of tunnels or peers that can be in the tunnel-selection-blacklist. If a tunnel or peer needs to be added to the blacklist and the blacklist is full, the system removes the item (tunnel or peer) from the blacklist that was in this blacklist for the longest time.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-list-length unlimited

Parameters 
unlimited—
Specifies there is no limit.
count
Specifies how many items (tunnels or peers) can be in the tunnel-selection-blacklist.
Values—
1 to 65635

 

17.105. max-lockout-hosts

max-lockout-hosts

Syntax 
max-lockout-hosts hosts
no max-lockout-hosts
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>host-lockout-plcy max-lockout-hosts)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt host-lockout-policy max-lockout-hosts
Description 

When a client enters lockout, authentication and ESM host creation is suppressed. A lightweight context maintains the lockout state and the timeouts for the client in lockout. This command allows the number of lockout contexts to be configured per SAP. If the number of existing contexts reaches the configured count, incoming hosts that fail authentication or creation are not subject to lockout, and are retried as normal.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

max-lockout-hosts 100

Parameters 
hosts—
Specifies the maximum number of lockout host.
Values—
1 to 32000

 

17.106. max-mac

max-mac

Syntax 
max-mac [value]
no max-mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>access max-mac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>access max-mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext access max-mac
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext access max-mac
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of allowed MAC addresses on the access side of HLE.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-mac 20

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the maximum number of MAC entries in bridged domains.
Values—
1 to 128

 

max-mac

Syntax 
max-mac [value]
no max-mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>xconnect max-mac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>xconnect max-mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw ranges range vrgw lanext xconnect max-mac
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw ranges range vrgw lanext xconnect max-mac
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of allowed MAC in the bridge domain.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-mac 20

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the maximum number of MAC entries in bridged domains.
Values—
1 to 128

 

max-mac

Syntax 
max-mac [value]
no max-mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>network max-mac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>network max-mac)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext network max-mac
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext network max-mac
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of allowed VM MAC addresses on the access side of HLE.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-mac 20

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the maximum number of VM MAC entries in bridged domains.
Values—
1 to 128

 

17.107. max-msg-size

max-msg-size

Syntax 
max-msg-size number
no max-msg-size
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>grpc max-msg-size)
Full Contexts 
configure system grpc max-msg-size
Description 

This command configures the maximum rx message size that can be received.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-msg-size 512

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the message size, in MB.
Values—
1 to 1024

 

Default—
512

17.108. max-nbr-mac-addr

max-nbr-mac-addr

Syntax 
max-nbr-mac-addr table-size
no max-nbr-mac-addr
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template max-nbr-mac-addr)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>endpoint max-nbr-mac-addr)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap max-nbr-mac-addr)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp max-nbr-mac-addr)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>vxlan max-nbr-mac-addr)
Full Contexts 
configure service template vpls-sap-template max-nbr-mac-addr
configure service vpls endpoint max-nbr-mac-addr
configure service vpls sap max-nbr-mac-addr
configure service vpls spoke-sdp max-nbr-mac-addr
configure service vpls vxlan max-nbr-mac-addr
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of FDB entries for both learned and static MAC addresses for this SAP, spoke-SDP, endpoint, or VXLAN instance.

When the configured limit is reached, and discard-unknown-source is enabled for this SAP, spoke-SDP, or static VXLAN instance (see config>service>vpls>sap discard-unknown-source or config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp discard-unknown-source), then packets with unknown source MAC addresses are discarded.

The no form of the command restores the global MAC learning limitations for the SAP or spoke-SDP, or VXLAN instance.

Default 

no max-nbr-mac-addr

Parameters 
table-size—
Specifies the maximum number of learned and static entries allowed in the FDB of this service.
Values—
1 to 511999 for the 7750 SR
1 to 131071 for the 7450 ESS

 

max-nbr-mac-addr

Syntax 
max-nbr-mac-addr table-size
no max-nbr-mac-addr
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>pw-template max-nbr-mac-addr)
Full Contexts 
configure service pw-template max-nbr-mac-addr
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of FDB entries for both learned and static MAC addresses for this SAP or spoke SDP.

When the configured limit has been reached, and discard-unknown-source has been enabled for this SAP or spoke SDP (see config>service>vpls>sap discard-unknown-source or config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp discard-unknown-source), packets with unknown source MAC addresses will be discarded.

The no form of the command restores the global MAC learning limitations for the SAP or spoke SDP.

Default 

no max-nbr-mac-addr

Parameters 
table-size—
Specifies the maximum number of learned and static entries allowed in the FDB of this service.
Values—
1 to 511999

 

17.109. max-nbr-of-leases

max-nbr-of-leases

Syntax 
max-nbr-of-leases max-nbr-of-leases
no max-nbr-of-leases
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>dhcp6-server max-nbr-of-leases)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface ipv6 dhcp6-server max-nbr-of-leases
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of lease states installed by the DHCPv6 server function allowed on this interface.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default 

max-nbr-of-leases 8000

Parameters 
max-nbr-of-leases—
Specifies the maximum number of lease states installed by the DHCPv6 server function allowed on this interface.
Values—
0 to 8000

 

17.110. max-num-groups

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups count
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-groups)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-groups)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-groups)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mld-snooping max-num-groups)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>mld-snooping max-num-groups)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>mld-snooping max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-groups
configure service vpls mesh-sdp mld-snooping max-num-groups
configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping max-num-groups
configure service vpls sap mld-snooping max-num-groups
configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-groups
configure service vpls spoke-sdp mld-snooping max-num-groups
Description 

This command defines the maximum number of multicast groups that can be joined on this SAP or SDP. If the node receives an IGMP join message that would exceed the configured number of groups, the request is ignored.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

no max-num-groups

Parameters 
count —
Specifies the maximum number of groups that can be joined on this SAP or SDP.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups max-num-groups
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-trk max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command disables the check.

Default 

no max-num-groups

Parameters 
max-num-groups—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.
Values—
1 to 196607

 

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups max-num-groups
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>sub-mgmt>igmp-policy max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt igmp-policy max-num-groups
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Parameters 
max-num-groups—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups.
Values—
0 to 16000

 

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups max-num-groups
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-trk max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command removes the values from the configuration.

Default 

no max-num-groups

Parameters 
max-num-groups—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.
Values—
1 to 196607

 

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups max-num-groups
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command removes the values from the configuration.

Parameters 
max-num-groups—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.
Values—
1 to 196607

 

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups max-num-groups
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only>igmp-snp max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters igmp-snooping max-num-groups
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups that can be joined on an MSAP or SDP. If the router receives an IGMP join message that would exceed the configured number of groups, the request is ignored.

Parameters 
max-num-groups —
Specifies the maximum number of groups that can be joined on an MSAP or SDP.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups count
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>mld-policy max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt mld-policy max-num-groups
Description 

This command defines the maximum number of multicast groups that can be joined. If the router receives a join message that would exceed the configured number of groups, the request is ignored.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
count —
Specifies the maximum number of groups that can be joined.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups max-num-groups
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-snooping max-num-groups
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command removes the values from the configuration.

Parameters 
max-num-groups—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.
Values—
1 to 196607

 

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups max-num-groups
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-groups
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command removes the values from the configuration.

Default 

no max-num-groups

Parameters 
max-num-groups—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast groups allowed to be tracked
Values—
1 to 196607

 

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups num-groups
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>pim-snooping max-num-groups)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>pim-snooping max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap pim-snooping max-num-groups
configure service vpls spoke-sdp pim-snooping max-num-groups
Description 

This command configures the maximum groups for PIM snooping.

Parameters 
num-groups—
Specifies the maximum groups for PIM snooping
Values—
1 to 16000

 

max-num-groups

Syntax 
max-num-groups count
no max-num-groups
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>pw-template>igmp-snooping max-num-groups)
Full Contexts 
configure service pw-template igmp-snooping max-num-groups
Description 

This command defines the maximum number of multicast groups that can be joined. If the router receives an IGMP join message that would exceed the configured number of groups, the request is ignored.

Default 

no max-num-groups

Parameters 
count —
Specifies the maximum number of groups that can be joined.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

17.111. max-num-grp-sources

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax 
max-num-grp-sources [max-num-grp-sources]
no max-num-grp-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>igmp-policy max-num-grp-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt igmp-policy max-num-grp-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources will not be allowed. When this object has a value of 0, there is no limit to the number of group sources.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters 
max-num-grp-sources
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.
Values—
1 to 32000

 

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax 
max-num-grp-sources [max-num-grp-sources]
no max-num-grp-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>igmp-trk max-num-grp-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources will not be allowed. When this object has a value of 0, there is no limit to the number of group sources.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters 
max-num-grp-sources
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.
Values—
1 to 32000

 

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax 
max-num-grp-sources [max-num-grp-sources]
no max-num-grp-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>mld-policy max-num-grp-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt mld-policy max-num-grp-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which MLD can have local receiver information based on received MLD reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources are not allowed. When this object has a value of 0, there is no limit to the number of group sources.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters 
max-num-grp-sources
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.
Values—
1 to 32000

 

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax 
[no] max-num-grp-sources [number]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of group sources, the group sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new group sources are not allowed. When this object has a value of 0, there is no limit to the number of group sources.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters 
number
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.
Values—
1 to 32000

 

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax 
max-num-grp-sources [1 to 32000]
no max-num-grp-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources
configure service vpls sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources
configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources
configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-grp-sources
Description 

This command defines the maximum number of multicast SGs that can be joined on this SAP or SDP. If the node receives an IGMP join message that would exceed the configured number of SGs, the request is ignored.

The no form of this command disables the check.

Default 

no max-num-grp-sources

Parameters 
1 to 32000—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group

max-num-grp-sources

Syntax 
max-num-grp-sources max-num-sources
no max-num-grp-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-grp-sources
Description 

This command configures the max number of multicast (S,G)s allowed to be tracked.

The no form of this command disables the check.

Default 

no max-num-grp-sources

Parameters 
max-num-sources—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.
Values—
1 to 32000

 

17.112. max-num-sources

max-num-sources

Syntax 
max-num-sources max-num-sources
no max-num-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>sub-mgmt>igmp-policy max-num-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt igmp-policy max-num-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast sources.

The no form of this command disables the command.

Parameters 
max-num-sources—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-num-sources

Syntax 
max-num-sources max-num-sources
no max-num-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters 
max-num-sources—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-num-sources

Syntax 
max-num-sources max-num-sources
no max-num-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>mld-policy max-num-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt mld-policy max-num-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast sources allowed per group.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters 
max-num-sources—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed per group.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-num-sources

Syntax 
max-num-sources max-num-sources
no max-num-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-snooping max-num-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters 
max-num-sources—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-num-sources

Syntax 
max-num-sources max-num-sources
no max-num-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-sources)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping max-num-sources)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping max-num-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-sources
configure service vpls sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources
configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping max-num-sources
configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping max-num-sources
Description 

This command defines the maximum number of multicast sources that can be joined on this SAP or SDP. If the node receives an IGMP join message that would exceed the configured number of sources, the request is ignored.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters 
max-num-sources—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed per group
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-num-sources

Syntax 
max-num-sources max-num-sources
no max-num-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap igmp-host-tracking max-num-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Parameters 
max-num-sources—
Specifies the maximum number of multicast sources allowed to be tracked per group.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

17.113. max-num-ue

max-num-ue

Syntax 
max-num-ue maximum
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>wlan-gw>tunnel-query max-num-ue)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt wlan-gw tunnel-query max-num-ue
Description 

This command enables matching only on tunnels that have, at most, the specified number of UEs connected.

Default 

max-num-ue 4294967295

Parameters 
maximum—
Specifies the maximum number of UEs.
Values—
0 to 4294967295

 

17.114. max-path

max-path

Syntax 
max-path max-paths
no max-path
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam>ldp-treetrace>path-discovery max-path)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam ldp-treetrace path-discovery max-path
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of ECMP paths the path discovery attempts to discover for each run every interval minute.

The no form of this command resets the time out to its default value.

Default 

no max-path

Parameters 
max-paths—
Specifies the tree discovery maximum path.
Values—
1 to 128

 

17.115. max-payload-length

max-payload-length

Syntax 
max-payload-length direction direction [create]
no max-payload-length direction direction
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>statistics>tca>gtp-filter max-payload-length)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group statistics threshold-crossing-alert gtp-filter max-payload-length
Description 

This command configures a TCA for the counter capturing drops due to the GTP filter maximum payload length. A maximum payload length drop TCA can be created for traffic generated from the subscriber side of AA (from-sub) or for traffic generated from the network toward the AA subscriber (to-sub). The create keyword is mandatory when creating a maximum payload length drop TCA.

Default 

none

Parameters 
direction—
Specifies the traffic direction.
Values—
from-sub, to-sub

 

create—
Keyword used to create the TCA.

max-payload-length

Syntax 
max-payload-length bytes
no max-payload-length
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>gtp>gtp-filter max-payload-length)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group gtp gtp-filter max-payload-length
Description 

This command specifies the maximum allowed GTP payload size.

The no form of this command removes this GTP message length filter.

Default 

no max-payload-length

Parameters 
bytes—
Specifies the packet length in bytes.
Values—
0 to 65535

 

17.116. max-peer

max-peer

Syntax 
max-peer max-peer
no max-peer
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>dot1x>macsec>sub-port max-peer)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet dot1x macsec sub-port max-peer
Description 

This command configures the max peer allowed under this MACsec instance.

Note:

The peer establishment is a race condition and first come first serve. On any security zone, only 32 peers can be supported. See SA Exhaustion Behavior for more details.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default 

no max-peer

Parameters 
max-peer —
The maximum number of peers supported on this port.
Values—
0 to 32

 

17.117. max-percent-rate

max-percent-rate

Syntax 
max-percent-rate percentage [local-limit |reference-port-limit]
no max-percent-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>plcr-ctrl-plcy>root max-percent-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure qos policer-control-policy root max-percent-rate
Description 

This command configures the maximum percentage rate for the policer control policy.

The no form of this command removes the configuration.

Parameters 
percentage—
Specifies the percentage.
Values—
0.01 to 100.00

 

local-limit—
Keyword used to specify the local limit.
reference-port-limit—
Keyword used to specify the reference port limit.

17.118. max-prob

max-prob

Syntax 
max-prob discard-probability-in-percent
no max-prob
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>hsmda-slope-policy>high-slope max-prob)
[Tree] (config>qos>hsmda-slope-policy>low-slope max-prob)
Full Contexts 
configure qos hsmda-slope-policy high-slope max-prob
configure qos hsmda-slope-policy low-slope max-prob
Description 

This command defines the slopes maximum probability point where the slope ends and the discard probability rises directly to 100%. Together with the max-depth command, the max-prob value defines the end of the slope.

The defined percent-of-discard-probability for max-prob is defined as a percentage of a 100% discard probability. If a value of 75% is defined, near the end of the slope close to 75% of the packets will be discarded. At the end of the slope, the discard probability rises to 100% and all packets are discarded.

Parameters 
discard-probability-in-percent—
Specifies the max probability percentage for the high or low slopes. The percent-of-discard-probability parameter is required when executing the max-prob command. It is expressed as a percentage value with two decimal places (100th of a percent) accuracy. Specifying the fractional portion is optional.

max-prob

Syntax 
max-prob percent
no max-prob
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>exceed-slope max-prob)
[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>highplus-slope max-prob)
[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>high-slope max-prob)
[Tree] (config>qos>slope-policy>low-slope max-prob)
Full Contexts 
configure qos slope-policy exceed-slope max-prob
configure qos slope-policy high-slope max-prob
configure qos slope-policy highplus-slope max-prob
configure qos slope-policy low-slope max-prob
Description 

Sets the exceed, low, high, or highplus Random Early Detection (RED) slope position for the maximum non-one packet discard probability value before the packet discard probability rises directly to one. The percent parameter is expressed as a percentage of packet discard probability where always discard is a probability of 1. A max-prob value of 80 represents 80% of 1, or a packet discard probability of 0.8.

The no form of this command restores the max-prob value to the default setting.

Default 

max-prob 80

Parameters 
percent—
The maximum drop probability percentage corresponding to the max-avg, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
0 to 100

 

17.119. max-queue-size

max-queue-size

Syntax 
max-queue-size queue-size
no max-queue-size
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>mlppp-profile-egress>class max-queue-size)
Full Contexts 
configure qos mlppp-profile-egress class max-queue-size
Description 

This command configures the maximum queue size for each MLPPP class queue for this profile.

Parameters 
queue-size—
Specifies the maximum queue size in ms of buffer space.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-queue-size

Syntax 
max-queue-size queue-size
no max-queue-size
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>mc-fr-profile-egress>class max-queue-size)
Full Contexts 
configure qos mc-fr-profile-egress class max-queue-size
Description 

This command configures the maximum size for each Frame Relay scheduling class queue for this profile.

Default 

max-queue-size 10 — class 0

max-queue-size 50 — class 1

max-queue-size 150 — class 2

max-queue-size 750 — class 3

Parameters 
queue-size—
Specifies the number, in ms, of the available link or bundle rate.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

17.120. max-rate

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate {rate |max}
no max-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>ingress>policer-control-policy max-rate)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>egress>policer-control-policy max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile egress policer-control-policy max-rate
configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile ingress policer-control-policy max-rate
Description 

The max-rate command defines the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s decrement rate. A parent policer is created for each time the policer-control-policy is applied to either a SAP or subscriber instance. Packets that are not discarded by the child policers associated with the SAP or subscriber instance are evaluated against the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket.

For each packet, the bucket is first decremented by the correct amount based on the decrement rate to derive the current bucket depth. The current depth is then compared to one of two discard thresholds associated with the packet. The first discard threshold (discard-unfair) is applied if the FIR (Fair Information Rate) leaky bucket in the packet’s child policer is in the confirming state. The second discard threshold (discard-all) is applied if the child policer's FIR leaky bucket is in the exceed state. Only one of the two thresholds is applied per packet. If the current depth of the parent policer PIR bucket is less than the threshold value, the parent PIR bucket is in the conform state for that particular packet. If the depth is equal to or greater than the applied threshold, the bucket is in the violate state for the packet.

If the result is “conform,” the bucket depth is increased by the size of the packet (plus or minus the per-packet-offset setting in the child policer) and the packet is not discarded by the parent policer. If the result is “violate,” the bucket depth is not increased and the packet is discarded by the parent policer. When the parent policer discards a packet, any bucket depth increases (PIR, CIR and FIR) in the parent policer caused by the packet are canceled. This prevents packets that are discarded by the parent policer from consuming the child policers PIR, CIR and FIR bandwidth.

The policer-control-policy root max-rate setting may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-rate max

Parameters 
rate
Specifies the max rate in kilobits per second. Defining the rate value is mutually exclusive with the max parameter. The rate (in kilobits per second) value must be defined as an integer that represents the number of kilobytes that the parent policer is decremented per second. The actual decrement is performed per packet based on the time that has elapsed since the last packet associated with the parent policer.
Values—
0 to 2000000000

 

max—
Specifies the maximum frame-based bandwidth limit of this policer. The max parameter is mutually exclusive with defining a rate (in kilobits per second) value. When max is specified, the parent policer does not enforce a maximum rate on the aggregate throughput of the child policers. This is the default setting when the policer-control-policy is first created and is the value that the parent policer returns to when a no max-rate command is executed. In order for the parent policer to be effective, a rate (in kilobits per second) value should be specified.

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate {rate |max}
no max-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>acc>qgrp>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)
[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>network>qgrp>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure card fp ingress access queue-group policer-control-override max-rate
configure card fp ingress network queue-group policer-control-override max-rate
Description 

This command defines the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s decrement rate. A parent policer is created for each time the policer-control-policy is applied to either a SAP or subscriber instance. Packets that are not discarded by the child policers associated with the SAP or subscriber instance are evaluated against the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket.

For each packet, the bucket is first decremented by the correct amount based on the decrement rate to derive the current bucket depth. The current depth is then compared to one of two discard thresholds associated with the packet. The first discard threshold (discard-unfair) is applied if the FIR (Fair Information Rate) leaky bucket in the packet’s child policer is in the confirming state. The second discard threshold (discard-all) is applied if the child policer's FIR leaky bucket is in the exceed state. Only one of the two thresholds is applied per packet. If the current depth of the parent policer PIR bucket is less than the threshold value, the parent PIR bucket is in the conform state for that particular packet. If the depth is equal to or greater than the applied threshold, the bucket is in the violate state for the packet.

If the result is “conform,” the bucket depth is increased by the size of the packet (plus or minus the per-packet-offset setting in the child policer) and the packet is not discarded by the parent policer. If the result is “violate,” the bucket depth is not increased and the packet is discarded by the parent policer. When the parent policer discards a packet, any bucket depth increases (PIR, CIR and FIR) in the parent policer caused by the packet are canceled. This prevents packets that are discarded by the parent policer from consuming the child policers PIR, CIR and FIR bandwidth.

The policer-control-policy root max-rate setting may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the policer-control-policy’s parent policer maximum rate to max.

Default 

max-rate max

Parameters 
rate
Specifies that a kilobits-per-second value is mutually exclusive with the max keyword. The kilobits-per-second value must be defined as an integer that represents the number of kilobytes that the parent policer will be decremented per second. The actual decrement is performed per packet based on the time that has elapsed since the last packet associated with the parent policer.
Values—
0 to 2000000000

 

max—
The max keyword is mutually exclusive with defining a kilobits-per-second value. When max is specified, the parent policer does not enforce a maximum rate on the aggregate throughput of the child policers. This is the default setting when the policer-control-policy is first created and is the value that the parent policer returns to when no max-rate is executed. In order for the parent policer to be effective, a kilobits-per-second value should be specified.

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate pir-rate
max-rate percent percent-rate
no max-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)
[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e3>egr-scheduler-override max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet egress-scheduler-override max-rate
configure port sonet-sdh path egress-scheduler-override max-rate
configure port tdm ds1 channel-group egress-scheduler-override max-rate
configure port tdm ds3 egress-scheduler-override max-rate
configure port tdm e1 channel-group egress-scheduler-override max-rate
configure port tdm e3 egress-scheduler-override max-rate
Description 

This command overrides the max-rate parameter found in the port-scheduler-policy associated with the port. When a max-rate is defined at the port or channel level, the port scheduler policies max-rate parameter is ignored.

The egress-scheduler-override max-rate command supports a parameter that allows the override command to restore the default of not having a rate limit on the port scheduler. This is helpful when the port scheduler policy has an explicit maximum rate defined and it is desirable to remove this limit at the port instance.

The no form of this command removes the maximum rate override from the egress port or channels port scheduler context. Once removed, the max-rate parameter from the port scheduler policy associated with the port or channel will be used by the local scheduler context.

Parameters 
pir-rate—
Specifies the explicit maximum frame based bandwidth limit, in kilobits per second. This value overrides the QoS scheduler policy rate.
Values—
For Ethernet: 1 to 6400000000, max
For SONET-SDH and TDM: 1 to 3200000000, max

 

percent-rate—
Specifies the percent rate.
Values—
0.01 to 100.00

 

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate rate
no max-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>hsmda-scheduler-overrides max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet hsmda-scheduler-overrides max-rate
Description 

This command overrides the max-rate parameters configured in the hsmda-scheduler-policy associated with the egress port or ingress MDA. When a max-rate is defined at the override level, the HSMDA scheduler policy’s max-rate parameter is ignored.

The hsmda-scheduler-override max-rate command supports a max parameter that allows the override command to restore the default of not having a rate limit on the port scheduler. This is helpful when the HSMDA scheduler policy has an explicit maximum rate defined and it is desirable to remove this limit at the port instance.

The no form of this command removes the maximum rate override from the egress port or the ingress MDA scheduler context. Once removed, the max-rate parameter from the HSMDA scheduler policy associated with the port or MDA will be used by the local scheduler context.

Parameters 
rate—
The rate parameter is mutually exclusive to specifying the max keyword. When executing the max-rate override command either the keyword max or a rate in megabits-per-second must be specified.
Values—
1 to 10000, max (Mb/s)

 

max—
The max keyword is mutually exclusive to specifying a rate in megabits-per-second. When executing the max-rate override command either the keyword max or a rate in megabits-per-second must be specified. The max keyword removes an existing rate limit from the HSMDA scheduler context.

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate rate
no max-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>egress>hs-sched-ovr max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet egress hs-scheduler-overrides max-rate
Description 

This command overrides the max-rate configured in the HS scheduler policy applied to the port egress.

The no form of this command removes the max-rate override from the port egress configuration.

Parameters 
rate—
Specifies the explicit maximum frame based bandwidth limit, in megabits per second. This parameter is required when executing this command..
Values—
1 to 100000, max

 

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate {rate |max}
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override max-rate)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override max-rate)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override max-rate)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override max-rate)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override max-rate)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure service cpipe sap egress policer-control-override max-rate
configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate
configure service epipe sap egress policer-control-override max-rate
configure service epipe sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate
configure service ipipe sap egress policer-control-override max-rate
configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate
Description 

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress contexts, overrides the root arbiter parent policer max-rate that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy max-rate parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no max-rate command within the SAP.

The no form of this command returns the policer-control-policy’s parent policer maximum rate to max.

Parameters 
rate—
Specifies the rate override in kilobits per second.
Values—
1 to 6400000000

 

max—
Specifies the maximum rate override.

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate {rate |max}
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap egress policer-control-override max-rate
configure service vpls sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate
Description 

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress contexts, overrides the root arbiter parent policer max-rate that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy max-rate parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no max-rate command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes an explicit rate value from the aggregate rate therefore returning it to its default value.

Parameters 
rate |max—
Specifies the max rate override in kilobits per second or use the maximum
Values—
1 to 6400000000, max

 

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate {rate |max}
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap egress policer-control-override max-rate
configure service ies interface sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate
Description 

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress contexts, overrides the root arbiter parent policer max-rate that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy max-rate parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no max-rate command within the SAP.

Parameters 
rate |max—
Specifies the rate override in kilobits per second or use the maximum override value.
Values—
1 to 6400000000, max

 

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate {rate |max}
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap egress policer-control-override max-rate
configure service vprn interface sap ingress policer-control-override max-rate
Description 

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress contexts, overrides the root arbiter parent policer max-rate that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy max-rate parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no max-rate command within the SAP.

The no form of this command returns the policer-control-policy’s parent policer maximum rate to max.

Parameters 
rate |max—
Specifies the rate override in kilobits per second or use the maximum override value.
Values—
1 to 6400000000, max

 

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate rate
no max-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>plcr-ctrl-plcy>root max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure qos policer-control-policy root max-rate
Description 

The max-rate command defines the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s decrement rate. A parent policer is created for each time the policer-control-policy is applied to either a SAP or subscriber instance for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR, or multiservice site instance for the 7950 XRS. Packets that are not discarded by the child policers associated with the SAP or subscriber or multiservice site instances are evaluated against the parent policer’s PIR leaky bucket.

For each packet, the bucket is first decremented by the correct amount based on the decrement rate to derive the current bucket depth. The current depth is then compared to one of two discard thresholds associated with the packet. The first discard threshold (discard-unfair) is applied if the FIR (Fair Information Rate) leaky bucket in the packet’s child policer is in the confirming state. The second discard threshold (discard-all) is applied if the child policer's FIR leaky bucket is in the exceed state. Only one of the two thresholds is applied per packet. If the current depth of the parent policer PIR bucket is less than the threshold value, the parent PIR bucket is in the conform state for that particular packet. If the depth is equal to or greater than the applied threshold, the bucket is in the violate state for the packet.

If the result is “conform,” the bucket depth is increased by the size of the packet (plus or minus the per-packet-offset setting in the child policer) and the packet is not discarded by the parent policer. If the result is “violate,” the bucket depth is not increased and the packet is discarded by the parent policer. When the parent policer discards a packet, any bucket depth increases (PIR, CIR and FIR) in the parent policer caused by the packet are canceled. This prevents packets that are discarded by the parent policer from consuming the child policers PIR, CIR, and FIR bandwidth.

The policer-control-policy root max-rate setting may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the policer-control-policy’s parent policer maximum rate to max.

Parameters 
rate—
The kilobits-per-second value must be defined as an integer that represents the number of kilobytes that the parent policer will be decremented per second. The actual decrement is performed per packet, based on the time that has elapsed since the last packet associated with the parent policer.
Values—
1 to 6400000000, max

 

max—
When max is specified, the parent policer does not enforce a maximum rate on the aggregate throughput of the child policers. This is the default setting when the policer-control-policy is first created and is the value that the parent policer returns to when no max-rate is executed. In order for the parent policer to be effective, a kilobits-per-second value should be specified.

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate rate [burst-limit size] [bytes |kilobytes]
no max-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>hsmda-scheduler-policy max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure qos hsmda-scheduler-policy max-rate
Description 

This command defines an explicit maximum frame-based bandwidth limit for the HSMDA scheduler policy scheduler. If a max-rate is defined that is smaller than the port rate, the port will be rate limited to the expressed megabits-per-second value. This command should be used with caution if the policy may be applied on ingress for an HSMDA as the total port ingress rate will be limited to the defined maximum rate.

This command can be executed at any time for any non-default existing HSMDA scheduler policy. When a new maximum rate is given for a policy, the system evaluates all instances of the policy to see if the configured rate is smaller than the available port bandwidth. If the rate is smaller and the maximum rate is not currently overridden on the scheduler instance, the scheduler instance is updated with the new maximum rate value.

The maximum rate value defined in the policy can be overridden on each scheduler instance. If the maximum rate is explicitly defined as an override on a port or ingress HSMDA, the policy’s max-rate value has no effect.

The no form of this command removes an explicit rate value from the HSMDA scheduler policy. When removed, all instances of the scheduler policy on egress ports or ingress HSMDAs are allowed to run at the available line rate unless the instance has a max-rate override in place.

Parameters 
rate—
Specifies an explicit maximum frame-based bandwidth limit for the HSMDA scheduler policy scheduler.
Values—
1 to 40000000 megabits per second, max

 

size—
Specifies the burst limit size.
Values—
1 to 327680

 

bytes—
Specifies to use the size in bytes.
kilobytes—
Specifies to use the size in kilobytes.

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate rate
no max-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>hs-scheduler-policy max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure qos hs-scheduler-policy max-rate
Description 

This command defines an explicit maximum frame-based bandwidth limit for the HS scheduler policy scheduler context. If a maximum rate is defined that is smaller than the port rate, the port is rate-limited to the configured megabits per second value. This command can be executed at any time for any non-default existing HS scheduler policy.

The no form of the command removes an explicit rate value from the HS scheduler policy. After the explicit rate value is removed, all instances of the scheduler policy on HSQ egress ports are allowed to run at the available line rate unless the instance has a max rate override in place.

Parameters 
rate—
Specifies the explicit maximum frame-based bandwidth limit, in megabits per second. This parameter is required when executing this command.
Values—
1 to 100000, max

 

max-rate

Syntax 
max-rate pir-rate
max-rate percent percent-rate
no max-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>port-scheduler-policy max-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure qos port-scheduler-policy max-rate
Description 

This command defines an explicit maximum frame-based bandwidth limit for the port scheduler policies scheduler context. By default, when a scheduler policy is associated with a port or channel, the instance of the scheduler on the port automatically limits the bandwidth to the lesser of port or channel line rate and a possible egress-rate value (for Ethernet ports). If a max-rate is defined that is smaller than the port or channel rate, the expressed kilobits per second value is used instead. The max-rate command is another way to sub-rate the port or channel. This command can be used on channels only on the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR.

The max-rate command may be executed at any time for an existing port-scheduler-policy. When a new max-rate is given for a policy, the system evaluates all instances of the policy to see if the configured rate is smaller than the available port or channel bandwidth. If the rate is smaller and the maximum rate is not currently overridden on the scheduler instance, the scheduler instance is updated with the new maximum rate value.

The max-rate value defined in the policy may be overridden on each scheduler instance. If the maximum rate is explicitly defined as an override on a port or channel, the policies max-rate value has no effect.

The no form of this command removes an explicit rate value from the port scheduler policy. When removed, all instances of the scheduler policy on egress ports or channel are allowed to run at the available line rate unless the instance has a max-rate override in place.

Parameters 
pir-rate—
Specifies the PIR rate, in kilobits per second.
Values—
1 to 6400000000, max

 

percent percent-rate
Specifies the percent rate.
Values—
0.01 to 100.00

 

17.121. max-retries-estab

max-retries-estab

Syntax 
max-retries-estab max-retries
no max-retries-estab
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp max-retries-estab)
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group max-retries-estab)
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>tunnel max-retries-estab)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp max-retries-estab)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group max-retries-estab)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>tunnel max-retries-estab)
Full Contexts 
configure router l2tp group max-retries-estab
configure router l2tp group tunnel max-retries-estab
configure router l2tp max-retries-estab
configure service vprn l2tp group max-retries-estab
configure service vprn l2tp group tunnel max-retries-estab
configure service vprn l2tp max-retries-estab
Description 

This command configures the number of retries allowed for this L2TP tunnel while it is established, before its control connection goes down.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Default 

no max-retries-estab

Parameters 
max-retries—
Specifies the maximum number of retries for an established tunnel.
Default—
no max-retries-estab
Values—
2 to 7

 

17.122. max-retries-not-estab

max-retries-not-estab

Syntax 
max-retries-not-estab max-retries
no max-retries-not-estab
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp max-retries-not-estab)
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group max-retries-not-estab)
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>tunnel max-retries-not-estab)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp max-retries-not-estab)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group max-retries-not-estab)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>tunnel max-retries-not-estab)
Full Contexts 
configure router l2tp group max-retries-not-estab
configure router l2tp group tunnel max-retries-not-estab
configure router l2tp max-retries-not-estab
configure service vprn l2tp group max-retries-not-estab
configure service vprn l2tp group tunnel max-retries-not-estab
configure service vprn l2tp max-retries-not-estab
Description 

This command configures the number of retries allowed for this L2TP tunnel while it is not established, before its control connection goes down.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Default 

no max-retries-not-estab

Parameters 
max-retries—
Specifies the maximum number of retries for non-established tunnels.
Default—
no max-retries-not-estab
Values—
2 to 7

 

17.123. max-routes

max-routes

Syntax 
max-routes routes
no max-routes
Context 
[Tree] (config>aaa>route-downloader max-routes)
Full Contexts 
configure aaa route-downloader max-routes
Description 

This command determines the upper limits for total number of routes to be received and accepted by the system. The total number is inclusive of both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses and no differentiation is needed across protocols. It includes the sum of both. Once this limit is reached, the download process stops sending new access-requests until the next download-interval expires.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

max-routes 200000

Parameters 
routes—
Specifies the maximum number of the routes imported.
Values—
1 to 200000

 

17.124. max-rx-defect-window

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax 
max-rx-defect-window seconds
no max-rx-defect-window
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-ring>path>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel>path>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>lag>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-ring path eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure eth-tunnel path eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure lag eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure port ethernet eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
Description 

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default 

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window.
Values—
1 to 86400

 

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax 
max-rx-defect-window seconds
no max-rx-defect-window
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
Full Contexts 
configure service epipe sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure service ipipe sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
Description 

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default 

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window.
Values—
1 to 86400

 

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax 
max-rx-defect-window seconds
no max-rx-defect-window
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
Description 

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default 

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window.
Values—
1 to 86400

 

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax 
max-rx-defect-window seconds
no max-rx-defect-window
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure service ies interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
Description 

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default 

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window
Values—
1 to 86400

 

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax 
max-rx-defect-window seconds
no max-rx-defect-window
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
Description 

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default 

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window
Values—
1 to 86400

 

max-rx-defect-window

Syntax 
max-rx-defect-window seconds
no max-rx-defect-window
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>if>eth-cfm>mep>grace>eth-ed max-rx-defect-window)
Full Contexts 
configure router interface eth-cfm mep grace eth-ed max-rx-defect-window
Description 

This command limits the duration of the received ETH-ED expected defect window to the lower value of either the received value from the peer or this parameter.

The no form of this command removes the limitation, and any valid defect window value received from a peer MEP in the ETH-ED PDU will be used.

Default 

no max-rx-defect-window

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the duration, in seconds, of the maximum expected defect window.
Values—
1 to 86400

 

17.125. max-sess-prefix

max-sess-prefix

Syntax 
max-sess-prefix count
no max-sess-prefix
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam>twamp>server>prefix max-sess-prefix)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam twamp server prefix max-sess-prefix
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of concurrent TWAMP-Test sessions by clients with an IP address in a specific prefix. A new test session (described by a Request-TW-Session message) is rejected if accepting it would cause either the limit defined by this command or the server limit (max-sess-server) to be exceeded.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default 

max-sess-prefix 32

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the maximum number of concurrent test sessions.
Values—
0 to 128

 

Default—
32

17.126. max-sess-server

max-sess-server

Syntax 
max-sess-server count
no max-sess-server
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam>twamp>server max-sess-server)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam twamp server max-sess-server
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of concurrent TWAMP-Test sessions across all allowed clients. A new test session (described by a Request-TW-Session message) is rejected if accepting it would cause either the limit defined by this command or a prefix limit (max-sess-prefix) to be exceeded.

The no form of this command returns the value to the default.

Default 

max-sess-server 32

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the maximum number of concurrent test sessions.
Values—
0 to 128

 

Default—
32

17.127. max-sessions

max-sessions

Syntax 
max-sessions sessions
no max-sessions
Context 
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-info-plcy>video-policy>video-if max-sessions)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy video-policy video-interface max-sessions
Description 

This command configures the per-client maximum number of sessions.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default 

max-sessions 256

Parameters 
sessions—
Specifies the per-client maximum number of sessions.
Values—
1 to 65536

 

Default—
256

17.128. max-sessions-per-cid

max-sessions-per-cid

Syntax 
max-sessions-per-cid sessions [allow-sessions-without-cid]
no max-sessions-per-cid
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>ppp-policy max-sessions-per-cid)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt ppp-policy max-sessions-per-cid
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of PPPoE sessions with the same Agent Circuit ID that can be active on the same SAP or MSAP. The limit is enforced in the discovery phase, prior to PAP or CHAP authentication and is based on the Agent Circuit ID sub-option that is present in the vendor-specific PPPoE access loop identification tag added in PADI and PADR messages by a PPPoE intermediate agent.

When the optional allow-sessions-without-cid keyword is specified, PPPoE sessions without an Agent Circuit ID can be established. The configured sessions limit does not apply to these sessions.

By default, there is no limit for the number of PPPoE sessions with the same Agent Circuit ID that are active on the same SAP or MSAP. Sessions without Agent Circuit ID can be established.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

no max-sessions-per-cid

Parameters 
sessions—
Specifies the maximum number of sessions with the same circuit ID that can be active on the same SAP or MSAP.
Values—
1 to 8190

 

allow-sessions-without-cid
Specifies to enable support for PPPoE sessions without a circuit ID while a max-sessions-per-cid limit is configured on a SAP or MSAP.

17.129. max-sessions-per-mac

max-sessions-per-mac

Syntax 
max-sessions-per-mac sessions [allow-same-circuit-id-for-dhcp]
no max-sessions-per-mac
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>ppp-policy max-sessions-per-mac)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt ppp-policy max-sessions-per-mac
Description 

This command sets the maximum PPP sessions that can be opened for a given MAC address.

To enable IPv4 address allocation using the internal DHCPv4 client for multiple PPPoE sessions on a single SAP and having the same MAC address and circuit-ID, the optional CLI parameter allow-same-circuit-id-for-dhcp should be added. The SR OS local DHCP server detects the additional vendor-specific options inserted by the internal DHCPv4 client and use an extended unique key for lease allocation.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Parameters 
sessions—
Specifies the maximum PPP sessions that can be opened for the given MAC address.
Values—
1 to 8191

 

allow-same-circuit-id-for-dhcp
Enables support for IPv4 address allocation using the internal DHCPv4 client for multiple PPPoE sessions on a single SAP that have the same MAC address and circuit ID.

17.130. max-setup-time

max-setup-time

Syntax 
max-setup-time [[up-interval] |infinite]
no max-setup-time
Context 
[Tree] (config>lag>bfd>family max-setup-time)
Full Contexts 
configure lag bfd family max-setup-time
Description 

This command specifies the maximum amount of time the router will forward traffic over a link that has transitioned from Standby to Active, before the micro-BFD session must be fully established (Up state).

The no form of this command returns the timer value to the default (0) which indicates that forwarding will not start until the BFD session is established.

Default 

max-setup-time infinite

Parameters 
up-interval—
Specifies the amount of time, in milliseconds.
Values—
-1 to 60000

 

infinite—
Specifies no end time to forward traffic.

17.131. max-size

max-size

Syntax 
max-size size
no max-size
Context 
[Tree] (config>open-flow>of-switch>flowtable max-size)
Full Contexts 
configure open-flow of-switch flowtable max-size
Description 

This command configures the size for the specified flow table. The OpenFlow switch instance must be shutdown to modify this parameter.

The no form of this command restores the default size.

Default 

max-size 1000

Parameters 
size—
Specifies the maximum size limit for the flow table. The size limit is a total for both IPv4 and IPv6.
Values—
1 to 262144

 

Default—
1000

17.132. max-sources

max-sources

Syntax 
max-sources max-sources
no max-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>grp-if max-sources)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>if max-sources)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>interface max-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn igmp group-interface max-sources
configure service vprn igmp interface max-sources
configure service vprn mld interface max-sources
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of sources for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on this interface. When this configuration is changed dynamically to a value lower than currently accepted number of sources, the sources that are already accepted are not deleted. Only new sources will not be allowed.

Parameters 
sources—
Specifies the maximum number of sources for this interface.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-sources

Syntax 
max-sources value
no max-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>igmp>group-interface max-sources)
[Tree] (config>router>igmp>if max-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure router igmp group-interface max-sources
configure router igmp interface max-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for this group-interface.

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the maximum number of group sources.
Values—
1 to 1000

 

max-sources

Syntax 
max-sources [1..1000]
no max-sources
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mld>group-interface max-sources)
[Tree] (config>router>mld>if max-sources)
Full Contexts 
configure router mld group-interface max-sources
configure router mld interface max-sources
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of group sources for this interface.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

no max-sources

Parameters 
1 .. 1000 —
Specifies the maximum number of group sources for this interface.

17.133. max-sr-labels

max-sr-labels

Syntax 
max-sr-labels label-stack-size [additional-frr-labels labels]
no max-sr-labels
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp max-sr-labels)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template max-sr-labels)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls lsp max-sr-labels
configure router mpls lsp-template max-sr-labels
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of labels which the ingress LER can push for a given SR-TE LSP.

This command is used to allow room to insert additional transport, service, and other labels when packets are forwarded in a given context.

The max-sr-labels label-stack-size value should reflect the desired maximum label stack of the primary path of the SR-TE LSP.

The value in additional-frr-labels labels should reflect additional labels inserted by remote LFA for the backup next-hop of the SR-TE LSP.

The sum of both label values represents the worst case transport of SR label stack size for this SR-TE LSP and is populated by MPLS in the TTM such that services and shortcut applications can check it to decide if a service can be bound or a route can be resolved to this SR-TE LSP.

The maximum label stack supported by the router is always signaled by PCC in the PCEP Open object as part of the as SR-PCE-CAPABILITY TLV. It is referred to as the Maximum Stack Depth (MSD).

In addition, the per-LSP value for the max-sr-labels option, if configured, is signaled by PCC to PCE in the Segment-ID (SID) Depth value in a METRIC object for both a PCE computed LSP and a PCE controlled LSP. PCE will compute and provide the full explicit path with TE-links specified. If there is no path with the number of hops lower than the MSD value, or the Segment-ID (SID) Depth value if signaled, a reply with no path will be returned to PCC.

For a PCC controlled LSP, if the label stack returned by the TE-DB’s hop-to-label translation exceeds the per LSP maximum SR label stack size, the LSP is brought down.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

max-sr-labels 6 additional-frr-labels 1

Parameters 
label-stack-size—
Specifies the label stack size.
Values—
1 to 11

 

additional-frr-labels labels
Specifies the addition FRR labels.
Values—
0 to 3

 

17.134. max-srte-pce-init-lsps

max-srte-pce-init-lsps

Syntax 
max-srte-pce-init-lsps max-number
no max-srte-pce-init-lsps
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>pcep>pcc max-srte-pce-init-lsps)
Full Contexts 
configure router pcep pcc max-srte-pce-init-lsps
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of PCE-initiated SR-TE LSPs that can be created by the router.

The no form of the command sets this value to the default.

Default 

max-srte-pce-init-lsps 8191

Parameters 
max-number—
Specifies the maximum number of SR-TE PCE-initiated LSPs.
Values—
0 to 8191

 

17.135. max-stats

max-stats

Syntax 
[no] max-stats
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>ingr-stats max-stats)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>ingr-stats>p2mp-template-lsp max-stats)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>ingr-stats>p2p-template-lsp max-stats)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>egr-stats max-stats)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template>egr-stats max-stats)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls ingr-stats max-stats
configure router mpls ingress-statistics p2mp-template-lsp max-stats
configure router mpls ingress-statistics p2p-template-lsp max-stats
configure router mpls lsp egr-stats max-stats
configure router mpls lsp-template egr-stats max-stats
Description 

This command enables accounting and statistical data collection. When applying accounting policies the data, by default, is collected in the appropriate records and written to the designated billing file.

The config>router>mpls>ingr-stats>p2mp-template-lsp>max-stats command is supported on the 7750 SR, 7950 XRS, and with VPLS only on the 7450 ESS.

When the no max-stats command is issued the statistics are still accumulated by the forwarding engine. However, the CPU will not obtain the results and write them to the billing file. If a subsequent max-stats command is issued then the counters written to the billing file include all the traffic while the no max-stats command was in effect.

Default 

max-stats

17.136. max-suppress

max-suppress

Syntax 
max-suppress minutes
no max-suppress
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>damping max-suppress)
Full Contexts 
configure router policy-options damping max-suppress
Description 

This command configures the maximum suppression parameter for the route damping profile.

This value indicates the maximum time, expressed in minutes, that a route can remain suppressed.

The no form of this command removes the maximum suppression parameter from the damping profile.

Default 

no max-suppress

Parameters 
minutes—
Specifies the maximum suppression time, in minutes, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 720

 

17.137. max-throughput-octet-count

max-throughput-octet-count

Syntax 
[no] max-throughput-octet-count
Context 
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-from-sub-cntr max-throughput-octet-count)
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-to-sub-cntr max-throughput-octet-count)
Full Contexts 
configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific from-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-octet-count
configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific to-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-octet-count
Description 

This command includes the maximum throughput as measured in the octet count. This command only applies to the 7750 SR.

The no form of this command excludes the maximum throughput octet count.

17.138. max-throughput-packet-count

max-throughput-packet-count

Syntax 
[no] max-throughput-packet-count
Context 
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-from-sub-cntr max-throughput-packet-count)
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-to-sub-cntr max-throughput-packet-count)
Full Contexts 
configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific from-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-packet-count
configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific to-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-packet-count
Description 

This command includes the maximum throughput as measured in the packet count. This command only applies to the 7750 SR.

The no form of this command excludes the maximum throughput packet count.

17.139. max-throughput-stats

max-throughput-stats

Syntax 
[no] max-throughput-stats
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>statistics>aa-sub max-throughput-stats)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group statistics aa-sub max-throughput-stats
Description 

This command enables the collection of max-throughput statistics.

The no form of this command disables the collection.

Default 

no max-throughput-stats

17.140. max-throughput-timestamp

max-throughput-timestamp

Syntax 
[no] max-throughput-timestamp
Context 
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-from-sub-cntr max-throughput-timestamp)
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-to-sub-cntr max-throughput-timestamp)
Full Contexts 
configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific from-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-timestamp
configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific to-aa-sub-counters max-throughput-timestamp
Description 

This command includes the timestamp of the maximum throughput. This command only applies to the 7750 SR.

The no form of this command excludes the timestamp.

17.141. max-time

max-time

Syntax 
max-time minutes
no max-time
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>tunnel-selection-blacklist max-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>tunnel-selection-blacklist max-time)
Full Contexts 
configure router l2tp tunnel-selection-blacklist max-time
configure service vprn l2tp tunnel-selection-blacklist max-time
Description 

This command configures time for which an entity (peer or a tunnel) are kept in the blacklist.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-time 5

Parameters 
minutes—
Specifies the maximum time a tunnel or peer may remain in the blacklist.
Values—
1 to 60

 

17.142. max-ttl

max-ttl

Syntax 
max-ttl ttl-value
no max-ttl
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam>ldp-treetrace>path-discovery max-ttl)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam ldp-treetrace path-discovery max-ttl
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of hops the path discovery traces in the path of each FEC to be discovered.

The no form of this command resets the time out to its default value.

Default 

no max-ttl

Parameters 
ttl-value—
Specifies the maximum label time-to-live value for an LSP trace request during the tree discovery.
Values—
1 to 255

 

17.143. max-tx-delay

max-tx-delay

Syntax 
max-tx-delay deci-seconds
no max-tx-delay
Context 
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-rprt-dest max-tx-delay)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management mcast-reporting-dest max-tx-delay
Description 

This command specifies the time interval before the packet starts transmitting towards the destination. When an IGMP event is encoded and ready to be transported, a buffer for the packet is allocated (if not already existent). The events are written into this buffer. Along with the initial buffer creation, a timer is started. The trigger for the transmission of the packet is either the TX buffer being filled up to 1400 B, or the timer expiry, whichever comes first.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
deci-seconds—
Specifies the maximum delay after which any cached reports are flushed to the reporting destination.
Values—
0 to 100

 

max-tx-delay

Syntax 
max-tx-delay deciseconds
no max-tx-delay
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>nat>syslog>syslog-export-policy max-tx-delay)
Full Contexts 
configure service nat syslog syslog-export-policy max-tx-delay
Description 

This command enables aggregation of flow log messages within a syslog frame. It introduces a delay during which logs are collected in each BB-ISA so they can be sent in a single syslog message to conserve system resources and network bandwidth.

When aggregation is enabled, generation of a syslog frame carrying multiple flow logs is triggered by one of the two events (whichever occurs first):

  1. Expiry of the max-tx-delay timer
  2. Exceeding MTU size

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default 

max-tx-delay 3

Parameters 
deciseconds—
Specifies the maximum time a syslog message is delayed in the system's output buffer.
Values—
1 to 100

 

17.144. max-ve-id

max-ve-id

Syntax 
max-ve-id value
no max-ve-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-vpls max-ve-id)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls bgp-vpls max-ve-id
Description 

This command configures the allowed range for the VE-id value: locally configured and received in a NLRI. Configuration of a VE-id higher than the value specified in this command is not allowed.

Also upon reception of a higher VE-id in an NLRI imported in this VPLS instance (RT is the configured import RT) the following action must be taken:

  1. a trap must be generated informing the operator of the mismatch.
  2. NLRI must be dropped
  3. no service labels are to be installed for this VE-id
  4. no new NLRI must be generated if a new offset is required for VE-id.

The no form of this command sets the max-ve-id to un-configured. The BGP VPLS status should be administratively down for “no max-ve-id” to be used.

The max-ve-id value can be changed without shutting down bgp-vpls if the newly provisioned value does not conflict with the already configured local VE-ID. If the value of the local-VE-ID is higher than the new max-ve-id value the command is rejected. The operator needs to decrease first the VE-ID before running the command.

The actions taken for other max-ve-id values are as follows:

  1. max-ve-id value higher than all VE-IDs (local and received) is allowed and there are no effects.
  2. max-ve-id higher than the local VE-ID but smaller than the remote VE-IDs:
    1. Provisioning is allowed
    2. A warning message will be generated stating that “Higher VE-ID values were received in the BGP VPLS context. Related pseudowires will be removed.”
    3. The pseudowires associated with the higher VE-IDs will be removed locally.
    4. This is a situation that should be corrected by the operator as the pseudowire may be down just at the local PE, consuming unnecessarily core bandwidth. The higher VE-IDs should be removed or lowered.

If the max-ve-id has increased a BGP route refresh is sent to the VPLS community to get the routes which might have been rejected earlier due to max-ve-id check. A max-ve-id value needs to be provisioned for BGP VPLS to be in “no shutdown” state.

Default 

no max-ve-id

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the allowed range of [1-value] for the VE-id. The configured value must be bigger than the existing VE-ids
Values—
1 to 65535

 

17.145. max-wait-to-advertise

max-wait-to-advertise

Syntax 
max-wait-to-advertise seconds
no max-wait-to-advertise
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>convergence>family max-wait-to-advertise)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn bgp convergence family max-wait-to-advertise
Description 

This command configures the maximum amount of time that BGP waits until it starts advertising IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes to its BGP peers. For IPv4-unicast routes, seconds is measured from the time when the first peer that supports the IPv4-unicast address family comes up. For IPv6-unicast routes seconds is measured from the time when the first peer that negotiates the IPv6-unicast address family comes up.

The time limit configured by this command should allow sufficient time for all important peers to re-establish their sessions with the restarting router and advertise their complete set of IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes (followed by the applicable End of RIB marker).

The no form of this command implements the default value, which is three times the value of the min-wait-to-advertise time limit.

Default 

no max-wait-to-advertise

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the maximum amount of time, in seconds, that BGP waits until IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes are advertised to peers.
Values—
0 to 3600

 

max-wait-to-advertise

Syntax 
max-wait-to-advertise seconds
no max-wait-to-advertise
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>convergence>family max-wait-to-advertise)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp convergence family max-wait-to-advertise
Description 

This command configures the maximum amount of time that BGP waits until it starts advertising IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes to its BGP peers. For IPv4-unicast routes, the time limit value is measured from the time when the first peer that supports the IPv4-unicast address family comes up. For IPv6-unicast routes the time limit value is measured from the time when the first peer that negotiates the IPv6-unicast address family comes up.

The time limit configured by this command should allow sufficient time for all important peers to re-establish their sessions with the restarting router and advertise their complete set of IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes (followed by the applicable End of RIB marker).

The no form of this command implements the default value, which is three times the value of the min-wait-to-advertise time-limit.

Default 

no max-wait-to-advertise

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the maximum amount of time, in seconds, that BGP waits until IPv4-unicast or IPv6-unicast routes are advertised to peers.
Values—
0 to 3600

 

17.146. maximum-cert-chain-depth

maximum-cert-chain-depth

Syntax 
maximum-cert-chain-depth level
no maximum-cert-chain-depth
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>pki maximum-cert-chain-depth)
Full Contexts 
configure system security pki maximum-cert-chain-depth
Description 

This command defines the maximum depth of certificate chain verification. This number is applied system wide.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

maximum-cert-chain-depth 7

Parameters 
level—
Specifies the maximum depth level of certificate chain verification, range from 1 to 7. the certificate under verification is not counted in. for example, if this parameter is set to 1, then the certificate under verification must be directly signed by trust anchor CA.
Values—
1 to 7

 

17.147. maximum-client-lead-time

maximum-client-lead-time

Syntax 
maximum-client-lead-time [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
no maximum-client-lead-time
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>failover maximum-client-lead-time)
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool>failover maximum-client-lead-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>failover maximum-client-lead-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool>failovermaximum-client-lead-time maximum-client-lead-time)
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server>failover maximum-client-lead-time)
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server>pool>failover maximum-client-lead-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server>failover maximum-client-lead-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server>pool>failover maximum-client-lead-time)
Full Contexts 
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server failover maximum-client-lead-time
configure router dhcp server pool failover maximum-client-lead-time
configure router dhcp6 local-dhcp-server failover maximum-client-lead-time
configure router dhcp6 server pool failover maximum-client-lead-time
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server failover maximum-client-lead-time
configure service vprn dhcp server pool failovermaximum-client-lead-time maximum-client-lead-time
configure service vprn dhcp6 local-dhcp-server failover maximum-client-lead-time
configure service vprn dhcp6 local-dhcp-server pool failover maximum-client-lead-time
Description 

The maximum-client-lead-time (MCLT) is the maximum time that a DHCP server can extend client’s lease time beyond the lease time currently known by the DHCP partner node. In dual-homed environment, the initial lease time for all DHCP clients is by default restricted to MCLT. Consecutive DHCP renews can extend the lease time beyond the MCLT.

The MCLT is a safeguard against IP address/prefix duplication in cases of a lease synchronization failure when local-remote failover model is deployed.

Once the intercommunication link failure between the redundant DHCP servers is detected, the DHCP IP address range configured as remote will not be allowed to start delegating new leases until the MCLT + partner-down-delay intervals expire. This is to ensure that the new lease that was delegated from the local IP address-range/prefix on one node but was never synchronized due to the intercommunication link failure, will expire before the same IP address/prefix is allocated from the remote IP address-range/prefix on the other node.

However, the already existing (and synchronized) lease times can be renewed from the remote IP address range at any time, regardless of the state of the intercommunication link (operational or failed).

Lease synchronization failure can be caused either by a node failure, or a failure of the link over which the DHCP leases are synchronized (intercommunication link). Synchronization failure detection can take up to 3 seconds.

During the failure, the DHCP lease time for the new clients is restricted to MCLT while for the existing clients the lease time will over time (by consecutive DHCP renews) be gradually reduced to the MCLT.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

maximum-client-lead-time min 10

Parameters 
maximum-client-lead-time
Specifies the maximum client lead time.
Values—

hrs hours

1 to 23

min minutes

1 to 59

sec seconds

1 to 59

 

17.148. maximum-declined

maximum-declined

Syntax 
maximum-declined maximum-declined
no maximum-declined
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool>subnet maximum-declined)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool>subnet maximum-declined)
Full Contexts 
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool subnet maximum-declined
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool subnet maximum-declined
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of declined addresses allowed.

The no form of the reverts to the default.

Default 

maximum-declined 64

Parameters 
maximum-declined—
Specifies the maximum number of declined addresses allowed.
Values—
0 to 4294967295

 

17.149. maximum-ipv6-routes

maximum-ipv6-routes

Syntax 
maximum-ipv6-routes number [log-only] [threshold percentage]
no maximum-ipv6-routes
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn maximum-ipv6-routes)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn maximum-ipv6-routes
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of remote IPv6 routes that can be held within a VPN routing/ forwarding (VRF) context. The local, host, static and aggregate routes are not counted.

The VPRN service ID must be in a shutdown state in order to modify maximum-routes command parameters.

If the log-only parameter is not specified and the maximum-routes value is set below the existing number of routes in a VRF, then the offending RIP peer (if applicable) is brought down (but the VPRN instance remains up). BGP peering will remain up but the exceeding BGP routes will not be added to the VRF.

The maximum route threshold can dynamically change to increase the number of supported routes even when the maximum has already been reached. Protocols will resubmit their routes which were initially rejected.

The no form of this command disables any limit on the number of routes within a VRF context. Issue the no form of this command only when the VPRN instance is shutdown.

Default 

0 or disabled — The threshold will not be raised.

Parameters 
number —
An integer that specifies the maximum number of routes to be held in a VRF context.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

log-only—
Specifies that if the maximum limit is reached, only log the event. log-only does not disable the learning of new routes.
threshold percentage —
The percentage at which a warning log message and SNMP trap should be set. There are two warnings, the first is a mid-level warning at the threshold value set and the second is a high-level warning at level between the maximum number of routes and the mid-level rate ([mid+max] / 2).
Values—
0 to 100

 

17.150. maximum-p2mp-spmsi

maximum-p2mp-spmsi

Syntax 
maximum-p2mp-spmsi range
no maximum-p2mp-spmsi
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn>pt>selective maximum-p2mp-spmsi)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn mvpn provider-tunnel selective maximum-p2mp-spmsi
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of RSVP P2MP or LDP P2MP S-PMSI tunnels for the mVPN. When the limit is reached, no more RSVP P2MP S-PMSI or LDP P2MP S-PMSI is created and traffic over the data-threshold will stay on I-PMSI.

Default 

10

Parameters 
range—
Specifies the maximum number of RSVP P2MP or LDP P2MP S-PMSI tunnel for the mVPN.
Values—
1 to 4000

 

Default—
10

maximum-p2mp-spmsi

Syntax 
maximum-p2mp-spmsi range
no maximum-p2mp-spmsi
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>gtm>provider-tunnel>selective maximum-p2mp-spmsi)
Full Contexts 
configure router gtm provider-tunnel selective maximum-p2mp-spmsi
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of RSVP P2MP or LDP P2MP S-PMSI tunnels for the GTM. When the limit is reached, no more RSVP P2MP S-PMSI or LDP P2MP S-P MSI tunnels are created and traffic over the data-threshold will stay on I-PMSI.

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Default 

maximum-p2mp-spmsi 10

Parameters 
range—
Specifies the maximum number of RSVP P2MP or LDP P2MP S-PMSI tunnels for the GTM.
Values—
1 to 4000

 

Default—
10

17.151. maximum-paths

maximum-paths

Syntax 
maximum-paths max-paths [ebgp ebgp-max-paths] [ibgp ibgp-max-paths] [restrict {same-neighbor-as |exact-as-path}] [unequal-cost]
no maximum-paths
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>multi-path maximum-paths)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn bgp multi-path maximum-paths
Description 

This command sets ECMP multi-path parameters that apply to all address families for that BGP multi-path. For some address families it is possible to override these settings on a per address family basis.

When multi-path is enabled, traffic to the destination is load-shared across a set of paths (BGP routes) that the BGP decision process considers equal to the best path. The actual distribution of traffic over the multiple paths may be equal or unequal (that is, based on weights derived from the Link Bandwidth Extended Community).

To qualify as a multi-path, a non-best route must meet the following criteria (some criteria are controlled by this command):

  1. The multi-path route must be the same type of route as the best path (same AFI/SAFI and, in some cases, same next-hop resolution method).
  2. The multi-path route must be tied with the best path for all criteria of greater significance than next-hop cost, except for criteria that are configured to be ignored.
  3. If the best path selection reaches the next-hop cost comparison, the multi-path route must have the same next-hop cost as the best route unless the unequal-cost option is configured.
  4. The multi-path route must not have the same BGP next-hop as the best path or any other multi-path route.
  5. The multi-path route must not cause the ECMP limit of the routing instance to be exceeded (configured using the ecmp command with a value in the range 1 to 64).
  6. The multi-path route must not cause the applicable max-paths limit to be exceeded. If the best path is an EBGP learned route and the ebgp option is used, the ebgp-max-paths limit overrides the max-paths limit. If the best path is an IBGP-learned route and the ibgp option is used, the ibgp-max-paths limit overrides the max-paths limit. All path limits are configurable up to a maximum of 64. Multi-path is effectively disabled if a value is set to 1.
  7. The multi-path route must have the same neighbor AS in its AS path as the best path if the restrict same-neighbor-as option is configured. By default, any path with the same AS path length as the best path (regardless of neighbor AS) is eligible for multi-path.
  8. The route must have the same AS path as the best path if the restrict exact-as-path option is configured. By default, any path with the same AS path length as the best path (regardless of the actual AS numbers) is eligible for multi-path.

The no form of this command disables BGP multi-path.

Default 

no maximum-paths

Parameters 
max-paths—
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix/NLRI if ebgp-max-paths or ibgp-max-paths does not apply.
Values—
1 to 64

 

egp-max-paths
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an EBGP learned route.
Values—
1 to 64

 

ibgp-max-paths
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an IBGP learned route.
Values—
1 to 64

 

restrict same-neighbor-as—
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same neighbor AS in its AS path as the best path.
restrict exact-as-path-as—
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same AS path as the best path.
unequal-cost—
Instructs BGP to ignore differences in the next-hop cost only when determining eligible multipaths.

maximum-paths

Syntax 
maximum-paths max-paths [ebgp ebgp-max-paths] [ibgp ibgp-max-paths] [restrict {same-neighbor-as |exact-as-path}] [unequal-cost]
no maximum-paths
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>multi-path maximum-paths)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp multi-path maximum-paths
Description 

This command sets ECMP multipath parameters that apply to all address families for that BGP multipath. For some address families it is possible to override these settings on a per address family basis.

When multipath is enabled, traffic to the destination is load-shared across a set of paths (BGP routes) that the BGP decision process considers equal to the best path. The actual distribution of traffic over the multiple paths may be equal or unequal (that is, based on weights derived from the Link Bandwidth Extended Community).

The no form of this command disables BGP multipath.

Default 

no maximum-paths

Parameters 
max-paths—
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix/NLRI if ebgp-max-paths or ibgp-max-paths does not apply.
Values—
1 to 64

 

ebgp-max-paths
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an EBGP learned route.
Values—
1 to 64

 

ibgp-max-paths
Specifies the maximum number of multipaths per prefix or NLRI when the best path is an IBGP learned route.
Values—
1 to 64

 

restrict same-neighbor-as—
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same neighbor AS in its AS path as the best path.
restrict exact-as-path—
Specifies that the non-best path must have the same AS path as the best path.
unequal-cost—
Instructs BGP to ignore differences in the next-hop cost only when determining eligible multipaths.

17.152. maximum-recovery-time

maximum-recovery-time

Syntax 
maximum-recovery-time interval
no maximum-recovery-time
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ldp>graceful-restart maximum-recovery-time)
Full Contexts 
configure router ldp graceful-restart maximum-recovery-time
Description 

This command configures the local maximum recovery time.

The no form of this command returns the default value.

Default 

no maximum-recovery-time (which equals a value of 120 seconds)

Parameters 
interval—
Specifies the length of time in seconds.
Values—
15 to 1800

 

17.153. maximum-routes

maximum-routes

Syntax 
maximum-routes number [log-only] [threshold percentage]
no maximum-routes
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn maximum-routes)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn maximum-routes
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of remote routes that can be held within a VPN routing/ forwarding (VRF) context. The local, host, static and aggregate routes are not counted.

The VPRN service ID must be in a shutdown state in order to modify maximum-routes command parameters.

If the log-only parameter is not specified and the maximum-routes value is set below the existing number of routes in a VRF, then the offending RIP peer (if applicable) is brought down (but the VPRN instance remains up). BGP peering will remain up but the exceeding BGP routes will not be added to the VRF.

The maximum route threshold can dynamically change to increase the number of supported routes even when the maximum has already been reached. Protocols will resubmit their routes which were initially rejected.

The no form of this command disables any limit on the number of routes within a VRF context. Issue the no form of this command only when the VPRN instance is shutdown.

Default 

0 or disabled — The threshold will not be raised.

Parameters 
number —
An integer that specifies the maximum number of routes to be held in a VRF context.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

log-only—
Specifies that if the maximum limit is reached, only log the event. log-only does not disable the learning of new routes.
threshold percentage —
The percentage at which a warning log message and SNMP trap should be set. There are two warnings, the first is a mid-level warning at the threshold value set and the second is a high-level warning at level between the maximum number of routes and the mid-level rate ([mid+max] / 2).
Values—
0 to 100

 

17.154. maximum-sid-depth

maximum-sid-depth

Syntax 
maximum-sid-depth
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>isis>segm-rtng maximum-sid-depth)
Full Contexts 
configure router isis segment-routing maximum-sid-depth
Description 

This command enables the context to configure a manual override of the Maximum Segment Depths (MSD) that is announced by the router.

maximum-sid-depth

Syntax 
maximum-sid-depth
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>segm-rtng maximum-sid-depth)
Full Contexts 
configure router ospf segment-routing maximum-sid-depth
Description 

This command enables the context to configure a manual override of the Maximum Segment Depths (MSD) that is announced by the router.

17.155. mbb

mbb

Syntax 
mbb [detail]
no mbb
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>mpls>event mbb)
Full Contexts 
debug router mpls event mbb
Description 

This command debugs the state of the most recent invocation of the make-before-break (MBB) functionality.

The no form of the command disables the debugging.

Parameters 
detail—
Displays detailed information about MBB events.

17.156. mbb-prefer-current-hops

mbb-prefer-current-hops

Syntax 
[no] mbb-prefer-current-hops
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls mbb-prefer-current-hops)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls mbb-prefer-current-hops
Description 

This command implements a new option in the CSPF path computation during a Make-Before-Break (MBB) procedure of an RSVP LSP.

When MPLS performs an MBB for the primary or secondary path of a P2P LSP, or the S2L path of a P2MP LSP, and the new mbb-prefer-current-hops option is enabled in MPLS context, CSPF will select a path, among equal-cost candidate paths, with the most overlapping links with the current path. Normally, CSPF selects the path randomly.

The procedures of the new MBB CSPF path selection apply to LSP without the least-fill option enabled. If the least-fill rule results in a different path, the LSP path will be moved though. Users can still favor stability over least-fill condition by applying a larger value to the parameter least-fill-min-thd under the MPLS context such that a path will only be moved when the difference of the least-available bandwidth becomes significant enough between the most used links in the equal cost paths. If that difference is not significant enough, CSPF will select the path with the most overlapping links instead of selecting a path randomly.

The procedures when the new mbb-prefer-current-hops option is enabled apply to all MBB types. Thus, it applies to the auto-bandwidth MBB, the configuration change MBB, the soft preemption MBB, the TE graceful shutdown MBB, the delayed retry MBB (for SRLG secondary LSP path), the path change MBB, the timer resignal MBB, and the manual resignal MBB.

During the FRR global revertive MBB, CSPF selects a random link among the ones available between the PLR node and the Merge Point node, including the failed link if it has restored in the meantime. These links cannot be checked for overlap with the current path.

The TE graceful shutdown MBB will still avoid the link or node that is in maintenance and the soft preemption MBB will still avoid the link that is overbooked.

For an inter-area LSP, this feature applies to the subset of the path from the ingress LER to the exit ABR.

The procedures of this feature are not applied to a zero bandwidth CSPP LSP, including an auto-bandwidth CSPF LSP while its operational bandwidth is zero, and to a non-CSPF LSP.

17.157. mbs

mbs

Syntax 
mbs percent-of-pool
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>bw-plcy>t2-paths>primary-paths>queue-parameters mbs)
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>bw-plcy>t2-paths>secondary-paths>queue-parameters mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management bandwidth-policy t2-paths primary-paths queue-parameters mbs
configure mcast-management bandwidth-policy t2-paths secondary-paths queue-parameters mbs
Description 

This command configures the override for the default Maximum Buffer Size (MBS) for each individual path’s queue. The queues MBS threshold defines the point at which all packets destined for the queue are discarded based on queue depth. The defined threshold also provides context for the queues drop-tail parameter.

The mbs percent-of-pool parameter is defined as a percentage of the total pool size. The system allows the sum of all MBS values to equal more than 100% allowing for oversubscription of the pool.

For the primary-path and secondary-path queues, the mbs percent is applied to a single queue for each path.

The no form of this command is used to restore the path queues default MBS value.

Parameters 
percent-of-pool—
Specifies the percent of buffers from the total buffer pool space for the number of buffers, expressed as a decimal integer. If 10 MB is the total buffers in the buffer pool, a value of 10 would limit the maximum queue size to 1MB (10%) of buffer space for the forwarding class queue. If the total size is increased to 20MB, the existing value of 10 would automatically increase the maximum size of the queue to 2MB.
Values—
0 to 100

 

Default—

Primary:

7

Secondary:

40

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [bytes |kilobytes]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sla-prof>egress>qos>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt sla-profile egress qos queue mbs
Description 

This command configures the maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an egress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer is available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size to the size as configured in the QoS policy.

Parameters 
size—
This required parameter specifies that the MBS is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly to define the size. By specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.
Values—
0 to 1073741824, default

 

bytes—
Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in bytes.
kilobytes—
Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in kilobytes.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [bytes |kilobytes]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sla-prof>ingress>qos>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt sla-profile ingress qos queue mbs
Description 

The Maximum Burst Size (MBS) command configures the explicit definition of the maximum number of buffers allowed for a specific queue.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded the number of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The sap-ingress context for mbs provides a mechanism for overriding the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer is available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope does not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size to the size as configured in the QoS policy.

Parameters 
size—
This required parameter specifies that the MBS is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly to define the size. By specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.
Values—
0 to 1073741824, default

 

bytes—
Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value is in bytes.
kilobytes—
Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value is in kilobytes.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [bytes |kilobytes]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sla-prof>ingress>qos>policer mbs)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sla-prof>egress>qos>policer mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt sla-profile egress qos policer mbs
configure subscriber-mgmt sla-profile ingress qos policer mbs
Description 

This command configures the MBS for the QoS policer.

Parameters 
size—
This required parameter specifies that the MBS is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly to define the size. By specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.
Values—
0 to 16777216, default

 

bytes—
Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in bytes.
kilobytes—
Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in kilobytes.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [bytes |kilobytes]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-profile>hsmda>egress-qos>qos>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile hsmda egress-qos qos queue mbs
Description 

This command overrides definition of the maximum number of buffers allowed for a specific queue. The value is given in bytes or kilobytes and overrides the default value for the context.

The no form of this command returns the queue to its default MBS size.

Parameters 
size [bytes |kilobytes]
Specifies the and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
byte—
When byte is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the queue’s MBS value given in bytes.
Values—
0 to 2688000

 

kilobyte—
When kilobytes is defined, the value is interpreted as the queue’s MBS value given in kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 2625

 

Default—
kilobyte

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [bytes |kilobytes]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap egress queue-override queue mbs
configure service ies interface sap ingress queue-override queue mbs
configure service vprn sap egress queue-override queue mbs
configure service vprn sap ingress queue-override queue mbs
Description 

This command overrides specific attributes of the specified queue’s MBS parameters. The MBS is a mechanism to override the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an egress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer is available when needed or that the packets RED slope is not forced the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

If the CBS value is larger than the MBS value, an error will occur, preventing the MBS change.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned to the queue.

Default 

mbs default

Parameters 
size—
This required parameter specifies that the MBS is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly to define the size. By specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.
Values—
0 to 1073741824, default

 

bytes—
Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in bytes.
kilobytes—
Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value in kb/s.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [bytes |kilobytes]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap egress queue-override queue mbs
configure service vpls sap ingress queue-override queue mbs
Description 

This command overrides specific attributes of the specified queue’s MBS parameters. The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packets RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting correct CBS parameters and controlling CBS over-subscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

The no form of this command returns the MBS assigned to the queue to the default value.

Default 

mbs default

Parameters 
size—
The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether the size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 1073741824
default

 

bytes—
When byte is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the queue's MBS value given in bytes.
kilobytes—
When kilobytes is defined, the value is interpreted as the queue's MBS value given in kilobytes.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs burst-size
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>isa-policer mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt isa-policer mbs
Description 

This command specifies the maximum burst-size value of this policer.

The no form of this command reverts to its default.

Default 

mbs 0

Parameters 
burst-size —
The maximum burst-size in kbytes.
Values—
0 to 131071

 

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {size [bytes |kilobyte] |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>access>qgrp>policer-over>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>network>qgrp>policer-over>plcr mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure card fp ingress access queue-group policer-override policer mbs
configure card fp ingress network queue-group policer-override policer mbs
Description 

This command configures the policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s high priority violate threshold. The high-prio-only command is applied to the MBS value to derive the bucket’s low priority violate threshold. For ingress, trusted in-profile packets and untrusted high priority packets use the policer’s high priority violate threshold while trusted out-of-profile and untrusted low priority packets use the policer’s low priority violate threshold. At egress, in-profile packets use the policer’s high priority violate threshold and out-of-profile packets use the policer’s low priority violate threshold.

The PIR bucket’s violate threshold represent the maximum burst tolerance allowed by the policer. If the policer’s offered rate is equal to or less than the policer’s defined rate, the PIR bucket depth hovers around the 0 depth with spikes up to the maximum packet size in the offered load. If the offered rate increases beyond the metering rate, the amount of data allowed above the rate is capped by the threshold. The low priority violate threshold provides a smaller burst size for the lower priority traffic associated with the policer. Since all lower priority traffic is discarded at the lower burst tolerance size, the remaining burst tolerance defined by high-prio-only is available for the higher priority traffic.

The policer’s mbs size defined in the QoS policy may be overridden on an sla-profile or SAP where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command reverts the policer to its default MBS size.

Parameters 
size
The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
bytes—
When bytes is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the policer’s MBS value given in bytes.
kilobytes—
When kilobytes is defined, the value is interpreted as the policer’s MBS value given in kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216

 

default—
Specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {[0 to 2625] kilobytes |[0 to 268800] bytes |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>access>egress>queue-group>hsmda-queue-override>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet access egress queue-group hsmda-queue-override queue mbs
Description 

This command configures the maximum buffer space override.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {size [bytes |kilobytes] |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>access>egr>qgrp>qover>q mbs)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>access>ing>qgrp>qover>q mbs)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>network>egr>qgrp>qover>q mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet access egress queue-group queue-overrides queue mbs
configure port ethernet access ingress queue-group queue-overrides queue mbs
configure port ethernet network egress queue-group queue-overrides queue mbs
Description 

The Maximum Burst Size (MBS) command specifies the default maximum buffer size for the template queue. The value is given in kilobytes.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The queue-group or network egress QoS context for mbs provides a mechanism for overriding the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packets RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

This command applies to egress queue group queues as the queue-delay is only supported on egress queues. This command the queue-delay command are mutually exclusive.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned to the queue to the value.

Default 

mbs default

Parameters 
size
The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 1073741824

 

bytes—
When byte is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the queue’s MBS value given in bytes.
kilobytes—
When kilobytes is defined, the value is interpreted as the queue’s MBS value given in kilobytes.
default—
Specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [bytes |kilobytes]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>egress>policer-over>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>ingress>policer-over>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>policer-over>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>policer-over>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>policer-over>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>policer-over>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>policer-over>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>policer-over>plcr mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure service apipe sap egress policer-override policer mbs
configure service apipe sap ingress policer-override policer mbs
configure service cpipe sap egress policer-override policer mbs
configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-override policer mbs
configure service epipe sap egress policer-override policer mbs
configure service epipe sap ingress policer-override policer mbs
configure service ipipe sap egress policer-override policer mbs
configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-override policer mbs
Description 

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress policer-overrides contexts, is used to override the sap-ingress and sap-egress QoS policy configured mbs parameter for the specified policer-id.

The no form of this command is used to restore the policer’s mbs setting to the policy defined value.

Default 

no mbs

Parameters 
size —
The size parameter is required when specifying mbs override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216 | default

 

bytes—
When bytes is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the policer’s MBS value in bytes.
kilobytes—
When kilobytes is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the policer’s MBS value in kilobytes.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {size [bytes |kilobytes] |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>fpipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>fpipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure service apipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs
configure service apipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs
configure service cpipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs
configure service cpipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs
configure service epipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs
configure service epipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs
configure service fpipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs
configure service fpipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs
configure service ipipe sap egress queue-override queue mbs
configure service ipipe sap ingress queue-override queue mbs
Description 

This command overrides specific attributes of the specified queue’s MBS parameters. A queue uses its MBS value to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded the number of buffers allowed by the MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope associated with a packet. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS is not guaranteed to have buffer available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting correct CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

The no form of this command returns the MBS assigned to the queue to the default value.

Default 

mbs default

Parameters 
size—
The size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of kilobytes or bytes of buffering allowed for the queue. A value of 0 causes the queue to discard all packets.
Values—
0 to 1073741824, default

 

bytes—
Indicates that the size parameter value is expressed in bytes.
kilobytes—
Indicates that the size parameter is expressed in kilobytes.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [{bytes |kilobytes}]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>policer-override>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>policer-override>plcr mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap egress policer-override policer mbs
configure service vpls sap ingress policer-override policer mbs
Description 

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress policer-overrides contexts, is used to override the sap-ingress and sap-egress QoS policy configured mbs parameter for the specified policer-id.

The no form of this command restores the policer’s mbs setting to the policy defined value.

Default 

no mbs

Parameters 
size—
This parameter is required when specifying MBS override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216 or default

 

Default—
kilobytes

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [{bytes |kilobytes}]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>policer-override>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>policer-override>plcr mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap egress policer-override policer mbs
configure service ies interface sap ingress policer-override policer mbs
Description 

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress policer-overrides contexts, is used to override the sap-ingress and sap-egress QoS policy configured mbs parameter for the specified policer-id.

The no form of this command restores the policer’s mbs setting to the policy defined value.

Default 

no mbs

Parameters 
size—
This parameter is required when specifying MBS override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216 or default

 

Default—
kilobytes

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {size [kilobytes] |bytes |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>hsmda-queue-override>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap egress hsmda-queue-override queue mbs
Description 

This command overrides specific attributes of the specified queue’s MBS parameters. The MBS is a mechanism to override the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an egress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

If the CBS value is larger than the MBS value, an error will occur, preventing the MBS change.

The no form of this command returns the MBS assigned to the queue.

Default 

mbs default

Parameters 
size—
Specifies the maximum number of kilobytes of buffering allowed for the queue. For a value of 100 kb/s, enter the value 100. A value of 0 causes the queue to discard all packets.
Values—
0 to 2625 kilobytes
0 to 2688000 bytes
default

 

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {[0..2625] [kilobytes] |[0..2688000] bytes |default }
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>hsmda-queue-override>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap egress hsmda-queue-override queue mbs
Description 

This command can be used to override specific attributes of the specified queue’s MBS parameters. The MBS is a mechanism to override the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an egress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

If the CBS value is larger than the MBS value, an error will occur, preventing the MBS change.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned to the queue.

Default 

mbs default

Parameters 
size—
Specifies the maximum number of kbytes of buffering allowed for the queue. For a value of 100 kb/s, enter the number 100. A value of 0 causes the queue to discard all packets.
Values—
0 to 2625 kilobytes
0 to 2688000 bytes
default

 

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [{bytes |kilobytes}]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>policer-override>plcr mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>policer-override>plcr mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap egress policer-override policer mbs
configure service vprn interface sap ingress policer-override policer mbs
Description 

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress policer-overrides contexts, is used to override the sap-ingress and sap-egress QoS policy configured mbs parameter for the specified policer-id.

The no form of this command restores the policer’s mbs setting to the policy defined value.

Default 

no mbs

Parameters 
size—
This parameter is required when specifying MBS override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216 or default

 

Default—
kilobytes

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {size [bytes |kilobytes] |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap egress queue-override queue mbs
configure service vprn interface sap ingress queue-override queue mbs
Description 

This command can be used to override specific attributes of the specified queue’s MBS parameters. The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

If the CBS value is larger than the MBS value, an error will occur, preventing the MBS change.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned to the queue to the value.

Default 

mbs default

Parameters 
size—
The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether the size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 1073741824
default

 

bytes—
When byte is defined, the value given for size is interpreted as the queue'sMBS value given in bytes.
kilobytes—
When kilobytes is defined, the value is interpreted as the queue's MBSvalue given in kilobytes.
default—
Specifying the keyword default sets the MBS to its default value.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs congested-mbs
mbs maximum-burst-size
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>policer mbs)
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>policer>congestion-override mbs)
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>tod-override mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group policer congestion-override mbs
configure application-assurance group policer mbs
configure application-assurance group tod-override mbs
Description 

This command provides a mechanism to configure the maximum burst size for the policer. It is recommended that MBS is configured larger than twice the MTU for the traffic handled by the policer to allow for some burstiness of the traffic. MBS is configurable for single-bucket, dual-bucket bandwidth and flow setup rate policers only.

The no form of this command resets the MBS value to its default.

Default 

no mbs

Parameters 
maximum-burst-size |congested-mbs—
Specifies an integer value defining either size, in kbytes, for the MBS of the bandwidth policer, or flow count for the MBS of the flow setup rate policers.
Values—
0 to 131071

 

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {size [bytes |kilobytes] |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>dyn-policer mbs)
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>dyn-policer mbs)
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>policer mbs)
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>policer mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure qos sap-egress dynamic-policer mbs
configure qos sap-egress policer mbs
configure qos sap-ingress dynamic-policer mbs
configure qos sap-ingress policer mbs
Description 

This command is used to configure the policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s high-priority violate threshold. The high-prio-only command is applied to the MBS value to derive the bucket’s low-priority violate threshold. For ingress, trusted in-profile packets and untrusted high-priority packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold while trusted out-of-profile and untrusted low-priority packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold. At egress, inplus-profile, and in-profile packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold and out-of-profile packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold. Exceed-profile packets are discarded unless enable-exceed-pir is configured, in which case they are forwarded.

The PIR bucket’s violate threshold represents the maximum burst tolerance allowed by the policer. If the policer's offered rate is equal to or less than the policer's defined rate, the PIR bucket depth hovers around the 0 depth with spikes up to the maximum packet size in the offered load. If the offered rate increases beyond the metering rate, the amount of data allowed above the rate is capped by the threshold. The low-priority violate threshold provides a smaller burst size for the lower priority traffic associated with the policer. Since all lower priority traffic is discarded at the lower burst tolerance size, the remaining burst tolerance defined by high-prio-only is available for the higher priority traffic.

The policer’s MBS size defined in the QoS policy may be overridden on an SLA profile or SAP where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the queue to its default MBS size.

By default, the MBS is 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicit configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

Parameters 
size [bytes |kilobytes]
The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 – 16777216 or default

 

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {size [bytes |kilobytes] |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>hsmda-queues>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-egress>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure qos sap-egress hsmda-queues queue mbs
configure qos sap-egress queue mbs
configure qos sap-ingress queue mbs
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of buffers allowed for a specific queue. The value is given in bytes or kilobytes and overrides the default value for the context.

The no form of this command returns the policer to its default MBS.

Default 

no mbs

Parameters 
size—
The size parameter is required when specifying mbs and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes.
Default—
kilobyte
default—
Sets the MBS to its default value.
bytes—
Specifies that the value given for size is interpreted as the queue’s MBS value given in bytes.
Values—
0 to 2688000

 

kilobytes—
Specifies the value is interpreted as the queue’s MBS value given in kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 2625

 

Default—
kilobytes

mbs

Syntax 
mbs size [byte |kilobytes]
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>network-queue>egress-hsmda>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure qos network-queue egress-hsmda queue mbs
Description 

The Maximum Burst Size (mbs) command specifies the relative amount of the buffer pool space for the maximum buffers for a specific HSMDA queue.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted its total allowed buffers while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeded its maximum number of buffers, all packets are discarded until the queue transmits a packet. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard against queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of the network queues.

The no form of the command returns the MBS size for the queue to the default for the forwarding class.

Parameters 
size—
Specifies the size of the MBS for the HSMDA queue.
Values—
0 to 2688000 (for bytes)
0 to 2625 (for kilobytes)

 

bytes—
Identifies the size value in terms of bytes.
kilobytes—
Identifies the size value in terms of kilobytes.
default—
Specifies the size of the MBS to be the default value configured on the system.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs percent
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>network-queue>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure qos network-queue queue mbs
Description 

This command specifies the relative amount of buffer pool space for the maximum buffers for a specific ingress network FP forwarding class queue or egress network port forwarding class queue. The value is entered as a percentage.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted its total allowed buffers while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeded its maximum amount of buffers, all packets are discarded until the queue transmits a packet. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS is not guaranteed to have a buffer available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. In order to safeguard against queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers), set proper CBS parameters and control CBS oversubscription. Another safeguard is to properly set the RED slope parameters for the needs of the network queues.

The MBS can sometimes be smaller than the CBS. This will result in a portion of the CBS for the queue to be unused and should be avoided.

The no form of this command returns the MBS for the queue to the default for the forwarding class.

Special Cases 
Forwarding Class Queue on Egress Network Port or Channel—
For network egress, each forwarding class is supported by an egress queue on a per network port basis. These forwarding class-based queues are automatically created when a port or channel is placed in network mode. The configuration parameters for each queue come from the applied egress policy on the network port or channel. Forwarding class queue on egress channel applies only to the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR.

The mbs value is used to calculate the queue’s MBS size based on the total amount buffer space allocated for the buffer pool on the egress network port or channel. This buffer pool size will dynamically fluctuate based on the port or channels egress pool size setting.

The total MBS settings for all network egress queues on the port or channel based on the total percentages can exceed 100 percent. Some over-subscription can be desirable to allow exceptionally busy forwarding classes more access to buffer space. The proper use of CBS settings will ensure that oversubscribing MBS settings will not starve other queues of buffers when needed.

Forwarding Class Queue on Ingress FP—
For network ingress, each forwarding class is supported by an ingress queue per FP. These forwarding class queues are automatically created when a single port or channel is placed in the network mode on the FP and are removed when all network ports or channels are removed from the FP (defined as access). The configuration parameters for each queue come from the applied ingress policy under the network context of the FP.

The mbs value is used to calculate the queue’s MBS size based on the total amount buffer space allocated for the network ingress buffer pool on the FP. This buffer pool will dynamically fluctuate based on the sum of all ingress pool sizes for all network ports and channels on the FP.

The total MBS settings for all network egress queues on the port or channel based on the total percentages can exceed 100 percent. Some over-subscription can be desirable to allow exceptionally busy forwarding classes more access to buffer space. The proper use of CBS settings will ensure that oversubscribing MBS settings will not starve other queues of buffers when needed.

Parameters 
percent—
The percent of buffers from the total buffer pool space for the maximum number of buffers, expressed as a decimal integer. If 10 Mbytes is the total buffer space in the buffer pool, a value of 10 would limit the maximum queue size to 1 Mbyte (10%) of buffer space for the forwarding class queue. If the total size is increased to 20 Mbytes, the existing value of 10 would automatically increase the maximum size of the queue to 2 Mbytes.
Values—
0 to 100

 

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {size [bytes |kilobytes] |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>egr>qgrp>policer mbs)
[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>ing>qgrp>policer mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure qos queue-group-templates egress queue-group policer mbs
configure qos queue-group-templates ingress queue-group policer mbs
Description 

This command specifies the default maximum buffer size for the template queue in bytes or kilobytes.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The port>ethernet>access>ingress>queue-group and port>ethernet>access>egress>queue-group contexts for mbs provides a mechanism for overriding the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope that a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard against queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

When configured on an egress queue group queue, this command and the queue-delay command are mutually exclusive. In order to change between the mbs and queue-delay parameters, the current parameter must be removed before adding the new parameter; that is, changing from mbs to queue-delay requires a no mbs before the queue-delay is configured and changing from queue-delay to mbs requires a no queue-delay before the mbs is configured. If queue-delay is configured for an egress queue group queue, it is not possible to override the MBS for that queue.

For policers, this command is used to configure the policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s high-priority violate threshold. The high-prio-only command is applied to the MBS value to derive the bucket’s low-priority violate threshold.

At ingress, trusted in-profile packets and untrusted high-priority packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold while trusted out-of-profile and untrusted low-priority packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold.

At egress, inplus-profile and in-profile packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold and out-of-profile packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold. Exceed-profile packets are discarded unless enable-exceed-pir is configured, in which case they are forwarded.

The PIR bucket’s violate threshold represents the maximum burst tolerance allowed by the policer. If the policer's offered rate is equal to or less than the policer's defined rate, the PIR bucket depth hovers around the 0 depth with spikes up to the maximum packet size in the offered load. If the offered rate increases beyond the metering rate, the amount of data allowed above the rate is capped by the threshold. The low-priority violate threshold provides a smaller burst size for the lower priority traffic associated with the policer. Since all lower priority traffic is discarded at the lower burst tolerance size, the remaining burst tolerance defined by high-prio-only is available for the higher priority traffic.

The policer’s mbs size defined in the QoS policy may be overridden on an SLA profile or SAP where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned to the queue to the value.

Default 

default

Parameters 
size —
For queues, the size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of bytes or kilobytes of buffering allowed for the queue. For a value of 100 kbytes, enter the value 100. A value of 0 causes the queue to discard all packets. For policers, the size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of bytes for the policer's MBS. The queue MBS maximum value used is constrained by the pool size in which the queue exists and by the shared pool space in the corresponding megapool.
Values—
0 to 16777216
Default value: 16 Mbytes when PIR equals max or is greater than or equal to the FP capacity (this overrides an explicitly configured MBS value); otherwise, 10 ms volume of traffic for a configured non-zero/non-max PIR capped to 3968 kbytes, with a minimum of 256 bytes.

 

[bytes |kilobytes]—
Select bytes or kilobytes.
Default—
kilobytes
default—
Sets the MBS to its default value.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {size [bytes |kilobytes] |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>egr>qgrp>queue mbs)
[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>ing>qgrp>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure qos queue-group-templates egress queue-group queue mbs
configure qos queue-group-templates ingress queue-group queue mbs
Description 

This command specifies the default maximum buffer size for the template queue in bytes or kilobytes.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The port>ethernet>access>ingress>queue-group and port>ethernet>access>egress>queue-group contexts for mbs provides a mechanism for overriding the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope that a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard against queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

When configured on an egress queue group queue, this command and the queue-delay command are mutually exclusive. In order to change between the mbs and queue-delay parameters, the current parameter must be removed before adding the new parameter; that is, changing from mbs to queue-delay requires a no mbs before the queue-delay is configured and changing from queue-delay to mbs requires a no queue-delay before the mbs is configured. If queue-delay is configured for an egress queue group queue, it is not possible to override the MBS for that queue.

For policers, this command is used to configure the policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s high-priority violate threshold. The high-prio-only command is applied to the MBS value to derive the bucket’s low-priority violate threshold.

At ingress, trusted in-profile packets and untrusted high-priority packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold while trusted out-of-profile and untrusted low-priority packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold.

At egress, inplus-profile and in-profile packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold and out-of-profile packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold. Exceed-profile packets are discarded unless enable-exceed-pir is configured, in which case they are forwarded.

The PIR bucket’s violate threshold represents the maximum burst tolerance allowed by the policer. If the policer's offered rate is equal to or less than the policer's defined rate, the PIR bucket depth hovers around the 0 depth with spikes up to the maximum packet size in the offered load. If the offered rate increases beyond the metering rate, the amount of data allowed above the rate is capped by the threshold. The low-priority violate threshold provides a smaller burst size for the lower priority traffic associated with the policer. Since all lower priority traffic is discarded at the lower burst tolerance size, the remaining burst tolerance defined by high-prio-only is available for the higher priority traffic.

The policer’s mbs size defined in the QoS policy may be overridden on an SLA profile or SAP where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned to the queue to the value.

Default 

default

Parameters 
size —
For queues, the size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of bytes or kilobytes of buffering allowed for the queue. For a value of 100 kbytes, enter the value 100. A value of 0 causes the queue to discard all packets. For policers, the size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of bytes for the policer's MBS. The queue MBS maximum value used is constrained by the pool size in which the queue exists and by the shared pool space in the corresponding megapool.
Values—
0 to 1048576 or default
Minimum configurable non-zero value: 6 kbytes on an FP2, 7680 bytes on an FP3, and 16 kbytes on an FP4
Minimum non-zero default value: maximum of 10 ms of CIR, or 6 kbytes on an FP2, 7680 bytes on an FP3, and 16 kbytes on an FP4

 

[bytes |kilobytes]—
Select bytes or kilobytes.
Default—
kilobytes
default—
Sets the MBS to its default value.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs {size [bytes |kilobytes] |default}
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>qgrps>egr>qgrp>hsmda-queues>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure qos queue-group-templates egress queue-group hsmda-queues queue mbs
Description 

This command specifies the default maximum buffer size for the template queue in bytes or kilobytes.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted all of its buffers while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeded the amount of buffers allowed by MBS, all packets are discarded until packets have been drained from the queue.

The port>ethernet>access>ingress>queue-group and port>ethernet>access>egress>queue-group contexts for mbs provides a mechanism for overriding the default maximum size for the queue.

The sum of the MBS for all queues on an ingress access port can oversubscribe the total amount of buffering available. When congestion occurs and buffers become scarce, access to buffers is controlled by the RED slope that a packet is associated with. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed or that the packet’s RED slope will not force the discard of the packet. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard against queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers). Another is properly setting the RED slope parameters for the needs of services on this port or channel.

When configured on an egress queue group queue, this command and the queue-delay command are mutually exclusive. In order to change between the mbs and queue-delay parameters, the current parameter must be removed before adding the new parameter; that is, changing from mbs to queue-delay requires a no mbs before the queue-delay is configured and changing from queue-delay to mbs requires a no queue-delay before the mbs is configured. If queue-delay is configured for an egress queue group queue, it is not possible to override the MBS for that queue.

For policers, this command is used to configure the policer’s PIR leaky bucket’s high-priority violate threshold. The high-prio-only command is applied to the MBS value to derive the bucket’s low-priority violate threshold.

At ingress, trusted in-profile packets and untrusted high-priority packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold while trusted out-of-profile and untrusted low-priority packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold.

At egress, inplus-profile and in-profile packets use the policer’s high-priority violate threshold and out-of-profile packets use the policer's low-priority violate threshold. Exceed-profile packets are discarded unless enable-exceed-pir is configured, in which case they are forwarded.

The PIR bucket’s violate threshold represents the maximum burst tolerance allowed by the policer. If the policer's offered rate is equal to or less than the policer's defined rate, the PIR bucket depth hovers around the 0 depth with spikes up to the maximum packet size in the offered load. If the offered rate increases beyond the metering rate, the amount of data allowed above the rate is capped by the threshold. The low-priority violate threshold provides a smaller burst size for the lower priority traffic associated with the policer. Since all lower priority traffic is discarded at the lower burst tolerance size, the remaining burst tolerance defined by high-prio-only is available for the higher priority traffic.

The policer’s mbs size defined in the QoS policy may be overridden on an SLA profile or SAP where the policy is applied.

The no form of this command returns the MBS size assigned to the queue to the value.

Default 

default

Parameters 
size —
For queues, the size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of bytes or kilobytes of buffering allowed for the queue. For a value of 100 kbytes, enter the value 100. A value of 0 causes the queue to discard all packets. For policers, the size parameter is an integer expression of the maximum number of bytes for the policer's MBS. The queue MBS maximum value used is constrained by the pool size in which the queue exists and by the shared pool space in the corresponding megapool.
Values—
0 to 2625 kilobytes, 0 to 2688000 bytes, or default

 

[bytes |kilobytes]—
Select bytes or kilobytes.
Default—
kilobytes
default—
Sets the MBS to its default value.

mbs

Syntax 
mbs percent
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>shared-queue>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure qos shared-queue queue mbs
Description 

This command specifies the relative amount of the buffer pool space for the maximum buffers for a specific ingress shared queue.

The MBS value is used by a queue to determine whether it has exhausted its total allowed buffers while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeded its maximum amount of buffers, all packets are discarded until the queue transmits a packet. A queue that has not exceeded its MBS size is not guaranteed that a buffer will be available when needed. Setting proper CBS parameters and controlling CBS oversubscription is one major safeguard against queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffers).

The MBS size can sometimes be smaller than the CBS. This will result in a portion of the CBS for the queue to be unused and should be avoided.

Default 

The queue MBS defaults are listed in Table 100.

Table 100:  Queue MBS Default Values

Queue

Default MBS

1

50

2

50

3

50

4

25

5

50

6

50

7

25

8

25

9

50

10

50

11

50

12

25

13

50

14

50

15

25

16

25

Parameters 
percent—
The percent of buffers from the total buffer pool space for the maximum amount of buffers, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
0 to 100

 

mbs

Syntax 
mbs mbs
no mbs
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>cpm-queue>queue mbs)
Full Contexts 
configure system security cpm-queue queue mbs
Description 

This command specifies the maximum queue depth to which a queue can grow.

Parameters 
mbs—
Specifies the maximum burst size in kbytes.

17.158. mbs-contribution

mbs-contribution

Syntax 
mbs-contribution size [bytes |kilobytes] [fixed]
no mbs-contribution
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>ing>plcr-ctrl-plcy>mbs-thrshlds>prio mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>egr>plcr-ctrl-plcy>mbs-thrshlds>prio mbs-contribution)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile egress policer-control-policy priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile ingress policer-control-policy priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
Description 

The mbs-contribution command is used to configure the policy-based burst tolerance for a parent policer instance created when the policy is applied to a SAP or subscriber context. The system uses the parent policer’s min-thresh-separation value, the priority level’s mbs-contribution value and the number of child policers currently attached to the priority level to derive the priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion of burst tolerance within the local priority level. The shared-portion and fair-portions for each priority level are then used by the system to calculate each priority level’s discard-unfair threshold and discard-all threshold.

The value for a priority level’s mbs-contribution within the policer-control-policy may be overridden on the SAP or subscriber sub-profile where the policy is applied in order to allow fine tuning of the discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds relevant to the needs of the local child policers on the object.

Accumulative Nature of Burst Tolerance for a Parent Policer Priority Level

When defining mbs-contribution, the specified size may only be a portion of the burst tolerance associated with the priority level. The packets associated with the priority level share the burst tolerance of lower within the parent policer. As the parent policer PIR bucket depth increases during congestion, the lower priority packets eventually experience discard based on each priority’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds. Assuming congestion continues once all the lower priority packets have been prevented from consuming bucket depth, the burst tolerance for the priority level is consumed by its own packets and any packets associated with higher priorities.

The Effect of Fair and Unfair Child Policer Traffic at a Parent Policer Priority Level

The system continually monitors the offered rate of each child policer on each parent policer priority level and detects when the policer is in a congested state (the aggregate offered load is greater than the decrement rate defined on the parent policer). As previously stated, the result of congestion is that the parent policer's bucket depth will increase until it eventually hovers around either a discard-unfair or discard-all threshold belonging to one of the priority levels. This threshold is the point where enough packets are being discarded that the increment rate and decrement rate begin to even out. If only a single child policer is associated to the priority level, the discard-unfair threshold is not used since fairness is only applicable when multiple child policers are competing at the same priority level.

When multiple child policers are sharing the congested priority level, the system uses the offered rates and the parenting parameters of each child to determine the fair rate per child when the parent policer is unable to meet the bandwidth needs of each child. The fair rate represents the number of bandwidth that each child at the priority level should receive relative to the other children at the same level according to the policer control policy instance managing the child policers. This fair rate is applied as the decrement rate for each child's FIR bucket. Changing a child’s FIR rate does not modify the number of packets forwarded by the parent policer for the child’s priority level. It simply modifies the forwarded ratio between the children on that priority level. Since each child FIR bucket has some level of burst tolerance before marking its packets as unfair, the current parent policer bucket depth may at times rise above the discard-unfair threshold. The mbs-contribution value provides a means to define how much separation is provided between the priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all threshold to allow the parent policer to absorb some of the FIR burst before reaching the priority’s discard-all threshold.

This level of fair aggregate burst tolerance is based on the decrement rate of the parent policer’s PIR bucket while the individual fair bursts making up the aggregate are based on each child’s FIR decrement rate. The aggregate fair rate of the priority level is managed by the system with consideration of the current rate of traffic in higher priority levels. In essence, the system ensures that for each iteration of the child FIR rate calculation, the sum of the child FIR decrement rates plus the sum of the higher priority traffic increment rates equals the parent policers decrement rate. This means that dynamic numbers of higher priority traffic can be ignored when sizing a lower priority’s fair aggregate burst tolerance. Consider the following:

  1. The parent policer decrement rate is set to 20 Mb/s (max-rate 20,000).
  2. A priority level’s fair burst size is set to 30 kbytes (mbs-contribution 30 kbytes).
  3. Higher priority traffic is currently taking 12 Mb/s.
  4. The priority level has three child policers attached.
  5. Each child’s PIR MBS is set to 10 kbytes, which makes each child’s FIR MBS 10 kbytes.
  6. The children want 10 Mb/s, but only 8 Mb/s is available,
  7. Based on weights, the children's FIR rates are set as follows:

    FIR Rate

    FIR MBS

    Child 1

    4 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 2

    3 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 3

    1 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

The 12 Mb/s of the higher priority traffic and the 8 Mb/s of fair traffic equal the 20 Mb/s decrement rate of the parent policer.

It is clear that the higher priority traffic is consuming 12 Mb/s of the parent policer’s decrement rate, leaving 8 Mb/s of decrement rate for the lower priority’s fair traffic.

  1. The burst tolerance of child 1 is based on 10 kbytes above 4 Mb/s,
  2. The burst tolerance of child 2 is based on 10 kbytes above 3 Mb/s,
  3. The burst tolerance of child 3 is based on 10 kbytes above 1 Mb/s.

If all three children burst simultaneously (unlikely), they will consume 30 kbytes above 8 Mb/s. This is the same as the remaining decrement rate after the higher priority traffic.

Parent Policer Total Burst Tolerance and Downstream Buffering

The highest in-use priority level’s discard-all threshold is the total burst tolerance of the parent policer. In some cases the parent policer represents downstream bandwidth capacity and the max-rate of the parent policer is set to prevent overrunning the downstream bandwidth. The burst tolerance of the parent policer defines how much more traffic may be sent beyond the downstream scheduling capacity. In the worst case scenario, when the downstream buffering is insufficient to handle the total possible burst from the parent policer, downstream discards based on lack of buffering may occur. However, in all likelihood, this is not the case.

In most cases, lower priority traffic in the policer is responsible for the greater part of congestion above the parent policer rate. Since this traffic is discarded with a lower threshold, this lowers the effective burst tolerance even while the highest priority traffic is present.

Configuring a Priority Level's MBS Contribution Value

In the most conservative case, a priority level’s mbs-contribution value may be set to be greater than the sum of child policer’s mbs and one max-size-frame per child policer. This ensures that even in the absolute worst case where all the lower priority levels are simultaneously bursting to the maximum capacity of each child, enough burst tolerance for the priority’s children will exist if they also burst to their maximum capacity.

Since simply adding up all the child policer’s PIR MBS values may result in large overall burst tolerances that are not ever likely to be needed, you should consider some level of burst oversubscription when configuring the mbs-contribution value for each priority level. The number of oversubscription should be determined based on the needs of each priority level.

Using the Fixed Keyword to Create Deterministic Parent Policer Discard Thresholds

In the default behavior, the system ignores the mbs-contribution values for a priority level on a subscriber or SAP parent policer when a child policer is not currently associated with the level. This prevents additional burst tolerance from being added to higher priority traffic within the parent policer.

This does cause fluctuations in the defined threshold values when child policers are added or removed from a parent policer instance. If this behavior is undesirable, the fixed keyword may be used which causes the mbs-contribution value to always be included in the calculation of parent policer’s discard thresholds. The defined mbs-contribution value may be overridden on a subscriber sla-profile or on a SAP instance, but the fixed nature of the contribution cannot be overridden.

If the defined mbs-contribution value for the priority level is zero, the priority level will have no effect on the parent policer’s defined discard thresholds. A packet associated with the priority level will use the next lower priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds.

The no mbs-contribution command returns the policy’s priority level’s MBS contribution to the default value. When changed, the thresholds for the priority level and all higher priority levels for all instances of the parent policer is recalculated.

Parameters 
size [bytes |kilobytes]
The size parameter is required when executing the mbs-contribution command. It is expressed as an integer and specifies the priority’s specific portion of accumulative MBS for the priority level in bytes or kilobytes which is selected by the trailing bytes or kilobytes keywords. If both bytes and kilobytes are missing, kilobytes is assumed. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the priority level’s mbs-contribution value has been overridden.
Values—
0 to 16777216

 

bytes |kilobytes:
The bytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the kilobytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in bytes.

The kilobytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the bytes keyword. Size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in kilobytes.

Default—
kilobytes
fixed—
This optional fixed keyword is used to force the inclusion of the defined mbs-contribution value in the parent policer’s discard threshold calculations. If the mbs-contribution command is executed without the fixed keyword, the fixed calculation behavior for the priority level is removed.

mbs-contribution

Syntax 
mbs-contribution size [bytes |kilobytes]
no mbs-contribution
Context 
[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>access>qgrp>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>prio mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>card>fp>ing>network>qgrp>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>prio mbs-contribution)
Full Contexts 
configure card fp ingress network queue-group policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure card fp ingress access queue-group policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
Description 

This command configures the policy-based burst tolerance for a parent policer instance created when the policy is applied to a SAP or subscriber context. The system uses the parent policer’s min-thresh-separation value, the priority level’s mbs-contribution value and the number of child policers currently attached to the priority level to derive the priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion of burst tolerance within the local priority level. The shared-portion and fair-portions for each priority level are then used by the system to calculate each priority level’s discard-unfair threshold and discard-all threshold.

The value for a priority level’s mbs-contribution within the policer-control-policy may be overridden on the SAP or subscriber sub-profile where the policy is applied in order to allow fine tuning of the discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds relevant to the needs of the local child policers on the object.

Accumulative Nature of Burst Tolerance for a Parent Policer Priority Level

When defining mbs-contribution, the specified size may only be a portion of the burst tolerance associated with the priority level. The packets associated with the priority level share the burst tolerance of lower within the parent policer. As the parent policer PIR bucket depth increases during congestion, the lower priority packets eventually experience discard based on each priority’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds. Assuming congestion continues once all the lower priority packets have been prevented from consuming bucket depth, the burst tolerance for the priority level will be consumed by its own packets and any packets associated with higher priorities.

The Effect of Fair and Unfair Child Policer Traffic at a Parent Policer Priority Level

The system continually monitors the offered rate of each child policer on each parent policer priority level and detects when the policer is in a congested state (the aggregate offered load is greater than the decrement rate defined on the parent policer). As previously stated, the result of congestion is that the parent policer's bucket depth will increase until it eventually hovers around either a discard-unfair or discard-all threshold belonging to one of the priority levels. This threshold is the point where enough packets are being discarded that the increment rate and decrement rate begin to even out. If only a single child policer is associated to the priority level, the discard-unfair threshold is not used since fairness is only applicable when multiple child policers are competing at the same priority level.

When multiple child policers are sharing the congested priority level, the system uses the offered rates and the parenting parameters of each child to determine the fair rate per child when the parent policer is unable to meet the bandwidth needs of each child. The fair rate represents the amount of bandwidth that each child at the priority level should receive relative to the other children at the same level according to the policer control policy instance managing the child policers. This fair rate is applied as the decrement rate for each child’s FIR bucket. Changing a child’s FIR rate does not modify the amount of packets forwarded by the parent policer for the child’s priority level. It simply modifies the forwarded ratio between the children on that priority level. Since each child FIR bucket has some level of burst tolerance before marking its packets as unfair, the current parent policer bucket depth may at times rise above the discard-unfair threshold. The mbs-contribution value provides a means to define how much separation is provided between the priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all threshold to allow the parent policer to absorb some amount of FIR burst before reaching the priority’s discard-all threshold.

This level of fair aggregate burst tolerance is based on the decrement rate of the parent policer’s PIR bucket while the individual fair bursts making up the aggregate are based on each child’s FIR decrement rate. The aggregate fair rate of the priority level is managed by the system with consideration of the current rate of traffic in higher priority levels. In essence, the system ensures that for each iteration of the child FIR rate calculation, the sum of the child FIR decrement rates plus the sum of the higher priority traffic increment rates equals the parent policers decrement rate. This means that dynamic amounts of higher priority traffic can be ignored when sizing a lower priority’s fair aggregate burst tolerance. Consider the following:

  1. The parent policer decrement rate is set to 20 Mb/s (max-rate 20,000).
  2. A priority level’s fair burst size is set to 30 kbytes (mbs-contribution 30 kilobytes).
  3. Higher priority traffic is currently taking 12 Mb/s.
  4. The priority level has three child policers attached.
  5. Each child’s PIR MBS is set to 10 kbytes, which makes each child’s FIR MBS 10 kbytes.
  6. The children want 10 Mb/s, but only 8 Mb/s is available,
  7. Based on weights, the children's FIR rates are set as follows:

    FIR Rate

    FIR MBS

    Child 1

    4 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 2

    3 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 3

    1 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

The 12 Mb/s of the higher priority traffic and the 8 Mb/s of fair traffic equal the 20 Mb/s decrement rate of the parent policer.

It is clear that the higher priority traffic is consuming 12 Mb/s of the parent policer’s decrement rate, leaving 8 Mb/s of decrement rate for the lower priority’s fair traffic.

  1. The burst tolerance of child 1 is based on 10 kbytes above 4 Mb/s,
  2. The burst tolerance of child 2 is based on 10 kbytes above 3 Mb/s,
  3. The burst tolerance of child 3 is based on 10 kbytes above 1 Mb/s.

If all three children burst simultaneously (unlikely), they will consume 30 kbytes above 8 Mb/s. This is the same as the remaining decrement rate after the higher priority traffic.

Parent Policer Total Burst Tolerance and Downstream Buffering

The highest in-use priority level’s discard-all threshold is the total burst tolerance of the parent policer. In some cases the parent policer represents downstream bandwidth capacity and the max-rate of the parent policer is set to prevent overrunning the downstream bandwidth. The burst tolerance of the parent policer defines how much more traffic may be sent beyond the downstream scheduling capacity. In the worst case scenario, when the downstream buffering is insufficient to handle the total possible burst from the parent policer, downstream discards based on lack of buffering may occur. However, in all likelihood, this is not the case.

In most cases, lower priority traffic in the policer will be responsible for the greater part of congestion above the parent policer rate. Since this traffic is discarded with a lower threshold, this lowers the effective burst tolerance even while the highest priority traffic is present.

Configuring a Priority Level's MBS Contribution Value

In the most conservative case, a priority level’s mbs-contribution value may be set to be greater than the sum of child policer’s MBS and one max-size-frame per child policer. This ensures that even in the absolute worst case where all the lower priority levels are simultaneously bursting to the maximum capacity of each child, enough burst tolerance for the priority’s children will exist if they also burst to their maximum capacity.

Since simply adding up all the child policer’s PIR MBS values may result in large overall burst tolerances that are not ever likely to be needed, you should consider some level of burst oversubscription when configuring the mbs-contribution value for each priority level. The amount of oversubscription should be determined based on the needs of each priority level.

Using the Fixed Keyword to Create Deterministic Parent Policer Discard Thresholds

In the default behavior, the system ignores the mbs-contribution values for a priority level on a subscriber or SAP parent policer when a child policer is not currently associated with the level. This prevents additional burst tolerance from being added to higher priority traffic within the parent policer.

This does cause fluctuations in the defined threshold values when child policers are added or removed from a parent policer instance. If this behavior is undesirable, the fixed keyword may be used which causes the mbs-contribution value to always be included in the calculation of parent policer’s discard thresholds. The defined mbs-contribution value may be overridden on a subscriber SLA profile or on a SAP instance, but the fixed nature of the contribution cannot be overridden.

If the defined mbs-contribution value for the priority level is zero, the priority level will have no effect on the parent policer’s defined discard thresholds. A packet associated with the priority level will use the next lower priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds.

The no form of this command reverts to the policy’s priority level’s MBS contribution to the default value. When changed, the thresholds for the priority level and all higher priority levels for all instances of the parent policer are recalculated.

Default 

no mbs-contribution

Parameters 
size
Specifies that the size parameter is required when executing the mbs-contribution command. It is expressed as an integer and specifies the priority’s specific portion amount of accumulative MBS for the priority level in bytes or kilobytes which is selected by the trailing bytes or kilobytes keywords. If both bytes and kilobytes are missing, kilobytes is assumed. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the priority level’s mbs-contribution value has been overridden. Clearing an override on parent policer instance causes this value to be enforced.
Values—
0 to 16777216

 

bytes, kilobytes—
Specifies that the bytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the kilobytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in bytes.

The kilobytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the bytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in kilobytes.

Default—
kilobytes

mbs-contribution

Syntax 
mbs-contribution size [bytes |kilobytes]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>fpipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>fpipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
Full Contexts 
configure service apipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service apipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service cpipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service epipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service epipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service fpipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service fpipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service ipipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
Description 

The mbs-contribution override command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override a parent policer’s priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP. This override allow the priority level’s burst tolerance to be tuned based on the needs of the SAP’s child policers attached to the priority level.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer priority level until the override is removed using the no mbs-contribution command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the mbs-contribution setting from the policer-control-policy to control the parent policer’s priority level’s burst tolerance.

Default 

no mbs-contribution

Parameters 
size—
The mbs-contribution override value.
Values—
1 to 16777216 | default

 

bytes—
Signifies that size is expressed in bytes. The bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and optional. The default is kilobytes.
kilobytes—
Signifies that size is expressed in kilobytes. The bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and optional. The default is kilobytes.

mbs-contribution

Syntax 
mbs-contribution size [{bytes |kilobytes}]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service vpls sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
Description 

The mbs-contribution override command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override a parent policer’s priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP. This override allow the priority level’s burst tolerance to be tuned based on the needs of the SAP’s child policers attached to the priority level.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer priority level until the override is removed using the no mbs-contribution command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the mbs-contribution setting from the policer-control-policy to control the parent policer’s priority level’s burst tolerance.

Default 

no mbs-contribution

Parameters 
size—
This parameter is required when specifying MBS contribution override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216 or default

 

Default—
kilobytes

mbs-contribution

Syntax 
mbs-contribution size [{bytes |kilobytes}]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service ies interface sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
Description 

The mbs-contribution override command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override a parent policer’s priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP. This override allow the priority level’s burst tolerance to be tuned based on the needs of the SAP’s child policers attached to the priority level.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer priority level until the override is removed using the no mbs-contribution command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the mbs-contribution setting from the policer-control-policy to control the parent policer’s priority level’s burst tolerance.

Default 

no mbs-contribution

Parameters 
size—
This parameter is required when specifying MBS contribution override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216 or default

 

Default—
kilobytes

mbs-contribution

Syntax 
mbs-contribution size [bytes |kilobytes]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds>priority mbs-contribution)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
configure service vprn interface sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
Description 

The mbs-contribution override command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override a parent policer’s priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP. This override allow the priority level’s burst tolerance to be tuned based on the needs of the SAP’s child policers attached to the priority level.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy priority level’s mbs-contribution parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer priority level until the override is removed using the no mbs-contribution command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the mbs-contribution setting from the policer-control-policy to control the parent policer’s priority level’s burst tolerance.

Default 

no mbs-contribution

Parameters 
size—
This parameter is required when specifying MBS contribution override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216 or default

 

Default—
kilobytes

mbs-contribution

Syntax 
mbs-contribution size [bytes |kilobytes] [fixed]
no mbs-contribution
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>plcr-ctrl-plcy>root>priority-mbs-thresholds>priority mbs-contribution)
Full Contexts 
configure qos policer-control-policy root priority-mbs-thresholds priority mbs-contribution
Description 

The mbs-contribution command is used to configure the policy-based burst tolerance for a parent policer instance created when the policy is applied to a SAP, or a subscriber context for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR, or a 7950 XRS multiservice site. The system uses the parent policer’s min-thresh-separation value, the priority level’s mbs-contribution value, and the number of child policers currently attached to the priority level to derive the priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion of burst tolerance within the local priority level. The shared-portion and fair-portions for each priority level are then used by the system to calculate each priority level’s discard-unfair threshold and discard-all threshold. The mbs-contribution is the minimum separation between two adjacent active discard-all thresholds.

The value for a priority level’s mbs-contribution within the policer-control-policy may be overridden on the SAP, or subscriber sub-profile (applies to the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR) or multiservice site (for 7950 XRS) where the policy is applied in order to allow fine tuning of the discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds relevant to the needs of the local child policers on the object.

Accumulative Nature of Burst Tolerance for a Parent Policer Priority Level

When defining mbs-contribution, the specified size may only be a portion of the burst tolerance associated with the priority level. The packets associated with the priority level share the burst tolerance of lower within the parent policer. As the parent policer PIR bucket depth increases during congestion, the lower priority packets eventually experience discard based on each priority’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds. Assuming congestion continues when all the lower priority packets have been prevented from consuming bucket depth, the burst tolerance for the priority level will be consumed by its own packets and any packets associated with higher priorities.

The Effect of Fair and Unfair Child Policer Traffic at a Parent Policer Priority Level

The system continually monitors the offered rate of each child policer on each parent policer priority level and detects when the policer is in a congested state (the aggregate offered load is greater than the decrement rate defined on the parent policer). As previously stated, the result of congestion is that the parent policer's bucket depth will increase until it eventually hovers around either a discard-unfair or discard-all threshold belonging to one of the priority levels. This threshold is the point where enough packets are being discarded that the increment rate and decrement rate begin to even out. If only a single child policer is associated with the priority level, the discard-unfair threshold is not used since fairness is only applicable when multiple child policers are competing at the same priority level.

When multiple child policers are sharing the congested priority level, the system uses the offered rates and the parenting parameters of each child to determine the fair rate per child when the parent policer is unable to meet the bandwidth needs of each child. The fair rate represents the amount of bandwidth that each child at the priority level should receive relative to the other children at the same level according to the policer control policy instance managing the child policers. This fair rate is applied as the decrement rate for each child's FIR bucket. Changing a child’s FIR rate does not modify the number of packets forwarded by the parent policer for the child’s priority level. It just modifies the forwarded ratio between the children on that priority level. Since each child FIR bucket has some level of burst tolerance before marking its packets as unfair, the current parent policer bucket depth may at times rise above the discard-unfair threshold. The mbs-contribution value provides a means to define how much separation is provided between the priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all threshold to allow the parent policer to absorb some amount of FIR burst before reaching the priority’s discard-all threshold.

This level of fair aggregate burst tolerance is based on the decrement rate of the parent policer’s PIR bucket while the individual fair bursts making up the aggregate are based on each child’s FIR decrement rate. The aggregate fair rate of the priority level is managed by the system with consideration of the current rate of traffic in higher priority levels. In essence, the system ensures that for each iteration of the child FIR rate calculation, the sum of the child FIR decrement rates plus the sum of the higher priority traffic increment rates equals the parent policers decrement rate. This means that dynamic amounts of higher priority traffic can be ignored when sizing a lower priority’s fair aggregate burst tolerance. Consider the following:

  1. The parent policer decrement rate is set to 20 Mb/s (max-rate 20,000).
  2. A priority level’s fair burst size is set to 30 kbytes (mbs-contribution 30 kbytes).
  3. Higher priority traffic is currently taking 12 Mb/s.
  4. The priority level has three child policers attached.
  5. Each child’s PIR MBS is set to 10 kbytes, which makes each child’s FIR MBS 10 kbytes.
  6. The children want 10 Mb/s, but only 8 Mb/s is available
  7. Based on weights, the children's FIR rates are set as follows:

    FIR Rate

    FIR MBS

    Child 1

    4 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 2

    3 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

    Child 3

    1 Mb/s

    10 kbytes

The 12 Mb/s of the higher priority traffic and the 8 Mb/s of fair traffic equal the 20 Mb/s decrement rate of the parent policer.

It is clear that the higher priority traffic is consuming 12 Mb/s of the parent policer’s decrement rate, leaving 8 Mb/s of decrement rate for the lower priority’s fair traffic.

  1. The burst tolerance of child 1 is based on 10 kbytes above 4 Mb/s.
  2. The burst tolerance of child 2 is based on 10 kbytes above 3 Mb/s.
  3. The burst tolerance of child 3 is based on 10 kbytes above 1 Mb/s.

If all three children burst simultaneously (unlikely), they will consume 30 kbytes above 8 Mb/s. This is the same as the remaining decrement rate after the higher priority traffic.

Parent Policer Total Burst Tolerance and Downstream Buffering

The highest in-use priority level’s discard-all threshold is the total burst tolerance of the parent policer. In some cases, the parent policer represents downstream bandwidth capacity and the max-rate of the parent policer is set to prevent overrunning the downstream bandwidth. The burst tolerance of the parent policer defines how much more traffic may be sent beyond the downstream scheduling capacity. In the worst-case scenario, when the downstream buffering is insufficient to handle the total possible burst from the parent policer, downstream discards based on lack of buffering may occur. However, in all likelihood, this is not the case.

In most cases, lower priority traffic in the policer will be responsible for the greater part of congestion above the parent policer rate. Since this traffic is discarded with a lower threshold, this lowers the effective burst tolerance even while the highest priority traffic is present.

Configuring a Priority Level's MBS Contribution Value

In the most conservative case, a priority level’s mbs-contribution value may be set to be greater than the sum of child policer’s mbs and one max-size-frame per child policer. This ensures that even in the absolute worst case where all the lower priority levels are simultaneously bursting to the maximum capacity of each child, enough burst tolerance for the priority’s children will exist if they also burst to their maximum capacity.

Since simply adding up all the child policer’s PIR MBS values may result in large overall burst tolerances that are not ever likely to be needed, consider some level of burst oversubscription when configuring the mbs-contribution value for each priority level. The amount of oversubscription should be determined based on the needs of each priority level.

Using the Fixed Keyword to Create Deterministic Parent Policer Discard Thresholds

In the default behavior, the system ignores the mbs-contribution values for a priority level on a subscriber for 7450 ESS and 7750 SR, or a multiservice site for 7950 XRS, or SAP parent policer when a child policer is not currently associated with the level. This prevents additional burst tolerance from being added to higher priority traffic within the parent policer.

This does cause fluctuations in the defined threshold values when child policers are added or removed from a parent policer instance. If this behavior is undesirable, the fixed keyword may be used that causes the mbs-contribution value to always be included in the calculation of parent policer’s discard thresholds. The defined mbs-contribution value may be overridden on a subscriber sla-profile for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR, or on a multiservice site for the 7950 XRS, or on a SAP instance, but the fixed nature of the contribution cannot be overridden.

If the defined mbs-contribution value for the priority level is zero, the priority level will have no effect on the parent policer’s defined discard thresholds. A packet associated with the priority level will use the next lower priority level’s discard-unfair and discard-all thresholds.

The no form of this command returns the policy’s priority level’s MBS contribution to the default value. When changed, the thresholds for the priority level and all higher priority levels for all instances of the parent policer will be recalculated.

Parameters 
size
The size parameter is required when executing the mbs-contribution command. It is expressed as an integer and specifies the priority’s specific portion amount of accumulative MBS for the priority level. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the priority level’s mbs-contribution value has been overridden.
Values—
0 to 4194304 or default (applies to the 7450 ESS)

 

0 to 16777216 or default (applies to the 7750 SR and 7950 XRS)
Default—
8
bytes |kilobytes:—
This parameter indicates whether the size is expressed in bytes or kilobytes.
Default—
kilobytes
fixed—
The optional fixed keyword is used to force the inclusion of the defined mbs-contribution value in the parent policer’s discard threshold calculations. If the mbs-contribution command is executed without the fixed keyword, the fixed calculation behavior for the priority level is removed.

17.159. mbytes

mbytes

Syntax 
mbytes {mbytes |disable}
no mbytes
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>key-re-exchange>client mbytes)
[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>key-re-exchange>server mbytes)
Full Contexts 
configure system security ssh key-re-exchange client mbytes
configure system security ssh key-re-exchange server mbytes
Description 

This command configures the maximum bytes to be transmitted before a key re-exchange is initiated by the server.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

mbytes 1024

Parameters 
mbytes—
Specifies the number of megabytes, on a SSH session, after which the SSH client initiates the key-re-exchange.
Values—
1 to 64000

 

Default—
1024
disable—
Specifies that a session will never timeout. To re-enable mbytes, enter the command without the disable option.

17.160. mc-constraints

mc-constraints

Syntax 
mc-constraints
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only>igmp-snp>mcac mc-constraints)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters igmp-snooping mcac mc-constraints
Description 

This command enables the context to configure the level and its associated bandwidth for a bundle or a logical interface.

mc-constraints

Syntax 
mc-constraints
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping>mcac mc-constraints)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mld-snooping>mcac mc-constraints)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping mcac mc-constraints
configure service vpls sap mld-snooping mcac mc-constraints
Description 

This command enters the context to configure multicast CAC constraints.

mc-constraints

Syntax 
mc-constraints
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>grp-if>mcac mc-constraints)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>if>mcac mc-constraints)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>grp-if>mcac mc-constraints)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>if>mcac mc-constraints)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim>if>mcac mc-constraints)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn igmp group-interface mcac mc-constraints
configure service vprn igmp interface mcac mc-constraints
configure service vprn mld group-interface mcac mc-constraints
configure service vprn mld interface mcac mc-constraints
configure service vprn pim interface mcac mc-constraints
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multicast CAC constraints.

mc-constraints

Syntax 
mc-constraints
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mcac>policy>bundle mc-constraints)
[Tree] (config>router>igmp>grp-if>mcac mc-constraints)
[Tree] (config>router>igmp>interface>mcac mc-constraints)
[Tree] (config>router>mld>grp-if>mcac mc-constraints)
[Tree] (config>router>mld>interface>mcac mc-constraints)
[Tree] (config>router>pim>interface>mcac mc-constraints)
Full Contexts 
configure router igmp group-interface mcac mc-constraints
configure router igmp interface mcac mc-constraints
configure router mcac policy bundle mc-constraints
configure router mld group-interface mcac mc-constraints
configure router mld interface mcac mc-constraints
configure router pim interface mcac mc-constraints
Description 

This command enables the context to configure the level and its associated bandwidth for a bundle or a logical interface.

17.161. mc-ecmp-balance

mc-ecmp-balance

Syntax 
[no] mc-ecmp-balance
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>pim mc-ecmp-balance)
Full Contexts 
configure router pim mc-ecmp-balance
Description 

This command enables multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links considering multicast bandwidth. When enabled, every multicast stream that needs to be forwarded over an ECMP link is evaluated for the total multicast utilization currently using the ECMP interface in question.

Note:

A given interface can be shared between multiple (partially overlapping) ECMP sets. This is taken into consideration and a complete balance is attempted.

ECMP load balancing helps to avoid loss of unicast traffic over ECMP links as it loads balance over ECMP links and if multicast is not balanced then it is possible that a given link does not have enough bandwidth to pass its allotted unicast traffic portion.

To achieve a proper balance, multicast groups and their bandwidth should be configured in the config mcast-management context.

If the bandwidth is not configured, then the default value applies, and for ECMP load balancing, the net effect is that the balance achieved reflects a balance of the number of multicast groups traversing over the ECMP link. The bandwidth used in this policy is the configured value, not the actual bandwidth.

If mc-ecmp-balance is enabled, a redistribution may be triggered whenever an interface is added to an ECMP link.

If mc-ecmp-balance is enabled, a period re-balance may be configured that re-optimizes the distribution as some multicast streams may have been removed from the ECMP link.

If mc-ecmp-balance is enabled, then a threshold (ecmp-opt-threshold) can be configured to avoid moving multicast streams where interruption should be avoided.

The ecmp-opt-threshold defines the preference level threshold where multicast ECMP path management can dynamically optimize channels based on topology or bandwidth events. If the channels preference is equal to or less than the ecmp-opt-threshold, ECMP can move the channel between ECMP paths when bandwidth distribution events happen. Channels with a preference level higher than the threshold are not moved during these events.

Changing the ecmp-opt-threshold causes all channels ECMP optimization eligibility to be reevaluated.

The no form of this command removes the re-balancing capability from the configuration.

Default 

mc-ecmp-balance

mc-ecmp-balance

Syntax 
[no] mc-ecmp-balance
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>pim mc-ecmp-balance)
Full Contexts 
configure router pim mc-ecmp-balance
Description 

This command enables multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links based on the number of (S, G) distributed over each link. When enabled, each new multicast stream that needs to be forwarded over an ECMP link is compared to the count of (S, G) already using each link, so that the link with the fewest (S, G) is chosen.

This command cannot be used together with the mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled command.

The no form of this command disables multicast ECMP balancing.

mc-ecmp-balance

Syntax 
[no] mc-ecmp-balance
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim mc-ecmp-balance)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn pim mc-ecmp-balance
Description 

This command enables multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links based on the number of (S, G) distributed over each link. When enabled, each new multicast stream that needs to be forwarded over an ECMP link is compared to the count of (S, G) already using each link, so that the link with the fewest (S, G) is chosen.

This command cannot be used together with the mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled command.

The no form of this command disables multicast ECMP balancing.

17.162. mc-ecmp-balance-hold

mc-ecmp-balance-hold

Syntax 
mc-ecmp-balance-hold minutes
no mc-ecmp-balance-hold
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>pim mc-ecmp-balance-hold)
Full Contexts 
configure router pim mc-ecmp-balance-hold
Description 

This command defines a hold period that applies after an interface has been added to the ECMP link. It is also used periodically to rebalance if channels have been removed from the ECMP link.

If the ECMP interface has not changed in the hold period and if no multicast streams have been removed, then no action is taken when the timer triggers.

This parameter should be used to avoid excessive changes to the multicast distribution.

A rebalance will not occur to multicast streams that have a priority greater than the configured ecmp-opt-threshold.

The no form of this command removes the minutes value from the configuration.

Parameters 
minutes—
Specifies the hold time, in minutes, that applies after an interface has been added to the ECMP link.
Values—
2 to 600

 

mc-ecmp-balance-hold

Syntax 
mc-ecmp-balance-hold minutes
no mc-ecmp-balance-hold
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim mc-ecmp-balance-hold)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn pim mc-ecmp-balance-hold
Description 

This command configures the hold time for multicast balancing over ECMP links.

Parameters 
minutes—
Specifies the hold time, in minutes, that applies after an interface has been added to the ECMP link.

17.163. mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Syntax 
mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled [rebalance]
no mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn pim mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled
Description 

This command enables hash-based multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links and causes PIM joins to be distributed over the multiple ECMP paths based on a hash of S and G (and possibly next-hop IP address). When a link in the ECMP set is removed, the multicast flows that were using that link are redistributed over the remaining ECMP links using the same hash algorithm. When a link is added to the ECMP set new joins may be allocated to the new link based on the hash algorithm, but existing multicast flows using the other ECMP links stay on those links until they are pruned.

Hash-based multicast balancing is supported for both IPv4 and IPv6.

This command cannot be used together with the mc-ecmp-balance command. Using this command and the lag-usage-optimization command on mixed port speed LAGs is not recommended, because some groups may be forwarded incorrectly.

The no form of this command disables the hash-based multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links.

The no form of this command means that the use of multiple ECMP paths if enabled at the config>router or config>service>vprn context is controlled by the existing implementation and CLI commands mc-ecmp-balance.

Default 

no mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Parameters 
rebalance—
Specifies to rebalance flows to newly added links immediately, instead of waiting until they are pruned.

mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Syntax 
[no] mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled [rebalance]
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>pim mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled)
Full Contexts 
configure router pim mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled
Description 

This command enables hash-based multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links and causes PIM joins to be distributed over the multiple ECMP paths based on a hash of S and G (and possibly next-hop IP address). When a link in the ECMP set is removed, the multicast flows that were using that link are redistributed over the remaining ECMP links using the same hash algorithm. When a link is added to the ECMP set new joins may be allocated to the new link based on the hash algorithm, but existing multicast flows using the other ECMP links stay on those links until they are pruned.

Hash-based multicast balancing is supported for both IPv4 and IPv6.

This command cannot be used together with the mc-ecmp-balance command. Using this command and the lag-usage-optimization command on mixed port speed LAGs is not recommended, because some groups may be forwarded incorrectly.

The no form of this command disables the hash-based multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links.

Default 

no mc-ecmp-hashing-enabled

Parameters 
rebalance—
Specifies to rebalance flows to newly added links immediately, instead of waiting until they are pruned.

17.164. mc-endpoint

mc-endpoint

Syntax 
[no] mc-endpoint
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer mc-endpoint)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-endpoint
Description 

This command specifies that the endpoint is multi-chassis. This value should be the same on both MC-EP peers for the pseudowires that must be part of the same group.

The no form of this command removes the endpoint from the MC-EP. Single chassis behavior applies.

Default 

no mc-endpoint

mc-endpoint

Syntax 
[no] mc-endpoint
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer mc-endpoint)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-endpoint
Description 

This command specifies that the endpoint is multi-chassis. This value should be the same on both MC-EP peers for the pseudowires that must be part of the same group.

The no form of this command removes the endpoint from the MC-EP. Single chassis behavior applies.

Default 

no mc-endpoint

mc-endpoint

Syntax 
mc-endpoint mc-ep-id
no mc-endpoint
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>endpoint mc-endpoint)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls endpoint mc-endpoint
Description 

This command specifies the identifier associated with the multi-chassis endpoint. This value should be the same on both MC-EP peers for the pseudowires that must be part of the same group.

The no form of this command removes the endpoint from the MC-EP. Single chassis behavior applies.

Default 

no mc-endpoint

Parameters 
mc-ep-id—
Specifies a multi-chassis endpoint ID
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

17.165. mc-enh-load-balancing

mc-enh-load-balancing

Syntax 
[no] mc-enh-load-balancing
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>load-balancing mc-enh-load-balancing)
Full Contexts 
configure system load-balancing mc-enh-load-balancing
Description 

This command enables enhanced egress multicast load balancing behavior for Layer 3 multicast. When enabled, the router will spray the multicast traffic using as hash inputs from the packet based on lsr-load-balancing, l4-load-balancing and system-ip-load-balancing configurations. That is, an ingress LER or IP PE will spray traffic based on the IP hash criteria: SA/DA + optional Layer 4 port + optional system IP egress LER or LSR - will spray traffic based on label or IP hash criteria outlined above or both based on configuration of lsr-load-balancing, l4-load-balancing, and system-ip-load-balancing.

The no form of the command preserves the default behavior for per flow hashing of multicast traffic.

Default 

no mc-enh-load-balancing

17.166. mc-ep-peer

mc-ep-peer

Syntax 
mc-ep-peer name
mc-ep-peer ip-address
no mc-ep-peer
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>endpoint>mc-ep mc-ep-peer)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls endpoint mc-endpoint mc-ep-peer
Description 

This command adds multi-chassis endpoint object.

The no form of this command removes the multi-chassis endpoint object.

Default 

no mc-ep-peer

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the name of the multi-chassis endpoint peer
ip-address—
Specifies the IP address of multi-chassis endpoint peer

17.167. mc-fr-profile-egress

mc-fr-profile-egress

Syntax 
mc-fr-profile-egress profile-id [create]
no mc-fr-profile-egress profile-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos mc-fr-profile-egress)
Full Contexts 
configure qos mc-fr-profile-egress
Description 

This command creates a profile for the user to configure the egress QoS parameters of an MLFR bundle or an FRF.12 UNI/NNI link. A maximum of 128 egress QoS profiles may be created on the system.

The no form of this command deletes the profile.

Parameters 
profile-id—
Specifies the profile number.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

create—
Required parameter when creating a multi-class Frame Relay egress profile.

17.168. mc-fr-profile-ingress

mc-fr-profile-ingress

Syntax 
mc-fr-profile-ingress profile-id [create]
no mc-fr-profile-ingress profile-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos mc-fr-profile-ingress)
Full Contexts 
configure qos mc-fr-profile-ingress
Description 

This command creates a profile for the user to configure the ingress QoS parameters of a Multi-Link Frame Relay (MLFR) bundle. A maximum of 128 ingress QoS profiles may be created on the system.

The no form of this command deletes the profile.

Parameters 
profile-id—
Specifies the profile number.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

create—
Required parameter when creating a multi-class Frame Relay ingress profile.

17.169. mc-handover

mc-handover

Syntax 
mc-handover percentage
no mc-handover
Context 
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-info-plcy>video-policy>video-if>hd mc-handover)
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-info-plcy>video-policy>video-if>pip mc-handover)
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>mcast-info-plcy>video-policy>video-if>sd mc-handover)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy video-policy video-interface hd mc-handover
configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy video-policy video-interface pip mc-handover
configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy video-policy video-interface sd mc-handover
Description 

This command sets the rate at which the Fast Channel Change (FCC) server will send unicast data to the FCC client during the handover to the multicast stream.

The no form of the command returns the parameter to the default value.

Default 

mc-handover 25

Parameters 
percentage—
Specifies the percentage of nominal bandwidth.
Values—

HD:

0 to 100

SD and PIP:

0 to 600

 

Default—
25

17.170. mc-ipsec

mc-ipsec

Syntax 
[no] mc-ipsec
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer mc-ipsec)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-ipsec
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multi-chassis peer parameters.

17.171. mc-ipsec-non-forwarding

mc-ipsec-non-forwarding

Syntax 
[no] mc-ipsec-non-forwarding tunnel-grp-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>vrrp>policy>priority-event mc-ipsec-non-forwarding)
Full Contexts 
configure vrrp policy priority-event mc-ipsec-non-forwarding
Description 

This command configures an instance of a multi-chassis IPsec tunnel-group Priority Event used to override the base priority value of a VRRP virtual router instance depending on the operational state of the event.

Parameters 
tunnel-grp-id—
Identifies the multi-chassis IPsec tunnel group whose non-forwarding state is monitored by this priority control event.

17.172. mc-lag

mc-lag

Syntax 
[no] mc-lag
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer mc-lag)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-lag
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multi-chassis LAG operations and related parameters.

The no form of this command administratively disables multi-chassis LAG. The mc-lag command can only be issued only when MC LAG is shutdown.

Default 

no mc-lag

mc-lag

Syntax 
[no] mc-lag
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer mc-lag)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-lag
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multi-chassis LAG operations and related parameters.

The no form of this command administratively disables multi-chassis LAG. MC-LAG can be issued only when mc-lag is shutdown.

Default 

no mc-lag

mc-lag

Syntax 
mc-lag
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-cfm>redundancy mc-lag)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-cfm redundancy mc-lag
Description 

This command enables the context under which the MC-LAG specific ETH-CFM redundancy parameters are to be configured

17.173. mc-maximum-routes

mc-maximum-routes

Syntax 
mc-maximum-routes number [log-only] [threshold threshold]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn mc-maximum-routes)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn mc-maximum-routes
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of multicast routes that can be held in the form of this command in a VPN routing or forwarding (VRF) context. When this limit is reached, a log and SNMP trap are sent. If the log-only parameter is not specified and the maximum-routes value is set below the existing number of routes in a VRF, then no new joins are processed.

The no form of this command disables the limit of multicast routes within a VRF context. Issue the no form of this command only when the VPRN instance is shutdown.

Default 

no mc-maximum-routes

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the maximum number of routes to be held in a VRF context.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

log-only—
Specifies that if the maximum limit is reached, only log the event. log-only does not disable the learning of new routes.
threshold
Specifies the percentage at which a warning log message and SNMP trap should be sent.
Values—
0 to 100

 

Default—
10

mc-maximum-routes

Syntax 
mc-maximum-routes number [log-only] [threshold threshold]
no mc-maximum-routes
Context 
[Tree] (config>router mc-maximum-routes)
Full Contexts 
configure router mc-maximum-routes
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of multicast routes that can be held within a VPN routing/forwarding (VRF) context. When this limit is reached, a log and SNMP trap are sent. If the log-only parameter is not specified and the maximum-routes value is set below the existing number of routes in a VRF, then no new joins will be processed.

The no form of this command disables the limit of multicast routes within a VRF context. Issue the no form of this command only when the VPRN instance is shutdown.

Default 

no mc-maximum-routes

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the maximum number of routes to be held in a VRF context
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

log-only—
Specifies that if the maximum limit is reached, only log the event. log-only does not disable the learning of new routes
threshold
The percentage at which a warning log message and SNMP trap should be sent.
Values—
0 to 100

 

Default—
10

17.174. mc-ring

mc-ring

Syntax 
mc-ring
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer mc-ring)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-ring
Description 

This command enables the context to configure the multi-chassis ring parameters.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

mc-ring

mc-ring

Syntax 
[no] mc-ring
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy>mc>peer mc-ring)
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync mc-ring)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer mc-ring
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer sync mc-ring
Description 

This command enables the context to configure the multi-chassis ring parameters.

Default 

no mc-ring

17.175. mcac

mcac

Syntax 
mcac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>pw-template>igmp-snooping mcac)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>snooping mcac)
Full Contexts 
configure service pw-template igmp-snooping mcac
configure service vpls mesh-sdp snooping mcac
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multicast CAC policy parameters and constraints for this interface.

mcac

Syntax 
mcac
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only>igmp-snp mcac)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters igmp-snooping mcac
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multicast CAC parameters.

mcac

Syntax 
mcac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping mcac)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>mld-snooping mcac)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping mcac)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mld-snooping mcac)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping mcac)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>mld-snooping mcac)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping mcac
configure service vpls mesh-sdp mld-snooping mcac
configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping mcac
configure service vpls sap mld-snooping mcac
configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping mcac
configure service vpls spoke-sdp mld-snooping mcac
Description 

This command configures multicast CAC policy and constraints for this interface.

mcac

Syntax 
mcac
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>grp-if mcac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>igmp>if mcac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>grp-if mcac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mld>if mcac)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim>if mcac)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn igmp group-interface mcac
configure service vprn igmp interface mcac
configure service vprn mld group-interface mcac
configure service vprn mld interface mcac
configure service vprn pim interface mcac
Description 

This command configures multicast CAC policy and constraints for this interface.

mcac

Syntax 
mcac
Context 
[Tree] (config>router mcac)
[Tree] (config>router>igmp>group-interface mcac)
[Tree] (config>router>igmp>interface mcac)
[Tree] (config>router>mld>group-interface mcac)
[Tree] (config>router>mld>interface mcac)
[Tree] (config>router>pim>if mcac)
Full Contexts 
configure router igmp group-interface mcac
configure router igmp interface mcac
configure router mcac
configure router mld group-interface mcac
configure router mld interface mcac
configure router pim interface mcac
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multicast CAC parameters.

17.176. mcast-capacity

mcast-capacity

Syntax 
mcast-capacity primary-percentage secondary secondary-percentage
no mcast-capacity
Context 
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>chassis-level>plane-capacity mcast-capacity)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management chassis-level per-mcast-plane-capacity mcast-capacity
Description 

This command configures the primary and secondary multicast plane capacities used when the full complement of possible switch fabrics in the system is not up (at least one possible switch fabric is not provisioned or is down). The rates are defined as a percentage of the total multicast plane capacity which is configured using the total-capacity command.

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Default 

mcast-capacity 87.50 secondary 87.50

Parameters 
primary-percentage —
Specifies the percentage of the total multicast plane capacity to be used for primary multicast planes.
secondary-percentage
Specifies the percentage of the total multicast plane capacity to be used for secondary multicast planes.
Values—
0.01 to 100

 

17.177. mcast-ipv4

mcast-ipv4

Syntax 
[no] mcast-ipv4
Context 
[Tree] (config>cflowd>collector>export-filter>family mcast-ipv4)
Full Contexts 
configure cflowd collector export-filter family mcast-ipv4
Description 

This command filters multicast IPv4 flow data from being sent to the associated collector.

The no form of this command removes the filter, allowing multicast IPv4 flow data to be sent to the associated collector.

Default 

no mcast-ipv4

17.178. mcast-ipv6

mcast-ipv6

Syntax 
[no] mcast-ipv6
Context 
[Tree] (config>cflowd>collector>export-filter>family mcast-ipv6)
Full Contexts 
configure cflowd collector export-filter family mcast-ipv6
Description 

This command filters multicast IPv6 flow data from being sent to the associated collector.

The no form of this command removes the filter, allowing multicast IPv6 flow data to be sent to the associated collector.

Default 

no mcast-ipv6

17.179. mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope

mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope

Syntax 
mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope {mac-based |sg-based}
no mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope
Description 

This command specifies the forwarding scope used for IPv6 multicast traffic when PIM snooping for IPv6 is enabled.

By default, the scope is mac-based; IPv6 snooped multicast traffic is forwarded is based on the low-order 32 bits of the destination IPv6 address.

When the scope is configured as sg-based, the IPv6 snooped multicast traffic is forwarded based on both its full source (if specified in the join) and destination IPv6 address. SG-based forwarding is only supported on FP3- (or higher) based line cards.

PIM snooping for IPv6 must be disabled to change the forwarding mode within a VPLS service between mac-based and sg-based.

Default 

mcast-ipv6-snooping-scope mac-based

Parameters 
mac-based—
Enables forwarding for PIM-snooped IPv6 multicast traffic based on the low-order 32 bits of its destination IPv6 address.
sg-based—
Enables forwarding for PIM-snooped IPv6 multicast traffic based on its full source (if specified in the join) and destination IPv6 address.

17.180. mcast-management

mcast-management

Syntax 
mcast-management
Context 
[Tree] (config mcast-management)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multicast management parameters. The mcast-management CLI node contains the bandwidth-policy and multicast-info-policy definitions. The bandwidth-policy is used to manage the ingress multicast paths into the switch fabric. The multicast-info-policy defines how each multicast channel is handled by the system. The policy may be used by the ingress multicast bandwidth manager, the ECMP path manager and the egress multicast CAC manager.

The mcast-management node always exists and contains the default bandwidth-policy and the default multicast-info-policy. Enter the mcast-management node when editing, deleting or creating a bandwidth policy or multicast info policy. The default bandwidth policy and multicast-info-policy cannot be edited or deleted.

A chassis-level node within multicast-management is used to control the switch fabric multicast planes replication limits. The switch fabric multicast planes are the individual multicast spatial replication contexts available in the system.

17.181. mcast-path-management

mcast-path-management

Syntax 
mcast-path-management
Context 
[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress mcast-path-management)
Full Contexts 
configure card fp ingress mcast-path-management
Description 

This CLI node contains the forwarding plane settings for ingress multicast path management. Enter the node to configure the bandwidth-policy and the administrative state of ingress multicast path management.

17.182. mcast-pool

mcast-pool

Syntax 
mcast-pool percent-of-total percent-of-buffers resv-cbs percent-of-pool slope-policy policy-name
no mcast-pool
Context 
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>bw-plcy mcast-pool)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management bandwidth-policy mcast-pool
Description 

This command configures the ingress multicast path management buffer pool. The pool is used by the primary and secondary path queues through which all ingress managed multicast traffic must flow. The parameters may be used to configure the size of the pool relative to the total ingress buffer space, the amount of reserved CBS buffers within the pool and the slope policy used to manage early congestion detection functions in the shared portion of the pool.

Care should be taken when managing the buffer pool space as changes to the systems buffer pool behavior can have negative effects on multicast and unicast forwarding.

Sizing the Pool

The percent-of-total command defines how much of the total ingress buffer pool space for the MDA is dedicated for multicast channels managed by the bandwidth policy. Since multicast typically has a higher scheduling priority through the switch fabric, the buffer pool does not need to be large. By default, the system reserves 10% of the buffers on the ingress side of the MDA once multicast path management is enabled.

Reserved CBS Portion of the Pool

The multicast pool is divided into two portions; reserved and shared. The reserved portion is used by the multicast path queues until they cross there individual CBS thresholds. Since the CBS thresholds are configured as percentages and the percentages can oversubscribe the reserved portion of the pool, it is possible for some of the queues CBS buffer allocation to be met by the shared portion of the pool. By default, 50% of the pool is defined as reserved. This may be changed using the resv-cbs percentage parameter.

Shared Portion WRED Slopes

The shared portion of the buffer pool is used by queues that have crossed over their CBS thresholds. Since the total MBS values for the multicast path queues may oversubscribe the pool size, a buffer congestion control mechanism is supported within the pool in the form of two WRED slopes. The slope-policy parameter defines how the slopes are configured and whether they are activated. Each packet entering a path queue is defined as high or low priority within the queue based on the channel’s preference value relative to the cong-priority-threshold command. When getting a shared buffer of a high priority packet, the high WRED slope is used. Low priority packets use the low WRED slope.

The no form of this command returns the managed multicast path pool to its default settings.

Parameters 
percent-of-buffers
Specifies the percentage of ingress buffers that is allocated to the multicast pool.
Values—
1 to 50

 

Default—
10
percent-of-pool
Specifies the percentage of the pool that is reserved for multicast path queues within their CBS threshold.
Values—
1 to 100

 

Default—
50
slope-policy-name
Specifies the WRED slopes within the multicast pool. Once a slope policy is associated with a buffer pool, it cannot be deleted.
Default—
default

17.183. mcast-reporting

mcast-reporting

Syntax 
[no] mcast-reporting
Context 
[Tree] (config>sub-mgmt>igmp-policy mcast-reporting)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt igmp-policy mcast-reporting
Description 

This command enables the context to configure mcast reporting.

17.184. mcast-reporting-dest

mcast-reporting-dest

Syntax 
mcast-reporting-dest dest-name [create]
no mcast-reporting-dest dest-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>mcast-management mcast-reporting-dest)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management mcast-reporting-dest
Description 

This command creates a multicast reporting destination hierarchy in CLI under which parameters defining this destination can be specified. The destination refers to an external node that collects and analyze IGMP events.

The multicast reporting destination is associated with a name that each subscriber can reference to send the IGMP related events.

It can be also referenced in the host tracking policy in case that IGMP events are related to the host tracking feature.

The no form of this command removes the destination name from the configuration.

Parameters 
dest-name—
Specifies the multicast reporting destination name.

mcast-reporting-dest

Syntax 
[no] mcast-reporting-dest [dest-name]
Context 
[Tree] (debug>mcast-mgmt mcast-reporting-dest)
Full Contexts 
debug mcast-management mcast-reporting-dest
Description 

This command debugs multicast path management reporting destinations and applies only to the 7750 SR.

mcast-reporting-dest

Syntax 
mcast-reporting-dest dest-name
no mcast-reporting-dest
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>igmp-policy>mcast-reporting mcast-reporting-dest)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>host-tracking-policy>mcast-reporting mcast-reporting-dest)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt host-tracking-policy mcast-reporting mcast-reporting-dest
configure subscriber-mgmt igmp-policy mcast-reporting mcast-reporting-dest
Description 

This command references the multicast reporting destination to which IGMP related events are exported.

The multicast reporting destination is referenced with the subscriber itself or within the Host-Tracking-Policy.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Parameters 
dest-name—
Specifies the name of the multicast reporting destination up to 32 characters.

17.185. mcast-upstream-asbr-frr

mcast-upstream-asbr-frr

Syntax 
[no] mcast-upstream-asbr-frr
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ldp mcast-upstream-asbr-frr)
Full Contexts 
configure router ldp mcast-upstream-asbr-frr
Description 

This command enables ASBR MoFRR.

When ASBR MoFRR is enabled, the local leaf will perform MoFRR for multiple ASBRs; for example, if there are two ASBRs, the local leaf will select one ASBR as the primary and another ASBR as the backup.

The no form of the command disables ASBR MoFRR.

If the mcast-upstream-frr command is enabled, disabling ASBR MoFRR will only allow IGP MoFRR in the local AS; for example, a single ASBR will be selected and two separate, disjointed paths will be selected as the primary and backup LSPs from the local leaf to ASBR.

If the mcast-upstream-frr command is disabled, disabling ASBR MoFRR will disable MoFRR entirely.

Default 

no mcast-upstream-asbr-frr

17.186. mcast-upstream-frr

mcast-upstream-frr

Syntax 
[no] mcast-upstream-frr
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ldp mcast-upstream-frr)
Full Contexts 
configure router ldp mcast-upstream-frr
Description 

This command enables the mLDP fast upstream switchover feature.

When this command is enabled and LDP is resolving a mLDP FEC received from a downstream LSR, it checks if an ECMP next-hop or a LFA next-hop exist to the root LSR node. If LDP finds one, it programs a primary ILM on the interface corresponding to the primary next-hop and a backup ILM on the interface corresponding to the ECMP or LFA next-hop. LDP then sends the corresponding labels to both upstream LSR nodes. In normal operation, the primary ILM accepts packets while the backup ILM drops them. If the interface or the upstream LSR of the primary ILM goes down causing the LDP session to go down, the backup ILM will then start accepting packets.

In order to make use of the ECMP next-hop, the user must configure the ecmp value in the system to at least 2 using the following command:

config>router>ecmp

In order to make use of the LFA next-hop, the user must enable LFA using the following commands:

config>router>isis>loopfree-alternates

config>router>ospf>loopfree-alternates

Enabling IP FRR or LDP FRR features is not strictly required since LDP only needs to know where the alternate next-hop to the root LSR is to be able to send the Label Mapping message to program the backup ILM at the initial signaling of the tree. Thus enabling the LFA option is sufficient. If however, unicast IP and LDP prefixes need to be protected, then these features and the mLDP fast upstream switchover can be enabled concurrently.

The mLDP FRR fast switchover relies on the fast detection of loss of **LDP session** to the upstream peer to which the primary ILM label had been advertised. We strongly recommended to perform the following:

  1. Enable BFD on all LDP interfaces to upstream LSR nodes. When BFD detects the loss of the last adjacency to the upstream LSR, it will bring down immediately the LDP session which will cause the IOM to activate the backup ILM.
  2. If there is a concurrent TLDP adjacency to the same upstream LSR node, enable BFD on the T-LDP peer in addition to enabling it on the interface.
  3. Enable the ldp-sync-timer option on all interfaces to the upstream LSR nodes. If an LDP session to the upstream LSR to which the primary ILM is resolved goes down for any other reason than a failure of the interface or of the upstream LSR, routing and LDP will go out of sync. This means the backup ILM will remain activated until the next time SPF is rerun by IGP. By enabling IGP-LDP synchronization feature, the advertised link metric will be changed to max value as soon as the LDP session goes down. This in turn will trigger an SPF and LDP will likely download a new set of primary and backup ILMs.

The no form of this command disables the fast upstream switchover for mLDP FECs.

Default 

no mcast-upstream-frr

17.187. mcast-vpn-ipv4

mcast-vpn-ipv4

Syntax 
mcast-vpn-ipv4 send send-limit receive [none]
mcast-vpn-ipv4 send send-limit
no mcast-vpn-ipv4
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4
configure router bgp group add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4
configure router bgp group neighbor add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv4
Description 

This command configures the add-paths capability for multicast IPv4 VPN routes. By default, add-paths is not enabled for multicast IPv4 VPN routes.

The maximum number of multicast paths per IPv4 VPN prefix to send is the configured send-limit, which is a mandatory parameter. The capability to receive multiple multicast paths per prefix from a peer is configurable using the receive keyword, which is optional. If the receive keyword is not included in the command, receive capability is enabled by default. The none option disables the receive capability.

The no form of this command disables add-paths support for multicast IPv4 VPN routes, causing sessions established using add-paths for multicast IPv4 VPN to go down and come back up without the add-paths capability.

Default 

no mcast-vpn-ipv4

Parameters 
send-limit—
Specifies the maximum number of paths per multicast IPv4 VPN prefix that are allowed to be advertised to add-paths peers. The actual number of advertised routes may be less. If the value is none, the router does not negotiate the send capability with respect to multicast IPv4 VPN AFI/SAFI.
Values—
1 to 16, none

 

receive—
Specifies that the router negotiates to receive multiple multicast routes per IPv4 VPN prefix.
none—
Specifies that the router does not negotiate to receive multiple multicast routes per IPv4 VPN prefix.

17.188. mcast-vpn-ipv6

mcast-vpn-ipv6

Syntax 
mcast-vpn-ipv6 send send-limit receive [none]
mcast-vpn-ipv6 send send-limit
no mcast-vpn-ipv6
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6
configure router bgp group add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6
configure router bgp group neighbor add-paths mcast-vpn-ipv6
Description 

This command configures the add-paths capability for multicast IPv6 VPN routes. By default, add-paths is not enabled for multicast IPv6 VPN routes.

The maximum number of multicast paths per IPv6 VPN prefix to send is the configured send-limit, which is a mandatory parameter. The capability to receive multiple multicast paths per prefix from a peer is configurable using the receive keyword, which is optional. If the receive keyword is not included in the command, receive capability is enabled by default. The none option disables the receive capability.

The no form of this command disables add-paths support for multicast IPv6 VPN routes, causing sessions established using add-paths for multicast IPv6 VPN to go down and come back up without the add-paths capability.

Default 

no mcast-vpn-ipv6

Parameters 
send-limit—
Specifies the maximum number of paths per multicast IPv6 VPN prefix that are allowed to be advertised to add-paths peers. The actual number of advertised routes may be less. If the value is none, the router does not negotiate the send capability with respect to multicast IPv6 VPN AFI/SAFI.
Values—
1 to 16, none

 

receive—
Specifies that the router negotiates to receive multiple multicast routes per IPv6 VPN prefix.
none—
Specifies that the router does not negotiate to receive multiple multicast routes per IPv6 VPN prefix.

17.189. mcc-mnc-prefix

mcc-mnc-prefix

Syntax 
mcc-mnc-prefix imsi-prefix-string
no mcc-mnc-prefix
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>gtp>gtp-fltr>imsi-apn-fltr>entry mcc-mnc-prefix)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group gtp gtp-filter imsi-apn-filter entry mcc-mnc-prefix
Description 

This command configures a matching condition for the IMSI (MCC-MNC) prefix.

Parameters 
imsi-prefix-string—
Specifies a string of 1 to 6 decimal digits representing the IMSI prefix to be matched against the IMSI IE of the packet, or the special value ANY_IMSI to indicate that an IMSI IE must be present as a matching condition regardless of the IMSI IE value.

If no MCC-MNC prefix is specified, the entry will match GTP packets that have an IMSI IE containing any value.

Values—
0 to 999999, ANY_IMSI

 

17.190. mcr-default-gtw

mcr-default-gtw

Syntax 
mcr-default-gtw
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mcr-default-gtw)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mcr-default-gtw
Description 

This command enables the context to configure the default gateway information when using Dual Homing in L2-TPSDA. The IP and MAC address of the default gateway used for subscribers on an L2 MC-Ring are configured in this context. After a ring heals or fails, the system sends out a gratuitous ARP on an active ring SAP in order to attract traffic from subscribers on the ring with connectivity to that SAP.

17.191. mcs

mcs

Syntax 
mcs [detail]
no mcs
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>pim-snooping mcs)
Full Contexts 
debug service id pim-snooping mcs
Description 

This command enables or disables debugging for PIM snooping multi-chassis synchronization.

Parameters 
detail
Provides detailed debugging information

mcs

Syntax 
mcs [ip-int-name]
no mcs
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>igmp mcs)
Full Contexts 
debug router igmp mcs
Description 

This command enables debugging for IGMP multicast servers (MCS).

The no form of the command disables the IGMP interface debugging for the specifies interface name.

Parameters 
ip-int-name—
Debugs the information associated with the specified IP interface name.
Values—
IP interface address

 

17.192. mcs-interval

mcs-interval

Syntax 
mcs-interval minutes
mcs-interval use-update-interval
no mcs-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>acct-plcy mcs-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt radius-accounting-policy mcs-interval
Description 

This command specifies the interval at which usage counters of the subscriber is synchronized. The minutes value is mutually exclusive with the use-update-interval keyword.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default 

no mcs-interval

Parameters 
minutes—
Specifies the interval, in minutes, at which accounting data of the subscriber is synchronized.
Values—
5 to 60

 

use-update-interval—
Synchronizes subscriber accounting data at the same time as the RADIUS interim-update.

17.193. mcs-peer

mcs-peer

Syntax 
mcs-peer ip-address sync-tag [sync-tag]
no mcs-peer
Context 
[Tree] (config>python>py-pol>cache mcs-peer)
Full Contexts 
configure python python-policy cache mcs-peer
Description 

This command specifies the MCS peer’s address and sync-tag for syncing the cached entries of the python-policy. The sync-tag must be match on both chassis.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies the IPv4 address of the MCS peer.
sync-tag—
Specifies the tag for sync, up to 32 characters.

mcs-peer

Syntax 
mcs-peer ip-address sync-tag name
no mcs-peer
Context 
[Tree] (config>aaa>diam-peer-plcy>proxy mcs-peer)
Full Contexts 
configure aaa diameter-peer-policy proxy mcs-peer
Description 

This command configures the IP address and the synchronization tag for the multi-chassis synchronization (MCS) peer.

This command is applicable only to legacy implementations of Diameter base in SR OS.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the MCS peer.
Values—

ipv4-address:

a.b.c.d

ipv6-address:

x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)

x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d

x - [0 to FFFF]H

d - [0 to 255]D

 

name—
Specifies the sync tag name, up to 32 characters. The name must match on both nodes for the pair of redundant diameter proxies.

17.194. md

md

Syntax 
md file-url
Context 
[Tree] (file md)
Full Contexts 
file md
Description 

This command creates a new directory in a file system.

Directories can only be created one level at a time.

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the directory name to be created.
Values—

local-url

[cflash-id/][file-path] up to 200 characters, including cflash-id directory length up to 99 each

remote-url

[{ftp:// | tftp://}login:pswd@remote-locn/][file-path]

up to 247 characters

directory length up to 99 characters each

remote-locn

[hostname | ipv4-address | [ipv6-address]]

ipv4-address

a.b.c.d

ipv6-address

x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x[-interface]

x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d[-interface]

x - [0 to FFFF]H

d - [0 to 255]D

interface - up to 32 characters, for link local addresses 255

cflash-id

cf1:, cf1-A:, cf1-B:, cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B:, cf3:, cf3-A:, cf3-B:

 

17.195. md-auto-id

md-auto-id

Syntax 
md-auto-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-cfm md-auto-id)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-cfm md-auto-id
Description 

This command automatically assigns numerical index values for ma-index and md-index in model-driven management interfaces.

Classic management interfaces use a numerical index as the primary key for ETH-CFM domains and associations. In model-driven interfaces, domains and associations use string names as keys. The domain and association can optionally be created without having to explicitly select and specify a numerical index in model-driven interfaces. In this case, SROS assigns an index using the configured index range.

md-auto-id

Syntax 
md-auto-id
 
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos md-auto-id)
Full Contexts 
configure qos md-auto-id
Description 

This command automatically assigns numerical ID values for QoS policies in model-driven (MD) management interfaces.

Classic management interfaces use a numerical policy ID as the primary key for sap-ingress, sap-egress, and network QoS policies. In model-driven interfaces, SAP and network policies use string names as keys. The SAP and network policies can optionally be created in MD interfaces without having to explicitly select and specify a numerical policy ID. In this case, SR OS assigns an ID using the configured ID range.

md-auto-id

Syntax 
md-auto-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>filter md-auto-id)
Full Contexts 
configure filter md-auto-id
Description 

This command automatically assigns numerical ID values for filter policies in model-driven management interfaces.

Classic management interfaces use a numerical filter ID as the primary key for IP filters, IPv6 filters, and MAC filters. In model-driven interfaces, IP, IPv6, and MAC filters use string names as keys. The filters can optionally be created in MD interfaces without having to explicitly select and specify a numerical filter ID. In this case, SR OS assigns an ID using the configured ID range.

md-auto-id

Syntax 
md-auto-id
 
Context 
[Tree] (config>service md-auto-id)
Full Contexts 
configure service md-auto-id
Description 

This command automatically assigns numerical ID values for services, customers, and PW templates in model-driven (MD) management interfaces.

Classic management interfaces use a numerical service ID, customer ID, and PW template ID as the primary key for services, customers, and PW templates. In model-driven interfaces, services, customers, and PW templates use string names as keys. The services, customers, and PW templates can optionally be created in MD interfaces without having to explicitly select and specify a numerical ID. In this case, SR OS assigns an ID using the configured ID range.

17.196. md-cli

md-cli

Syntax 
md-cli
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>cli md-cli)
Full Contexts 
configure system management-interface cli md-cli
Description 

This command enters the context to configure MD-CLI capabilities.

md-cli

Syntax 
md-cli
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>management-interface md-cli)
Full Contexts 
configure system security management-interface md-cli
Description 

This command enables the context to configure hash-control for the MD-CLI interface.

17.197. md-index-range

md-index-range

Syntax 
md-index-range start md-index end md-index
no md-index-range
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-cfm>md-auto-id md-index-range)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-cfm md-auto-id md-index-range
Description 

This command specifies the range of indexes used by SROS to automatically assign an index to ETH-CFM domains that are created in model-driven interfaces without an index explicitly specified by the user or client.

A domain created with an explicitly-specified index cannot use an index in this range. In classic CLI and SNMP, the ID range cannot be changed while objects exist inside the previous or new range. In MD interfaces, the range can be changed, which causes any previously existing objects in the previous ID range to be deleted and re-created using a new ID in the new range.

The no form of this command removes the range values.

See the md-auto-id command for further details.

Parameters 
start md-index
Specifies the lower value of the index range. The value must be less than or equal to the end value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

end md-index
Specifies the upper value of the index range. The value must be greater than or equal to the start value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

17.198. md-interfaces

md-interfaces

Syntax 
[no] md-interfaces
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>management-interface>output-authorization md-interfaces)
Full Contexts 
configure system security management-interface output-authorization md-interfaces
Description 

This command controls output authorization of commands or RPCs for model-driven interfaces that display configuration or state.

When enabled, output authorization is performed for the following commands:

  1. MD-CLI info and compare commands
  2. NETCONF <get> and <get-config> RPCs
  3. gNMI Get RPC

When disabled, output authorization is not performed, which may significantly decrease the system response time by reducing command authorization requests, especially when remote AAA servers are used. Input to edit configuration is always authorized based on the AAA configuration.

By default, authorization checks are performed for configuration and state output.

The no form of this command disables authorization checks, allowing the output to be displayed immediately.

Default 

md-interfaces

17.199. mda

mda

Syntax 
[no] mda mda-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>isa>wlan-gw-group mda)
Full Contexts 
configure isa wlan-gw-group mda
Description 

This command enables an ISA for WLAN-GW functionality.

The no form of this command removes the ISA from the WLAN-GW configuration.

Parameters 
mda-id—
Indicates the IOM and MDA slot in format slot/mda.
Values—
slot — 1 to 10
mda — 1 to 2

 

mda

Syntax 
[no] mda mda-slot
Context 
[Tree] (config>card mda)
Full Contexts 
configure card mda
Description 

This mandatory command enables access to a card’s MDA CLI context to configure MDAs.

Parameters 
mda-slot—
Specifies the MDA slot number to be configured. Slots are numbered 1 and 2. On vertically oriented slots, the top MDA slot is number 1, and the bottom MDA slot is number 2. On horizontally oriented slots, the left MDA is number 1, and the right MDA slot is number 2.
Values—
1, 2

 

mda

Syntax 
[no] mda mda-slot
Context 
[Tree] (config>card>xiom mda)
Full Contexts 
configure card xiom mda
Description 

Configures an MDA-s in one of the slots of an XIOM.

Parameters 
mda-slot—
Specifies the MDA-s slot number.
Values—
1 or 2

 

mda

Syntax 
[no] mda mda-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>egress>mfib-allowed-mda-destinations mda)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>egress>mfib-allowed-mda-destinations mda)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mesh-sdp egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations mda
configure service vpls spoke-sdp egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations mda
Description 

This command specifies an MFIB-allowed MDA destination for an SDP binding configured in the system.

Parameters 
mda-id—
Specifies an MFIB-allowed MDA destination
Values—

slot/mda

slot: 1 to 10

mda: 1, 2

slot/xiom/mda

slot: 1 to 10

xiom: “x1” or “x2”

mda: 1, 2

 

mda

Syntax 
[no] mda mda-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>isa>tunnel-grp mda)
Full Contexts 
configure isa tunnel-group mda
Description 

This command specifies the MDA ID of the MS-ISA as the member of tunnel-group with multi-active enabled. Up to 16 MDA could be configured under the same tunnel-group.

Parameters 
mda-id—
Specifies the id of MS-ISA.
Values—
iom-slot-id/mda-slot-id

 

mda

Syntax 
mda mda-id [drain]
no mda mda-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>isa>lns-group mda)
Full Contexts 
configure isa lns-group mda
Description 

This command configures an ISA LNS group MDA.

The no form of the command removes the MDA ID from the LNS group configuration.

Parameters 
mda-id—
Specifies the MDA identifier.
Values—

mda-id:

slot/mda

slot: 1 to 10

mda: 1, 2

 

drain—
Prevents new L2TP sessions being associated with the ISA. If an ISA is removed from the lns-group or if the lns-group be shutdown all associated L2TP sessions will be immediately terminated (and L2TP CDN messages sent to the L2TP peer). View show commands to determine which ISA is terminating which session (show router l2tp session).

mda

Syntax 
[no] mda mda-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>isa>nat-group mda)
Full Contexts 
configure isa nat-group mda
Description 

This command configures an ISA NAT group MDA.

Parameters 
mda-id—
Specifies the MDA ID in the slot/mda format.
Values—
slot: 1 to 10
mda: 1 to 16
Note:

Available parameter values may differ by platform.

 

mda

Syntax 
[no] mda mda-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>pw-template>egress>mfib-mda mda)
Full Contexts 
configure service pw-template egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations mda
Description 

This command specifies an MFIB-allowed media adapter destination for an SDP binding configured in the system.

Parameters 
mda-id—
Specifies an MFIB-allowed media adapters destination.
Values—
1, 2

 

17.200. mda-type

mda-type

Syntax 
mda-type mda-type [level mda-level]
no mda-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>card>mda mda-type)
Full Contexts 
configure card mda mda-type
Description 

This mandatory command provisions a specific MDA type to the device configuration for the slot. The MDA can be preprovisioned but an MDA must be provisioned before ports can be configured. Ports can be configured once the MDA is properly provisioned.

A maximum of two MDAs can be provisioned on an IOM or XCM. To modify an MDA slot, shut down all port associations.

XMAs are provisioned using MDA commands. A medium severity alarm is generated if an MDA is inserted that does not match the MDA type configured for the slot. This alarm is cleared when the correct MDA is inserted or the configuration is modified. A high severity alarm is raised when an administratively enabled MDA is removed from the chassis. This alarm is cleared if the either the correct MDA type is inserted or the configuration is modified. A low severity trap is issued if an MDA is removed that is administratively disabled.

An MDA can only be provisioned in a slot if the MDA type is allowed in the MDA slot. An error message is generated when an MDA is provisioned in a slot where it is not allowed.

Some MDA hardware can support two different firmware loads. One load includes the base Ethernet functionality, including 10G WAN mode, but does not include 1588 port-based timestamping. The second load includes the base Ethernet functionality and 1588 port-based timestamping, but does not include 10G WAN mode. These are identified as two MDA types that are the same, except for a “-ptp” suffix to indicate the second loadset; for example, x40-10gb-sfp and x40-10gb-sfp-ptp. A hard reset of the MDA occurs when switching between the two provisioned types.

A medium severity alarm is generated if an MDA is inserted that does not match the MDA type configured for the slot. This alarm is cleared when the correct MDA is inserted or the configuration is modified.

A high severity alarm is raised when an administratively enabled MDA is removed from the chassis. This alarm is cleared if the either the correct MDA type is inserted or the configuration is modified. A low severity trap is issued if an MDA is removed that is administratively disabled.

An alarm is raised if partial or complete MDA failure is detected. The alarm is cleared when the error condition ceases.

All parameters in the MDA context remain and if non-default values are required then their configuration remains as it is on all existing MDAs.

New generations of XMAs include variants controlled through hardware and software licensing. For these XMAs, the license level must be provisioned in addition to the MDA type. An XMA cannot become operational unless the provisioned license level matches the license level of the XMA installed into the slot. The set of license levels varies by MDA type.

The provisioned level controls aspects related to connector provisioning and the consumption of hardware egress queues and egress policers. Changes to the provisioned license level may be blocked if configuration that would not be permitted with the new target license level exists.

If the license level is not specified, the level is set to the highest license level for that XMA.

The no form of this command deletes the MDA from the configuration. The MDA must be administratively shut down before it can be deleted from the configuration.

Parameters 
mda-type—
Specifies the type of MDA selected for the slot position. Values for this attribute vary by platform and release. The release notes include a listing of all supported mda-types and their CLI strings. In addition, the command can be queried to check which mda-types are relevant for the active platform type. Some examples include me6-10gb-spf+ and x4-100g-cfp2.
mda-level—
Specifies the MDA level. Possible values vary by MDA type.

mda-type

Syntax 
mda-type isa-tunnel
no mda-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>card>mda mda-type)
Full Contexts 
configure card mda mda-type
Description 

This command provisions or de-provisions an MDA to or from the device configuration for the slot.

Parameters 
isa-tunnel—
Specifies the ISA tunnel.

mda-type

Syntax 
mda-type mda-type
no mda-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>card>xiom>mda mda-type)
Full Contexts 
configure card xiom mda mda-type
Description 

This command adds an MDA-s to the device configuration for the slot. The MDA-s type can be preprovisioned, which means that the MDA-s does not have to be installed in the chassis.

An MDA-s must be provisioned before a connector or a port can be configured.

An MDA-s can only be provisioned in a slot that is vacant. No other MDA-s can be provisioned (configured) for that particular slot. To reconfigure a slot position, use the no form of this command to remove the current information.

An MDA-s can only be provisioned in a slot if the MDA-s type is allowed in the slot. An error message is generated if an attempt is made to provision an MDA-s type that is not allowed.

If an MDA-s is inserted that does not match the configured MDA-s type for the slot, then a log event and a facility alarm are raised. The alarm is cleared when the correct MDA-s type is installed or the configuration is modified.

A log event and a facility alarm are raised if an administratively enabled MDA-s is removed from the chassis. The alarm is cleared when the correct MDA-s type is installed or the configuration is modified. A log event is issued when a MDA-s is removed that is administratively disabled.

The no form of this command removes the MDA-s from the configuration.

Parameters 
mda-type—
Specifies the type of MDA-s to be configured and installed in the slot. Values for this attribute vary by platform and release. The release notes include a listing of all supported mda-types and their CLI strings. In addition, the command can be queried to check which mda-types are relevant for the active platform type.

17.201. mdl

mdl

Syntax 
mdl {eic |lic |fic |unit |pfi |port |gen} mdl-string
no mdl [eic |lic |fic |unit |pfi |port |gen]
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3 mdl)
Full Contexts 
configure port tdm ds3 mdl
Description 

This command configures the maintenance data link (MDL) message for a DS-3/E-3.

This command is only applicable if the DS-3/E-3 is using C-bit framing (see the config>port>tdm>ds3 framing command).

The no form of this command removes the MDL string association and stops the transmission of any IDs.

Default 

no mdl

Parameters 
mdl-string —
Specifies an MDL message up to 38 characters long on a DS-3.
eic—
Specifies the equipment ID code up to 10 characters long.
lic—
Specifies the equipment ID code up to 11 characters long.
fic—
Specifies the ID code up to 10 characters long.
unit—
Specifies the unit ID code up to 6 characters long.
pfi—
Specifies the facility ID code up to 38 characters long.
port—
Specifies the port ID code up to 38 characters long.
gen—
Specifies the generator number to send in the MDL test signal message up to 38 characters long.

17.202. mdl-transmit

mdl-transmit

Syntax 
mdl-transmit {path |idle-signal |test-signal}
no mdl-transmit [path |idle-signal |test-signal]
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3 mdl-transmit)
Full Contexts 
configure port tdm ds3 mdl-transmit
Description 

This command enables the transmission of an MDL message on a DS-3/E-3 over channelized interface.

The no form of this command disables transmission of the specified message or all messages.

Default 

no mdl-transmit

Parameters 
path—
Specifies the MDL path message.
idle-signal—
Specifies the MDL idle signal message.
test-signal—
Specifies the MDL test signal message.

17.203. mdt-pim

mdt-pim

Syntax 
mdt-pim mode {asm |ssm} group-address group-ip-address
no mdt-pim
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn>pt>selective>multistream-spmsi mdt-pim)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn mvpn provider-tunnel selective multistream-spmsi mdt-pim
Description 

This command creates a multi-stream MDT that could match many (C-S,C-G)s into a single data MDT.

Parameters 
group-ip-address—
Specifies the group address of this data MDT, that is the provider group address.

17.204. mdt-type

mdt-type

Syntax 
mdt-type {sender-receiver |sender-only |receiver-only}
no mdt-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn mdt-type)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn mvpn mdt-type
Description 

This command allows restricting MVPN instance per PE node to a specific role. By default, MVPN instance on a given PE node assumes the role of being a sender as well as receiver. This creates a mesh of MDT/PMSI across all PE nodes from this PE.

This command provides an option to configure either a sender-only or receiver-only mode per PE node. Restricting the role of a PE node prevents creating full mesh of MDT/PMSI across all PE nodes that are participating in MVPN instance.

auto-rp-discovery cannot be enabled together with mdt-type sender-only or mdt-type receiver-only, or wildcard-spmsi configurations.

The no version of this command restores the default (sender-receiver).

Default 

mdt-type sender-receiver

Parameters 
sender-receiver—
MVPN has both sender and receivers connected to PE node.
sender-only—
MVPN has only senders connected to PE node.
receiver-only—
MVPN has only receivers connected to PE node.

17.205. meas-interval

meas-interval

Syntax 
meas-interval {5-mins |15-mins |1-hour |1-day} [create]
no meas-interval {5-mins |15-mins |1-hour |1-day}
Context 
[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session meas-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure oam-pm session meas-interval
Description 

This command establishes the parameters of the individual measurement intervals utilized by the session. Multiple measurement intervals may be specified within the session. A maximum of three different measurement intervals may be configured under each session.

The no form of this command deletes the specified measurement interval.

Parameters 
meas-interval
Specifies the duration of the measurement interval.
Values—
5-mins, 15-mins, 1-hour, 1-day

 

create —
Creates the measurement interval.

17.206. med-out

med-out

Syntax 
med-out {number |igp-cost}
no med-out
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>bgp-prng-plcy med-out)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt bgp-peering-policy med-out
Description 

This command enables advertising the Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED) and assigns the value used for the path attribute for the MED advertised to BGP peers if the MED is not already set.

The specified value can be overridden by any value set with a route policy.

The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default where the MED is not advertised.

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the MED path attribute value, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
0 to 4294967295

 

igp-cost—
Specifies that the MED is set to the IGP cost of the given IP prefix.

med-out

Syntax 
med-out {number |igp-cost}
no med-out
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp med-out)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group med-out)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor med-out)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn bgp group med-out
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor med-out
configure service vprn bgp med-out
Description 

This command enables advertising the Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED) and assigns the value used for the path attribute for the MED advertised to BGP peers if the MED is not already set.

The specified value can be overridden by any value set via a route policy.

This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.

The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default where the MED is not advertised.

The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.

The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.

Default 

no med-out

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the MED path attribute value, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
0 to 4294967295

 

igp-cost—
Specifies the MED is set to the IGP cost of the given IP prefix.

med-out

Syntax 
med-out {number |igp-cost}
no med-out
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp med-out)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group med-out)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor med-out)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp group med-out
configure router bgp group neighbor med-out
configure router bgp med-out
Description 

This command enables advertising the Multi-Exit Discriminator (MED) and assigns the value used for the path attribute for the MED advertised to BGP peers if the MED is not already set.

The specified value can be overridden by any value set via a route policy.

This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.

The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default where the MED is not advertised.

The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.

The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.

Default 

no med-out

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the MED path attribute value, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
0 to 4294967295

 

igp-cost—
Sets MED to the IGP cost of the given IP prefix.

17.207. medium-duration-flow-count

medium-duration-flow-count

Syntax 
[no] medium-duration-flow-count
Context 
[Tree] (config>log>acct-policy>cr>aa>aa-sub-cntr medium-duration-flow-count)
Full Contexts 
configure log accounting-policy custom-record aa-specific aa-sub-counters medium-duration-flow-count
Description 

This command includes the medium duration flow count in the AA subscriber's custom record. This command only applies to the 7750 SR.

The no form of this command excludes the medium duration flow count.

Default 

no medium-duration-flow-count

17.208. member

member

Syntax 
[no] member port-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>interface-group-handler member)
Full Contexts 
configure interface-group-handler member
Description 

This command binds the specified port with the associate Interface Group Handler. Up to eight member commands can be issued to add multiple ports to the associated IGH. The member must be a port or channel on a SONET or POS MDA. It must be a physical port or channel in network mode, and not bound to any router interfaces. A port or channel cannot be a member of more than one IGH at the same time. MLPPP bundles and their members cannot be IGH members.

The no form of this command removes the specified port ID from the associated IGH.

Parameters 
port-id—
Identifies the port to be associated with the interface group handler.

member

Syntax 
[no] member port-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>multilink-bundle member)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle member
Description 

This command binds a channel group to a multilink bundle. For IMA and MLFR groups, this command binds a channel group filling up the entire DS-1 or E-1. For MLPPP groups, fractional (n x ds0) DS1 or E1 links are also allowed. However, fractional DS1 links and fractional E1 links may not be combined in the same multilink bundle. If a channel with a different number of timeslots than the primary-link member is added to the bundle, a warning will be provided.

The no form of this command removes the specified channel group from the multilink bundle.

Parameters 
port-id—
Specifies the physical port ID in the following format:

port-id

slot/mda/port.channel

eth-sat-id

esat-id/slot/port

esat

keyword

id

1 to 20

pxc-id

pxc-id.sub-port

pxc

keyword

id

1 to 64

sub-port

a, b

member

Syntax 
member port-id
no member
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel>path member)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-tunnel path member
Description 

This command associates a port with the path defined under the Ethernet tunnel. If the operator wants to replace an existing member port or control tag, the whole path needs to be shutdown first. The alternate path will be activated as a result keeping traffic interruption to a minimum. Then the whole path must be deleted, the alternate path precedence modified to primary before re-creating the new path.

The following port-level configuration needs to be the same across the two member ports of an Ethernet tunnel:

  1. port>ethernet>access>{ingress|egress}>queue-group
  2. port>ethernet>egress-scheduler-policy
  3. port>access>egress>pool
  4. port>ethernet>dot1q-etype
  5. port>ethernet>qinq-etype
  6. port>ethernet>pbb-etype
  7. port>ethernet>mtu

The Ethernet tunnel will inherit the configuration from the first member port for these parameters. Additional member port that is added must have the same configuration.

The operator is allowed to update these port parameters only if the port is the sole member of an Ethernet tunnel. This means that in the example below, the operator needs to remove port 1/1/4 and port 1/1/5 before being allowed to modify 1/1/1 for the above parameters.

eth-tunnel 1
  path 1
    member 1/1/1
  path 2
    member 1/1/4
eth-tunnel 2
  path 1
    member 1/1/1
  path 2
    member 1/1/5

The no form of this command is used just to indicate that a member is not configured. The procedure described above, based on the no path command must be used to un-configure/change the member port assigned to the path.

Default 

no member

Parameters 
port-id—
Specifies the port-id associated with the path in the format x/y/z where x represents the IOM, y the MDA and z the port numbers.

member

Syntax 
member encap-value [create]
no member encap-value
Context 
[Tree] (config>connection-profile member)
Full Contexts 
configure connection-profile member
Description 

This command allows the adding of discrete VPI/VCI values to an ATM connection profile for assignment to an ATM SAP of an Apipe VLL of vc-type atm-cell.

Up to a maximum of 16 discrete VPI/VCI values can be configured in a connection profile. The user can modify the content of a profile which triggers a re-evaluation of all the ATM SAPs which are currently using the profile.

The no form of this command deletes the member from the configuration.

Parameters 
encap-value—
Specifies the VPI and VCI values of this connection profile member.
Values—
vpi: NNI: 0 to 4095
UNI: 0 to 255
vci: 1, 2, 5 to 65535

 

member

Syntax 
[no] member encap-id [to encap-id]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>encap-defined-qos>encap-group member)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap egress encap-defined-qos encap-group member
Description 

This command adds or removes a member ISID or a range of contiguous ISID members to an encap-group. The user can add or remove members to the encap-group one at a time or as a range of contiguous values using the member command. However, when the qos-per-member option is enabled, members must be added or removed one at a time.

The no form of this command removes the single or range of ISID values from the encap-group.

Parameters 
encap-id—
The value of the single encap-id or the start encap-id of the range. ISID is the only encap-id supported.
to encap-id
The value of the end encap-id of the range. ISID is the only encap-id supported.

member

Syntax 
[no] member interface-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>link-group>level member)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn isis link-group level member
Description 

This command adds or removes a links to the associated link-group. The interface name should already exist before it is added to a link-group.

The no form of this command removes the specified interface from the associated link-group.

Parameters 
interface-name—
Specifies the name of the interface to be added or removed from the associated link-group.

member

Syntax 
[no] member member-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>gmpls-tun-grp member)
Full Contexts 
configure gmpls-tun-grp member
Description 

This command configures a member of a GMPLS tunnel group. A member of a GMPLS tunnel group is a GMPLS LSP. All members of a tunnel group must have the same bandwidth. Up to 16 members may be configured for each GMPLS tunnel group.

The no form of this command removes the member.

Default 

no member

Parameters 
member-id—
Specifies the identifier of the GMPLS tunnel group member.
Values—
1 to 16

 

member

Syntax 
member user-profile-name [user-profile-name]
no member user-profile-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>user>console member)
Full Contexts 
configure system security user console member
Description 

This command is used to associate the user with a local command authorization profile.

A user can be associated with up to eight profiles.

The no form of this command removes the association between the user and the profile.

Default 

member default

Parameters 
user-profile-name—
Specifies up to eight user profile names, up to 32 characters.

member

Syntax 
[no] member interface-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>isis>link-group>level member)
Full Contexts 
configure router isis link-group level member
Description 

This command adds or removes a link to the associated link-group. The interface name should already exist before it is added to a link-group.

The no form of this command removes the specified interface from the associated link-group.

Parameters 
interface-name—
Specifies the name of the interface to be added or removed from the associated link-group.

17.209. member-threshold

member-threshold

Syntax 
[no] member-threshold threshold
Context 
[Tree] (config>gmpls-tun-grp member-threshold)
Full Contexts 
configure gmpls-tun-grp member-threshold
Description 

The member-threshold is the number of member GMPLS LSPs that must be operationally up before the GMPLS tunnel group is considered operationally up. If that number is not reached, then the GMPLS tunnel group is taken operationally down.

A member of a GMPLS tunnel group may be treated as down for one of the following reasons. These reason codes are recorded in the tmnxGmplsTunGrpMemberTable in the MIB:

  1. adminDn — The member or the related tunnel group is admin down.
  2. wpLspDn — The associated GMPLS LSP working path is down.
  3. wpPortDn — The data-bearer port associated with the GMPLS LSP working path is down.
  4. wpPortNoRsrc — The data bearer port associated with the LSP working path has no resource to support the services over the GMPLS tunnel group logical port.
  5. ppLspDn — The associated GMPLS LSP protect path is down.
  6. ppPortDn — The data-bearer port associated with the GMPLS LSP protect path is down.
  7. ppPortNoRsrc — The data bearer port associated with the GMPLS LSP protect path has no resource to support the services over the GMPLS tunnel group logical port.

The no form of this command resets the member threshold to 0.

Default 

member-threshold 0

Parameters 
threshold—
Specifies the minimum number of GMPLS LSPs that must be operationally up before the GMPLS tunnel group is considered operationally up.
Values—
0 to 15

 

17.210. members

members

Syntax 
[no] members comm-id [comm-id]
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>community members)
Full Contexts 
configure router policy-options community members
Description 

This command adds members to a route policy community list to use in route policy entries.

The no version of this command deletes route policy community members.

Parameters 
comm-id—
Specifies a BGP community value, up to 72 characters. A community ID can be specified in different forms.
Values—
[as-num:comm-val | reg-ex | ext-comm | well-known-comm | large-comm]
where:
  1. as-num — 0 to 65535
  2. comm-val — 0 to 65535
  3. reg-ex — A regular expression string. Allowed values are any string up to 72 characters, composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (such as “#”, “$”, or spaces), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
  4. ext-comm — The extended community, defined as one of the following:
    1. {target | origin}:ip-address:comm-val
    2. {target | origin}:reg-ex1&reg-ex2
    3. {target | origin}:ip-address:reg-ex2
    4. {target | origin}:asnum:ext-comm-val
    5. {target | origin}:ext-asnum:comm-val
    6. bandwidth:asnum:val-in-mbps
    7. ext:4300:ovstate
    8. ext:value1:value2
    9. flowspec-set:ext-asnum:group-id
    10. flowspec-set-trans:ext-asnum:group-id
    11. ipv6-redirect: ipv6-addr
    12. color:co-bits:color-value
    where:
    1. target — route target
    2. origin — route origin
    3. ip-address — a.b.c.d
    4. ext-comm-val — 0 to 4294967295
    5. ext-asnum — 0 to 4294967295
    6. reg-ex1, reg-ex2 — A regular expression string. Allowed values are any string up to 63 characters, composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
    7. bandwidth — bandwidth
    8. val-in-mbps — 0 to 16777215
    9. ext:4300 — origin verification
    10. ovstate — 0, 1, or 2 (0 for valid, 1 for not found, 2 for invalid)
    11. ext — extended
    12. value1 — 0000 to FFFF
    13. value2 — 0 to FFFFFFFFFFFF
    14. flowspec-set — FlowSpec set
    15. flowspec-set-trans — FlowSpec set transitive
    16. ipv6-addr — x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)
    17. group-id — 0 to 16383
    18. co-bits — 00, 01, 10 or 11
    19. color-value — 0 to 4294967295
  5. well-known-commnull, no-export, no-export-subconfed, no-advertise, llgr-stale, no-llgr, blackhole
  6. large-comm — large community, defined as one of the following:
    1. ext-asnum:ext-comm-val:ext-comm-val
    2. reg-ex3&reg-ex3&reg-ex3
    where:
    1. reg-ex3 — A regular expression string. Allowed values are any string up to 68 characters, composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

 

17.211. memory

memory

Syntax 
memory memory-size
no memory
Context 
[Tree] (config>esa>vm memory)
Full Contexts 
configure esa vm memory
Description 

This command configures the amount of memory (in gigabytes) that is allocated to the ESA-VM instance.

The no form of this command removes the memory allocation. To modify the memory allocation, first invoke the no memory command.

Parameters 
memory-size—
Specifies the amount of memory in GB.
Values—
0 to 256

 

17.212. memory-alarm

memory-alarm

Syntax 
memory-alarm high-threshold high-percentage low-threshold low-percentage
no memory-alarm
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>x-interfaces>x3>alarms memory-alarm)
Full Contexts 
configure li x-interfaces x3 alarms memory-alarm
Description 

This command configures the thresholds for raising the memory alarm. The low threshold value must be configured with a smaller value than the high threshold.

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Parameters 
high-percentage—
Specifies the high threshold value, as a percentage.
Values—
1 to 100

 

Default—
100
low-percentage—
Specifies the low threshold value, as a percentage.
Values—
0 to 99

 

Default—
0

17.213. memory-use-alarm

memory-use-alarm

Syntax 
memory-use-alarm rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
no memory-use-alarm
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>thresholds memory-use-alarm)
Full Contexts 
configure system thresholds memory-use-alarm
Description 

The memory thresholds are based on monitoring the TIMETRA-SYSTEM-MIB sgiMemoryUsed object. This object contains the amount of memory currently used by the system. The severity level is Alarm. The absolute sample type method is used.

The no form of this command removes the configured memory threshold warning.

Parameters 
rising-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold, a single threshold crossing event will be generated. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling-threshold value.

The threshold value represents units in bytes.

Values—
-2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
falling-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold, a single threshold crossing event will be generated. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a falling threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value rises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

The threshold value represents units in bytes.

Values—
-2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
seconds
Specifies the polling period over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.

The threshold value represents units in bytes.

Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

rmon-event-type
Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs.
Values—
log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence. This does not create an OS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the CLI command.
trap — An SROS logger event is generated. The SROS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.
both — Both an entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and an SROS logger event are generated.
none — No action is taken.

 

Default—
both
alarm-type
Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created. If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, then a single rising threshold crossing event is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.
Values—
rising, falling, either

 

Default—
either
Configuration example
memory-use-alarm rising-threshold 50000000 falling-threshold 45999999 
interval 500 rmon-event-type both start-alarm either

17.214. memory-use-warn

memory-use-warn

Syntax 
memory-use-warn rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
no memory-use-warn
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>thresholds memory-use-warn)
Full Contexts 
configure system thresholds memory-use-warn
Description 

The memory thresholds are based on monitoring MemoryUsed object. This object contains the amount of memory currently used by the system. The severity level is Alarm.

The absolute sample type method is used.

The no form of this command removes the configured compact flash threshold warning.

Parameters 
rising-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold, a single threshold crossing event will be generated. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling-threshold value.

The threshold value represents units in bytes.

Values—
-2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
falling-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold, a single threshold crossing event will be generated. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a falling threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value rises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

The threshold value represents units in bytes.

Values—
-2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
seconds
Specifies the polling period over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

rmon-event-type
Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs.
Values—
log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence.
This does not create an SROS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the show>system>thresholds CLI command.
trap — An SROS logger event is generated. The SROS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.
both — Both an entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and an SROS logger event are generated.
none — No action is taken.

 

Default—
both
startup-alarm alarm-type
Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created. If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, then a single rising threshold crossing event is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.
Default—
either
Values—
rising, falling, either

 

Configuration example
memory-use-warn rising-threshold 500000 falling-threshold 400000 interval 800 rmon-
event-type log start-alarm falling

17.215. mep

mep

Syntax 
[no] mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-tunnel>path>eth-cfm mep)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-tunnel path eth-cfm mep
Description 

This command provisions an 802.1ag maintenance endpoint (MEP).

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Parameters 
mep-id—
Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.
Values—
1 to 8191

 

md-index—
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

ma-index—
Specifies the MA index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

mep

Syntax 
[no] mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index [vlan vlan-id]
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>lag>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>router>if>eth-cfm mep)
Full Contexts 
configure lag eth-cfm mep
configure port ethernet eth-cfm mep
configure router interface eth-cfm mep
Description 

This command provisions the maintenance endpoint (MEP).

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Parameters 
mep-id—
Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.
Values—
1 to 8191

 

md-index—
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

ma-index—
Specifies the MA index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

vlan-id—
Specific to tunnel facility MEPs which means this option is only applicable to the lag>eth-cfm> context. Used to specify the outer vlan id of the tunnel.
Values—
1 to 4094

 

mep

Syntax 
mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index [direction {up |down}] [primary-vlan-enable]
no mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>eth-cfm mep)
Full Contexts 
configure service epipe sap eth-cfm mep
configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep
configure service ipipe sap eth-cfm mep
Description 

This command provisions the maintenance endpoint (MEP).

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Parameters 
mep-id—
Specifies the maintenance endpoint identifier.
Values—
1 to 8191

 

md-index—
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

ma-index—
Specifies the maintenance association (MA) index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

direction {up |down}—
Indicates the direction in which the MEP faces on the bridge port. The UP direction is not supported for all Fpipe services. For example, Ipipe does not support the direction of UP for MEPs.
up—
Sends ETH-CFM messages toward the MAC relay entity.
down—
Sends ETH-CFM messages away from the MAC relay entity.
primary-vlan-enable—
Provides a method for linking the MEP with the primary VLAN configured under the bridge-identifier for the MA. This must be configured as part of the creation step and can only be changed by deleting the MEP and re-creating it. Primary VLANs are only supported under Layer 2 Epipe and VPLS services.

mep

Syntax 
mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index [direction {up |down}] [primary-vlan-enable]
no mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>eth-cfm mep)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls eth-cfm mep
configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mep
configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mep
configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep
Description 

This command configures the ETH-CFM maintenance endpoint (MEP). A MEP created at the VPLS service level vpls>eth-cfm creates a virtual MEP.

The no version of the command will remove the MEP.

Parameters 
mep-id—
Specifies the MEP identifier.
Values—
1 to 8191

 

md-index—
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

ma-index—
Specifies the maintenance association (MA) index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

direction up |down—
Indicates the direction in which the MEP faces on the bridge port. Direction is not supported when a MEP is created directly under the vpls>eth-cfm construct (vMEP).

down — Sends ETH-CFM messages away from the MAC relay entity

up — Sends ETH-CFM messages toward the MAC relay entity

primary-vlan-enable—
Provides a method for linking the MEP with the primary VLAN configured under the bridge-identifier for the MA. MEPs cannot be changed from or to primary VLAN functions. This must be configured as part of the creation step and can only be changed by deleting the MEP and re-creating it. Primary VLANs are only supported under Layer 2 Epipe and VPLS services.

mep

Syntax 
mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index [direction {up |down}]
no mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm mep)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap eth-cfm mep
configure service ies interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep
Description 

This command configures the ETH-CFM maintenance endpoint (MEP).

Parameters 
mep-id—
Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.
Values—
1 to 8191

 

md-index—
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

ma-index—
Specifies the MA index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

direction up |down—
The direction in which the maintenance association (MEP) faces on the bridge port. Direction UP is not applicable to IES MEPs.

down — Sends ETH-CFM messages away from the MAC relay entity.

up — Sends ETH-CFM messages towards the MAC relay entity.

mep

Syntax 
mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index [direction {up |down}]
no mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mep)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm mep)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep
configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep
Description 

This command configures the ETH-CFM maintenance endpoint (MEP).

Parameters 
mep-id—
Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.
Values—
1 to 8191

 

md-index—
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

ma-index—
Specifies the MA index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

direction up |down—
Indicates the direction in which the maintenance association (MEP) faces on the bridge port. Direction UP is not supported on VPRN MEPs.
Values—
down — Sends continuity check messages away from the MAC relay entity.
up — Sends continuity check messages towards the MAC relay entity.

 

mep

Syntax 
[no] mep
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>working-tp-path mep)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>protect-tp-path mep)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls lsp protect-tp-path mep
configure router mpls lsp working-tp-path mep
Description 

This command creates or edits an MPLS-TP maintenance entity group (MEG) endpoint (MEP) on and MPLS-TP path. MEPs represent the termination point for OAM flowing on the path, as well as linear protection for the LSP. Only one MEP can be configured at each end of the path.

The following commands are applicable to a MEP on an MPLS-TP working or protect path: oam-template, bfd-enable, and shutdown. In addition, a protection-template may be configured on a protect path.

The no form of this command removes a MEP from an MPLS-TP path.

mep

Syntax 
[no] mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index
Context 
[Tree] (debug>eth-cfm mep)
Full Contexts 
debug eth-cfm mep
Description 

This command specifies the MEP from which to debug the CFM PDUs.

The no form of this command removes the MEP parameters.

Parameters 
mep-id—
Specifies the maintenance association endpoint identifier of the launch point.
Values—
1 to 8191

 

md-index—
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value of the launch point.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

ma-index—
Specifies the maintenance association (MA) index value of the launch point.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

mep

Syntax 
[no] mep mep-id domain md-index association ma-index
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-ring>path>eth-cfm mep)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-ring path eth-cfm mep
Description 

This command provisions an 802.1ag maintenance endpoint (MEP).

The no form of the command deletes the MEP.

Parameters 
mep-id—
Specifies the maintenance association end point identifier.
Values—
1 to 81921

 

md-index—
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

ma-index—
Specifies the MA index value.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

17.216. mesh-group

mesh-group

Syntax 
mesh-group {value |blocked}
no mesh-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>if mesh-group)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn isis interface mesh-group
Description 

This command assigns an interface to a mesh group. Mesh groups limit the amount of flooding that occurs when a new or changed LSP is advertised throughout an area.

All routers in a mesh group should be fully meshed. When LSPs need to be flooded, only a single copy is received rather than a copy per neighbor.

To create a mesh group, configure the same mesh group value for each interface that is part of the mesh group. All routers must have the same mesh group value configured for all interfaces that are part of the mesh group.

To prevent an interface from flooding LSPs, the optional blocked parameter can be specified. Configure mesh groups carefully. It is easy to create isolated islands that do not receive updates as (other) links fail.

The no form of this command removes the interface from the mesh group.

Default 

no mesh-group — The interface does not belong to a mesh group.

Parameters 
value—
Specifies a unique decimal integer value distinguishes this mesh group from other mesh groups on this or any other router that is part of this mesh group.
Values—
1 to 2000000000

 

blocked—
Prevents an interface from flooding LSPs.

mesh-group

Syntax 
mesh-group {value |blocked}
no mesh-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>isis>interface mesh-group)
Full Contexts 
configure router isis interface mesh-group
Description 

This command assigns an interface to a mesh group. Mesh groups limit the amount of flooding that occurs when a new or changed LSP is advertised throughout an area.

All routers in a mesh group should be fully meshed. When LSPs need to be flooded, only a single copy is received rather than a copy per neighbor.

To create a mesh group, configure the same mesh group value for each interface that is part of the mesh group. All routers must have the same mesh group value configured for all interfaces that are part of the mesh group.

To prevent an interface from flooding LSPs, the optional blocked parameter can be specified. Configure mesh groups carefully to avoid creating isolated islands that do not receive updates as (other) links fail.

The no form of this command removes the interface from the mesh group.

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the unique decimal integer value that distinguishes this mesh group from other mesh groups on this or any other router that is part of this mesh group.
Values—
1 to 2000000000

 

blocked—
Prevents an interface from flooding LSPs.

17.217. mesh-sdp

mesh-sdp

Syntax 
mesh-sdp sdp-id[:vc-id] [vc-type {ether |vlan}] [create]
mesh-sdp sdp-id[:vc-id] [vc-type {ether |vlan}] [create] leaf-ac
mesh-sdp sdp-id[:vc-id] [vc-type {ether |vlan}] [create] root-leaf-tag
no mesh-sdp sdp-id[:vc-id]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mesh-sdp)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mesh-sdp
Description 

This command binds a VPLS service to an existing Service Distribution Point (SDP).

Mesh SDPs bound to a service are logically treated like a single bridge “port” for flooded traffic where flooded traffic received on any mesh SDP on the service is replicated to other “ports” (spoke SDPs and SAPs) and not transmitted on any mesh SDPs.

Note:

This command creates a binding between a service and an SDP. The SDP has an operational state which determines the operational state of the SDP within the service. For example, if the SDP is administratively or operationally down, the SDP for the service is down.

The SDP must already be defined in the config>service>sdp context in order to associate the SDP with an Epipe or VPLS service. If the sdp sdp-id is not already configured, an error message is generated. If the sdp-id does exist, a binding between that sdp-id and the service is created.

SDPs must be explicitly associated and bound to a service. If an SDP is not bound to a service, no far-end router devices can participate in the service.

The no form of this command removes the SDP binding from the service. The SDP configuration is not affected; only the binding of the SDP to a service. Once removed, no packets are forwarded to the far-end router.

Default 

No sdp-id is bound to a service.

Special Cases 
VPLS—
Several SDPs can be bound to a VPLS. Each SDP must be destined to a different router. If two sdp-id bindings terminate on the same router, an error occurs and the second SDP binding is rejected.
Parameters 
sdp-id—
Specifies an SDP identifier.
Values—
1 to 17407

 

vc-id—
Specifies a virtual circuit identifier. This value is used to validate the VC ID portion of each mesh SDP binding defined in the service. The default value of this object is equal to the service ID. Any value may be used for the vc-id when there is no existing mesh SDP within the service; if a mesh SDP exists then all other mesh SDPs in the service must be configured with the same vc-id.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

vc-type—
Specifies to override the default VC type signaled for the spoke or mesh binding to the far end of the SDP. The VC type is a 15 bit-quantity containing a value which represents the type of VC. The actual signaling of the VC type depends on the signaling parameter defined for the SDP. If signaling is disabled, the vc-type command can still be used to define the dot1q value expected by the far-end provider equipment. A change of the binding’s VC type causes the binding to signal the new VC type to the far end when signaling is enabled.

VC types are derived according to IETF draft-martini-l2circuit-trans-mpls.

The VC type value for Ethernet is 0x0005.

The VC type value for an Ethernet VLAN is 0x0004.

ether—
Defines the VC type as Ethernet. The vlan keyword is mutually exclusive. When the VC type is not defined then the default is Ethernet for spoke SDP bindings. Defining Ethernet is the same as executing no vc-type and restores the default VC type for the spoke SDP binding (hex 5).
vlan—
Defines the VC type as VLAN. The top VLAN tag, if a VLAN tag is present, is stripped from traffic received on the pseudowire, and a vlan-tag is inserted when forwarding into the pseudowire. The ethernet and vlan keywords are mutually exclusive. When the VC type is not defined then the default is Ethernet for mesh SDP bindings.
Note:

The system expects a symmetrical configuration with its peer, specifically it expects to remove the same number of VLAN tags from received traffic as it adds to transmitted traffic. As some of the related configuration parameters are local and not communicated in the signaling plane, an asymmetrical behavior cannot always be detected and so cannot be blocked. Consequently, protocol extractions will not necessarily function for asymmetrical configurations as they would with a symmetrical configurations resulting in an unexpected operation.

root-leaf-tag—
Specifies a tagging mesh SDP under an E-Tree VPLS. When a tag SDP binding is required, it is created with a root-leaf-tag flag. Only VLAN tag SDP bindings are supported. The VLAN type must be set to VC VLAN type. The root-leaf-tag parameter indicates this SDP binding is a tag SDP that uses a default VID 1 for root and 2 for leaf. The SDP binding tags egress E-Tree traffic with root and leaf VIDs as appropriate. Root and leaf VIDs are only significant between peering VPLS but the values must be consistent on each end. On ingress a tag SDP binding removes the VID tag on the interface between VPLS in the same E-Tree service. The tag SDP receives root tagged traffic and marks the traffic with a root indication internally. This option is not available on BGP EVPN-enabled E-Tree services.
leaf-ac—
Specifies an access (AC) mesh SDP binding under a E-Tree VPLS as a leaf access (AC) SDP. The default E-Tree SDP type is a root AC if leaf-ac or root-leaf-tag is not specified at SDP binding creation. This option is only available when the VPLS is designated as an E-Tree VPLS. BGP EVPN-enabled E-Tree VPLS services support the leaf-ac option.
create—
Keyword used to create the mesh SDP. The create keyword requirement can be enabled or disabled in the environment>create context.

17.218. mesh-sdp-binding

mesh-sdp-binding

Syntax 
[no] mesh-sdp-binding
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>site mesh-sdp-binding)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls site mesh-sdp-binding
Description 

This command enables applications to all mesh SDPs.

The no form of reverts the default.

Default 

no mesh-sdp-binding

17.219. message

message

Syntax 
message {eq |neq} pattern pattern [regexp]
no message
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>log>filter>entry>match message)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn log filter entry match message
Description 

This command adds system messages as a match criterion.

The no form of this command removes messages as a match criterion.

Parameters 
eq—
Determines if the matching criteria should be equal to the specified value.
neq—
Determines if the matching criteria should not be equal to the specified value.
pattern—
Specifies a message, up to 400 characters, to be used in the match criteria.
regexp—
Specifies the type of string comparison to use to determine if the log event matches the value of message command parameters. When the regexp keyword is not specified, the default matching algorithm used is a basic substring match.

message

Syntax 
message {eq |neq} pattern pattern [regexp]
no message
Context 
[Tree] (config>log>filter>entry>match message)
Full Contexts 
configure log filter entry match message
Description 

This command adds system messages as a match criterion.

The no form of this command removes messages as a match criterion.

Parameters 
eq—
Determines if the matching criteria should be equal to the specified value.
neq—
Determines if the matching criteria should not be equal to the specified value.
pattern—
Specifies a message up to 400 characters in length to be used in the match criteria.
regexp—
Specifies the type of string comparison to use to determine if the log event matches the value of message command parameters. When the regexp keyword is not specified, the default matching algorithm used is a basic substring match.

17.220. message-count

message-count

Syntax 
message-count count
Context 
[Tree] (config>ipsec>tnl-temp>icmp6-gen>pkt-too-big message-count)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>icmp6-gen>pkt-too-big message-count)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipsec>ipsec-tunnel>icmp6-gen>pkt-too-big message-count)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ipsec-tun>icmp6-gen>pkt-too-big message-count)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipsec-tunnel>icmp-gen>pkt-too-big message-count)
Full Contexts 
configure ipsec tunnel-template icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count
configure router interface ipsec-tunnel icmp-gen pkt-too-big message-count
configure service ies interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count
configure service vprn interface ipsec ipsec-tunnel icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count
configure service vprn interface sap ipsec-tunnel icmp6-generation pkt-too-big message-count
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of ICMPv6 messages that can be sent during the configured interval.

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the maximum number of ICMPv6 messages that can be sent during the configured interval
Values—
10 to 1000

 

Default—
100

17.221. message-digest-key

message-digest-key

Syntax 
message-digest-key keyid md5 [key |hash-key] [hash |hash2 |custom]
no message-digest-key keyid
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>if message-digest-key)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>virtual-link message-digest-key)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>sham-link message-digest-key)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn ospf area interface message-digest-key
configure service vprn ospf area sham-link message-digest-key
configure service vprn ospf area virtual-link message-digest-key
Description 

This command configures a message digest key when MD5 authentication is enabled on the interface, virtual-link or sham-link. Multiple message digest keys can be configured.

This command is not valid in the OSPF3 context.

The no form of this command removes the message digest key identified by the key-id.

Default 

No message digest keys are defined.

Parameters 
keyid—
The keyid is expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

md5 key
The MD5 key. The key can be any alphanumeric string up to 16 characters in length.
md5 hash-key—
The MD5 hash key. The key can be any combination of ASCII characters up to 32 characters in length (encrypted). If spaces are used in the string, enclose the entire string in quotation marks (“ ”).

This is useful when a user must configure the parameter, but, for security purposes, the actual unencrypted key value is not provided.

hash—
Specifies the key is entered in an encrypted form. If the hash parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in a non-encrypted, clear text form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash parameter specified.
hash2—
Specifies the key is entered in a more complex encrypted form that involves more variables than the key value alone, meaning that the hash2 encrypted variable cannot be copied and pasted. If the hash or hash2 parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in an unencrypted, clear text form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash or hash2 parameter specified.
custom—
Specifies the custom encryption to management interface.

message-digest-key

Syntax 
message-digest-key key-id md5 [key |hash-key |hash2-key] [hash |hash2 |custom]
no message-digest-key key-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>interface message-digest-key)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>virtual-link message-digest-key)
Full Contexts 
configure router ospf area interface message-digest-key
configure router ospf area virtual-link message-digest-key
Description 

This command configures a message digest key when MD5 authentication is enabled on the interface. Multiple message digest keys can be configured.

The no form of this command removes the message digest key identified by the key-id.

By default, no message keys are defined.

Parameters 
key-id—
The keyid is expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

key—
Specifies the MD5 key. The key can be any alphanumeric string up to 16 characters in length.
hash-key |hash2-key—
Specifies the MD5 hash or hash2 key. the hash key. The key can be any combination of ASCII characters up to 32 (hash1-key) or 55 (hash2-key) characters in length (encrypted). If spaces are used in the string, enclose the entire string in quotation marks (“ ”).

This is useful when a user must configure the parameter, but, for security purposes, the actual unencrypted key value is not provided.

hash—
Specifies the key is entered in an encrypted form. If the hash or hash2 parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in an unencrypted, clear text form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash or hash2 parameter specified.
hash2—
Specifies the key is entered in a more complex encrypted form that involves more variables than the key value alone, meaning that the hash2 encrypted variable cannot be copied and pasted. If the hash or hash2 parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in an unencrypted, clear text form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash or hash2 parameter specified.
custom—
Specifies the custom encryption to management interface.

17.222. message-fast-tx

message-fast-tx

Syntax 
message-fast-tx time
no message-fast-tx
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>lldp message-fast-tx)
Full Contexts 
configure system lldp message-fast-tx
Description 

This command configures the duration of the fast transmission period.

Default 

no message-fast-tx

Parameters 
time—
Specifies the fast transmission period in seconds.
Values—
1 to 3600

 

Default—
1

17.223. message-fast-tx-init

message-fast-tx-init

Syntax 
message-fast-tx-init count
no message-fast-tx-init
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>lldp message-fast-tx-init)
Full Contexts 
configure system lldp message-fast-tx-init
Description 

This command configures the number of LLDPDUs to send during the fast transmission period.

Default 

no message-fast-tx-init

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the number of LLDPDUs to send during the fast transmission period.
Values—
1 to 8

 

Default—
4

17.224. message-interval

message-interval

Syntax 
message-interval {[seconds] [milliseconds milliseconds]}
no message-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>vrrp message-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface ipv6 vrrp message-interval
Description 

This command sets the advertisement timer and indirectly sets the master down timer on the virtual router instance. The message-interval setting must be the same for all virtual routers participating as a virtual router. Any VRRP advertisement message received with an Advertisement Interval field different than the virtual router instance configured message-interval value will be silently discarded.

The message-interval command is available in both non-owner and owner vrrp virtual-router-id nodal contexts. If the message-interval command is not executed, the default message interval of 1 second will be used.

The no form of this command restores the default message interval value of 1 second to the virtual router instance.

Default 

message-interval 1

Parameters 
seconds—
The number of seconds that will transpire before the advertisement timer expires.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
1
milliseconds milliseconds
Specifies the time interval, in milliseconds, between sending advertisement messages.
Values—
100 to 900

 

message-interval

Syntax 
message-interval {[seconds] [milliseconds milliseconds]}
no message-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>vrrp message-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface vrrp message-interval
Description 

This command sets the advertisement timer and indirectly sets the master down timer on the virtual router instance. The message-interval setting must be the same for all virtual routers participating as a virtual router. Any VRRP advertisement message received with an Advertisement Interval field different than the virtual router instance configured message-interval value will be silently discarded.

The message-interval command is available in both non-owner and owner vrrp virtual-router-id nodal contexts. If the message-interval command is not executed, the default message interval of 1 second will be used.

The no form of this command restores the default message interval value of 1 second to the virtual router instance.

Parameters 
seconds—
The number of seconds that will transpire before the advertisement timer expires.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
1
milliseconds milliseconds
Specifies the time interval, in milliseconds, between sending advertisement messages. This parameter is not supported on non-redundant chassis.
Values—
100 to 900

 

message-interval

Syntax 
message-interval {[seconds] [milliseconds milliseconds]}
no message-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if message-interval)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6>vrrp message-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface ipv6 vrrp message-interval
configure service vprn interface message-interval
Description 

This command sets the advertisement timer and indirectly sets the master down timer on the virtual router instance. The message-interval setting must be the same for all virtual routers participating as a virtual router. Any VRRP advertisement message received with an Advertisement Interval field different than the virtual router instance configured message-interval value will be silently discarded.

The message-interval command is available in both non-owner and owner vrrp virtual-router-id nodal contexts. If the message-interval command is not executed, the default message interval of 1 second will be used.

The no form of this command restores the default message interval value of 1 second to the virtual router instance.

Parameters 
seconds—
The number of seconds that will transpire before the advertisement timer expires.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
1
milliseconds milliseconds
Specifies the time interval, in milliseconds, between sending advertisement messages. This parameter is not supported on single-slot chassis.
Values—
100 to 900

 

message-interval

Syntax 
message-interval {[seconds] [milliseconds milliseconds]}
no message-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>if>vrrp message-interval)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6>vrrp message-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure router interface ipv6 vrrp message-interval
configure router interface vrrp message-interval
Description 

This command configures the administrative advertisement message timer used by the master virtual router instance to send VRRP advertisement messages and to derive the master down timer as backup.

For an owner virtual router instance, the administrative advertisement timer directly sets the operational advertisement timer and indirectly sets the master down timer for the virtual router instance.

Non-owner virtual router instances usage of the message-interval setting is dependent on the state of the virtual router (master or backup) and the state of the master-int-inherit parameter.

  1. When a non-owner is operating as master for the virtual router, the configured message-interval is used as the operational advertisement timer similar to an owner virtual router instance. The master-int-inherit command has no effect when operating as master.
  2. When a non-owner is in the backup state with master-int-inherit disabled, the configured message-interval value is used to match the incoming VRRP advertisement message advertisement interval field. If the locally configured message interval does not match the advertisement interval field, the VRRP advertisement is discarded.
  3. When a non-owner is in the backup state with master-int-inherit enabled, the configured message-interval is ignored. The master down timer is indirectly derived from the incoming VRRP advertisement message advertisement interval field value.

VRRP advertisements messages that are fragmented, or contain IP options (IPv4), or contain extension headers (IPv6) require a longer message interval to be configured.

The in-use value of the message interval is used to derive the master down timer to be used when the virtual router is operating in backup mode based on the following formula:

(3x (in-use message interval) + skew time)

The skew time portion is used to slow down virtual routers with relatively low priority values when competing in the master election process.

The command is available in both non-owner and owner vrrp nodal contexts.

By default, a message-interval of 1 second is used.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default 

message-interval 1 — Advertisement timer set to 1 second.

Parameters 
seconds—
The number of seconds that will transpire before the advertisement timer expires expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
IPv4: 1 to 255 IPv6: 1 to 40

 

milliseconds—
Specifies the time interval, in milliseconds, between sending advertisement messages.
Values—
100 to 900 IPv6: 10 to 990

 

17.225. message-length

message-length

Syntax 
message-length message-length
no message-length
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>sdp>keep-alive message-length)
Full Contexts 
configure service sdp keep-alive message-length
Description 

This command configures the SDP monitoring keepalive request message length transmitted.

The no form of this command reverts the message-length octets value to the default setting.

Default 

no message-length — The message length should be equal to the SDP’s operating path MTU as configured in the config>service>sdp path-mtu command. If the default size is overridden, the actual size used will be the smaller of the operational SDP ID Path MTU and the size specified.

Parameters 
message-length
Specifies the size of the keepalive request messages in octets, expressed as a decimal integer. The size keyword overrides the default keepalive message size.
Values—
40 to 9198

 

17.226. message-path

message-path

Syntax 
message-path sap-id
no message-path
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>srrp message-path)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>srrp message-path)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface srrp message-path
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface srrp message-path
Description 

This command defines a specific SAP for SRRP in-band messaging. A message-path SAP must be defined prior to activating the SRRP instance. The defined SAP must exist on the SRRP instances group IP interface for the command to succeed and cannot currently be associated with any dynamic or static subscriber hosts. Once a group IP interface SAP has been defined as the transmission path for SRRP Advertisement messages, it cannot be administratively shutdown, will not support static or dynamic subscriber hosts and cannot be removed from the group IP interface.

The SRRP instance message-path command may be executed at any time on the SRRP instance. Changing the message SAP fails if a dynamic or static subscriber host is associated with the new SAP. Once successfully changed, the SRRP instance immediately disables anti-spoof on the SAP and starts sending SRRP Advertisement messages, if the SRRP instance is activated.

Changing the current SRRP message SAP on an active pair of routers should be done in the following manner:

  1. Shutdown the backup SRRP instance.
  2. Change the message SAP on the shutdown node.
  3. Change the message SAP on the active master node.
  4. Re-activate the shutdown SRRP instance.

Shutting down the backup SRRP instance prevents the SRRP instances from becoming master due to temporarily using differing message path SAPs.

If an MCS peering is operational between the redundant nodes and the SRRP instance has been associated with the peering, the designated message path SAP is sent from each member.

The no form of this command can only be executed when the SRRP instance is shutdown. Executing no message-path allows the existing SAP to be used for subscriber management functions. A new message-path SAP must be defined prior to activating the SRRP instance.

Parameters 
sap-id—
Specifies the physical port identifier portion of the SAP definition.

17.227. message-retransmit

message-retransmit

Syntax 
message-retransmit [timeout timeout] [retry-count value]
no message-retransmit
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>gtp>peer-profile message-retransmit)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt gtp peer-profile message-retransmit
Description 

This command configures the retry-count and response-timeout for GTP messages.

The no form of this command reverts to the default values.

Default 

message-retransmit timeout 5 retry-count 3

Parameters 
timeout—
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between retransmission of signaling request messages towards the same peer Mobile Gateway.
Values—
1 to 30

 

Default—
5
value—
Specifies the number of times a signaling request message is transmitted towards the same peer Mobile Gateway.
Values—
1 to 8

 

Default—
3

17.228. message-severity-level

message-severity-level

Syntax 
message-severity-level
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>cli>md-cli>environment message-severity-level)
Full Contexts 
configure system management-interface cli md-cli environment message-severity-level
Description 

This command configures the message severity level.

17.229. message-size

message-size

Syntax 
message-size max-num-of-routes
no message-size
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip message-size)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group message-size)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group>neighbor message-size)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng message-size)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group message-size)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group>neighbor message-size)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn rip group message-size
configure service vprn rip group neighbor message-size
configure service vprn rip message-size
configure service vprn ripng group message-size
configure service vprn ripng group neighbor message-size
configure service vprn ripng message-size
Description 

This command sets the maximum number of routes per RIP update message.

The no form of this command resets the maximum number of routes back to the default of 25.

Default 

no message-size

Parameters 
size —
An Integer.
Values—
25 to 255

 

Default—
25

message-size

Syntax 
message-size max-num-of-routes
no message-size
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>rip message-size)
[Tree] (config>router>rip>group message-size)
[Tree] (config>router>rip>group>neighbor message-size)
[Tree] (config>router>ripng message-size)
[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group message-size)
[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group>neighbor message-size)
Full Contexts 
configure router rip group message-size
configure router rip group neighbor message-size
configure router rip message-size
configure router ripng group message-size
configure router ripng group neighbor message-size
configure router ripng message-size
Description 

This command configures the maximum number of routes per RIP update message.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default 

message-size 25

Parameters 
max-num-of-routes—
The maximum number of RIP routes per RIP update message expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
25 to 255

 

17.230. message-timeout

message-timeout

Syntax 
message-timeout seconds
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>x-interfaces>x1>timeouts message-timeout)
Full Contexts 
configure li x-interfaces x1 timeouts message-timeout
Description 

This command configures the maximum time that the LIC must reply to an X1 message. If the timer expires, the session is released.

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the maximum timeout value, in seconds.
Values—
180 to 300

 

Default—
180

17.231. message-type

message-type

Syntax 
message-type [ccr] [cca] [rar] [raa] [asr] [asa] [aar] [aaa]
message-type all
no message-type
Context 
[Tree] (debug>diam>diam-peer-plcy>avp-match message-type)
Full Contexts 
debug diameter diameter-peer-policy avp-match message-type
Description 

This command specifies the message type match criteria for AVP value matching. Only specified diameter application messages are used for AVP value matching. This is a mandatory criteria in an avp-match id command.

This command does not restrict the debug output to the specified messages.

Parameters 
ccr—
credit control request
cca—
credit control answer
rar —
re-authentication request
raa —
re-authentication answer
asr —
abort session request
asa —
abort session answer
aar —
aa request
aaa —
aa answer
all —
all message types

message-type

Syntax 
message-type [ccr] [cca] [cer] [cea] [dwr] [dwa] [dpr] [dpa] [rar] [raa] [asr] [asa] [aar] [aaa]
message-type all
no message-type
Context 
[Tree] (debug>diam>diam-peer-plcy message-type)
[Tree] (debug>diam message-type)
Full Contexts 
debug diameter diameter-peer-policy message-type
debug diameter message-type
Description 

This command restricts the debug output to the specified message types.

When specified within a diameter peer policy, it overrides the message type configuration at the debug>diam level for messages received and sent on that diameter peer policy.

The no form of this command removes the message type from the debug configuration.

Parameters 
ccr—
credit control request
cca—
credit control answer
cer —
capabilities exchange request
cea —
capabilities exchange answer
dwr —
device watchdog request
dwa —
device watchdog answer
dpr —
disconnect peer request
dpa —
disconnect peer answer
rar —
re-authentication request
raa —
re-authentication answer
asr —
abort session request
asa —
abort session answer
aar —
aa request
aaa —
aa answer
all —
all message types

message-type

Syntax 
message-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>statistics>tca>gtp-filter message-type)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group statistics threshold-crossing-alert gtp-filter message-type
Description 

This command configures a TCA for the counter capturing hits due to the GTP filter message type.

message-type

Syntax 
message-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>gtp>gtp-filter message-type)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group gtp gtp-filter message-type
Description 

This command specifies the context for configuration of GTP message-type filtering. If no message-type is specified within a filter, then all GTP message types are allowed.

17.232. message-type-gtpv2

message-type-gtpv2

Syntax 
message-type-gtpv2
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>statistics>tca>gtp-filter message-type-gtpv2)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group statistics threshold-crossing-alert gtp-filter message-type-gtpv2
Description 

This command configures a TCA for the counter capturing hits due to the GTPv2 message type filter.

message-type-gtpv2

Syntax 
message-type-gtpv2
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>gtp>gtp-fltr message-type-gtpv2)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group gtp gtp-filter message-type-gtpv2
Description 

This command specifies the context for the configuration of GTP-v2 message-type filtering. If no message-type-gtpv2 is specified within a filter, then all GTP message types are allowed, except for the messages that are dropped by GTP-C inspection because they violate the expected GTP protocol for the deployment interface (for example, roaming deployment).

The gtpc-inspection command must be enabled before configuring message-type-gtpv2 filtering.

17.233. messages

messages

Syntax 
[no] messages
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>ldp>if>event messages)
[Tree] (debug>router>ldp>peer>event messages)
Full Contexts 
debug router ldp interface event messages
debug router ldp peer event messages
Description 

This command displays specific information (for example, message type, source, and destination) regarding LDP messages sent to and received from LDP peers.

The no form of the command disables debugging output for LDP messages.

17.234. meta-data

meta-data

Syntax 
meta-data
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>isa-svc-chain>vas-filter>entry>action>insert-nsh meta-data)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt isa-service-chaining vas-filter entry action insert-nsh meta-data
Description 

This command enables the context to configure opaque metadata to be inserted in NSH in the steered traffic if the forward action indicates NSH insertion.

17.235. metric

metric

Syntax 
metric value
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>spb>level metric)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>spb>level metric)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap spb level metric
configure service vpls spoke-sdp spb level metric
Description 

This configures metric for this SPB interface SAP/spoke-sdp. This command is valid only for interfaces on control B-VPLS.

Parameters 
value —
The configuration metric value.
Values—
1 to 16777215

 

Default—
1000

metric

Syntax 
metric ipv4-metric
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>spb>level metric)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>spb>level metric)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap spb level metric
configure service vpls spoke-sdp spb level metric
Description 

This command configures the IS-IS interface metric for IPv4 unicast.

Parameters 
ipv4-metric—
Specifies the IS-IS interface metric for IPv4 unicast
Values—
1 to 16777215

 

metric

Syntax 
metric metric-value
no metric [metric-value]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>black-hole metric)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>next-hop metric)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>grt metric)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>indirect metric)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>static-route-entry>ipsec-tunnel metric)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn static-route-entry black-hole metric
configure service vprn static-route-entry grt metric
configure service vprn static-route-entry indirect metric
configure service vprn static-route-entry ipsec-tunnel metric
configure service vprn static-route-entry next-hop metric
Description 

This command specifies the cost metric for the static route, expressed as a decimal integer. This value is used when importing the static route into other protocols such as OSPF. When the metric is configured as 0 then the metric configured in OSPF, default-import-metric, applies. When modifying the metric of an existing static route, the preference will not change unless specified. This value is also used to determine which static route to install in the forwarding table.

If there are multiple static routes with the same preference but different metrics then the lower cost (metric) route will be installed.

The no form of this command returns the metric to the default value

Default 

metric 1

Parameters 
metric-value
Specifies the cost metric value.
Values—
0 to 65535

 

metric

Syntax 
metric metric
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis>if>level metric)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn isis interface level metric
Description 

This command configures the metric used for the level on the interface.

In order to calculate the lowest cost to reach a given destination, each configured level on each interface must have a cost. The costs for each level on an interface may be different.

If the metric is not configured, the default of 10 is used unless reference bandwidth is configured.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

no metric

Parameters 
metric—
The metric assigned for this level on this interface.
Values—
1 to 16777215

 

Default—
10

metric

Syntax 
metric metric
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>if metric)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>area>if metric)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>sham-link metric)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn ospf area interface metric
configure service vprn ospf area sham-link metric
configure service vprn ospf3 area interface metric
Description 

This command configures an explicit route cost metric for the OSPF interface that overrides the metrics calculated based on the speed of the underlying link.

The no form of this command deletes the manually configured interface metric, so the interface uses the computed metric based on the reference-bandwidth command setting and the speed of the underlying link.

Default 

no metric

Parameters 
metric—
The metric to be applied to the interface expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

metric

Syntax 
metric metric
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp metric)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template metric)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>static-lsp metric)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls lsp metric
configure router mpls lsp-template metric
configure router mpls static-lsp metric
Description 

This command allows the user to override the LSP operational metric with a constant administrative value that will not change regardless of the actual path the LSP is using over its lifetime.

The LSP operational metric will match the metric the active path of this LSP is using at any given time. For a CSPF LSP, this metric represents the cumulative IGP metric of all the links the active path is using. If CSPF for this LSP is configured to use the TE metric, the LSP operational metric is set to the maximum value. For a non-CSPF LSP, the operational metric is the shortest IGP cost to the destination of the LSP.

The LSP operational metric is used by some applications to select an LSP among a set of LSPs that are destined to the same egress router. The LSP with the lowest operational metric will be selected. If more than one LSP with the same lowest LSP metric exists, the LSP with the lowest tunnel index will be selected. The configuration of a constant metric by the user will make sure the LSP always maintains its preference in this selection regardless of the path it is using at any given time. Applications that use the LSP operational metric include LDP-over-RSVP, VPRN auto-bind, and IGP, BGP and static route shortcuts.

The no form of this command disables the administrative LSP metric and reverts to the default setting in which the metric value will represent the LSP metric returned by MPLS. The same behavior is obtained if the user entered a metric of value zero (0).

Default 

no metric. The LSP operational metric defaults to the metric returned by MPLS.

Parameters 
metric—
Specifies the integer value which specifies the value of the LSP administrative metric. A value of zero command reverts to the default setting and disables the administrative LSP metric.
Values—
0 to 16777215

 

metric

Syntax 
metric metric
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>fwd-policies>fwd-policy metric)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls forwarding-policies forwarding-policy metric
Description 

This command configures the metric of an MPLS forwarding policy.

The metric parameter is supported with the endpoint policy only and is inherited by the routes which resolve their next hop to this policy.

The no form of this command removes the metric parameter from the MPLS forwarding policy.

Parameters 
metric—
Specifies the metric value.
Values—
1 to 16777215

 

metric

Syntax 
metric metric
no metric [metric]
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>black-hole metric)
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>indirect metric)
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>next-hop metric)
Full Contexts 
configure router static-route-entry black-hole metric
configure router static-route-entry indirect metric
configure router static-route-entry next-hop metric
Description 

This command specifies the cost metric for the static route, expressed as a decimal integer. This value is used when importing the static route into other protocols such as OSPF. When the metric is configured as 0 then the metric configured in OSPF, default-import-metric, applies. When modifying the metric of an existing static route, the preference will not change unless specified. This value is also used to determine which static route to install in the forwarding table.

If there are multiple static routes with the same preference but different metrics then the lower cost (metric) route will be installed.

The no form of this command returns the metric to the default value

Default 

metric 1

Parameters 
metric
Specifies the cost metric value.
Values—
0 to 65535

 

metric

Syntax 
metric metric
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>sdp metric)
Full Contexts 
configure service sdp metric
Description 

This command specifies the metric to be used within the tunnel table manager for decision making purposes. When multiple SDPs going to the same destination exist, this value is used as a tie-breaker by tunnel table manager users such as MP-BGP to select the route with the lower value.

Parameters 
metric—
Specifies the SDP metric.
Values—
0 to 65535

 

metric

Syntax 
metric metric
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>isis>if>level metric)
Full Contexts 
configure router isis interface level metric
Description 

This command configures the metric used for the level on the interface.

In order to calculate the lowest cost to reach a given destination, each configured level on each interface must have a cost. The costs for each level on an interface may be different.

If the metric is not configured, the default of 10 is used unless reference bandwidth is configured.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

metric 10

Parameters 
metric—
Specifies the metric assigned for this level on this interface.
Values—
1 to 16777215

 

metric

Syntax 
metric metric
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>interface metric)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>area>interface metric)
Full Contexts 
configure router ospf area interface metric
configure router ospf3 area interface metric
Description 

This command configures an explicit route cost metric for the OSPF interface that overrides the metrics calculated based on the speed of the underlying link.

The no form of this command deletes the manually configured interface metric, so the interface uses the computed metric based on the reference-bandwidth command setting and the speed of the underlying link.

Default 

no metric

Parameters 
metric—
Specifies the metric to be applied to the interface expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

metric

Syntax 
metric metric [equal |or-higher |or-lower]
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>from metric)
Full Contexts 
configure router policy-options policy-statement entry from metric
Description 

This command matches BGP routes based on local preference (the value in the MULTI_EXIT_DISC attribute).

If no comparison qualifiers are present (equal, or-higher, or-lower), then equal is the implied default.

A non-BGP route does not match a policy entry if it contains the metric command. In addition, a BGP route without a MED attribute also does not match a policy entry if it contains a metric command.

Default 

no metric

Parameters 
metric—
Specifies the MED value.
Values—
0 to 4294967295, or a parameter name delimited by starting and ending at-sign (@) characters

 

equal—
Specifies that matched routes should have the same MED as the value specified.
or-higher—
Specifies that matched routes should have the same or a greater MED as the value specified.
or-lower—
Specifies that matched routes should have the same or a lower MED as the value specified.

metric

Syntax 
metric {add |subtract} metric
metric set [igp |metric-value]
no metric
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>default-action metric)
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>action metric)
Full Contexts 
configure router policy-options policy-statement default-action metric
configure router policy-options policy-statement entry action metric
Description 

In a BGP import or export policy, this command assigns a MED value to routes matched by the policy statement entry. The MED value may be set to a fixed value (overriding the received value), set to the routing table cost of the route used to resolve the next hop of the BGP route, or modified by adding or subtracting a fixed value offset.

The no form of this command removes the MED attribute from the matched routes.

Default 

no metric

Parameters 
add —
Specifies that an integer is added to any existing metric. If the result of the addition results in a number greater than 4294967295, the value 4294967295 is used.
subtract—
Specified integer is subtracted from any existing metric. If the result of the subtraction results in a number less than 0, the value of 0 is used.
set—
Specifies that integer replaces any existing metric.
igp—
Sets the MED value to the routing table cost of the route used to resolve the next hop of the BGP route.
metric—
Specifies the metric modifier expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
0 to 4294967295
param-name —Specifies the metric parameter variable name. Allowed values are any string up to 32 characters composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes. Policy parameters must start and end with at-signs (@); for example, “@variable@”

 

17.236. metric-in

metric-in

Syntax 
metric-in metric
no metric-in
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip metric-in)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group metric-in)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group>neighbor metric-in)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng metric-in)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group metric-in)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group>neighbor metric-in)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn rip group metric-in
configure service vprn rip group neighbor metric-in
configure service vprn rip metric-in
configure service vprn ripng group metric-in
configure service vprn ripng group neighbor metric-in
configure service vprn ripng metric-in
Description 

This command sets the metric added to routes that were received from a RIP neighbor.

The no form of this command reverts the metric value back to the default.

Default 

no metric-in

Parameters 
metric—
The value added to the metric of routes received from a RIP neighbor, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 16

 

metric-in

Syntax 
metric-in metric
no metric-in
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>rip metric-in)
[Tree] (config>router>rip>group metric-in)
[Tree] (config>router>rip>group>neighbor metric-in)
[Tree] (config>router>ripng metric-in)
[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group metric-in)
[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group>neighbor metric-in)
Full Contexts 
configure router rip group metric-in
configure router rip group neighbor metric-in
configure router rip metric-in
configure router ripng group metric-in
configure router ripng group neighbor metric-in
configure router ripng metric-in
Description 

This command configures the metric added to routes received from a RIP neighbor.

When applying an export policy to a RIP configuration, the policy overrides the metric values determined through calculations involving the metric-in and metric-out values.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default 

metric-in 1

Parameters 
metric—
Specifies the value added to the metric of routes received from a RIP neighbor expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 16

 

17.237. metric-out

metric-out

Syntax 
metric-out metric
no metric-out
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip metric-out)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group metric-out)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>rip>group>neighbor metric-out)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng metric-out)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group metric-out)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ripng>group>neighbor metric-out)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn rip group metric-out
configure service vprn rip group neighbor metric-out
configure service vprn rip metric-out
configure service vprn ripng group metric-out
configure service vprn ripng group neighbor metric-out
configure service vprn ripng metric-out
Description 

This command sets the metric added to routes that were exported into RIP and advertised to RIP neighbors.

The no form of this command removes the command from the config and resets the metric-in value back to the default.

Default 

no metric-out

Parameters 
metric—
The value added to the metric for routes exported into RIP and advertised to RIP neighbors, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 16

 

metric-out

Syntax 
metric-out metric
no metric-out
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>rip metric-out)
[Tree] (config>router>rip>group metric-out)
[Tree] (config>router>rip>group>neighbor metric-out)
[Tree] (config>router>ripng metric-out)
[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group metric-out)
[Tree] (config>router>ripng>group>neighbor metric-out)
Full Contexts 
configure router rip group metric-out
configure router rip group neighbor metric-out
configure router rip metric-out
configure router ripng group metric-out
configure router ripng group neighbor metric-out
configure router ripng metric-out
Description 

This command configures the metric assigned to routes exported into RIP and advertised to RIP neighbors.

When applying an export policy to a RIP configuration, the policy overrides the metric values determined through calculations involving the metric-in and metric-out values.

The no form of the command reverts to the default value.

Default 

metric-out 1

Parameters 
metric—
Specifies the value added to the metric for routes exported into RIP and advertised to RIP neighbors expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 16

 

17.238. metric-type

metric-type

Syntax 
metric-type metric-type
no metric-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp metric-type)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template metric-type)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls lsp metric-type
configure router mpls lsp-template metric-type
Description 

This command specifies the link metric type to use in the RSVP-TE LSP or SR-TE LSP path computation by either the local CSPF or the PCE.

The no form of this command returns the metric to its default value.

Default 

metric-type igp

Parameters 
metric-type—
Specifies the metric type for the LSP.
Values—
igp, te

 

metric-type

Syntax 
metric-type {igp |te-metric default |delay}
no metric-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>fad>flex-algo metric-type)
Full Contexts 
configure router flexible-algorithm-definitions flex-algo metric-type
Description 

This command configures the type of metric for the flexible algorithm. The topology graph assumes that all links are configured with the correct metric type.

For example, if the flexible algorithm definition instructs the use of te-metric keyword, it is assumed that all links have te-metric configured. Links without the te-metric configuration are excluded from the flexible algorithm topology graph.

The no form of this command removes the configured metric type and sets it to its default value (that is, igp).

Default 

no metric-type

Parameters 
igp—
Keyword to use the IGP metric for the flexible algorithm topology graph.
te-metric—
Keyword to use the TE metric for the flexible algorithm topology graph.
delay—
Keyword to use the delay metric for the flexible algorithm topology graph.

17.239. mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

Syntax 
mfib-allowed-mda-destinations
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mesh-sdp egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations
configure service vpls spoke-sdp egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations
Description 

This command enters the context to configure MFIB-allowed MDA destinations.

The allowed-mda-destinations node and the corresponding mda command are used on spoke and mesh SDP bindings to provide a list of MDA destinations in the chassis that are allowed as destinations for multicast streams represented by [*,g] and [s,g] multicast flooding records on the VPLS service. The MDA list only applies to IP multicast forwarding when IGMP snooping is enabled on the VPLS service. The MDA list has no effect on normal VPLS flooding such as broadcast, L2 multicast, unknown destinations or non-snooped IP multicast.

At the IGMP snooping level, a spoke or mesh SDP binding is included in the flooding domain for an IP multicast stream when it has either been defined as a multicast router port, received a IGMP query through the binding or has been associated with the multicast stream through an IGMP request by a host over the binding. Due to the dynamic nature of the way that a spoke or mesh SDP binding is associated with one or more egress network IP interfaces, the system treats the binding as appearing on all network ports. This causes all possible network destinations in the switch fabric to be included in the multicast streams flooding domain. The MDA destination list provides a simple mechanism that narrows the IP multicast switch fabric destinations for the spoke or mesh SDP binding.

If no MDAs are defined within the allowed-mda-destinations node, the system operates normally and will forward IP multicast flooded packets associated with the spoke or mesh SDP binding to all switch fabric taps containing network IP interfaces.

The MDA inclusion list should include all MDAs that the SDP binding may attempt to forward through. A simple way to ensure that an MDA that is not included in the list is not being used by the binding is to define the SDP the binding is associated with as MPLS and use an RSVP-TE LSP with a strict egress hop. The MDA associated with the IP interface defined as the strict egress hop should be present in the inclusion list. If the inclusion list does not currently contain the MDA that the binding is forwarding through, the multicast packets will not reach the destination represented by the binding.

By default, the MDA inclusion list is empty.

If an MDA is removed from the list, the MDA is automatically removed from the flooding domain of any snooped IP multicast streams associated with a destination on the MDA unless the MDA was the last MDA on the inclusion list. Once the inclusion list is empty, all MDAs are eligible for snooped IP multicast flooding for streams associated with the SDP binding.

mfib-allowed-mda-destinations

Syntax 
mfib-allowed-mda-destinations
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>pw-template>egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations)
Full Contexts 
configure service pw-template egress mfib-allowed-mda-destinations
Description 

This command enables the context to configure MFIB-allowed XMA or MDA destinations.

The allowed-mda-destinations node and the corresponding mda command are used on spoke and mesh SDP bindings to provide a list of XMA or MDA destinations in the chassis that are allowed as destinations for multicast streams represented by [*,g] and [s,g] multicast flooding records on the VPLS service. The XMA or MDA list only applies to IP multicast forwarding when IGMP snooping is enabled on the VPLS service. The XMA or MDA list has no effect on normal VPLS flooding such as broadcast, Layer 2 multicast, unknown destinations or non-snooped IP multicast.

At the IGMP snooping level, a spoke or mesh SDP binding is included in the flooding domain for an IP multicast stream when it has either been defined as a multicast router port, received a IGMP query through the binding or has been associated with the multicast stream through an IGMP request by a host over the binding. Due to the dynamic nature of the way that a spoke or mesh SDP binding is associated with one or more egress network IP interfaces, the system treats the binding as appearing on all network ports. This causes all possible network destinations in the switch fabric to be included in the multicast streams flooding domain. The XMA or MDA destination list provides a simple mechanism that narrows the IP multicast switch fabric destinations for the spoke or mesh SDP binding.

If no XMAs or MDAs are defined within the allowed-mda-destinations node, the system operates normally and will forward IP multicast flooded packets associated with the spoke or mesh SDP binding to all switch fabric taps containing network IP interfaces.

The XMA or MDA inclusion list should include all XMAs or MDAs that the SDP binding may attempt to forward through. A simple way to ensure that an XMA or MDA that is not included in the list is not being used by the binding is to define the SDP the binding is associated with as MPLS and use an RSVP-TE LSP with a strict egress hop. The XMA or MDA associated with the IP interface defined as the strict egress hop should be present in the inclusion list.

If the inclusion list does not currently contain the XMA or MDA that the binding is forwarding through, the multicast packets will not reach the destination represented by the binding. By default, the XMA or MDA inclusion list is empty.

If an XMA or MDA is removed from the list, the XMA or MDA is automatically removed from the flooding domain of any snooped IP multicast streams associated with a destination on the XMA or MDA unless the XMA or MDA was the last XMA or MDA on the inclusion list. Once the inclusion list is empty, all XMAs or MDAs are eligible for snooped IP multicast flooding for streams associated with the SDP binding.

17.240. mfib-ping

mfib-ping

Syntax 
mfib-ping service service-id source src-ip destination mcast-address [size size] [ttl vc-label-ttl] [count send-count] [return-control] [timeout timeout] [interval interval]
Context 
[Tree] (oam mfib-ping)
Full Contexts 
oam mfib-ping
Description 

This command determines the list of SAPs which egress a certain IP multicast stream (identified by source unicast and destination multicast IP addresses) within a VPLS service. An MFIB ping packet is always sent via the data plane.

An MFIB ping is forwarded across the VPLS following the MFIB. If an entry for the specified source unicast and destination multicast IP addresses exist in the MFIB for that VPLS, then the packet is forwarded along those paths, provided they are active. A response is generated only when there is an egress SAP binding for the specified IP multicast stream.

An MFIB ping reply can be sent using the data plane or the control plane. The return-control option configures the reply to be sent using the control plane. If return-control is not specified, the reply is sent using the data plane.

Special Cases 
MFIB 224.0.0.X pings —
MFIB ping requests directed to a destination address in the special 224.0.0.X range are flooded throughout the service flooding domain and receives a response from all operational SAPs. Note that SAPs that are operationally down do not reply.
Parameters 
service-id —
Specifies the service ID of the VPLS to diagnose or manage.
Values—
1 to 2147483647, service-name, up to 64 characters

 

src-ip —
Specifies the source IP address for the OAM request.
Values—
ipv4-address - a.b.c.dipv6-address - xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx
xx [0..FF]H

 

mcast-address —
Specifies the destination multicast address for the OAM request.
Values—
ipv4-address - a.b.c.dipv6-address - xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx
xx [0..FF]H

 

size—
Specifies the multicast OAM request packet size, in octets, expressed as a decimal integer. The request payload is padded to the specified size with a 6-byte PAD header and a byte payload of 0xAA as necessary.

If the octet size specified is less than the minimum packet, the minimum sized packet necessary to send the request is used.

Values—
1 to 9786

 

Default—
No OAM packet padding
vc-label-ttl —
Specifies the TTL value in the VC label for the OAM request, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
255
send-count —
Specifies the number of messages to send, expressed as a decimal integer. The count parameter override the default number of message requests sent. Each message request must either time out or receive a reply before the next message request is sent.

The message interval value must be expired before the next message request is sent.

Values—
1 to 100

 

Default—
1
return-control —
Specifies that the OAM reply must be sent using the control plane instead of the data plane.
timeout —
Specifies the value used to override the default timeout value and is the amount of time that the router waits for a message reply after sending the next message request.

Upon the expiration of the message time out, the requesting router assumes that the message response is not received. A request timeout message is displayed by the CLI for each message request sent that expires. Any response received after the request times out is silently discarded.

Values—
1 to 100

 

Default—
5
interval —
Specifies the value used to override the default request message send interval and defines the minimum amount of time that must expire before the next message request is sent.

If the interval is set to 1 second where the timeout value is set to 10 seconds, then the maximum time between message requests is 10 seconds and the minimum is 1 second. This depends upon the receipt of a message reply corresponding to the outstanding message request.

Values—
1 to 10

 

Default—
1
Output 

The following output displays multicast FIB connectivity test information

Sample Output
A:ALA-A# oam mfib-ping service 10 source 10.10.10.1 destination 225.0.0.1 count 2
Seq Node-id                                               Path     Size  RTT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Send request Seq. 1.]
1   51.51.51.51:sap1/1/1                                 Self     100   0ms
1   54.54.54.54:sap1/1/2                                 In-Band  100   20ms
1   54.54.54.54:sap1/1/3                                 In-Band  100   10ms
1   52.52.52.52:sap1/1/3                                 In-Band  100   20ms
[Send request Seq. 2.]
2   51.51.51.51:sap1/1/1                                 Self     100   0ms
2   52.52.52.52:sap1/1/2                                 In-Band  100   10ms
2   54.54.54.54:sap1/1/2                                 In-Band  100   10ms
2   52.52.52.52:sap1/1/3                                 In-Band  100   20ms
2   54.54.54.54:sap1/1/3                                 In-Band  100   30ms
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A:ALA-AIM# oam mfib-ping service 1 source 11.11.0.0 destination 224.0.0.1
Seq Node-id                                               Path     Size  RTT
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[Send request Seq. 1.]
1   10.20.1.3:sap1/1/5:1                      Not in MFIB Self     40    0ms
1   10.20.1.3:sap1/1/2:1                                  Self     40    10ms
[Echo replies received: 2]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A:ALA-AIM# 

17.241. mfib-table-high-wmark

mfib-table-high-wmark

Syntax 
[no] mfib-table-high-wmark high-water-mark
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mfib-table-high-wmark)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mfib-table-high-wmark
Description 

This command specifies the multicast FIB high watermark. When the percentage filling level of the multicast FIB exceeds the configured value, a trap is generated and a log entry is added.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

mfib-table-high-wmark 95

Parameters 
high-water-mark—
Specifies the multicast FIB high watermark as a percentage.
Values—
1 to 100

 

17.242. mfib-table-low-wmark

mfib-table-low-wmark

Syntax 
[no] mfib-table-low-wmark low-water-mark
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mfib-table-low-wmark)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mfib-table-low-wmark
Description 

This command specifies the multicast FIB low watermark. When the percentage filling level of the multicast FIB drops below the configured value, the corresponding trap is cleared and a log entry is added.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

mfib-table-low-wmark

Parameters 
low-water-mark —
Specifies the multicast FIB low watermark as a percentage.
Values—
1 to 100

 

Default—
90

17.243. mfib-table-size

mfib-table-size

Syntax 
mfib-table-size size
no mfib-table-size
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mfib-table-size)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mfib-table-size
Description 

This command specifies the maximum number of (s,g) entries in the multicast forwarding database (MFIB) for this VPLS instance.

The mfib-table-size parameter specifies the maximum number of multicast database entries for both learned and static multicast addresses for the VPLS instance. When a table-size limit is set on the mfib of a service which is lower than the current number of dynamic entries present in the mfib then the number of entries remains above the limit.

The no form of this command removes the configured maximum MFIB table size.

Default 

no mfib-table-size

Parameters 
size —
Specifies the maximum number of (s,g) entries allowed in the Multicast FIB
Values—
1 to 40959

 

17.244. mgmt-ethernet

mgmt-ethernet

Syntax 
mgmt-ethernet [revert seconds]
no mgmt-ethernet
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy mgmt-ethernet)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy mgmt-ethernet
Description 

If the management Ethernet port on the active CPM goes down, this command allows the active CPM to be configured to use the management Ethernet port of the standby CPM.

The revert option allows the administrator to control when to revert back to the management Ethernet port of the primary CPM once it comes up again.

The no form of the command disables redundancy, so that connectivity to the active CPM is lost if its Ethernet port goes down.

This feature is not supported on the 7750 SR-a, 7750-e, and the VSR platforms.

Default 

no mgmt-ethernet

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the duration to wait (in seconds) before reverting back to the primary CPM’s management Ethernet port.
Values—
1 to 300

 

17.245. mh-mode

mh-mode

Syntax 
mh-mode {access |network}
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn>vxlan mh-mode)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls bgp-evpn vxlan mh-mode
Description 

This command configures multihoming mode.

Default 

mh-mode access

Parameters 
access—
When configured in this mode, the BGP-EVPN instance does not participate in multihoming procedures, such as processing DF election for the service or enabling local bias forwarding mode.
network—
When configured in this mode, the BGP-EVPN instance participates in multi-homing procedures, such as processing DF election for the service or enable local bias forwarding mode.

In services with two VXLAN instances, only one of the two instances can be configured as network.

17.246. mhf-creation

mhf-creation

Syntax 
mhf-creation {default |none |explicit |static}
no mhf-creation
Context 
[Tree] (cfg>eth-cfm>domain>assoc>bridge mhf-creation)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-cfm domain association bridge-identifier mhf-creation
Description 

This command defines the MIP method of creation. MIP creation mode and other factors are part of the MIP creation authority (association or default-domain) logic. The MIP creation algorithm may result in multiple potential MIPs. Only the lowest-level valid MIP is installed. The static creation mode is the exception to the single MIP installation rule.

Under the association context, the level level parameter is not supported as part of this command. The level is derived from the level configuration of the domain.

The no form of this command is only available under the association context, and reverts the current mode of creation to the default none. In order to transition to and from the static mode of operation, the active mhf-creation mode must be none.

Default 

mhf-creation none

Parameters 
default—
Specifies MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP without the requirement for a MEP at some lower MA level. If a lower-level MEP exists, the creation method will behave as explicit.
none—
Specifies that no MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP.
explicit—
Specifies that MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP only if a MEP is created at some lower MD Level. There must be at least one lower MD Level MEP provisioned on the same SAP or spoke SDP.
static—
Specifies the exact level of the MHF (MIP) that will be created for this SAP. Multiple MHFs (MIPs) are allowed as long as the MD Level hierarchy is properly configured for the particular Primary VLAN. Ingress MHFs (MIPs) with primary VLAN are not supported on SDP Bindings.

mhf-creation

Syntax 
mhf-creation {none |default |explicit |static} level level
no mhf-creation
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-cfm>default-domain>bridge-identifier mhf-creation)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-cfm default-domain bridge-identifier mhf-creation
Description 

This command defines the MIP method of creation. MIP creation mode and other factors are part of the MIP creation authority (association or default-domain) logic. The MIP creation algorithm may result in multiple potential MIPs. Only the lowest-level valid MIP is installed. The static creation mode is the exception to the single MIP installation rule.

Under the association context, the level level parameter is not supported as part of this command. The level is derived from the level configuration of the domain.

The no form of this command is only available under the association context, and reverts the current mode of creation to the default none. In order to transition to and from the static mode of operation, the active mhf-creation mode must be none.

Default 

mhf-creation defer (config>eth-cfm>default-domain>bridge-identifier)

Parameters 
none—
Specifies that no MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP.
default—
Specifies MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP without the requirement for a MEP at some lower MA level. If a lower-level MEP exists, the creation method will behave as explicit.
explicit—
Specifies that MHFs (MIPs) can be created for this SAP or spoke SDP only if a MEP is created at some lower MD Level. There must be at least one lower MD Level MEP provisioned on the same SAP or spoke SDP.
defer—
Defers the MIP creation process to the system-wide read-only values. This parameter is only configurable under the default-domain context.
level—
Specifies the requested level of the MIP. This is used by the MIP creation algorithm to determine its validity in comparison to other ETH-CFM MIPs in the same service. If level is configured as “defer”, the level value will be inherited from the global read-only system values, and “-1” will be stored as a MIB value in the table.
Values—
0 to 7, defer

 

Default—
defer

17.247. micro-loop-avoidance

micro-loop-avoidance

Syntax 
micro-loop-avoidance [fib-delay fib-delay]
no micro-loop-avoidance
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>isis>segment-routing micro-loop-avoidance)
Full Contexts 
configure router isis segment-routing micro-loop-avoidance
Description 

This command enables, in the IGP instance, the micro-loop avoidance feature to prevent micro-loops from using Segment Routing (SR) loop-free tunnels for packets that are forwarded over SR IS-IS node SIDs.

When enabled, the behavior of the feature is triggered by the receipt of a single event on a on a P2P link or broadcast link with two neighbors:

  1. link addition or restoration
  2. link removal or failure
  3. link metric change

IGP then performs the following procedures:

  1. runs the main SPF and LFA SPFs
  2. for a node or a prefix in which the SPF resulted in no change to its next hop(s) and metric(s), then IGP takes no action
  3. for a node or a prefix in which SPF resulted in a change to its next hop(s) or metric(s), IGP marks the route as micro-loop avoidance eligible:
    1. activate, for each node SID that uses a micro-loop avoidance eligible route with ECMP next hops, the common set of next hops between the previous and new SPF
    2. compute and activate, for each node SID which uses a micro-loop avoidance eligible route, with a single next hop loop-free SR tunnel that is applicable to the specific link event
      This tunnel acts the micro-loop avoidance primary path for the route and uses the same outgoing interface as the new computed primary next hop.
    3. program the TI-LFA, base LFA, or remote LFA backup path that protects the new primary next hop for the node SID
  4. start the fib-delay timer to delay programming of new main and LFA SPF results into the FIB
  5. upon the expiry of the fib-delay timer, program the new primary next hop(s) for node SIDs routes that were marked eligible for micro-loop avoidance procedures

The no form of this command disables the micro-loop avoidance feature.

Default 

no micro-loop-avoidance

Parameters 
fib-delay—
Specifies the time the programming of the new next hops for the SR tunnel, in 100s of milliseconds.
Values—
1 to 300

 

Default—
15

17.248. mid-pool

mid-pool

Syntax 
[no] mid-pool mid-pool-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>hs-pool-policy>mid-tier mid-pool)
Full Contexts 
configure qos hs-pool-policy mid-tier mid-pool
Description 

This command enables the context to configure mid-pool tier parameters for an HS pool policy. Parameters allow for allocating the percentage of the root pool size, defining a mid-tier pool’s root-pool parent, specifying the port bandwidth oversubscription factor, or specifying a slope policy for the specific mid-tier pool.

The no form of the command reverts the parent root pool association to root-pool 1, reverts to the default allocation-percentage value, the default port-bw-oversub-factor, and default slope-policy to the specified mid-pool.

Parameters 
mid-pool-id—
Specifies the mid pool ID. This is a required parameter when this command is executed and specifies which mid-pool context is being entered.
Values—
1 to 16

 

17.249. mid-tier

mid-tier

Syntax 
mid-tier
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>hs-pool-policy mid-tier)
Full Contexts 
configure qos hs-pool-policy mid-tier
Description 

This command enables the context to configure HS pool policy parameters. Within the mid-tier context, mid-pools can be associated with a root pool, sized as a percentage of the root pool, have an HS slope policy applied, or be configured with a port bandwidth oversubscription factor parameter used to influence the port-class pool sizes associated with the mid-tier pool.

17.250. migrant

migrant

Syntax 
[no] migrant
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>wlan-gw>tunnel-query>ue-state migrant)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt wlan-gw tunnel-query ue-state migrant
Description 

This command enables matching on tunnels with migrant UEs.

The no form of this command disables matching on migrant UEs, unless UE state matching is disabled altogether.

Default 

no migrant

17.251. millisecond-event-timestamp

millisecond-event-timestamp

Syntax 
[no] millisecond-event-timestamp
Context 
[Tree] (config>aaa>isa-radius-plcy>acct-include-attributes millisecond-event-timestamp)
Full Contexts 
configure aaa isa-radius-policy acct-include-attributes millisecond-event-timestamp
Description 

This command enables the router to include the Alc-Millisecond-Event-Timestamp attribute in the accounting message. This attribute specifies the time the accounting event was logged, in milliseconds since Jan 1, 1970 00:00:00 UTC.

The no form of this command disables the router from including the Alc-Millisecond-Event-Timestamp attribute in the accounting message.

17.252. min-advertisement

min-advertisement

Syntax 
min-advertisement seconds
no min-advertisement
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv min-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 min-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv min-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if min-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 min-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv min-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv min-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>rtr-adv-plcy min-advertisement)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 min-advertisement
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements min-advertisement
configure service ies subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements min-advertisement
configure service vprn router-advert interface min-advertisement
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 min-advertisement
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements min-advertisement
configure service vprn subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements min-advertisement
configure subscriber-mgmt router-advertisement-policy min-advertisement
Description 

This command specifies the minimum time allowed between sending unsolicited router advertisements.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

min-advertisement 900

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the minimum advertisement interval, in seconds.
Values—
900 to 1350

 

17.253. min-advertisement-interval

min-advertisement-interval

Syntax 
[no] min-advertisement-interval seconds
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if min-advertisement-interval)
[Tree] (config>router>router-advert>if min-advertisement-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure router router-advertisement interface min-advertisement-interval
configure service vprn router-advertisement interface min-advertisement-interval
Description 

This command configures the minimum interval between sending ICMPv6 neighbor discovery router advertisement messages.

Default 

min-advertisement-interval 200

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the minimum interval in seconds between sending ICMPv6 neighbor discovery router advertisement messages.
Values—
3 to 1350

 

min-advertisement-interval

Syntax 
min-advertisement-interval seconds
no min-advertisement-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>router-advert>if min-advertisement-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure router router-advertisement interface min-advertisement-interval
Description 

This command configures the minimum interval between sending ICMPv6 neighbor discovery router advertisement messages.

Default 

min-advertisement-interval 200

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the minimum interval in seconds between sending ICMPv6 neighbor discovery router advertisement messages.
Values—
3 to 1350

 

17.254. min-auth-interval

min-auth-interval

Syntax 
min-auth-interval min-auth-interval
no min-auth-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if min-auth-interval)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>arp-host min-auth-interval)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>arp-host min-auth-interval)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only min-auth-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface min-auth-interval
configure service vpls sap arp-host min-auth-interval
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface arp-host min-auth-interval
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only min-auth-interval
Description 

This command configures the minimum authentication interval.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

min-auth-interval 15

Parameters 
min-auth-interval—
Specifies the minimum authentication interval, in minutes.
Values—
1 to 6000

 

min-auth-interval

Syntax 
min-auth-interval [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
no min-auth-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-sol min-auth-interval)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-sol min-auth-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-solicit min-auth-interval
Description 

This command specify the minimum interval between two consecutive authentication attempts from the same host.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
days
Specifies the number of days that a user must wait for the next authentication attempt.
hours
Specifies the number of hours that a user must wait for the next authentication attempt.
minutes
Specifies the number of minutes that a user must wait for the next authentication attempt.
seconds
Specifies the number of seconds that a user must wait for the next authentication attempt.

min-auth-interval

Syntax 
min-auth-interval [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
min-auth-interval infinite
no min-auth-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipoe-session min-auth-interval)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipoe-session min-auth-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipoe-session min-auth-interval
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipoe-session min-auth-interval
Description 

Re-authentication for IPoE sessions enable dynamic policy changes.

This command configures the maximum frequency of re-authentications by specifying a minimum interval between two non-forced authentications for the same IPoE session.

A forced authentication is by default triggered by a circuit-id, interface-id or remote-id change (see the force-auth [config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipoe-session force-auth, config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipoe-session force-auth] command).

Re-authentications are, by default, disabled and can be enabled by configuring a min-auth-interval.

Setting the min-auth-interval to zero seconds always re-authenticates on each trigger packet.

The no form of this command reverts to the default behavior.

Default 

min-auth-interval infinite

Parameters 
days
Specifies the min number of days between two non-forced authentications for IPoE sessions.
Values—
0 to 365

 

hours
Specifies the min number of hours between two non-forced authentications for IPoE sessions.
Values—
0 to 23

 

minutes
Specifies the min number of minutes between two non-forced authentications for IPoE sessions.
Values—
0 to 59

 

seconds
Specifies the min number of seconds between two non-forced authentications for IPoE sessions.
Values—
0 to 59

 

infinite —
Specifies that non-forced re-authentications for IPoE sessions is not performed.

17.255. min-bandwidth

min-bandwidth

Syntax 
min-bandwidth bandwidth-in-mbps
no min-bandwidth
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>auto-bandwidth min-bandwidth)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template>auto-bandwidth min-bandwidth)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls lsp auto-bandwidth min-bandwidth
configure router mpls lsp-template auto-bandwidth min-bandwidth
Description 

This command configures the minimum bandwidth that auto-bandwidth allocation is allowed to request for an LSP.

The LSP minimum applies whether the bandwidth adjustment is triggered by normal adjust-timer expiry or manual request.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

min-bandwidth 0

Parameters 
bandwidth-in-mbps —
Specifies the minimum bandwidth in Mb/s.
Values—
0 to 6400000

 

17.256. min-delay

min-delay

Syntax 
min-delay [delay]
no min-delay
Context 
[Tree] (config>log>event-handling>handler>action-list>entry min-delay)
Full Contexts 
configure log event-handling handler action-list entry min-delay
Description 

This command specifies the minimum delay in seconds between subsequent executions of the action specified in this entry. This is useful, for example, to ensure that a script does not get triggered to execute too often.

Default 

no min-delay

Parameters 
delay—
Specifies the unit in seconds.
Values—
1 to 604800

 

17.257. min-frame-length

min-frame-length

Syntax 
min-frame-length byte-length
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet min-frame-length)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet min-frame-length
Description 

This command configures the minimum transmitted frame length.

Parameters 
byte-length—
Specifies the number of bytes for the minimum frame length.
Values—
64, 68

 

Default—
64

17.258. min-lease-time

min-lease-time

Syntax 
min-lease-time [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
no min-lease-time
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool min-lease-time)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool min-lease-time)
Full Contexts 
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool min-lease-time
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool min-lease-time
Description 

This command configures the minimum lease time.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

min-lease-time min 10

Parameters 
min-lease-time—
Specifies the minimum lease time.
Values—

days

0 to 3650

hours

0 to 23

minutes

0 to 59

seconds

0 to 59

 

17.259. min-num-ue

min-num-ue

Syntax 
min-num-ue minimum
no min-num-ue
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>wlan-gw>tunnel-query min-num-ue)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt wlan-gw tunnel-query min-num-ue
Description 

This command enables matching only on tunnels that have at least the specified number of UEs connected.

The no form of this command disables matching on a minimum number of UEs.

Default 

no min-num-ue

Parameters 
minimum—
Specifies the minimum number of UEs.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

17.260. min-route-advertisement

min-route-advertisement

Syntax 
min-route-advertisement seconds
no min-route-advertisement
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>bgp-prng-plcy min-route-advertisement)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt bgp-peering-policy min-route-advertisement
Description 

This command configures the minimum interval, in seconds, at which a prefix can be advertised to a peer.

The no form of this command reverts to default values.

Default 

min-route-advertisement 30

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the minimum route advertising interval, in seconds, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

min-route-advertisement

Syntax 
min-route-advertisement seconds
no min-route-advertisement
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp min-route-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group min-route-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor min-route-advertisement)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn bgp group min-route-advertisement
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor min-route-advertisement
configure service vprn bgp min-route-advertisement
Description 

This command configures the minimum interval, in seconds, at which a prefix can be advertised to a peer.

This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group) or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.

The no form of this command reverts to default values.

Default 

min-route-advertisement 30

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the minimum route advertising interval, in seconds, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

min-route-advertisement

Syntax 
min-route-advertisement seconds
no min-route-advertisement
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp min-route-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group min-route-advertisement)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor min-route-advertisement)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp group min-route-advertisement
configure router bgp group neighbor min-route-advertisement
configure router bgp min-route-advertisement
Description 

This command configures the minimum interval, in seconds, between successive updates of a prefix towards a peer.

This configuration parameter can be set at three levels: global level (applies to all peers), group level (applies to all peers in peer-group), or neighbor level (only applies to specified peer). The most specific value is used.

The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default.

The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.

The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.

The rapid-update command can be used to override the peer-level min-route-advertisement time and applies the minimum setting (0 seconds) to routes belonging to address families specified by the rapid-update command; routes of other address families continue to be advertised according to the session-level MRAI setting.

The rapid-update and rapid-withdrawal commands may result in the routes being sent before the peer-level MRAI timer expires.

Default 

min-route-advertisement 30

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the minimum route advertising interval, in seconds, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

17.261. min-thresh-separation

min-thresh-separation

Syntax 
min-thresh-separation size [bytes |kilobytes]
no min-thresh-separation
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>ingress>policer-control-policy>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof>egress>policer-control-policy>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile egress policer-control-policy priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile ingress policer-control-policy priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
Description 

The min-thresh-separation command defines the minimum required separation between each in-use discard threshold maintained for each parent policer context associated with the policer-control-policy. The min-thresh-separation value may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile to which the policy is applied.

The system uses the default or specified min-thresh-separation value in order to determine the minimum separation required between each of the of the parent policer discard thresholds. The system enforces the minimum separation based on the following behavior in two ways. The first is determining the size of the shared-portion for each priority level (when the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is not specified):

  1. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has less than two child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level is zero.
  2. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has two or more child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level is equal to the current value of min-thresh-separation.

The second function the system uses the min-thresh-separation value for is determining the value per priority level for the fair-portion:

  1. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has no child policers associated, the fair-portion for the level is zero.
  2. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has one child policer associated, the fair-portion is equal to the maximum of the min-thresh-separation value and the priority level’s mbs-contribution value.
  3. When a parent policer instance's priority level has two or more child policers associated, the fair-portion is equal to the maximum of the following:
    1. min-thresh-separation value
    2. The priority level’s mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

When the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is defined for a priority level within the policy, the system will treat the defined mbs-contribution value as an explicit definition of the priority level’s MBS. While the system will continue to track child policer associations with the parent policer priority levels, the association counters will have no effect. Instead the following rules is used to determine a fixed priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion:

  1. If a fixed priority level’s mbs-contribution value is set to zero, both the shared-portion and fair-portion is set to zero
  2. If the mbs-contribution value is not set to zero:
    1. The shared-portion is set to the current min-thresh-separation value
    2. The fair-portion is set to the maximum of the following:

min-thresh-separation value

mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

Each time the min-thresh-separation value is modified, the thresholds for all instances of the parent policer created through association with this policer-control-policy are reevaluated.

Determining the Correct Value for the Minimum Threshold Separation Value

The minimum value for min-thresh-separation should be set equal to the maximum size packet that is handled by the parent policer. This ensures that when a lower priority packet is incrementing the bucket, the size of the increment will not cause the bucket's depth to equal or exceed a higher priority threshold. It also ensures that an unfair packet within a priority level cannot cause the PIR bucket to increment to the discard-all threshold within the priority.

When evaluating maximum packet size, each child policer’s per-packet-offset setting should be taken into consideration. If the maximum size packet is 1518 bytes and a per-packet-offset parameter is configured to add 20 bytes per packet, min-thresh-separation should be set to 1538 due to the fact that the parent policer will increment its PIR bucket using the extra 20 bytes.

In most circumstances, a value larger than the maximum packet size is not necessary. Management of priority level aggregate burst tolerance is intended to be implemented using the priority level mbs-contribution command. Setting a value larger than the maximum packet size will not adversely affect the policer performance, but it may increase the aggregate burst tolerance for each priority level.

Note:

A priority level’s shared-portion of the parent policer’s PIR bucket depth is only necessary to provide some separation between a lower priority’s discard-all threshold and this priority’s discard-unfair threshold. It is expected that the burst tolerance for the unfair packets is relatively minimal since the child policers feeding the parent policer priority level all have some amount of fair burst before entering into an FIR exceed or unfair state. The fair burst amount for a priority level is defined using the mbs-contribution command.

The no form of this command returns the policy’s min-thresh-separation value to the default value.

Parameters 
size
The size parameter is required when executing the min-thresh-separation command. It is expressed as an integer and specifies the shared portion in bytes or kilobytes that is selected by the trailing bytes or kilobytes keywords. If both bytes and kilobytes are missing, kilobytes is the assumed value. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the min-thresh-separation value has been overridden.
Values—
0 to 16777216

 

[bytes |kilobytes]
The bytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the kilobytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in bytes.

The kilobytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the bytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in kilobytes.

Default—
kilobytes

min-thresh-separation

Syntax 
min-thresh-separation size [bytes |kilobytes]
no min-thresh-separation
Context 
[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>access>queue-group>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>card>fp>ingress>network>queue-group>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
Full Contexts 
configure card fp ingress access queue-group policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure card fp ingress network queue-group policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
Description 

This command defines the minimum required separation between each in-use discard threshold maintained for each parent policer context associated with the policer-control-policy. The min-thresh-separation value may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile to which the policy is applied.

The system uses the default or specified min-thresh-separation value in order to determine the minimum separation required between each of the of the parent policer discard thresholds. The system enforces the minimum separation based on the following behavior in two ways. The first is determining the size of the shared-portion for each priority level (when the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is not specified):

  1. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has less than two child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level will be zero.
  2. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has two or more child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level will be equal to the current value of min-thresh-separation.

The second function the system uses the min-thresh-separation value for is determining the value per priority level for the fair-portion:

  1. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has no child policers associated, the fair-portion for the level will be zero.
  2. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has one child policer associated, the fair-portion will be equal to the maximum of the min-thresh-separation value and the priority level’s mbs-contribution value.
  3. When a parent policer instance's priority level has two or more child policers associated, the fair-portion will be equal to the maximum of the following:
    1. min-thresh-separation value
    2. The priority level’s mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

When the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is defined for a priority level within the policy, the system will treat the defined mbs-contribution value as an explicit definition of the priority level’s MBS. While the system will continue to track child policer associations with the parent policer priority levels, the association counters will have no effect. Instead the following rules will be used to determine a fixed priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion:

  1. If a fixed priority level’s mbs-contribution value is set to zero, both the shared-portion and fair-portion will be set to zero
  2. If the mbs-contribution value is not set to zero:
    1. The shared-portion will be set to the current min-thresh-separation value
    2. The fair-portion will be set to the maximum of the following:
      1. min-thresh-separation value
      2. mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

Each time the min-thresh-separation value is modified, the thresholds for all instances of the parent policer created through association with this policer-control-policy are reevaluated except for parent policer instances that currently have a min-thresh-separation override.

Determining the Correct Value for the Minimum Threshold Separation Value

The minimum value for min-thresh-separation should be set equal to the maximum size packet that will be handled by the parent policer. This ensures that when a lower priority packet is incrementing the bucket, the size of the increment will not cause the bucket's depth to equal or exceed a higher priority threshold. It also ensures that an unfair packet within a priority level cannot cause the PIR bucket to increment to the discard-all threshold within the priority.

When evaluating maximum packet size, each child policer’s per-packet-offset setting should be taken into consideration. If the maximum size packet is 1518 bytes and a per-packet-offset parameter is configured to add 20 bytes per packet, min-thresh-separation should be set to 1538 due to the fact that the parent policer will increment its PIR bucket using the extra 20 bytes.

In most circumstances, a value larger than the maximum packet size is not necessary. Management of priority level aggregate burst tolerance is intended to be implemented using the priority level mbs-contribution command. Setting a value larger than the maximum packet size will not adversely affect the policer performance, but it may increase the aggregate burst tolerance for each priority level.

One thing to note is that a priority level’s shared-portion of the parent policer’s PIR bucket depth is only necessary to provide some separation between a lower priority’s discard-all threshold and this priority’s discard-unfair threshold. It is expected that the burst tolerance for the unfair packets is relatively minimal since the child policers feeding the parent policer priority level all have some amount of fair burst before entering into an FIR exceed or unfair state. The fair burst amount for a priority level is defined using the mbs-contribution command.

The no form of this command returns the policy’s min-thresh-separation value to the default value. This has no effect on instances of the parent policer where min-thresh-separation is overridden unless the override is removed.

Default 

no min-thresh-separation

Parameters 
size
Specifies that the size parameter is required when executing the min-thresh-separation command. It is expressed as an integer and specifies the shared portion in bytes or kilobytes that is selected by the trailing bytes or kilobytes keywords. If both bytes and kilobytes are missing, kilobytes is the assumed value. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the min-thresh-separation value has been overridden. Clearing an override on parent policer instance causes this value to be enforced.
Values—
0 to 16777216

 

bytes |kilobytes—
Specifies that the bytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the kilobytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in bytes.

The kilobytes keyword is optional and is mutually exclusive with the bytes keyword. When specified, size is interpreted as specifying the size of min-thresh-separation in kilobytes.

Values—
bytes or kilobytes

 

Default—
kilobytes

min-thresh-separation

Syntax 
min-thresh-separation size [bytes |kilobytes]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>fpipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>fpipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>policer-control-override>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
Full Contexts 
configure service apipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service apipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service cpipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service cpipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service epipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service epipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service fpipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service fpipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service ipipe sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service ipipe sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
Description 

This command, within the SAP ingress and egress contexts, is used to override the root arbiter’s parent policer min-thresh-separation parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy min-thresh-separation parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no min-thresh-separation command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the min-thresh-separation setting from the policer-control-policy to control the root arbiter’s parent policer’s minimum discard threshold separation size.

Default 

no min-thresh-separation

Parameters 
size—
The minimum discard threshold separation override value.
Values—
1 to 16777216 | default

 

bytes—
Signifies that size is expressed in bytes. The bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and optional. The default is kilobytes.
kilobytes—
Signifies that size is expressed in kilobytes. The bytes and kilobytes keywords are mutually exclusive and optional. The default is kilobytes.

min-thresh-separation

Syntax 
min-thresh-separation size [{bytes |kilobytes}]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service vpls sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
Description 

This command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override the root arbiter’s parent policer min-thresh-separation parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy min-thresh-separation parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no min-thresh-separation command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the min-thresh-separation setting from the policer-control-policy to control the root arbiter’s parent policer’s minimum discard threshold separation size.

Default 

no min-thresh-separation

Parameters 
size—
This parameter is required when specifying min-thresh-separation override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216 or default

 

Default—
kilobytes

min-thresh-separation

Syntax 
min-thresh-separation size [{bytes |kilobytes}]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap egress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service ies interface sap ingress policer-control-override priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
Description 

This command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override the root arbiter’s parent policer min-thresh-separation parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy min-thresh-separation parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no min-thresh-separation command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the min-thresh-separation setting from the policer-control-policy to control the root arbiter’s parent policer’s minimum discard threshold separation size.

Default 

no min-thresh-separation

Parameters 
size—
This parameter is required when specifying min-thresh-separation override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216 or default

 

Default—
kilobytes

min-thresh-separation

Syntax 
min-thresh-separation size [{bytes |kilobytes}]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>policer-ctrl-over>mbs-thrshlds min-thresh-separation)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap egress policer-ctrl-over priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
configure service vprn interface sap ingress policer-ctrl-over priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
Description 

This command within the SAP ingress and egress contexts is used to override the root arbiter’s parent policer min-thresh-separation parameter that is defined within the policer-control-policy applied to the SAP.

When the override is defined, modifications to the policer-control-policy min-thresh-separation parameter have no effect on the SAP’s parent policer until the override is removed using the no min-thresh-separation command within the SAP.

The no form of this command removes the override and allows the min-thresh-separation setting from the policer-control-policy to control the root arbiter’s parent policer’s minimum discard threshold separation size.

Default 

no min-thresh-separation

Parameters 
size—
This parameter is required when specifying min-thresh-separation override and is expressed as an integer representing the required size in either bytes or kilobytes. The default is kilobytes. The optional byte and kilobyte keywords are mutually exclusive and are used to explicitly define whether size represents bytes or kilobytes.
Values—
0 to 16777216 or default

 

Default—
kilobytes

min-thresh-separation

Syntax 
min-thresh-separation size [bytes |kilobytes]
no min-thresh-separation
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>plcr-ctrl-plcy>root>priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation)
Full Contexts 
configure qos policer-control-policy root priority-mbs-thresholds min-thresh-separation
Description 

The min-thresh-separation command defines the minimum required separation between each in-use discard threshold maintained for each parent policer context associated with the policer-control-policy. The min-thresh-separation value may be overridden on each SAP or sub-profile to which the policy is applied.

The system uses the default or specified min-thresh-separation value in order to determine the minimum separation required between each of the of the parent policer discard thresholds. The system enforces the minimum separation based on the following behavior in two ways. The first is determining the size of the shared-portion for each priority level (when the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is not specified):

  1. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has less than two child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level will be zero.
  2. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has two or more child policers associated, the shared-portion for the level will be equal to the current value of min-thresh-separation.

The second function the system uses the min-thresh-separation value for is determining the value per priority level for the fair-portion:

  1. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has no child policers associated, the fair-portion for the level will be zero.
  2. When a parent policer instance’s priority level has one child policer associated, the fair-portion will be equal to the maximum of the min-thresh-separation value and the priority level’s mbs-contribution value.
  3. When a parent policer instance's priority level has two or more child policers associated, the fair-portion will be equal to the maximum of the following:
    1. min-thresh-separation value
    2. mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

When the mbs-contribution command’s optional fixed keyword is defined for a priority level within the policy, the system will treat the defined mbs-contribution value as an explicit definition of the priority level’s MBS. While the system will continue to track child policer associations with the parent policer priority levels, the association counters will have no effect. Instead, the following rules will be used to determine a fixed priority level’s shared-portion and fair-portion:

  1. If a fixed priority level’s mbs-contribution value is set to zero, both the shared-portion and fair-portion will be set to zero
  2. If the mbs-contribution value is not set to zero:
    1. The shared-portion will be set to the current min-thresh-separation value
    2. The fair-portion will be set to the maximum of the following:
      min-thresh-separation value
      mbs-contribution value less min-thresh-separation value

Each time the min-thresh-separation value is modified, the thresholds for all instances of the parent policer created through association with this policer-control-policy are reevaluated.

Determining the Correct Value for the Minimum Threshold Separation Value

The minimum value for min-thresh-separation should be set equal to the maximum size packet that will be handled by the parent policer. This ensures that when a lower priority packet is incrementing the bucket, the size of the increment will not cause the bucket's depth to equal or exceed a higher priority threshold. It also ensures that an unfair packet within a priority level cannot cause the PIR bucket to increment to the discard-all threshold within the priority.

When evaluating maximum packet size, each child policer’s per-packet-offset setting should be taken into consideration. If the maximum size packet is 1518 bytes and a per-packet-offset parameter is configured to add 20 bytes per packet, min-thresh-separation should be set to 1538 due to the fact that the parent policer will increment its PIR bucket using the extra 20 bytes.

In most circumstances, a value larger than the maximum packet size is not necessary. Management of priority level aggregate burst tolerance is intended to be implemented using the priority level mbs-contribution command. Setting a value larger than the maximum packet size will not adversely affect the policer performance, but it may increase the aggregate burst tolerance for each priority level.

Note:

A priority level’s shared-portion of the parent policer’s PIR bucket depth is only necessary to provide some separation between a lower priority’s discard-all threshold and this priority’s discard-unfair threshold. It is expected that the burst tolerance for the unfair packets is relatively minimal since the child policers feeding the parent policer priority level all have some amount of fair burst before entering into an FIR exceed or unfair state. The fair burst amount for a priority level is defined using the mbs-contribution command.

The no form of this command returns the policy’s min-thresh-separation value to the default value.

Parameters 
size—
The size parameter is required when executing the min-thresh-separation command. It is expressed as an integer. Setting this value has no effect on parent policer instances where the min-thresh-separation value has been overridden.
Values—
0 to 4194304 or default (applies to the 7450 ESS)
0 to 16777216 or default (applies to the 7750 SR or 7950 XRS)

 

Default—
1536
bytes |kilobytes—
This parameter indicates whether the size is expressed in bytes or kilobytes.
Default—
kilobytes

17.262. min-vp-vpi

min-vp-vpi

Syntax 
min-vp-vpi value
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path>atm min-vp-vpi)
[Tree] (config>port>ml-bundle>ima>atm min-vp-vpi)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>atm min-vp-vpi)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3>atm min-vp-vpi)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>atm min-vp-vpi)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e3>atm min-vp-vpi)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle ima atm min-vp-vpi
configure port sonet-sdh path atm min-vp-vpi
configure port tdm ds1 channel-group atm min-vp-vpi
configure port tdm ds3 atm min-vp-vpi
configure port tdm e1 channel-group atm min-vp-vpi
configure port tdm e3 atm min-vp-vpi
Description 

This command sets the minimum allowable virtual path identifier (VPI) value that can be used on the ATM interface for a VPC.

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the minimum allowable VPI value that can be used on the ATM interface for a VPC.
Values—
0 to 4095 (NNI) 0 to 255 (UNI)

 

Default—
0

17.263. min-wait-to-advertise

min-wait-to-advertise

Syntax 
min-wait-to-advertise seconds
no min-wait-to-advertise
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>convergence min-wait-to-advertise)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn bgp convergence min-wait-to-advertise
Description 

This command configures the minimum amount of time that BGP waits, after the first session establishment following a restart of the BGP instance, until it can start advertising IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes to its BGP peers, to allow time for re-convergence.

The time limit configured by this command should allow sufficient time for all important peers to re-establish their sessions with the restarting router.

The no form of this command implements the default time limit of 0 seconds, which disables all forms of delayed route advertisement. In other words, it causes IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes to be re-advertised as soon as possible after BGP instance restart.

Default 

no min-wait-to-advertise

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the minimum amount of time, in seconds, that BGP waits until IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes can be advertised to peers.
Values—
0 to 3600

 

min-wait-to-advertise

Syntax 
min-wait-to-advertise seconds
no min-wait-to-advertise
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>convergence min-wait-to-advertise)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp convergence min-wait-to-advertise
Description 

This command configures the minimum amount of time that BGP waits, after the first session establishment following a restart of the BGP instance, until it can start advertising IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes to its BGP peers, to allow time for re-convergence.

The time limit configured by this command should allow sufficient time for all important peers to re-establish their sessions with the restarting router.

The no form of this command implements the default time limit of 0 seconds, which disables all forms of delayed route advertisement. In other words, it causes IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes to be re-advertised as soon as possible after BGP instance restart.

Default 

no min-wait-to-advertise

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the minimum amount of time, in seconds, that BGP waits until IPv4-unicast and IPv6-unicast routes can be advertised to peers.
Values—
0 to 3600

 

17.264. minimum

minimum

Syntax 
minimum [percent [percent]] [number [number]]
no minimum
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server>pool>prefix>thresholds>minimum-free minimum)
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server>pool>prefix>thresholds>minimum-free minimum)
Full Contexts 
configure router dhcp6 local-dhcp-server pool prefix thresholds minimum-free minimum
configure service vprn dhcp6 local-dhcp-server pool prefix thresholds minimum-free minimum
Description 

This command configures a percentage-based or number-based threshold which represents the minimal available percentage or number of the prefix with a configured length in the provisioned prefix. The system sends out a warning if the actual percentage or number is lower than the configured threshold.

For example:

prefix 2001:0:0:ffe0::/50 pd wan-host create
   thresholds
       minimum-free prefix-length 64
           minimum number 3
 

With the above configuration, the system sends a warning when the number of available /64 in prefix 2001:0:0:ffe0::/50 is less than 3.

The no form of this command removes the command parameters from the configuration.

Parameters 
percent
Specifies the percentage of used prefixes with the minimum free threshold length in the pool compared to the number of provisioned prefixes.
Values—
0 to 100

 

number
Specifies the number of prefixes.
Values—
0 to 4294967295

 

17.265. minimum-age

minimum-age

Syntax 
minimum-age [days days] [hrs hours] [min minutes] [sec seconds]
no minimum-age
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>password minimum-age)
Full Contexts 
configure system security password minimum-age
Description 

Configure the minimum required age of a password before it can be changed again.

Default 

minimum-age min 10

Parameters 
days—
Specifies the minimum required days of a password before it can be changed again.
Values—
0 to 1

 

hours—
Specifies the minimum required hours of a password before it can be changed again.
Values—
0 to 23

 

minutes—
Specifies the minimum required minutes of a password before it can be changed again.
Values—
0 to 59

 

seconds—
Specifies the minimum required seconds of a password before it can be changed again.
Values—
0 to 59
Note:

This command applies to local users.

 

17.266. minimum-change

minimum-change

Syntax 
minimum-change distance
no minimum-change
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>password minimum-change)
Full Contexts 
configure system security password minimum-change
Description 

This command configures the minimum number of characters required to be different in the new password from a previous password.

The no form of this command reverts to default value.

Default 

minimum-change 5

Parameters 
distance—
Specifies how many characters must be different in the new password from the old password.
Values—
1 to 20
Note:

This command applies to local users.

 

17.267. minimum-classes

minimum-classes

Syntax 
minimum-classes minimum
no minimum-classes
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>password>complexity-rules minimum-classes)
Full Contexts 
configure system security password complexity-rules minimum-classes
Description 

Force the use of at least this many different character classes

The no form of this command resets to default.

Default 

no minimum-classes

Parameters 
minimum —
Specifies the minimum number of classes to be configured.
Values—
2 to 4

 

17.268. minimum-free

minimum-free

Syntax 
minimum-free minimum-free [percent] [event-when-depleted]
no minimum-free
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool minimum-free)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool minimum-free)
Full Contexts 
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool minimum-free
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool minimum-free
Description 

This command specifies the desired minimum number of free addresses in this pool.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

minimum-free 1

Parameters 
minimum-free—
Specifies the minimum number of free addresses.
Values—
0 to 255

 

percent—
Specifies that the value indicates a percentage.
event-when-depleted—
This parameter enables a system-generate event when all available addresses in the pool/subnet of local DHCP server are depleted.

minimum-free

Syntax 
minimum-free minimum-free [percent] [event-when-depleted]
no minimum-free
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp>server>pool>subnet minimum-free)
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server>pool>subnet minimum-free)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp>server>pool>subnet minimum-free)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server>pool>subnet minimum-free)
Full Contexts 
configure router dhcp local-dhcp-server pool subnet minimum-free
configure router dhcp6 server pool subnet minimum-free
configure service vprn dhcp local-dhcp-server pool subnet minimum-free
configure service vprn dhcp6 server pool subnet minimum-free
Description 

This command configures the minimum number of free addresses in this subnet. If the actual number of free addresses in this subnet falls below this configured minimum, a notification is generated.

The no form of the reverts to the default.

Default 

minimum-free 1

Parameters 
minimum-free—
Specifies the minimum number of free addresses in this subnet.
Values—
0 to 255

 

percent—
Specifies that the value indicates a percentage.
event-when-depleted—
Enables a system-generate event when all available addresses in the pool or subnet of local DHCP server are depleted.

minimum-free

Syntax 
[no] minimum-free prefix-length [prefix-length]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>dhcp6>server>pool>thresholds minimum-free)
[Tree] (config>router>dhcp6>server>pool>thresholds minimum-free)
Full Contexts 
configure router dhcp6 local-dhcp-server pool thresholds minimum-free
configure service vprn dhcp6 local-dhcp-server pool thresholds minimum-free
Description 

This command creates a threshold for a given prefix length on the pool level. Up to 128 thresholds could be created. For example, with minimum-free prefix-length 64, then the usage of /64 prefix in the pool is counted.

There are two types of thresholds that could be defined at the pool level:

  1. Depleted — The system sends out a warning when the prefix with the configured length is no long available in the pool.
  2. Minimum free — A percentage-based threshold which represents the minimal available percentage of prefix with the configured length in the pool. The system will send out warning if the actual percentage is lower than the configured percentage.

Configuring this command also enables the system stats collection for configure prefix length, which could be displayed with the show router router-id dhcp6 local-dhcp-server dhcp6-server-name pool-threshold-stats command.

The no form of this command removes the prefix-length from the configuration.

Parameters 
prefix-length
Specifies the IPv6 prefix length.
Values—
1 to 128

 

17.269. minimum-isa-generation

minimum-isa-generation

Syntax 
minimum-isa-generation min-isa-generation
Context 
[Tree] (config>isa>aa-grp minimum-isa-generation)
Full Contexts 
configure isa application-assurance-group minimum-isa-generation
Description 

This command configures the scale parameters for the ISA group. When min-isa-generation is configured as 1, the group and per-ISA limits are the MS-ISA scale.

If there is a mix of ISA 1s and 2s, the min-isa-generation must be left as 1.

When min-isa-gen is configured as 2, the per-isa resource limits shown in the show isa application-assurance-group 1 load-balance output will increase to show ISA2 limits.

Default 

minimum-isa-generation 1

Parameters 
min-isa-generation—
Specifies the minimum ISA Generation allowed in this group.
Values—
1 – ISA (ISA1)
2 – ISA2

 

17.270. minimum-length

minimum-length

Syntax 
minimum-length length
no minimum-length
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>password>complexity-rules minimum-length)
Full Contexts 
configure system security password complexity-rules minimum-length
Description 

This command configures the minimum number of characters required for locally administered passwords, HMAC-MD5-96, HMAC-SHA-96, and des-keys configured in the system security section.

If multiple minimum-length commands are entered each command overwrites the previous entered command.

The no form of this command reverts to default value.

Default 

minimum-length 6

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the minimum number of characters required for a password.
Values—
1 to 8

 

17.271. minimum-lifetimes

minimum-lifetimes

Syntax 
minimum-lifetimes
Context 
[Tree] (config>python>py-pol>cache minimum-lifetimes)
Full Contexts 
configure python python-policy cache minimum-lifetimes
Description 

This command enables the context to configure minimum-lifetime of Python cache information.

17.272. minimum-links

minimum-links

Syntax 
minimum-links minimum-links
no minimum-links
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>multilink-bundle minimum-links)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle minimum-links
Description 

This command sets the minimum number of links that must be active for the bundle to be active.

If the number of active links drops below the configured minimum then the multilink bundle will transition to an operationally down state.

The no form of this command removes the minimum link limit.

Default 

minimum-links 1

Parameters 
minimum-link —
Specifies the minimum link limit, expressed as an integer.
Values—
1 to 8

 

17.273. minute

minute

Syntax 
minute {minute-number [..minute-number] |all}
no minute
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>cron>sched minute)
Full Contexts 
configure system cron schedule minute
Description 

This command specifies the minute to schedule a command. Multiple minutes of the hour can be specified. When multiple minutes are configured, each of them will cause the schedule to occur. If a minute is configured, but no hour or day is configured, the event will not execute. If a minute is configured without configuring the month, weekday, day-of-month, and minute, the event will not execute.

The no form of this command removes the specified minute from the configuration.

Default 

no minute

Parameters 
minute-number—
Specifies the minute to schedule a command.
Values—
0 to 59 (maximum 60 minute-numbers)

 

all —
Specifies all minutes.

17.274. minutes

minutes

Syntax 
minutes {minutes |disable}
no minutes
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>key-re-exchange>client minutes)
[Tree] (config>system>security>ssh>key-re-exchange>server minutes)
Full Contexts 
configure system security ssh key-re-exchange client minutes
configure system security ssh key-re-exchange server minutes
Description 

This command configures the maximum time, in minutes, before a key re-exchange is initiated by the server.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

minutes 60

Parameters 
minutes—
Specifies the time interval, in minutes, after which the SSH client will initiate the key-re-exchange.
Values—
1 to 1440

 

Default—
60
disable—
Specifies that a session will never timeout. To re-enable minutes, enter the command without the disable option.

17.275. mip

mip

Syntax 
mip [mac mac-address] [primary-vlan-enable vlan-id]
mip default-mac [primary-vlan-enable vlan-id]
no mip
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>eth-cfm mip)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mip)
Full Contexts 
configure service epipe sap eth-cfm mip
configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mip
Description 

This command allows Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs). The creation rules of the MIP are dependent on the mhf-creation configuration for the MA.

The no form of this command removes the MIP creation request.

Default 

no mip

Parameters 
mac—
Provides a method for manually configuring the MIP MAC address.
mac-address—
Specifies the MAC address of the MIP.
Values—
6-byte mac-address in the form of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx of the MIP. The MAC address must be unicast. Using the all-zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

 

default-mac—
Using the no command deletes the MIP. This parameter should be used if the operator wants to change the MAC address back to the default MAC without having to delete and reconfigure the MIP.
primary-vlan-enable—
Provides a method for linking the MIP with the primary VLAN configured under the bridge-identifier for the MA. This is only allowed if the mhf-creation method is static. MIPs cannot be changed from or to primary VLAN functions without first being deleted. This must be configured as part of the creation step and can only be changed by deleting the MIP and re-creating it. Primary VLANs are only supported under Layer 2 Epipe and VPLS services.
vlan-id
Must match the VLAN id under the bridge-identifier for the MA that is appropriate for this service.
Values—
0 to 4094

 

mip

Syntax 
mip [mac mac-address] [primary-vlan-enable vlan-id]
mip default-mac [primary-vlan-enable vlan-id]
no mip [primary-vlan-enable vlan-id]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>eth-cfm mip)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm mip)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>eth-cfm mip)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mip
configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mip
configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mip
Description 

This command allows Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs). The creation rules of the MIP are dependent on the mhf-creation configuration for the MA.

The no form of this command removes the MIP creation request.

Default 

no mip

Parameters 
mac-address—
Specifies the MAC address of the MEP.
Values—
6-byte MAC address in the form of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx of the MIP. The MAC must be unicast. Using the all-zeros address is equivalent to the no form of this command.

 

default-mac—
Using the no command deletes the MIP. If the operator wants to change the MAC back to the default MAC without having to delete the MIP and reconfiguring, this command is useful.
primary-vlan-enable—
Provides a method for linking the MIP with the primary VLAN configured under the bridge-identifier for the MA. This is only allowed if the mhf-creation method is static. MIPs cannot be changed from or to primary VLAN functions without first being deleted. Primary VLANs are only supported under Layer 2 Epipe and VPLS services.
vlan-id
Must match the vlan-id under the bridge-identifier for the MA that is appropriate for this service.
Values—
0 to 4094

 

mip

Syntax 
mip primary-vlan-enable [vlan vlan-id]
no mip
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-sap-template>eth-cfm mip)
Full Contexts 
configure service template vpls-sap-template eth-cfm mip
Description 

This command allows Maintenance Intermediate Points (MIPs). The creation rules of the MIP are dependent on the mhf-creation configuration for the MA. This MIP option is only available for default and static mhf-creation methods.

Parameters 
primary-vlan-enable—
Provides a method for linking the MIP with the primary VLAN configured under the bridge-identifier for the MA. This is only allowed if the mhf-creation method is static. MIPs cannot be changed from or to primary VLAN functions without first being deleted. This must be configured as part of the creation step and can only be changed by deleting the MEP and re-creating it. Primary VLANs are only supported under Ethernet SAPs.
vlan —
A required parameter when including primary-vlan-enable. Provides a method for associating the VLAN under the bride-identifier under the MA with the MIP.
vlan-id
Must match the vlan-id under the bridge-identifier for the MA that is appropriate for this service.
Values—
0 to 4094

 

mip

Syntax 
[no] mip
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>mpls-tp>transit-path>forward-path mip)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>mpls-tp>transit-path>reverse-path mip)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls mpls-tp transit-path forward-path mip
configure router mpls mpls-tp transit-path reverse-path mip
Description 

This command creates a context for maintenance entity group intermediate point (MIP) parameters for the forward path and the reverse path of an MPLS-TP LSP at an LSR.

mip

Syntax 
[no] mip domain md-index association ma-index
Context 
[Tree] (debug>eth-cfm mip)
Full Contexts 
debug eth-cfm mip
Description 

This command specifies the MIP from which to debug the CFM PDUs.

The no form of this command removes the MIP parameters.

Parameters 
md-index—
Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) index value of the launch point.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

ma-index—
Specifies the maintenance association (MA) index value of the launch point.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

17.276. mip-ltr-priority

mip-ltr-priority

Syntax 
mip-ltr-priority priority
Context 
[Tree] (cfg>eth-cfm>domain>assoc>bridge mip-ltr-priority)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-cfm domain association bridge-identifier mip-ltr-priority
Description 

This command allows the operator to set the priority of the Linktrace Response Message (ETH-LTR) from a MIP for this association.

Default 

7

Parameters 
priority—
Specifies the priority of the Linktrace Response Message (ETH-LTR) from a MIP.
Values—
0 to 7

 

mip-ltr-priority

Syntax 
mip-ltr-priority priority
Context 
[Tree] (config>eth-cfm>default-domain>bridge-identifier mip-ltr-priority)
Full Contexts 
configure eth-cfm default-domain bridge-identifier mip-ltr-priority
Description 

This command allows the operator to set the priority of the Linktrace Response Message (ETH-LTR) from a MIP for this association.

Default 

defer

Parameters 
priority—
Specifies the priority of the Linktrace Response Message (ETH-LTR) from a MIP. The “defer” value is only supported under the default-domain context and causes mip-ltr-priority to inherit values from the global read-only-system values.
Values—
0 to 7, defer

 

17.277. mir

mir

Syntax 
mir mir-value
no mir
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>mlppp-profile-egress>class mir)
Full Contexts 
configure qos mlppp-profile-egress class mir
Description 

This command configures the minimum information rate (MIR) scheduling parameter for each MLPPP class queue for this profile.

Parameters 
mir-value—
Specifies the MIR scheduling parameter.
Values—
1 to 100

 

mir

Syntax 
mir mir
no mir
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>mc-fr-profile-egress>class mir)
Full Contexts 
configure qos mc-fr-profile-egress class mir
Description 

This command configures the minimum information rate scheduling parameter for each Frame Relay scheduling class queue for this profile.

Default 

90% for all classes

Parameters 
mir—
Specifies the percentage of the available link or bundle rate.
Values—
1 to 100

 

17.278. mirror-dest

mirror-dest

Syntax 
mirror-dest service-id [create] [type mirror-type] [name name]
no mirror-dest service-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>mirror mirror-dest)
Full Contexts 
configure mirror mirror-dest
Description 

This command creates a context to set up a service that is intended for packet mirroring. It is configured as a service to allow mirrored packets to be directed locally (within the same router) or remotely, over the core of the network and have a far-end decode mirror encapsulation.

The mirror destination service is comprised of destination parameters that define where the mirrored packets are to be sent. It also specifies whether the defined service-id will receive mirrored packets from far-end router over the network core.

The mirror destination service IDs are persistent between boots of the router and are included in the configuration saves. The local sources of mirrored packets for the service ID are defined within the debug mirror mirror-source command that references the same service-id. Up to 255 mirror destination service IDs can be created within a single system.

The mirror-dest command creates or edits a service ID for mirroring purposes. If the service-id does not exist within the context of all defined services, the mirror destination service is created and the context of the CLI is changed to that service ID. If the service-id exists within the context of defined mirror destination services, the CLI context is changed for editing parameters on that service ID. If the service-id exists within the context of another service type, an error message is returned and CLI context is not changed from the current context.

LI source configuration is saved using the li>save command.

The no form of this command removes a mirror destination from the system. The mirror source or li-source associations with the mirror destination service-id do not need to be removed or shutdown first. The mirror destination service-id must be shutdown before the service ID can be removed. When the service ID is removed, all mirror-source or li-source commands that have the service ID defined will also be removed from the system.

Parameters 
service-id—
The service identification identifies the service in the service domain. This ID is unique to this service and cannot be used by any other service, regardless of service type. The same service ID must be configured on every router that this particular service is defined on.

If particular a service ID already exists for a service, then the same value cannot be used to create a mirror destination service ID with the same value. For example:

If an Epipe service ID 11 exists, then a mirror destination service ID 11 cannot be created. If a VPLS service ID 12 exists, then a mirror destination service ID 12 cannot be created.

If an IES service ID 13 exists, then a mirror destination service ID 13 cannot be created.

Values—

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

svc-name:

64 characters maximum

 

create—
Keyword used to create a mirror destination service.
mirror-type
The type describes the encapsulation supported by the mirror service.
Values—
The following values apply to the 7750 SR:
ether, frame-relay, ppp, ip-only, atm-sdu, satop-e1, satop-e3, satop-t1, cesopsn, cesopsn-cas

 

Values—
The following values apply to the 7950 XRS:
ether, ip-only

 

Values—
The following values apply to the 7450 ESS:
ether, frame-relay, ppp

 

name—
Configures an optional service name identifier, up to 64 characters, to a given service. This service name can then be used in configuration references, display, and show commands throughout the system. A defined service name can help the service provider or administrator to identify and manage services within the SR OS platforms.

To create a service, you must assign a service ID; however, after it is created, either the service ID or the service name can be used to identify and reference a service.

If a name is not specified at creation time, then SR OS assigns a string version of the service-id as the name.

Service names may not begin with an integer (0 to 9).

17.279. mirror-dest-reservation

mirror-dest-reservation

Syntax 
mirror-dest-reservation service-id to service-id
no mirror-dest-reservation
Context 
[Tree] (config>li mirror-dest-reservation)
Full Contexts 
configure li mirror-dest-reservation
Description 

This command configures a range of service IDs reserved for RADIUS-triggered mirror destination. The range can be expanded or reduced in real time. The range cannot conflict with other service IDs.

The no form of this command removes the service IDs reserved for LI mirror destination services.

Parameters 
service-id—
Specifies the starting or ending service ID in the range for the mirror destination.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

17.280. mirror-dest-template

mirror-dest-template

Syntax 
mirror-dest-template name [type mirror-type] [create]
no mirror-dest-template name
Context 
[Tree] (config>li mirror-dest-template)
Full Contexts 
configure li mirror-dest-template
Description 

This command creates a template used by RADIUS-triggered mirror destinations. RADIUS provides the IP destination (and other optional attributes) for the mirror destination and the mirror template provides the remaining mirror destination attributes for mirroring packets remotely over the core of an IP network.

The system supports up to eight mirror destination templates and allows a mirror destination to be swapped in real time. Only new LI sources will use the new attribute of the mirror destination template. Existing LI sources remain unchanged and continue to use the attribute of the previous mirror destination template.

The no form of this command removes a mirror destination template from the system.

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the template name, up to 32 characters.
mirror-type—
Specifies the type of encapsulation supported by the mirror service.
Values—
ether, frame-relay, ppp, ip-only, atm-sdu, satop-e1, satop-t1, cesopsn, cesopsn-cas

 

create —
Keyword required to create a template.

mirror-dest-template

Syntax 
mirror-dest-template template-name
no mirror-dest-template
Context 
[Tree] (config>li>radius mirror-dest-template)
Full Contexts 
configure li radius mirror-dest-template
Description 

This command enables or disables the use of a RADIUS triggered mirror destination template to be used by new LI sources.

Parameters 
template-name—
Specifies the template name, up to 32 characters. The template must already exist.

17.281. mirror-source

mirror-source

Syntax 
mirror-source [all-inclusive] mirror-service-id
no mirror-source
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>policy>aqp>entry>action mirror-source)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group policy app-qos-policy entry action mirror-source
Description 

This command configures an application-based policy mirroring service that uses this AA ISA group’s AQP entry as a mirror source. When configured, AQP entry becomes a mirror source for IP packets seen by the AA (the mirrored packet is an IP packet analyzed by AA and does not include encapsulations present on the incoming interfaces).

Default 

no mirror-source

Parameters 
all-inclusive—
Specifies that all packets during identification phase that could match a given AQP rule are mirrored in addition to packets after an application identification completes that match the AQP rule. This ensures all packets of a given flow are mirrored at a cost of sending unidentified packets that once the application is identified will no longer match this AQP entry.
mirror-service-id—
Specifies the mirror source service ID to use for flows that match this policy.
Values—
1 to 2147483647
svc-name: 64 characters maximum

 

mirror-source

Syntax 
[no] mirror-source service-id
Context 
[Tree] (debug>app-assure>group>traffic-capture>match mirror-source)
Full Contexts 
debug app-assure group traffic-capture match mirror-source
Description 

This command configures debugging on a mirror source.

mirror-source

Syntax 
[no] mirror-source service-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>mirror mirror-source)
Full Contexts 
configure mirror mirror-source
Description 

This command configures mirror source parameters for a mirrored service.

The mirror-source command is used to enable mirroring of packets specified by the association of the mirror-source to sources of packets defined within the context of the mirror-dest-service-id. The mirror destination service must already exist within the system.

A mirrored packet cannot be mirrored to multiple destinations. If a packet matches multiple mirror source entries (for example, a SAP on one mirror-source and a port on another mirror-source), then the packet is mirrored to a single mirror-dest-service-id based on the following precedence:

  1. Filter entry
  2. Subscriber (applies to the 7750 SR and 7450 ESS)
  3. SAP
  4. Physical port

The precedence is structured so the most specific match criteria has precedence over a less specific match. For example, if a mirror-source defines a port and a SAP on that port, then a packet arriving on the SAP will be mirrored using the SAP mirror (and not mirrored using the Port mirror) because the SAP is more specific than the port.

The no form of this command deletes all related source commands within the context of the mirror-source service-id. The command does not remove the service ID from the system.

Parameters 
service-id—
Specifies the service identification identifies the service in the service domain. This ID is unique to this service and cannot be used by any other service, regardless of service type. The same service ID must be configured on every router that this particular service is defined on.
Values—

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

svc-name:

64 characters maximum

 

mirror-source

Syntax 
[no] mirror-source service-id
Context 
[Tree] (debug mirror-source)
Full Contexts 
debug mirror-source
Description 

This command configures mirror source parameters for a mirrored service.

The mirror-source command is used to enable mirroring of packets specified by the association of the mirror-source to sources of packets defined within the context of the mirror-dest-service-id. The mirror destination service must already exist within the system.

A mirrored packet cannot be mirrored to multiple destinations. If a packet matches multiple mirror source entries (for example, a SAP on one mirror-source and a port on another mirror-source), then the packet is mirrored to a single mirror-dest-service-id based on the following precedence:

  1. Filter entry
  2. Subscriber (applies to the 7750 SR and 7450 ESS)
  3. SAP
  4. Physical port

The precedence is structured so the most specific match criteria has precedence over a less specific match. For example, if a mirror-source defines a port and a SAP on that port, then a packet arriving on the SAP will be mirrored using the SAP mirror (and not mirrored using the Port mirror) because the SAP is more specific than the port.

The mirror-source configuration is not saved when a configuration is saved. A mirror-source manually configured within an ASCII configuration file will not be preserved if that file is overwritten by a save command. Define the mirror-source within a file associated with a config exec command to make a mirror-source persistent between system reboots.

By default, all mirror destination service IDs have a mirror-source associated with them. The mirror-source is not technically created with this command. Instead the service ID provides a contextual node for storing the current mirroring sources for the associated mirror destination service ID. The mirror-source is created for the mirror service when the operator enters the debug>mirror-source svcId for the first time. If the operator enters li>li-source svcId for the first time, an LI source is created for the mirror service. The mirror-source is also automatically removed when the mirror destination service ID is deleted from the system.

The no form of this command deletes all related source commands within the context of the mirror-source service-id. The command does not remove the service ID from the system.

Parameters 
service-id—
Specifies the mirror destination service ID for which match criteria will be defined. The service-id must already exist within the system.
Values—
service-id: 1 to 2147483647
svc-name: 64 characters maximum

 

17.282. misc

misc

Syntax 
[no] misc
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>igmp misc)
Full Contexts 
debug router igmp misc
Description 

This command enables debugging for IGMP miscellaneous information.

The no form of the command disables the debugging.

Output 

The following is shows debugged IGMP miscellaneous information

Sample Output
A:ALA-CA# debug router 100 igmp misc 
*A:ALA-CA# show debug 
debug
    router "100"
        igmp
            misc
        exit
    exit
exit
*A:ALA-CA# 

misc

Syntax 
[no] misc
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>gmpls>event misc)
Full Contexts 
debug router gmpls event misc
Description 

This command enables and disables debugging for GMPLS Misc events.

misc

Syntax 
misc [detail]
no misc
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>mpls>event misc)
[Tree] (debug>router>rsvp>event misc)
Full Contexts 
debug router mpls event misc
debug router rsvp event misc
Description 

This command debugs miscellaneous events.

The no form of the command disables the debugging.

Parameters 
detail—
Displays detailed information about miscellaneous events.

misc

Syntax 
[no] misc
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>mtrace misc)
[Tree] (debug>router>mtrace2 misc)
Full Contexts 
debug router mtrace misc
debug router mtrace2 misc
Description 

This command enables debugging for mtrace and mtrace2 miscellaneous.

misc

Syntax 
[no] misc
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>isis misc)
Full Contexts 
debug router isis misc
Description 

This command enables debugging for IS-IS misc.

The no form of the command disables debugging.

misc

Syntax 
[no] misc
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>ospf misc)
[Tree] (debug>router>ospf3 misc)
Full Contexts 
debug router ospf misc
debug router ospf3 misc
Description 

This command enables debugging for miscellaneous OSPF events.

17.283. mismatch-reaction

mismatch-reaction

Syntax 
mismatch-reaction {squelch-rx}
no mismatch-reaction
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>otu>pm-tti mismatch-reaction)
Full Contexts 
configure port otu pm-tti mismatch-reaction
Description 

This command allows the user to configure the consequent action to a pm-tti mismatch.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

n/a, the received traffic is passed through.

Parameters 
squelch-rx —
Specifies that the received traffic is blocked.

mismatch-reaction

Syntax 
mismatch-reaction {none |squelch-rx}
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>otu>psi-payload mismatch-reaction)
Full Contexts 
configure port otu psi-payload mismatch-reaction
Description 

This command allows the user to configure the consequent action to a psi-payload type mismatch.

Parameters 
none —
Specifies the received traffic is passed through.
squelch-rx —
Specifies the received traffic is blocked.

mismatch-reaction

Syntax 
mismatch-reaction {none |squelch-rx}
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>otu>sm-tti mismatch-reaction)
Full Contexts 
configure port otu sm-tti mismatch-reaction
Description 

This command allows the user to configure the consequent action to a sm-tti mismatch.

Default 

n/a

Parameters 
none —
Specifies that the received traffic is passed through.
squelch-rx —
Specifies that the received traffic is blocked.

17.284. missing-mandatory-ie

missing-mandatory-ie

Syntax 
missing-mandatory-ie direction direction [create]
no missing-mandatory-ie direction direction
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>statistics>tca>gtp-filter missing-mandatory-ie)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group statistics threshold-crossing-alert gtp-filter missing-mandatory-ie
Description 

This command configures a TCA for the counter capturing drops due to the GTP filter missing mandatory IE check. A missing-mandatory-ie drop TCA can be created for traffic generated from the subscriber side of AA (from-sub) or for traffic generated from the network toward the AA subscriber (to-sub). The create keyword is mandatory when creating a missing-mandatory-ie TCA.

Parameters 
direction—
Specifies the traffic direction.
Values—
from-sub, to-sub

 

create—
Keyword used to create the TCA.

17.285. mixed-lsp-mode

mixed-lsp-mode

Syntax 
[no] mixed-lsp-mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>sdp mixed-lsp-mode)
Full Contexts 
configure service sdp mixed-lsp-mode
Description 

This command enables the use by an SDP of the mixed-LSP mode of operation. This command indicates to the service manager that it must allow a primary LSP type and a backup LSP type in the same SDP configuration. For example, the lsp and ldp commands are allowed concurrently in the SDP configuration. The user can configure one or two types of LSPs under the same SDP. Without this command, these commands are mutually exclusive.

The user can configure an RSVP LSP as a primary LSP type with an LDP LSP as a backup type. The user can also configure a BGP RFC 3107 BGP LSP as a backup LSP type.

If the user configures an LDP LSP as a primary LSP type, then the backup LSP type must be an RFC 3107 BGP labeled route.

At any given time, the service manager programs only one type of LSP in the linecard that will activate it to forward service packets according to the following priority order:

  1. RSVP LSP type. Up to 16 RSVP LSPs can be entered by the user and programmed by the service manager in ingress linecard to load balance service packets. This is the highest priority LSP type.
  2. LDP LSP type. One LDP FEC programmed by the service manager but the ingress card can use up to 16 LDP ECMP paths for the FEC to load balance service packets when ECMP is enabled on the node.
  3. BGP LSP type. One RFC 3107-labeled BGP prefix programmed by the service manager. The ingress card can use more than one next-hop for the prefix.

In the case of the RSVP/LDP SDP, the service manager will program the NHLFE(s) for the active LSP type preferring the RSVP LSP type over the LDP LSP type. If no RSVP LSP is configured or all configured RSVP LSPs go down, the service manager will re-program the card with the LDP LSP if available. If not, the SDP goes operationally down.

When a higher priority type LSP becomes available, the service manager reverts back to this LSP at the expiry of the sdp-revert-time timer or the failure of the currently active LSP, whichever comes first. The service manager then re-programs the card accordingly. If the infinite value is configured, then the SDP reverts to the highest priority type LSP only if the currently active LSP failed.

Note:

LDP uses a tunnel down damp timer which is set to three seconds by default. When the LDP LSP fails, the SDP will revert to the RSVP LSP type after the expiry of this timer. For an immediate switchover, this timer must be set to zero. Use the config>router>ldp>tunnel-down-damp-time command.

If the user changes the value of the sdp-revert-time timer, it will take effect only at the next use of the timer. Any timer which is outstanding at the time of the change will be restarted with the new value.

If class based forwarding is enabled for this SDP, the forwarding of the packets over the RSVP LSPs will be based on the FC of the packet as in current implementation. When the SDP activates the LDP LSP type, then packets are forwarded over the LDP ECMP paths using the regular hash routine.

In the case of the LDP/BGP SDP, the service manager will prefer the LDP LSP type over the BGP LSP type. The service manager will re-program the card with the BGP LSP if available otherwise it brings down the SDP operationally.

Also note the following difference in behavior of the LDP/BGP SDP compared to that of an RSVP/LDP SDP. For a given /32 prefix, only a single route will exist in the routing table: the IGP route or the BGP route. Thus, either the LDP FEC or the BGP label route is active at any given time. The impact of this is that the tunnel table needs to be re-programmed each time a route is deactivated and the other is activated. Furthermore, the SDP revert-time cannot be used since there is no situation where both LSP types are active for the same /32 prefix.

The no form of this command disables the mixed-LSP mode of operation. The user first has to remove one of the LSP types from the SDP configuration or the command will fail.

Default 

no mixed-lsp-mode

17.286. mka-hello-interval

mka-hello-interval

Syntax 
mka-hello-interval interval
no mka-hello-interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>macsec>conn-assoc>static-cak mka-hello-interval)
Full Contexts 
configure macsec connectivity-association static-cak mka-hello-interval
Description 

This command specifies the MKA hello interval.

The no form of this command disables the MKA hello interval.

Default 

mka-hello-interval 2

Parameters 
interval—
Specifies the MKA hello interval, in seconds.
Values—
1 to 6 s in 1-s increments, 500ms

 

17.287. mka-key-server-priority

mka-key-server-priority

Syntax 
mka-key-server-priority priority
no mka-key-server-priority
Context 
[Tree] (config>macsec>conn-assoc>static-cak mka-key-server-priority)
Full Contexts 
configure macsec connectivity-association static-cak mka-key-server-priority
Description 

This command specifies the key server priority used by the MACsec Key Agreement (MKA) protocol to select the key server when MACsec is enabled using static connectivity association key (CAK) security mode.

The no form of this command disables the mka-key-server-priority.

Default 

mka-key-server-priority 16

Parameters 
priority—
Specifies the priority of the server.
Values—
0 to 255

 

17.288. mld

mld

Syntax 
[no] mld
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync mld)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer sync mld
Description 

This command specifies whether MLD protocol information should be synchronized with the multi-chassis peer.

Default 

no mld

mld

Syntax 
[no] mld
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn mld)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn mld
Description 

This command enters the context to configure Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) parameters.

The no form of this command disables MLD.

Default 

no mld

mld

Syntax 
[no] mld
Context 
[Tree] (config>router mld)
Full Contexts 
configure router mld
Description 

This command enables the context to configure Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) parameters.

The no form of the command disables MLD.

Default 

no mld

17.289. mld-parameters

mld-parameters

Syntax 
mld-parameters
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp>host mld-parameters)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host mld-parameters)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host mld-parameters
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp host mld-parameters
Description 

This command enables the context to configure an MLD import policy.

17.290. mld-policy

mld-policy

Syntax 
mld-policy mld-policy-name [create]
no mld-policy mld-policy-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt mld-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt mld-policy
Description 

This command enables the context to create an MLD policy.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
mld-policy-name—
Specifies the MLD policy name up to 32 characters.
create—
Keyword required to create the configuration context.

mld-policy

Syntax 
mld-policy policy name
no mld-policy
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>sub-prof mld-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt sub-profile mld-policy
Description 

This command enables Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) processing per subscriber host.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

no mld-policy

Parameters 
policy-name—
Specifies the name of the MLD policy, up to 32 characters. The MLD policy must be defined in the config>subscr-mgmt context.

17.291. mld-snooping

mld-snooping

Syntax 
mld-snooping
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mld-snooping)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap mld-snooping)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp mld-snooping)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp mld-snooping)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>allow-ip-int-bind mld-snooping)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls allow-ip-int-bind mld-snooping
configure service vpls mesh-sdp mld-snooping
configure service vpls mld-snooping
configure service vpls sap mld-snooping
configure service vpls spoke-sdp mld-snooping
Description 

This command enables the context to configure MLD snooping parameters.

mld-snooping

Syntax 
[no] mld-snooping
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync mld-snooping)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis peer sync mld-snooping
Description 

This command is not supported. It is not blocked for backwards-compatibility reasons but has no effect on the system if configured.

Default 

no mld-snooping

mld-snooping

Syntax 
[no] mld-snooping
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id mld-snooping)
Full Contexts 
debug service id mld-snooping
Description 

This command enables and configures MLD-snooping debugging.

The no form of this command disables MLD-snooping debugging.

mld-snooping

Syntax 
mld-snooping
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>vxlan mld-snooping)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls vxlan mld-snooping
Description 

This command enables the MLD snooping context.

mld-snooping

Syntax 
mld-snooping
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls mld-snooping)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sap mld-snooping)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sdp mld-snooping)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls mld-snooping
configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sap mld-snooping
configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sdp mld-snooping
Description 

This command configures MLD snooping attributes for I-VPLS.

17.292. mldp

mldp

Syntax 
[no] mldp
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>provider-tunnel>inclusive mldp)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls provider-tunnel inclusive mldp
Description 

This command enables the context to configure the parameters of an LDP P2MP LSP used for forwarding Broadcast, Unicast unknown and Multicast (BUM) packets of a VPLS or B-VPLS instance.

mldp

Syntax 
[no] mldp
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn>pt>inclusive mldp)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn>pt>selective mldp)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn mvpn provider-tunnel inclusive mldp
configure service vprn mvpn provider-tunnel selective mldp
Description 

This command enables use of P2MP mLDP LSP as inclusive or selective PMSI tunnels.

For multi-stream S-PMSI, either LDP or RSVP-TE must first be configured before multi-stream policy can be configured.

Default 

no mldp

17.293. mlfr

mlfr

Syntax 
mlfr
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>multilink-bundle mlfr)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle mlfr
Description 

This command enables the context to configure a Multi-link Frame Relay (MLFR) bundle.

17.294. mlppp

mlppp

Syntax 
mlppp
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ml-bundle mlppp)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle mlppp
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multi-link PPP bundle attributes.

17.295. mlppp-profile-egress

mlppp-profile-egress

Syntax 
mlppp-profile-egress profile-id [create]
no mlppp-profile-egress profile-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos mlppp-profile-egress)
Full Contexts 
configure qos mlppp-profile-egress
Description 

This command creates a profile for the user to configure the egress QoS parameters of a multiclass MLPPP bundle.

A maximum of 128 egress QoS profiles can be created on the system.

The no form of this command deletes the profile.

Parameters 
profile-id—
Specifies an ingress mlppp-profile ID.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

17.296. mlppp-profile-ingress

mlppp-profile-ingress

Syntax 
[no] mlppp-profile-ingress profile-id [create]
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos mlppp-profile-ingress)
Full Contexts 
configure qos mlppp-profile-ingress
Description 

This command creates a profile for the user to configure the ingress QoS parameters of a multiclass MLPPP bundle.

A maximum of 128 ingress QoS profiles can be created on the system.

The no form of this command deletes the profile.

Parameters 
profile-id—
Specifies a specific multi-class ingress profile.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

17.297. mme

mme

Syntax 
mme
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>gtp>peer-profile mme)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt gtp peer-profile mme
Description 

This command configures parameters specific to a Mobility Management Entity (MME) peer.

17.298. mmrp

mmrp

Syntax 
mmrp
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mrp mmrp)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mrp mmrp
Description 

This command configures MMRP parameters.

17.299. mmrp-impm-override

mmrp-impm-override

Syntax 
[no] mmrp-impm-override
Context 
[Tree] (config>mcast-mgmt>chassis-level mmrp-impm-override)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management chassis-level mmrp-impm-override
Description 

This command enables ingress Multicast Path Management (IMPM) from monitoring PIM and IGMP.

The no form of this command disables the IMPM monitoring.

17.300. mmrp-mac

mmrp-mac

Syntax 
[no] mmrp-mac ieee-address
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>mrp mmrp-mac)
Full Contexts 
debug service id mrp mmrp-mac
Description 

This command filters debug events and only shows events related to the MAC address specified.

The no form of this command removes the debug filter.

Parameters 
ieee-address—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx or xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx (cannot be all zeros)

17.301. mobility

mobility

Syntax 
mobility
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw mobility)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw mobility)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw mobility
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw mobility
Description 

This command enables the context to configure mobility parameters.

17.302. mobility-acct-updates

mobility-acct-updates

Syntax 
[no] mobility-acct-updates
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>vlan-tag-ranges>range>xconnect mobility-acct-updates)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>vlan-tag-ranges>range>xconnect mobility-acct-updates)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range xconnect mobility-acct-updates
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range xconnect mobility-acct-updates
Description 

This command enables the administrative state to send mobility-triggered accounting interim updates.

The no form of this command disables sending the mobility-triggered accounting updates.

17.303. mobility-triggered-acct

mobility-triggered-acct

Syntax 
mobility-triggered-acct
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>wlan-gw mobility-triggered-acct)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>wlan-gw mobility-triggered-acct)
Full Contexts 
configure router wlan-gw mobility-triggered-acct
configure service vprn wlan-gw mobility-triggered-acct
Description 

This command enters the configuration context of mobility-triggered-accounting in wlan-gw context under router or VPRN service.

17.304. mode

mode

Syntax 
mode {dropped-only |ingr-and-dropped |egr-ingr-and-dropped}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>ip>dhcp mode)
[Tree] (debug>router>ip>dhcp6 mode)
[Tree] (debug>router>local-dhcp-server mode)
Full Contexts 
debug router ip dhcp mode
debug router ip dhcp6 mode
debug router local-dhcp-server mode
Description 

This command debugs the DHCP tracing detail level.

Parameters 
dropped-only—
Displays only dropped packets.
ingr-and-dropped—
Displays only ingress packet and dropped packets.
egr-ingr-and-dropped—
Displays ingress, egress and dropped packets.

mode

Syntax 
mode {dropped-only |ingr-and-dropped |egr-ingr-and-dropped}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>ppp>packet mode)
Full Contexts 
debug service id ppp packet mode
Description 

This command specifies PPP packet debug mode.

The no form of this command disables debugging.

Parameters 
dropped-only—
Displays only dropped packets.
ingr-and-dropped—
Displays only ingress packet and dropped packets.
egr-ingr-and-dropped—
Displays ingress, egress and dropped packets.

mode

Syntax 
mode mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>card>mda>atm mode)
Full Contexts 
configure card mda atm mode
Description 

This command configures the ATM MDA into a mode with the increased VC scale (16k VCs, as opposed to 8K VCs). ESM is supported only in 16K VCs mode. In 16K VCs mode, there is only one queue allocated to each VC in the ATM MDA. In 8K VCs mode, there are two queues allocated per VC.

The 16K VC mode is supported only on the 4-port oc-3/12c/STM-1/4c ATM MDA.

Changing the ATM MDA mode requires a reset of the MDA. A warning is issued asking for the confirmation before the command is executed.

Default 

mode max8k-vc

Parameters 
mode—
Specifies the VC scale.
Values—
max8k-vc, max16k-vc

 

mode

Syntax 
mode {strict |loose |strict-no-ecmp}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>ipv6>urpf-check mode)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>urpf-check mode)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>urpf-check mode)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>ipv6>urpf-check mode)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>urpf-check mode)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nw-if>urpf-check mode)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>urpf-check mode)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface ipv6 urpf-check mode
configure service ies interface urpf-check mode
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 urpf-check mode
configure service vprn interface ipv6 urpf-check mode
configure service vprn interface urpf-check mode
configure service vprn network-interface urpf-check mode
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface urpf-check mode
Description 

This command specifies the mode of unicast RPF check.

The no form of this command reverts to the default (strict) mode.

Default 

mode strict

Parameters 
strict—
When specified, uRPF checks whether incoming packet has a source address that matches a prefix in the routing table, and whether the interface expects to receive a packet with this source address prefix.
loose—
In loose mode, uRPF checks whether incoming packet has source address with a corresponding prefix in the routing table. However, the loose mode does not check whether the interface expects to receive a packet with a specific source address prefix. This object is valid only when urpf-check is enabled.
strict-no-ecmp—
When a packet is received on an interface in this mode and the SA matches an ECMP route the packet is dropped by uRPF.

mode

Syntax 
mode {strict |loose |strict-no-ecmp}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>git>ipv4>urpf-check mode)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt group-interface-template ipv4 urpf-check mode
Description 

This command configures the mode of Unicast RPF (uRPF) check.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

mode strict

Parameters 
strict—
Specifies that the uRPF checks whether the incoming packet has a source IP address that matches a prefix in the routing table, and whether the interface expects to receive a packet with this source IP address prefix.
loose—
Specifies that the uRPF checks whether the incoming packet has a source IP address with a corresponding prefix in the routing table. However, the loose mode does not check whether the interface expects to receive a packet with a specific source IP address prefix. This object is valid only when the urpf-check command is enabled.
strict-no-ecmp—
Specifies that when a packet is received on an interface in this mode and the SA matches an ECMP route, the packet is dropped by uRPF.

mode

Syntax 
mode {none |basic |advanced}
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>power-management mode)
Full Contexts 
configure system power-management mode
Description 

This command sets the power mode. This command is supported in the 7750 SR-S OS and 7950 XRS only.

Default 

mode basic

Parameters 
none—
Specifies that there is no management of power to modules. In this mode, no gradual shutdown of active XCMs and XMAs is enforced. No spare capacity is reserved and any APEQ failure may result in brownouts or card failures.
basic—
Specifies that the node will bring up as many provisioned modules (in order of priority) as possible using the N+1 algorithm. In basic mode the system shuts down IO cards when power capacity drops below the Power Safety Level.
advanced—
Specifies that the operator can maintain a spare APEQ as long as possible to make it immune to the possibility of power brown-outs. In advanced mode, the system starts shutting down IO cards when the power capacity drops below the Power Safety Level + Max rated APEQ.

mode

Syntax 
mode {automatic |manual}
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>dwdm>coherent mode)
Full Contexts 
configure port dwdm coherent mode
Description 

This command configures the mode used to compensate for chromatic dispersion.

Parameters 
automatic—
Sets to automatic mode.
manual—
Sets to manual mode.

mode

Syntax 
mode {none |uni-n}
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>elmi mode)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet elmi mode
Description 

This command configures the Ethernet LMI mode.

Parameters 
none—
Specifies that the E LMI mode is set to none.
uni-n—
Specifies that the E LMI mode is set to UNI-N.

mode

Syntax 
mode {access |network |hybrid}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>lag mode)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet mode)
[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path mode)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group mode)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3 mode)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group mode)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e3 mode)
Full Contexts 
configure lag mode
configure port ethernet mode
configure port sonet-sdh path mode
configure port tdm ds1 channel-group mode
configure port tdm ds3 mode
configure port tdm e1 channel-group mode
configure port tdm e3 mode
Description 

This command configures an Ethernet port, TDM channel, or SONET/SDH path (sub-port) for access, network or hybrid mode operation.

An access port or channel is used for customer facing traffic on which services are configured. A Service Access Point (SAP) can only be configured on an access port or channel. When a port is configured for access mode, the appropriate encap-type must be specified to distinguish the services on the port or SONET path. Once an Ethernet port, a TDM channel or a SONET path has been configured for access mode, multiple services can be configured on the Ethernet port, a TDM channel or SONET path. Note that ATM, Frame Relay, and cHDLC port parameters can only be configured in the access mode.

A network port or channel participates in the service provider transport or infrastructure network when a network mode is selected. When the network option is configured, the encap-type cannot be configured for the port/channel.

When network mode is selected on a SONET/SDH path, the appropriate control protocols are activated when the need arises. For example, configuring an IP interface on the SONET path activates IPCP while the removal of the IP interface causes the IPCP to be removed. The same applies for MPLS, MPLSCP, and OSICP. When configuring a SONET/SDH port, the mode command must be entered in the channel context or an error message is generated.

A hybrid Ethernet port allows the combination of network and access modes of operation on a per-VLAN basis and must be configured as either dot1q or QinQ encapsulation.

When the hybrid port is configured to the dot1q encapsulation, the user configures a SAP inside a service simply by providing the SAP ID which must include the port-id value of the hybrid mode port and an unused VLAN tag value. The format is <port-id>:qtag1. A SAP of format <port-id>:* also supported.

The user configures a network IP interface under config>router>if>port by providing the port name which consists of the port-id of the hybrid mode port and an unused VLAN tag value. The format is <port-id>:qtag1. The user must explicitly enter a valid value for qtag1. The <port-id>:* value is not supported on a network IP interface. The 4096 VLAN tag space on the port is shared among VLAN SAPs and VLAN network IP interfaces.

When the hybrid port is configured to QinQ encapsulation, the user configures a SAP inside a service simply by providing the SAP ID which must include the port-id value of the hybrid mode port and the outer and inner VLAN tag values. The format is <port-id>:qtag1.qtag2. A SAP of format <port-id>: qtag1.* is also supported. The outer VLAN tag value must not have been used to create an IP network interface on this port. In addition, the qtag1.qtag2 value combination must not have been used by another SAP on this port.

The user configures a network IP interface under config>router>if>port by providing the port name which consists of the port-id of the hybrid mode port and a VLAN tag value. The format is <port-id>:qtag1.*. An outer VLAN tag qtag2 of * creates an IP network interface. In addition, the qtag1.qtag2 value combination must not have been used on another SAP or IP network interface on this port.

The no form of this command restores the default.

Default 

mode network — For Ethernet ports

mode access — For TDM channel or SONET paths

Special Cases 
SONET/SDH Path—
When network mode is selected, the appropriate control protocols are activated when the need arises. For example, configuring an IP interface on the SONET path activates IPCP while the removal of the IP interface causes the IPCP to be removed. The same applies for MPLS, MPLSCP, and OSICP. When configuring a SONET/SDH port, the mode command must be entered in the channel context or an error message is generated.
Parameters 
access—
Configures the Ethernet port, TDM channel or SONET path as service access.
network—
Configures the Ethernet port, TDM channel or SONET path for transport network use.
hybrid—
Configures the Ethernet port for hybrid use.

mode

Syntax 
mode {active |passive}
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>efm-oam mode)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet efm-oam mode
Description 

This command configures the mode of OAM operation for this Ethernet port. These two modes differ in that active mode causes the port to continually send out efm-oam info PDUs while passive mode waits for the peer to initiate the negotiation process. A passive mode port cannot initiate monitoring activities (such as loopback) with the peer.

Default 

mode active

Parameters 
active—
Provides capability to initiate negotiation and monitoring activities.
passive—
Relies on peer to initiate negotiation and monitoring activities.

mode

Syntax 
mode {dce |dte |bidir}
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ml-bundle>mlfr>frame-relay mode)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle mlfr frame-relay mode
Description 

This command configures the DCE/DTE mode of the Frame Relay interface.

Parameters 
dce—
Enables the DCE mode.
dte —
Enables the DTE mode.
bidir —
Enables the bidirectional mode for LMI types ANSI and ITU.

mode

Syntax 
mode {dce |dte |bidir}
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>multi-link-bundle>mlfr>frame-relay mode)
[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path>frame-relay mode)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group>frame-relay mode)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3>frame-relay mode)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group>frame-relay mode)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e3>frame-relay mode)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle mlfr frame-relay mode
configure port sonet-sdh path frame-relay mode
configure port tdm ds1 channel-group frame-relay mode
configure port tdm ds3 frame-relay mode
configure port tdm e1 channel-group frame-relay mode
configure port tdm e3 frame-relay mode
Description 

This command sets the Frame Relay interface into the DCE, DTE, or Bidirectional mode of LMI operation. The DTE mode causes the router to send status inquiries over the interface. The DCE mode causes the router to respond to status inquiries. In bidirectional mode, the router performs both DTE and DCE operation over the FR interface. The bidirectional mode applies to the ANSI and ITU LMI types only.

This feature is used when two routers are connected back-to-back, running frame relay encapsulation.

Default 

mode dte

Parameters 
dce—
Enables the DCE mode.
dte —
Enables the DTE mode.
bidir —
Enables the bidirectional mode for LMI types ANSI and ITU.

mode

Syntax 
mode {manual |auto |off}
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>system>bgp-evpn>eth-seg>service-carving mode)
Full Contexts 
configure service system bgp-evpn ethernet-segment service-carving mode
Description 

This command configures the service-carving mode. This determines how the DF is elected for a specified Ethernet-Segment and service.

Default 

mode auto

Parameters 
auto—
This mode is the service-carving algorithm defined in RFC 7432. The DF for the service is calculated based on the modulo function of the service (identified by either the evi or the isid) and the number of PEs.
manual—
In this mode the DF is elected based on the manual configuration added in the service-carving>manual context.
off—
In this mode all the services elect the same DF PE (assuming the same PEs are active for all the configured services). The PE with the lowest IP is elected as DF for the Ethernet-Segment.

mode

Syntax 
mode mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pim-snooping mode)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls pim-snooping mode
Description 

This command sets the PIM snooping mode to proxy or plain snooping.

Parameters 
mode—
Specifies PIM snooping mode
Values—
snoop, proxy

 

Default—
proxy

mode

Syntax 
mode {rstp |comp-dot1w |dot1w |mstp |pmstp}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp mode)
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-template>stp mode)
Full Contexts 
configure service template vpls-template stp mode
configure service vpls stp mode
Description 

This command specifies the version of Spanning Tree Protocol the bridge is currently running.

See section Spanning Tree Operating Modes for more information about these modes.

The no form of this command returns the STP variant to the default.

Default 

mode rstp

Parameters 
rstp—
Corresponds to the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol specified in IEEE 802.1D/D4-2003
dot1w—
Corresponds to the mode where the Rapid Spanning Tree is backward compatible with IEEE 802.1w
compdot1w—
Corresponds to the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol in conformance with IEEE 802.1w
mstp—
Sets MSTP as the STP mode of operation. Corresponds to the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol specified in 802.1Q REV/D5.0-09/200
pmstp—
The PMSTP mode is only supported in VPLS services where the M-VPLS flag is configured

mode

Syntax 
mode {all |dropped-only}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>arp-host mode)
Full Contexts 
debug service id arp-host mode
Description 

This command configures the ARP host tracing mode.

Parameters 
all—
Debugs all dropped packets.
dropped-only—
Only displays dropped packets.

mode

Syntax 
mode {dropped-only |ingr-and-dropped |egr-ingr-and-dropped}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>igmp-snooping mode)
Full Contexts 
debug service id igmp-snooping mode
Description 

This command enables and configures the IGMP tracing mode.

The no form of this command disables the configures the IGMP tracing mode.

mode

Syntax 
mode {dropped-only |ingr-and-dropped |egr-ingr-and-dropped}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>mld mode)
Full Contexts 
debug service id mld-snooping mode
Description 

This command enables and configures the MLD tracing mode.

The no form of this command disables the configures the MLD tracing mode.

mode

Syntax 
mode {mesh-group |standard}
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>msdp>group mode)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn msdp group mode
Description 

This command configures groups of peers in a full mesh topology to limit excessive flooding of source-active messages to neighboring peers.

Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) peers can be configured grouped in a full-mesh topology that prevents excessive flooding of source-active messages to neighboring peers.

In a meshed configuration, all members of the group must have a peer connection with every other mesh group member. If this rule is not adhered to, then unpredictable results may occur.

Default 

mode standard

Parameters 
mesh-group—
Specifies that source-active message received from a mesh group member are always accepted but are not flooded to other members of the same mesh group. These source-active messages are only flooded to non-mesh group peers or members of other mesh groups.
standard—
Specifies a non-meshed mode.

mode

Syntax 
mode {auto |napt |one-to-one}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nat>outside>pool mode)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn nat outside pool mode
Description 

This command configures the mode of operation of this NAT address pool.

The mode value is only relevant while the value of pool type is equal to largeScale; while the value of pool type is equal to l2Aware, the mode of operation is always NAPT.

Default 

mode auto

Parameters 
napt —
Specifies NAPT (Network Address Port Translation)
auto—
The system selects the actual mode based upon other configuration parameters; the actual mode can be NAPT or 1:1 NAT (also known as 'Basic NAT').
one-to-one—
Indicates 1:1 NAT (also known as 'Basic NAT')

mode

Syntax 
mode {dropped-only |ingr-and-dropped |egr-ingr-and-dropped}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>dhcp mode)
Full Contexts 
debug service id dhcp mode
Description 

This command configures the DHCP tracing mode.

The no form of the command disables debugging.

Parameters 
dropped-only—
Only displays dropped packets.
ingr-and-dropped—
Only displays ingress packet and dropped packets.
egr-ingr-and-dropped—
Displays ingress, egress and dropped packets.

mode

Syntax 
mode mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>gmpls-tun-grp mode)
Full Contexts 
configure gmpls-tun-grp mode
Description 

This command sets the operating mode of the GMPLS tunnel group.

In load-sharing mode, traffic is load-shared across the member GMPLS LSPs of the tunnel group. The same hashing algorithm is used as for LAG (see the "LAG and ECMP hashing" chapter of the 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7950 XRS, and VSR Interface Configuration Guide). If load-sharing is configured, then all of the GMPLS LSPs must terminate on the same far-end node. All of the ports used by GMPLS LSPs must be equivalent in that they must have the same named QoS policy, bandwidth, and so on Once more than one gLSP is associated with a tunnel group, the QoS policy / scheduler policy cannot be changed for any of the ports. All GMPLS LSPs must be unprotected end-to-end. Segment protection is allowed for GMPLS LSPs associated in a load sharing mode tunnel group.

In active-standby mode, only one member gLSP can be associated with the tunnel group.

The no form of this command removes the member.

Default 

mode load-sharing

Parameters 
mode—
Specifies the operating mode of the GMPLS tunnel group.
Values—
active-standby — Sets the operating mode to active-standby.load-sharing — Sets the operating mode to load-sharing.

 

mode

Syntax 
mode mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>app-assure>group>gtp mode)
Full Contexts 
configure application-assurance group gtp mode
Description 

This command is used to either untunnel GTP-U traffic received on UDP port number 2152, or apply GTP filtering/firewall rules as specified under this GTP CLI context.

Default 

mode filtering

Parameters 
mode—
Specifies the operational mode of the command.
Values—
filtering — AA applies GTP filtering rules to GTP-U traffic, without further analysis of IP traffic tunneled within GTP.
untunneling — AA untunnels GTP traffic and provides analytical reporting of the applications running within the GTP tunnels. The rest of the commands under GTP CLI context (such as GTP-filter and event-log) are not applicable in this mode.
For AA to untunnel GTP traffic, the operator must configure “gtp” under the partition by using the config>app-assure>group>gtp command.
The following caveats apply:
  1. Only GTP-U traffic with TID <> 0 is untunneled.
  1. Any UDP but non-GTP traffic that uses port 2152 will be identified as UDP traffic.
  1. Only GTP-U packets with message type: G-PDU (0xFF) is untunneled. Other GTP-U packets with different message types are reported as GTP Protocol.
  1. Only GTP-u packets with non-fragmented outer IP and no IPv4 options or IPv6 extension headers are untunneled. Otherwise, no inner GTP tunnel classification is performed and the traffic is identified and reported as GTP protocol.

 

mode

Syntax 
mode {auto |napt |one-to-one}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>nat>outside>pool mode)
Full Contexts 
configure router nat outside pool mode
Description 

This command specifies the mode of operation of this NAT address pool.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default 

auto

Parameters 
{auto |napt |one-to-one}—
Specifies the mode of operation of this NAT pool.

mode

Syntax 
mode {mesh-group |standard}
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>msdp>group mode)
Full Contexts 
configure router msdp group mode
Description 

This command configures groups of peers in a full mesh topology to limit excessive flooding of source-active messages to neighboring peers.

Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) peers can be configured grouped in a full-mesh topology that prevents excessive flooding of source-active messages to neighboring peers.

In a meshed configuration, all members of the group must have a peer connection with every other mesh group member. If this rule is not adhered to, then unpredictable results may occur.

Default 

mode standard

Parameters 
mesh-group—
Specifies that source-active message received from a mesh group member are always accepted but are not flooded to other members of the same mesh group. These source-active messages are only flooded to non-mesh group peers or members of other mesh groups.
standard—
Specifies a non-meshed mode.

mode

Syntax 
mode {strict |loose |strict-no-ecmp}
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>if>urpf-check mode)
[Tree] (config>router>if>ipv6>urpf-check mode)
Full Contexts 
configure router interface ipv6 urpf-check mode
configure router interface urpf-check mode
Description 

This command specifies the mode of unicast RPF check.

The no form of this command reverts to the default (strict) mode.

Default 

mode strict

Parameters 
strict—
When specified, uRPF checks whether incoming packet has a source address that matches a prefix in the routing table, and whether the interface expects to receive a packet with this source address prefix.
loose—
In loose mode, uRPF checks whether incoming packet has source address with a corresponding prefix in the routing table. However, the loose mode does not check whether the interface expects to receive a packet with a specific source address prefix. This object is valid only when urpf-check is enabled.
strict-no-ecmp—
When a packet is received on an interface in this mode and the SA matches an ECMP route the packet is dropped by uRPF.

mode

Syntax 
mode {ecmp-protected | linear}
no mode
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>segment-routing>maintenance-policy mode)
Full Contexts 
configure router segment-routing maintenance-policy mode
Description 

This command specifies the data path programming and protection mechanism for SR policy candidate paths to which the maintenance policy is applied.

In both the linear mode and ecmp-protected modes, if two or more candidate paths of the same {headend, color, endpoint} and also have the same mode, then the best preference path is treated as the primary while the next best preference path is the standby. If a third path is present in the linear mode, then this is treated as a tertiary and also programmed in the IOM.

If the currently active path goes unavailable due to S-BFD, the system failovers to the next best preference available candidate path. If S-BFD is down on all segment lists of all programmed candidate paths of an SR Policy, then the SR Policy is marked as down in TTM.

If the default mode is specified, the router only programs the segment lists of the best preference paths in the IOM.

The no form of this command removes the configured mode.

Default 

no mode

Parameters 
ecmp-protected
Specifies only the top two routes (paths) are programmed in the IOM. Up to 32 segment lists can be programmed for each path.
linear
Specifies the top three routes are programmed in the IOM. Only one segment list is allowed per path.

mode

Syntax 
mode {target-defined |on-change |sample}
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>telemetry>persistent-subscriptions>subscription mode)
Full Contexts 
configure system telemetry persistent-subscriptions subscription mode
Description 

This command configures the subscription path mode for telemetry notifications that are sent for the persistent subscription.

Default 

mode target-defined

Parameters 
target-defined—
Keyword specifying that target defined mode is used.
on-change—
Keyword specifying that on change mode is used.
sample—
Keyword specifying that sample mode is used.

17.305. mode-annexb

mode-annexb

Syntax 
[no] mode-annexb
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>aps mode-annexb)
Full Contexts 
configure port aps mode-annexb
Description 

This command configures the APS group for 1+1 Optimized operation as described in Annex B of ITU.T G.841. Note that Annex B operates in non-revertive bi-directional switching mode only as defined in G.841.

17.306. modify-buffer-allocation-rate

modify-buffer-allocation-rate

Syntax 
modify-buffer-allocation-rate
Context 
[Tree] (config>port modify-buffer-allocation-rate)
Full Contexts 
configure port modify-buffer-allocation-rate
Description 

This command enables the context to configure ingress and egress percentage of rate parameters. This command only applies to physical ports (for example, it will not work on APS or similar logical ports). The percentage of rate commands are used to define a percentage value that affects the amount of buffers used by ingress and egress port managed buffer space. Enter the modify-buffer-allocation-rate context when editing the port’s percentage of rate commands.

17.307. module

module

Syntax 
module cpm-slot
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>bluetooth module)
Full Contexts 
configure system bluetooth module
Description 

This command enters the context to define Bluetooth parameters for the specific CPM slot.

Parameters 
cpm-slot—
Specifies the CPM slot.
Values—
{A | B | C | D}

 

17.308. mofrr

mofrr

Syntax 
[no] mofrr
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>pim mofrr)
Full Contexts 
debug router pim mofrr
Description 

This command enables debugging for PIM multicast fast failover (MoFRR).

The no form of this command disables MoFRR debugging.

17.309. mon-port-sch

mon-port-sch

Syntax 
[no] mon-port-sch
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet mon-port-sch)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>access>egress>vport mon-port-sch)
[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path>access>egress>vport mon-port-sch)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet access egress vport mon-port-sch
configure port ethernet mon-port-sch
configure port sonet-sdh path access egress vport mon-port-sch
Description 

This command enables congestion monitoring on an Egress Port Scheduler (EPS) that is applied to a physical port or to a Vport.

Congestion monitoring must be further configured under the port-scheduler CLI hierarchy. Once the congestion monitoring is in effect, the offered rate (incoming traffic) is compared to the configured port-scheduler congestion threshold. The results of these measurements are stored as the number of samples representing the number of times the offered rates exceeded the configured congestion threshold since the last clearing of the stats. Therefore, the results represent the number of times that the port-scheduler that is applied to a port/Vport was congested since the last reset of the stats (via a clear command).

The no form of this command disables congestion monitoring.

Default 

no mon-port-sch

17.310. monitor

monitor

Syntax 
monitor
Context 
[Tree] (monitor)
Full Contexts 
monitor
Description 

This command enables the context to monitor statistics.

monitor

Syntax 
monitor ip-prefix/length
no monitor
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>wlan-gw>redundancy monitor)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface wlan-gw redundancy monitor
Description 

This command specifies an IPv4 route (prefix/length) per subscriber-interface to be monitored in the FDB to determine liveness of the subscriber-interface (and consequently all associated group-interfaces of type wlangw) on a peer WLAN-GW. This route is the one that is advertised in routing by the peer WLAN-GW when the subscriber-interface and WLAN-GW group are operationally up.

Parameters 
ip-prefix/length—
Specifies the IP prefix and length.
Values—
ip-prefix:a.b.c.d
ip-prefix-length: 0 to 32

 

monitor

Syntax 
monitor ip-prefix/length
no monitor
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nat>outside>pool>redundancy monitor)
[Tree] (config>router>nat>outside>pool>redundancy monitor)
Full Contexts 
configure router nat outside pool redundancy monitor
configure service vprn nat outside pool redundancy monitor
Description 

This command configures the monitoring route based on which the NAT multi-chassis switchover is triggered. Monitoring route of a NAT pool on the local node must match the export route of a corresponding NAT pool on the peering node. Presence of the monitoring route in the routing table is an indication that the peering NAT pool is active (since it is advertising its export route). The disappearance of the monitoring route from the routing table is an indication that the peering pool has failed and consequently the nodal switchover is triggered, the local pool becomes active and its export route is consequently advertised. The export route can be advertised only from:

  1. The active lead pool.
  2. Active pool for which fate-sharing is disabled.
Default 

no monitor

Parameters 
ip-prefix/length—
Specifies the IP prefix and length.

Syntax:

ip-prefix/length:

ip-prefix

a.b.c.d

ip-prefix-length

0 to 32

monitor

Syntax 
[no] monitor
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp monitor)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group monitor)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor monitor)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group monitor)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor monitor)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp group monitor
configure router bgp group neighbor monitor
configure router bgp monitor
configure service vprn bgp group monitor
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor monitor
Description 

This command enables the context to configure monitor parameters.

The no form of this command disables BGP BMP monitoring.

17.311. monitor-agg-egress-queue-stats

monitor-agg-egress-queue-stats

Syntax 
[no] monitor-agg-egress-queue-stats
Context 
[Tree] (config>port monitor-agg-egress-queue-stats)
Full Contexts 
configure port monitor-agg-egress-queue-stats
Description 

This command enables the monitoring of aggregate egress queue statistics on the port. All queues on the port are monitored, including SAP egress, network egress, subscriber egress, and egress queue group queues, as well as system queues that can be used, for example, to send port-related protocol packets (LACP, EFM, and so on). The aggregate in-profile, out-of-profile, and total statistics are provided for both forwarded and dropped packets and octets.

Monitoring of aggregate statistics is supported on PXC sub-ports but not on a PXC physical port. It is also not supported on satellite ports or ports on an HSMDA.

The no form of this command disables aggregate egress queue statistics monitoring on the specified port.

17.312. monitor-bandwidth

monitor-bandwidth

Syntax 
[no] monitor-bandwidth
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>auto-bandwidth monitor-bandwidth)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template>auto-bandwidth monitor-bandwidth)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls lsp auto-bandwidth monitor-bandwidth
configure router mpls lsp-template auto-bandwidth monitor-bandwidth
Description 

This command enables the collection and display of auto-bandwidth measurements, but prevents any automatic bandwidth adjustments from taking place.

The no form of this command disables the collection and display of auto-bandwidth measurements.

17.313. monitor-depth

monitor-depth

Syntax 
[no] monitor-depth
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>eth>access>ing>qgrp>qover>q monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>port>eth>access>egr>qgrp>qover>q monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>network>egr>qgrp>qover>q monitor-depth)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet access egress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-depth
configure port ethernet access ingress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-depth
configure port ethernet network egress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-depth
Description 

This command enables queue depth monitoring for the specified queue. This command and the dynamic-mbs command are mutually exclusive on the related queue group queue.

The no form of this command removes queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

monitor-depth

Syntax 
[no] monitor-depth
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>fpipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>fpipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
Full Contexts 
configure service apipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service apipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service cpipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service cpipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service epipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service epipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service fpipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service fpipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service ipipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service ipipe sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-depth
Description 

This command enables queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

The no form of this command removes queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

monitor-depth

Syntax 
[no] monitor-depth
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap egress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service ies interface sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-depth
Description 

This command enables queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

The no form of this command removes queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

monitor-depth

Syntax 
[no] monitor-depth
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>ingress>queue-override>queue monitor-depth)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap egress queue-override queue monitor-depth
configure service vprn interface sap ingress queue-override queue monitor-depth
Description 

This command enables queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

The no form of this command removes queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

17.314. monitor-oper-group

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group name priority-step step
no monitor-oper-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>srrp monitor-oper-group)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>srrp monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface srrp monitor-oper-group
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface srrp monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command will configure the association between the SRRP instance in a Fate Sharing Group and the operational-group that contains messaging SAPs. A state transition of a messaging SAP within an operational-group will trigger calculation of the priority for all SRRP instances that are associated with that operational-group.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the name of the operational-group, up to 32 characters, that is tracking operational state of SRRP messaging SAPs
priority-step—
Specifies the priority step for which the priority of an SRRP instance is changed. If a messaging SAP within an operational-group transition to a non-UP state, the priority is decreased by the step value. If the messaging SAP within the operational-group transition into the UP state, the priority of the SRRP instance is increased by the step value.
Values—
1 to 10

 

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group name
no monitor-oper-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>lag monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure lag monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command, supported on access LAG only, specifies the operational group to monitor. The state of the operational group affects the state of this LAG. When the operational group is inactive, the state of the LAG goes down and the LAG uses the configured lag>standby-signaling mechanism (lacp or power-off) to signal the CE that the LAG is not available.

Default 

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the name of the oper-group, up to 32 characters.

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group name
no monitor-oper-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>site monitor-oper-group)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp monitor-oper-group)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap monitor-oper-group)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp>pw-template-binding monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls bgp pw-template-binding monitor-oper-group
configure service vpls sap monitor-oper-group
configure service vpls site monitor-oper-group
configure service vpls spoke-sdp monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command specifies the operational group to be monitored by the object under which it is configured. The oper-group name must be already configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command.

The no form of this command removes the association.

Default 

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters 
group-name—
Specifies a character string of maximum 32 ASCII characters identifying the group instance.

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group group-name
no monitor-oper-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp monitor-oper-group)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure service epipe sap monitor-oper-group
configure service epipe spoke-sdp monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command specifies the operational group to be monitored by the object under which it is configured. The oper-group name must be already configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command.

The no form of this command removes the association.

Parameters 
group-name—
Specifies an oper group name.

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group group-name
no monitor-oper-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>pw-port monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure service epipe pw-port monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command configures the monitoring operational group name, up to 32 characters in length, associated with this PW-port entry.

Parameters 
group-name—
Specifies an operational group to monitor.

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group name
no monitor-oper-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command specifies the operational group to be monitored by the object under which it is configured. The oper-group name must be already configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command.

The no form of this command removes the association from the configuration.

Default 

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters 
name—
Specifies a character string of maximum 32 ASCII characters identifying the group instance.

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group name
no monitor-oper-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command specifies the operational group to be monitored by the object under which it is configured. The oper-group name must be already configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command.

The no form of this command removes the association from the configuration.

Default 

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters 
name—
Specifies a character string, up to 32 ASCII characters, identifying the group instance.

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 |ipv6} add [1..4294967295]
monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 |ipv6} set [1..4294967295]
monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 |ipv6} subtract [1..4294967295]
no monitor-oper-group [family {ipv4 |ipv6}]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim>if monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn pim interface monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command configures PIM to monitor the state of an operational group to provide a redundancy mechanism. PIM monitors the operational group and changes its DR priority to the specified value when the status of the operational group is up. This enables the router to become the PIM DR only when the operational group is up. If the operational group status changes to down, PIM changes its DR priority to the default or the value configured with priority under config>service>vprn>pim>if. The oper-group group-name must already be configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command. Two operational groups are supported per PIM interface.

The no form of this command removes the operational group from the configuration.

Parameters 
group-name—
Specifies the operational group identifier up to 32 characters in length.
family—
Specifies the address family.
ipv4—
Specifies the IPv4 designated router priority.
ipv6—
Specifies the IPv6 designated router priority.
add—
Specifies that the value is to be added to the existing priority to become the designated router.
subtract—
Specifies that the value is to be subtracted from the existing priority to become the designated router.
set—
Specifies the priority to become the designated router.
value—
Specifies the priority modifier expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group name health-drop drop
no monitor-oper-group name
Context 
[Tree] (config>isa>nat-group>inter-chassis-redundancy monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure isa nat-group inter-chassis-redundancy monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command enables monitoring of the objects, such as SAPs, BFD sessions, or VRRP sessions for the purpose of adjusting the overall health of the node in a redundant inter- chassis NAT system. A state change of the objects in the oper-group influences the health of a NAT node in a redundant configuration.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the name of the operational group that is being monitored, up to 32 characters.
drop—
A state change of an object in the oper-group influences the overall health of the system in the context of NAT inter-chassis redundancy. For example, a transition into a non-operational (down) state of an object within the monitored oper-group triggers a decrease of the overall health of the node for the amount specified by the health-drop value.
Values—
1 to 255

 

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 |ipv6} add [value]
monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 |ipv6} set [value]
monitor-oper-group group-name family {ipv4 |ipv6} subtract [value]
no monitor-oper-group [family {ipv4 |ipv6}]
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>pim>if monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure router pim interface monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command configures PIM to monitor the state of an operational group to provide a redundancy mechanism. PIM monitors the operational group and changes its DR priority to the specified value when the status of the operational group is up. This enables the router to become the PIM DR only when the operational group is up. If the operational group status changes to down, PIM changes its DR priority to the default or the value configured with priority under config>router>pim>if. The oper-group group-name must already be configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command. Two operational groups are supported per PIM interface.

The no form of this command removes the operational group from the configuration.

Parameters 
group-name—
Specifies the operational group identifier, up to 32 characters.
family—
Specifies the address family.
ipv4—
Specifies the IPv4 designated router priority.
ipv6—
Specifies the IPv6 designated router priority.
add—
Specifies that the value is to be added to the existing priority to become the designated router.
subtract—
Specifies that the value is to be subtracted from the existing priority to become the designated router.
set—
Specifies the priority to become the designated router.
value—
Specifies the priority modifier expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 4294967295

 

monitor-oper-group

Syntax 
monitor-oper-group group name
no monitor-oper-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>sdp>binding>pw-port monitor-oper-group)
Full Contexts 
configure service sdp binding pw-port monitor-oper-group
Description 

This command specifies the operational group to be monitored by the object under which it is configured. The oper-group name must be already configured under the config>service context before its name is referenced in this command.

The no form of the command removes the association from the configuration.

Default 

no monitor-oper-group

Parameters 
name—
Specifies a character string of maximum 32 ASCII characters identifying the group instance.

17.315. monitor-port

monitor-port

Syntax 
monitor-port port-id health-drop drop
no monitor-port port-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>isa>nat-group>inter-chassis-redundancy monitor-port)
Full Contexts 
configure isa nat-group inter-chassis-redundancy monitor-port
Description 

This command enables monitoring of the ports to adjust the overall health of the node in a redundant inter-chassis NAT system. A state change of a monitored port influences the health of a NAT node in a redundant configuration.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

no monitor-port

Parameters 
port-id—
Specifies the port being monitored.
Values—
slot/mda/port

 

drop—
A state change of an object in the oper-group influences the overall health of the system in the context of NAT inter-chassis redundancy. For example, a transition into a non-operational (down) state of an object within the monitored oper-group triggers a decrease of the overall health of the node for the amount specified by the health-drop value.
Values—
1 to 255

 

17.316. monitor-queue-depth

monitor-queue-depth

Syntax 
monitor-queue-depth [fast-polling] [violation-threshold percentage]
no monitor-queue-depth
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>eth>access>egr>qgrp>qover>q monitor-queue-depth)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>network>egr>qgrp>qover>q monitor-queue-depth)
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>network>egress-port-queue-overrides>queue monitor-queue-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>fpipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>egress>queue-override>queue monitor-queue-depth)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet access egress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth
configure port ethernet network egress queue-group queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth
configure port ethernet network egress-port-queue-overrides queue monitor-queue-depth
configure service apipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
configure service cpipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
configure service epipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
configure service fpipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
configure service ies interface sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
configure service ipipe sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
configure service vpls sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
configure service vprn interface sap egress queue-override queue monitor-queue-depth
Description 

This command enables queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

The no form of this command disables queue depth monitoring for the specified queue.

Parameters 
fast-polling
Keyword used to specify that fast queue polling is enabled and is only supported on FP3 and FP4 hardware.
violation-threshold
Keyword used to specify a percentage of the queue MBS. When the depth of this queue exceeds this percentage, a violation is registered.
percentage—
Specifies a percentage, up to two decimal places, of the queue MBS.
Values—
00.01 to 99.99

 

17.317. monitor-threshold

monitor-threshold

Syntax 
monitor-threshold percent
no monitor-threshold
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>port-scheduler-policy monitor-threshold)
[Tree] (config>qos>port-scheduler-policy>group monitor-threshold)
Full Contexts 
configure qos port-scheduler-policy group monitor-threshold
configure qos port-scheduler-policy monitor-threshold
Description 

This command defines the congestion monitoring threshold for the desired monitoring entity under the port-scheduler for per aggregate port-scheduler rate, per individual level, and per group that is aggregating multiple levels.

The congestion threshold is specified in percentages of the configured PIR rate for the entity for which congestion monitoring is desired. For example, if the configured PIR rate for level 1 is 100,000 kb/s, and the monitoring threshold is set to 90%, then an event where the offered rate is >90,000 kb/s will be recorded. This event is shown as part of the cumulative count of congestion threshold exceeds since the last clearing of the counters.

The no form of this command removes the congestion monitoring threshold.

Default 

no monitor-threshold

Parameters 
percent—
Specifies the percent of the configured rate. If the offered rate exceeds the configured threshold, a counter monitoring the threshold will be increased.
Values—
0 to 100

 

17.318. month

month

Syntax 
month {month-number [..month-number] |month-name [..month-name] |all}
no month
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>cron>sched month)
Full Contexts 
configure system cron schedule month
Description 

This command specifies the month when the event should be executed. Multiple months can be specified. When multiple months are configured, each of them will cause the schedule to trigger. If a month is configured without configuring the month, weekday, day-of-month, and minute, the event will not execute.

The no form of this command removes the specified month from the configuration.

Default 

no month

Parameters 
month-number—
Specifies a month number.
Values—
1 to 12 (maximum 12 month-numbers)

 

month-name—
Specifies a month by name.
Values—
january, february, march, april, may, june, july, august, september, october, november, december (maximum 12 month names)

 

all —
Specifies all months.

17.319. more

more

Syntax 
[no] more
Context 
[Tree] (environment more)
Full Contexts 
environment more
Description 

This command enables per-screen CLI output, meaning that the output is displayed on a screen-by- screen basis. The terminal screen length can be modified with the terminal command.

The following prompt appears at the end of each screen of paginated output:

Press any key to continue (Q to quit)

The no form of the command displays the output all at once. If the output length is longer than one screen, the entire output will be displayed, which may scroll the screen.

Default 

more

more

Syntax 
[no] more
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>management-interface>cli>md-cli>environment more)
Full Contexts 
configure system management-interface cli md-cli environment more
Description 

This command configures pagination of the output text.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

more

17.320. more-fragments

more-fragments

Syntax 
more-fragments more-fragments
no more-fragments
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam>build-packet>header>ipv4 more-fragments)
[Tree] (debug>oam>build-packet>packet>field-override>header>ipv4 more-fragments)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam build-packet header ipv4 more-fragments
debug oam build-packet packet field-override header ipv4 more-fragments
Description 

This command defines if the MF flag should be set in the associated IPv4 header.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

more-fragments 0

Parameters 
more-fragments—
Specifies an MF flag for an IPv4 packet header to be launched by the OAM find-egress tool. A value of 1 means there are more fragments to be sent.
Values—
0, 1

 

17.321. motd

motd

Syntax 
motd {url url-prefix: source-url |text motd-text-string}
no motd
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>login-control motd)
Full Contexts 
configure system login-control motd
Description 

This command creates the message of the day displayed after a successful console login. Only one message can be configured.

The no form of this command removes the message.

Default 

no motd

Parameters 
url url-prefix: source-url
When the message of the day is present as a text file, provide both url-prefix and the source-url of the file containing the message of the day. The URL prefix can be local or remote.
text motd-text-string
Specifies the text of the message of the day. The motd-text-string must be enclosed in double quotes. Multiple text strings are not appended to one another.

Some special characters can be used to format the message text. The \n character can be used to create multi-line messages. A \n in the message moves to the beginning of the next line by sending ASCII/UTF-8 chars 0xA (LF) and 0xD (CR) to the client terminal. An \r in the message sends the ASCII/UTF-8 char 0xD (CR) to the client terminal.

17.322. move

move

Syntax 
move old-file-url new-file-url [force] [no-redirect] [client-tls-profile profile] [proxy proxy-url]
Context 
[Tree] (file move)
Full Contexts 
file move
Description 

This command moves a local file, system file, or a directory. If the target already exists, the command fails and an error message displays.

The following prompt appears if the destination file already exists:

“Overwrite destination file (y/n)?”

Parameters 
old-file-url—
Specifies the file or directory to be moved.
Values—

local-url

[cflash-id/][file-path] up to 200 characters, including cflash-id directory length up to 99 each

remote-url

[{ftp:// | tftp:// | http:// | https://}login:pswd@remote-locn/][file-path]

up to 247 characters

directory length up to 99 characters each

remote-locn

[hostname | ipv4-address | [ipv6-address]]

ipv4-address

a.b.c.d

ipv6-address

x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x[-interface]

x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d[-interface]

x - [0 to FFFF]H

d - [0 to 255]D

interface - up to 32 characters, for link local addresses 255

cflash-id

cf1:, cf1-A:, cf1-B:, cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B:, cf3:, cf3-A:, cf3-B:

 

new-file-url—
Specifies the new destination to place the old-file-url.
Values—

local-url

[cflash-id/][file-path] up to 200 characters, including cflash-id directory length up to 99 each

remote-url

[{ftp:// | tftp://}login:pswd@remote-locn/][file-path]

up to 247 characters

directory length up to 99 characters each

remote-locn

[hostname | ipv4-address | [ipv6-address]]

ipv4-address

a.b.c.d

ipv6-address

x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x[-interface]

x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d[-interface]

x - [0 to FFFF]H

d - [0 to 255]D

interface - up to 32 characters, for link local addresses 255

cflash-id

cf1:, cf1-A:, cf1-B:, cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B:, cf3:, cf3-A:, cf3-B:

 

force—
Forces an immediate move of the specified file(s).

The file move force command moves the specified file(s) without displaying a user prompt message. This command also automatically accepts HTTP redirects unless overridden by the no-redirect parameter.

profile—
Specifies the TLS client profile configured under config>system>security>tls>client-tls-profile to use.
proxy-url—
Specifies the URL of an HTTP proxy. For example, http://proxy.mydomain.com:8000. This URL must be an HTTP URL and not an HTTPS URL.
no-redirect—
Specifies to automatically refuse any HTTP redirects without prompting the user.

17.323. move-frequency

move-frequency

Syntax 
move-frequency frequency
no move-frequency
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mac-move move-frequency)
[Tree] (config>service>template>vpls-template>mac-move move-frequency)
Full Contexts 
configure service template vpls-template mac-move move-frequency
configure service vpls mac-move move-frequency
Description 

This command indicates the maximum rate at which MACs can be re-learned in the VPLS service, before the SAP where the moving MAC was last seen is automatically disabled in order to protect the system against undetected loops or duplicate MACs.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

move-frequency 2 (when mac-move is enabled). For example, 10 relearns in a 5 second period.

Parameters 
frequency—
Specifies the rate, in 5-second intervals for the maximum number of relearns
Values—
1 to 10

 

17.324. mp-bgp-keep

mp-bgp-keep

Syntax 
[no] mp-bgp-keep
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp mp-bgp-keep)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp mp-bgp-keep
Description 

As a result of enabling this command, route refresh messages are no longer needed, or issued when VPN route policy changes are made; RIB-IN will retain all MP-BGP routes.

The no form of this command is used to disable this feature.

Default 

no mp-bgp-keep

17.325. mp-mbb-time

mp-mbb-time

Syntax 
mp-mbb-time interval
no interval
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ldp mp-mbb-time)
Full Contexts 
configure router ldp mp-mbb-time
Description 

This command configures the maximum time a P2MP transit/bud node must wait before switching over to the new path if the new node does not send MBB TLV to inform of the availability of data plane.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

no mp-mbb-time (which equals a value of 3 seconds)

Parameters 
interval—
Specifies the MP MBB time, in seconds.
Values—
1 to 10

 

17.326. mpls

mpls

Syntax 
mpls [bgp bgp] [endpoint endpoint-name]
no mpls [bgp bgp]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>bgp-evpn mpls)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn mpls)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp-evpn mpls)
Full Contexts 
configure service epipe bgp-evpn mpls
configure service vpls bgp-evpn mpls
configure service vprn bgp-evpn mpls
Description 

This command enables the context to configure the BGP EVPN MPLS parameters. In VPLS, either instance BGP 1 or BGP 2 can be configured, but not both simultaneously in the same service. Epipe and VPRN services only support instance 1. If the bgp bgp parameter is not specified, the instance is set to 1.

The endpoint option is only supported for Epipe services. When configured, the same endpoint name can be configured for the bgp-evpn>mpls context and an additional spoke SDP. An EVPN MPLS destination always has higher preference than a spoke SDP.

The no form of this command removes the MPLS instance from the service.

Parameters 
bgp
Indicates the BGP instance identifier.
Values—
1, 2

 

endpoint-name—
Specifies the endpoint name, up to 32 characters.

mpls

Syntax 
[no] mpls
Context 
[Tree] (config>router mpls)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls
Description 

This command enables the context to configure MPLS parameters. MPLS is not enabled by default and must be explicitly enabled (no shutdown). The shutdown command administratively disables MPLS.

The no form of this command deletes this MPLS protocol instance; this will remove all configuration parameters for this MPLS instance.

MPLS must be shutdown before the MPLS instance can be deleted. All SDP bindings to LSPs must be removed before the MPLS instance can be deleted.

If MPLS is not shutdown, when the no mpls command is executed, a warning message on the console displays indicating that MPLS is still administratively up.

mpls

Syntax 
mpls
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>rib-api mpls)
Full Contexts 
configure router rib-api mpls
Description 

This command enables the context to configure MPLS parameters related to the RIB-API gRPC service.

mpls

Syntax 
mpls [lsp lsp-name] [sender source-address] [endpoint endpoint-address] [tunnel-id tunnel-id] [lsp-id lsp-id]
no mpls
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router mpls)
Full Contexts 
debug router mpls
Description 

This command enables and configures debugging for MPLS.

Parameters 
lsp lsp-name
Specifies the LSP name up to 64 characters in length.
sender source-address
Specifies the IP address of the sender.
endpoint endpoint-address
Specifies the far-end IP address.
tunnel-id tunnel-id
Specifies the MPLS SDP ID.
Values—
0 to 4294967295

 

lsp-id lsp-id
Specifies the LSP ID.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

mpls

Syntax 
mpls
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam>build-packet>header mpls)
[Tree] (debug>oam>build-packet>packet>field-override>header mpls)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam build-packet header mpls
debug oam build-packet packet field-override header mpls
Description 

This command causes the associated header to be defined as an MPLS label header template and enables the context to define the MPLS parameters.

mpls

Syntax 
mpls
Context 
[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session mpls)
Full Contexts 
configure oam-pm session mpls
Description 

This command enables the context to configure MPLS-specific source and destination, LSP type and tunnel information, the priority, and the MPLS DM test configuration on the launch point.

mpls

Syntax 
[no] mpls
Context 
[Tree] (config>cflowd>collector>export-filter>family mpls)
Full Contexts 
configure cflowd collector export-filter family mpls
Description 

This command filters MPLS flow data from being sent to the associated collector.

The no form of this command removes the filter, allowing MPLS flow data to be sent to the associated collector.

Default 

no mpls

mpls

Syntax 
mpls
Context 
[Tree] (monitor>router mpls)
Full Contexts 
monitor router mpls
Description 

This commands monitors commands for the MPLS instance.

mpls

Syntax 
mpls
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>ip mpls)
Full Contexts 
configure system ip mpls
Description 

This command enables the context to configure system-wide MPLS parameters.

17.327. mpls-dm

mpls-dm

Syntax 
mpls-dm
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam mpls-dm)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam mpls-dm
Description 

This command enables the context to configure global MPLS delay measurement parameters.

17.328. mpls-echo-request-downstream-map

mpls-echo-request-downstream-map

Syntax 
mpls-echo-request-downstream-map {dsmap |ddmap}
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam mpls-echo-request-downstream-map)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam mpls-echo-request-downstream-map
Description 

This command specifies which format of the downstream mapping TLV to use in all LSP trace packets and LDP tree trace packets originated on this node. The Downstream Mapping (DSMAP) TLV is the original format in RFC 4379 (obsoleted by RFC 8029) and is the default value. The new Downstream Detailed Mapping (DDMAP) TLV is the new enhanced format specified in RFC 6424 and RFC 8029.

This command applies to LSP trace of an RSVP P2P LSP, a MPLS-TP LSP, or LDP unicast FEC, and to LDP tree trace of a unicast LDP FEC. It does not apply to LSP trace of an RSVP P2MP LSP which always uses the DDMAP TLV.

The global DSMAP/DDMAP setting impacts the behavior of both OAM LSP trace packets and SAA test packets of type lsp-trace and is used by the sender node when one of the following events occurs:

  1. An SAA test of type lsp-trace is created (not modified) and no value is specified for the per-test downstream-map-tlv {dsmap | ddmap | none} option. In this case, the SAA test downstream-map-tlv value defaults to the global mpls-echo-request-downstream-map value.
  2. An OAM test of type lsp-trace test is executed and no value is specified for the per-test downstream-map-tlv {dsmap | ddmap | none} option. In this case, the OAM test downstream-map-tlv value defaults to the global mpls-echo-request-downstream-map value.

A consequence of the rules above is that a change to the value of mpls-echo-request-downstream-map option does not affect the value inserted in the downstream mapping TLV of existing tests.

Following are the details of the processing of the new DDMAP TLV:

  1. When either the DSMAP TLV or the DDMAP TLV is received in an echo request message, the responder node includes the same type of TLV in the echo reply message with the proper downstream interface information and label stack information.
  2. If an echo request message without a Downstream Mapping TLV (DSMAP or DDMAP) expires at a node which is not the egress for the target FEC stack, the responder node always includes the DSMAP TLV in the echo reply message. This can occur in the following cases:
    1. The user issues a LSP trace from a sender node with a min-ttl value higher than 1 and a max-ttl value lower than the number of hops to reach the egress of the target FEC stack. This is the sender node behavior when the global configuration or the per-test setting of the DSMAP/DDMAP is set to DSMAP.
    2. The user issues a LSP ping from a sender node with a ttl value lower than the number of hops to reach the egress of the target FEC stack. This is the sender node behavior when the global configuration of the DSMAP/DDMAP is set to DSMAP.
    3. The behavior in (a) is changed when the global configuration or the per-test setting of the Downstream Mapping TLV is set to DDMAP. The sender node includes in this case the DDMAP TLV with the Downstream IP address field set to the all-routers multicast address as per Section 3.4 of RFC 8029. The responder node then bypasses the interface and label stack validation and replies with a DDMAP TLV with the correct downstream information for the target FEC stack.
  3. A sender node never includes the DSMAP or DDMAP TLV in an lsp-ping message.

In addition to performing the same features as the DSMAP TLV, the new DDMAP TLV addresses the following scenarios:

  1. Full validation of an LDP FEC stitched to a BGP IPv4 label route. In this case, the LSP trace message is inserted from the LDP LSP segment or from the stitching point.
  2. Full validation of a BGP IPv4 label route stitched to an LDP FEC. This includes the case of explicit configuration of the LDP-BGP stitching in which the BGP label route is active in Route Table Manager (RTM) and the case of a BGP IPv4 label route resolved to the LDP FEC due to the IGP route of the same prefix active in RTM. In this case, the LSP trace message is inserted from the BGP LSP segment or from the stitching point.
  3. Full validation of an LDP FEC which is stitched to a BGP LSP and stitched back into an LDP FEC. In this case, the LSP trace message is inserted from the LDP segments or the or from the stitching points.
  4. Full validation of an LDP FEC tunneled over an RSVP LSP using LSP trace.

To properly check a target FEC which is stitched to another FEC (stitching FEC) of the same or a different type, or which is tunneled over another FEC (tunneling FEC), it is necessary for the responding nodes to provide details about the FEC manipulation back to the sender node. This is achieved via the use of the new FEC stack change sub-TLV in the Downstream Detailed Mapping TLV (DDMAP) defined in RFC 6424.

When the user configures the use of the DDMAP TLV on a trace for an LSP that does not undergo stitching or tunneling operation in the network, the procedures at the sender and responder nodes are the same as in the case of the DSMAP TLV.

This feature however introduces changes to the target FEC stack validation procedures at the sender and responder nodes in the case of LSP stitching and LSP hierarchy. These changes pertain to the processing of the new FEC stack change sub-TLV in the new DDMAP TLV and the new return code of value 15 Label switched with FEC change.

The no form of this command reverts to the default behavior of using the DSMAP TLV in a LSP trace packet and LDP tree trace packet.

Default 

mpls-echo-request-downstream-map dsmap

Parameters 
dsmap—
Specifies that the DSMAP TLV should be used in all LSP trace packets and LDP tree trace packets originating on the node.
ddmap—
Specifies that the DDMAP TLV should be used in all LSP trace packets and LDP tree trace packets originating on the node.
Output 

The following output is an example of mpls-echo-request-downstream-map information.

Sample Output for LDP-over-RSVP
A          B          D          F          E          C  
o -------- o -------- o -------- o -------- o -------- o  
| \______/ | \____________________________/ | \______/ |  
 \  RSVP  /               LDP                \  RSVP  /   
  \______/                                    \______/    
    LDP                                         LDP       
 
Testing LDP FEC of Node C with DSMAP TLV
----------------------------------------
*A:Dut-A# 
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.3/32 downstream-map-tlv dsmap detail 
lsp-trace to 10.20.1.3/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 104 byte packets
1  10.20.1.2  rtt=3.90ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.4.4 ifaddr=10.10.4.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131068 protocol=3(LDP)
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=5.69ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.9.6 ifaddr=10.10.9.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131066 protocol=3(LDP)
3  10.20.1.6  rtt=7.88ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.5 ifaddr=10.10.10.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131060 protocol=3(LDP)
4  10.20.1.5  rtt=23.2ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.5.3 ifaddr=10.10.5.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496 
           label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
5  10.20.1.3  rtt=12.0ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 
*A:Dut-A# 
 
 
Testing LDP FEC of Node C with DDMAP TLV
----------------------------------------
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.3/32 downstream-map-tlv ddmap detail 
lsp-trace to 10.20.1.3/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 136 byte packets
1  10.20.1.2  rtt=4.00ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2 
1  10.20.1.2  rtt=3.48ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.4.4 ifaddr=10.10.4.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131068 protocol=3(LDP)
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=5.34ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.9.6 ifaddr=10.10.9.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131066 protocol=3(LDP)
3  10.20.1.6  rtt=7.78ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.5 ifaddr=10.10.10.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131060 protocol=3(LDP)
4  10.20.1.5  rtt=12.8ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.5.3 ifaddr=10.10.5.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496 
           label[1]=131054 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
           label[2]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
           fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.3 remotepeer=10.10.5.3
5  10.20.1.3  rtt=12.8ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2 
5  10.20.1.3  rtt=13.4ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 
*A:Dut-A# 
 
 
 
D          F          E          C          A          B  
o -------- o -------- o -------- o -------- o -------- o  
  \_________________/ | \_________________/ | \______/ |  
          LDP          \     RSVP ECA      / \  RSVP  /   
                        \_________________/   \______/    
                                LDP             LDP       
 
Testing LDP FEC of Node B with DDMAP TLV
----------------------------------------
*A:Dut-D# 
*A:Dut-D# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.2/32 downstream-map-tlv ddmap detail 
lsp-trace to 10.20.1.2/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 108 byte packets
1  10.20.1.6  rtt=3.17ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.5 ifaddr=10.10.10.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131065 protocol=3(LDP)
2  10.20.1.5  rtt=8.27ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.5.3 ifaddr=10.10.5.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496 
           label[1]=131068 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
           label[2]=131065 protocol=3(LDP)
           fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.1 remotepeer=10.10.5.3
3  10.20.1.3  rtt=9.50ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.2.1 ifaddr=10.10.2.1 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500 
           label[1]=131068 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
4  10.20.1.1  rtt=10.4ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2 
4  10.20.1.1  rtt=10.2ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1 
     DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.1.2 ifaddr=10.10.1.2 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496 
           label[1]=131066 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
           label[2]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
           fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.2 remotepeer=10.10.1.2
5  10.20.1.2  rtt=13.7ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2 
5  10.20.1.2  rtt=13.6ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 
*A:Dut-D# 
Sample Output for LDP-BGP Stitching
A         B          C           D         E         F   
o ------- o -------- o --------- o ------- o ------- o   
  \_____/ |            \_______/           | \_____/     
    LDP   |              RSVP              |   LDP          
          |\______________________________/|             
          |              LDP               |             
           \______________________________/              
                         BGP                             
 
Testing LDP FEC of Node F with DSMAP TLV
----------------------------------------
*A:Dut-A# *A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.6/32 downstream-map-
tlv dsmap detail lsp-trace to 10.20.1.6/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 104 byte packets
1  10.20.1.2  rtt=2.65ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
2  10.20.1.3  rtt=4.89ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=1
3  10.20.1.4  rtt=6.49ms rc=5(DSMappingMismatched) rsc=1 
*A:Dut-A#
 
Testing LDP FEC of Node F with DDMAP TLV
----------------------------------------
*A:Dut-A# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.6/32 downstream-map-tlv ddmap detail lsp-
trace to 10.20.1.6/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 108 byte packets
1  10.20.1.2  rtt=3.50ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.3.3 ifaddr=10.10.3.3 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
            label[1]=131068 protocol=3(LDP)
            label[2]=131060 protocol=2(BGP)
            fecchange[1]=POP  fectype=LDP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=0.0.0.0 
(Unknown)
            fecchange[2]=PUSH fectype=BGP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=10.20.1.5
            fecchange[3]=PUSH fectype=LDP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.5 remotepeer=10.10.3.3
2  10.20.1.3  rtt=6.53ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.11.4 ifaddr=10.10.11.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
          label[1]=131060 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
          label[2]=131070 protocol=3(LDP)
          label[3]=131060 protocol=2(BGP)
          fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.4 remotepeer=10.10.11.4
3  10.20.1.4  rtt=7.94ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
3  10.20.1.4  rtt=6.69ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.6.5 ifaddr=10.10.6.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500
            label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
            label[2]=131060 protocol=2(BGP)
4  10.20.1.5  rtt=10.1ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
4  10.20.1.5  rtt=8.97ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.6 ifaddr=10.10.10.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500
           label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
           fecchange[1]=POP  fectype=BGP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=0.0.0.0 
(Unknown)
           fecchange[2]=PUSH fectype=LDP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=10.10.10.6
5  10.20.1.6  rtt=11.8ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 *A:Dut-A#
 
 
A         B          C           D         E 
o ------- o -------- o --------- o ---3--- o 
  \_____/ |            \_______/           | 
    LDP   |              RSVP              |             
          |\______________________________/|             
          |              LDP               |             
           \______________________________/              
                         BGP                             
Testing BGP Label Route of Node E with DDMAP TLV
-------------------------------------------------
*A:Dut-B# oam lsp-trace prefix 11.20.1.5/32 bgp-label downstream-map-
tlv ddmap detail lsp-trace to 11.20.1.5/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 124 byte packets
1  10.20.1.3  rtt=2.35ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.11.4 ifaddr=10.10.11.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
          label[1]=131060 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
          label[2]=131070 protocol=3(LDP)
          label[3]=131070 protocol=2(BGP)
          fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.4 remotepeer=10.10.11.4
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=4.17ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=4.50ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.6.5 ifaddr=10.10.6.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500
            label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
            label[2]=131070 protocol=2(BGP)
3  10.20.1.5  rtt=7.78ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
3  10.20.1.5  rtt=6.80ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 *A:Dut-B#
 
B          C           D         E         F   
o -------- o --------- o ---3--- o ---3--- o   
|            \_______/           | \_____/     
|              RSVP              |             
|\______________________________/|             
|              LDP               |             
 \______________________________/              
               BGP                             
 
Testing with DDMAP TLV LDP FEC of Node F when stitched to a BGP Label Route
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
*A:Dut-B# oam lsp-trace prefix 10.20.1.6/32 bgp-label downstream-map-
tlv ddmap detail lsp-trace to 10.20.1.6/32: 0 hops min, 0 hops max, 124 byte packets
1  10.20.1.3  rtt=3.21ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.11.4 ifaddr=10.10.11.4 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1496
          label[1]=131060 protocol=4(RSVP-TE)
          label[2]=131070 protocol=3(LDP)
          label[3]=131060 protocol=2(BGP)
          fecchange[1]=PUSH fectype=RSVP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.4 remotepeer=10.10.11.4
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=5.50ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=3
2  10.20.1.4  rtt=5.37ms rc=8(DSRtrMatchLabel) rsc=2
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.6.5 ifaddr=10.10.6.5 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500
          label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
          label[2]=131060 protocol=2(BGP)
3  10.20.1.5  rtt=7.82ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=2
3  10.20.1.5  rtt=6.11ms rc=15(LabelSwitchedWithFecChange) rsc=1
      DS 1: ipaddr=10.10.10.6 ifaddr=10.10.10.6 iftype=ipv4Numbered MRU=1500
          label[1]=131071 protocol=3(LDP)
          fecchange[1]=POP  fectype=BGP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=0.0.0.0 
(Unknown)
          fecchange[2]=PUSH fectype=LDP IPv4 prefix=10.20.1.6 remotepeer=10.10.10.6
4  10.20.1.6  rtt=10.2ms rc=3(EgressRtr) rsc=1 *A:Dut-B#

17.329. mpls-fwd-policy

mpls-fwd-policy

Syntax 
[no] mpls-fwd-policy
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>bgp-evpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bgp-evpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp-evpn>mpls>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure service epipe bgp-evpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy
configure service vpls bgp-evpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy
configure service vprn bgp-evpn mpls auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy
Description 

This command selects the MPLS forwarding policy type.

The mpls-fwd-policy value instructs BGP to use the MPLS forwarding policy to determine the address of the BGP next hop.

The no form of this command removes the selected the MPLS forwarding policy type.

mpls-fwd-policy

Syntax 
[no] mpls-fwd-policy
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>auto-bind-tunnel>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn auto-bind-tunnel resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy
Description 

This command enables setting MPLS forwarding policy for the auto bind tunnel

The mpls-fwd-policy value instructs BGP to use the MPLS forwarding policy tunnel type to resolve the next hop of BGP VPN-IPv4 and VPN-IPv6 prefixes.

mpls-fwd-policy

Syntax 
[no] mpls-fwd-policy
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>static-route-entry>indirect>tunnel-next-hop>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure router static-route-entry indirect tunnel-next-hop resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy
Description 

This command enables the use of the MPLS forwarding policy to resolve the indirect next hops of statically-configured routes.

Default 

no mpls-fwd-policy

mpls-fwd-policy

Syntax 
[no] mpls-fwd-policy
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>next-hop-resolution>shortcut-tunn>family>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>next-hop-resolution>labeled-routes>transport-tunnel>family>resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp next-hop-resolution labeled-routes transport-tunnel family resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy
configure router bgp next-hop-resolution shortcut-tunnel family resolution-filter mpls-fwd-policy
Description 

This command selects MPLS forwarding policy to be used for next-hop resolution.

17.330. mpls-label

mpls-label

Syntax 
mpls-label value
no mpls-label
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>segment-routing>sr-policies>static-policy>segment-list>segment mpls-label)
Full Contexts 
configure router segment-routing sr-policies static-policy segment-list segment mpls-label
Description 

This command configures the MPLS label value this is associated with a segment.

The no form of this command removes the label value.

Default 

no mpls-label

Parameters 
value—
Specifies the MPLS label value.
Values—
0 to 1048575

 

17.331. mpls-labels

mpls-labels

Syntax 
mpls-labels
Context 
[Tree] (config>router mpls-labels)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls-labels
Description 

This command creates a context for the configuration of global parameters related to MPLS labels.

17.332. mpls-time-stamp-format

mpls-time-stamp-format

Syntax 
mpls-time-stamp-format {rfc4379 |unix}
Context 
[Tree] (config>test-oam mpls-time-stamp-format)
Full Contexts 
configure test-oam mpls-time-stamp-format
Description 

This command configures the format of the timestamp used by for lsp-ping, lsp-trace, p2mp-lsp-ping and p2mp-lsp-trace, vccv-ping, vccv-trace, and lsp-trace.

If rfc4379 is selected, then the timestamp is in seconds and microseconds since 1900, otherwise it is in seconds and microseconds since 1970.

Changing this system-wide setting does not affect tests that are currently in progress, but SAAs starts to use the new timestamp when they are restarted. When an SROS receives an echo request, it replies with the locally configured timestamp format, and does not try to match the timestamp format of the incoming echo request message.

Default 

mpls-time-stamp-format unix

Parameters 
rfc4379—
Specifies the RFC 4379 (obsoleted by RFC 8029) time stamp format. The timestamp's seconds field holds the integral number of seconds since 1-Jan-1900 00:00:00 UTC. The timestamp's microseconds field contains a microseconds value in the range 0 to 999999. This setting is used to inter-operate with network elements which are fully compliant with RFC 4379, Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane Failures, (such as an SROS system with the same setting, or any other RFC 4379 compliant router).
unix—
Specifies the Unix time stamp format. The time stamps seconds field holds a Unix time, the integral number of seconds since 1-Jan-1970 00:00:00 UTC. The time stamps microseconds field contains a microseconds value in the range 0 to 999999. This setting is used to inter-operate with network elements which send and expect a 1970-based timestamp in MPLS Echo Request/Reply PDUs (such as an SROS system with the same setting, or an SROS system running software earlier than R8.0 R4).

17.333. mpls-tp

mpls-tp

Syntax 
[no] mpls-tp
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls mpls-tp)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls mpls-tp
Description 

Generic MPLS-TP parameters and MPLS-TP transit paths are configured under this context. If a user configures no mpls, normally the entire mpls configuration is deleted. However, in the case of mpls-tp, a check is made that there is no other mpls-tp configuration (e.g., services or LSPs using mpls-tp on the node). The mpls-tp context cannot be deleted if MPLS-TP LSPs or SDPs exist on the system.

A shutdown of mpls-tp will bring down all MPLS-TP LSPs on the system.

Default 

no mpls-tp

17.334. mpls-tp-mep

mpls-tp-mep

Syntax 
[no] mpls-tp-mep
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>interface mpls-tp-mep)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls interface mpls-tp-mep
Description 

This command enables the context for a section layer MEP for MPLS-TP on an MPLS interface.

17.335. mpls-tp-static

mpls-tp-static

Syntax 
mpls-tp-static
Context 
[Tree] (config>oam-pm>session>mpls>lsp mpls-tp-static)
Full Contexts 
configure oam-pm session mpls lsp mpls-tp-static
Description 

This command enables the context to configure an MPLS TP LSP and its attributes to be tested.

17.336. mrib

mrib

Syntax 
mrib [group grp-ip-address] [source ip-address] [detail]
no mrib
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>pim mrib)
Full Contexts 
debug router pim mrib
Description 

This command enables debugging for PIM MRIB.

The no form of this command disables debugging for PIM MRIB.

Parameters 
grp-ip-address
Debugs information associated with the specified PIM MRIB.
Values—
multicast group address (ipv4, ipv6)

 

ip-address
Debugs information associated with the specified PIM MRIB.
Values—
source address (ipv4, ipv6)

 

detail—
Debugs detailed MRIB information.

17.337. mrinfo

mrinfo

Syntax 
mrinfo {ip-address |dns-name} [router router-instance |service-name service-name]
Context 
[Tree] (global mrinfo)
Full Contexts 
global mrinfo
Description 

This command is used to print relevant multicast information from the target multicast router. Information displayed includes adjacency information, protocol, metrics, thresholds, and flags from the target multicast route.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies the IP address of the multicast-capable target router.
Values—
ipv4 unicast address (a.b.c.d)

 

dns-name—
Specifies the DNS name (if DNS name resolution is configured), up to 63 characters.
router-instance
Specifies the router name or service ID for the router instance.
Values—
router-name: Base
vprn-service-id: 1 to 2147483647

 

Default—
Base
service-name—
Specifies the service name, up to 64 characters.
Output 
Table 101:  Mrinfo Output Fields

Label

Description

General flags

version

Indicates software version on queried router.

prune

Indicates that router understands pruning.

genid

Indicates that router sends generation IDs.

mtrace

Indicates that the router handles mtrace requests.

Neighbors flags

1

Metric

0

Threshold (multicast time-to-live)

pim

PIM enabled on interface.

down

Operational status of interface.

disabled

Administrative status of interface.

leaf

No downstream neighbors on interface.

querier

Interface is IGMP querier.

tunnel

Neighbor reached via tunnel.

Output Sample
A:dut-f# mrinfo 10.1.1.2
 
10.1.1.2  [version 3.0,prune,genid,mtrace]:
  10.1.1.2 -> 10.1.1.1 [1/0/pim]
  10.1.1.3 -> 0.0.0.0 [1/0/pim/down/disabled]
  10.1.1.4 -> 0.0.0.0 [1/0/pim/querier/leaf]
  239.200.200.3 -> 239.200.200.5 [1/0/tunnel/pim]... 

17.338. mrouter-dest

mrouter-dest

Syntax 
[no] mrouter-dest mac-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>igmp-snooping mrouter-dest)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>mld-snooping mrouter-dest)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls igmp-snooping mrouter-dest
configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls mld-snooping mrouter-dest
Description 

This command configures the destination B-MAC address name to be used in the related backbone VPLS to reach a specific IGMP or MLD snooping MRouter. The name is associated at system level with the MAC address, using the command config>service>pbb mac-name.

Parameters 
mac-name—
Specifies the MAC name.
Values—
32 chars max

 

17.339. mrouter-port

mrouter-port

Syntax 
[no] mrouter-port
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bind>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>bind>mld-snooping mrouter-port)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>mld-snooping mrouter-port)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls allow-ip-int-bind igmp-snooping mrouter-port
configure service vpls allow-ip-int-bind mld-snooping mrouter-port
configure service vpls mesh-sdp igmp-snooping mrouter-port
configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping mrouter-port
configure service vpls spoke-sdp igmp-snooping mrouter-port
configure service vpls spoke-sdp mld-snooping mrouter-port
Description 

This command specifies whether a multicast router is attached behind this SAP, SDP, or routed VPLS IP interface.

Configuring these objects as an mrouter-port will have a double effect. Firstly, all multicast traffic received on another SAP, SDP, or routed VPLS IP interface will be copied to this SAP, SDP, or routed VPLS IP interface. Secondly, IGMP/MLD reports generated by the system as a result of a router joining or leaving a multicast group, will be sent to this SAP, SDP, or routed VPLS IP interface.

If two multicast routers exist in the network, one of them will become the active querier. While the other multicast router (non-querier) stops sending IGMP queries, it should still receive reports to keep its multicast trees up-to-date. To support this, the mrouter-port should be enabled on all SAPs, SDPs, or routed VPLS IP interfaces connecting to a multicast router.

Note:

The IGMP version to be used for the reports (v1, v2, or v3) can only be determined after an initial query has been received. Until such time, no reports are sent on the SAP, spoke-SDP, or routed VPLS IP interface, even if mrouter-port is enabled.

If the send-queries command is enabled on this SAP or spoke-SDP, the mrouter-port parameter cannot be set.

When PIM-snooping is enabled within a VPLS service, all IP multicast traffic and PIM messages will be sent to any SAP or SDP binding configured with an IGMP-snooping mrouter port. This occurs even without IGMP-snooping enabled, but is not supported in a BGP-VPLS or M-VPLS service.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

no mrouter-port

mrouter-port

Syntax 
[no] mrouter-port
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>vxlan>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls vxlan igmp-snooping mrouter-port
Description 

This command enables all VXLAN binds to be mrouter ports, indicating that a multicast router is attached behind each VXLAN binding. Configuring these objects as an mrouter-port has two effects. Firstly, all multicast traffic received on another object is copied to each VXLAN binding. Secondly, IGMP reports generated by the system as a result of a router joining or leaving a multicast group is sent to all VXLAN bindings. When PIM snooping for IPv4 is enabled within a VPLS service, all IP multicast traffic and PIM for IPv4 messages are sent to all VXLAN bindings configured with an igmp-snooping mrouter-port. This occurs even without igmp-snooping enabled.

Default 

no mrouter-port

mrouter-port

Syntax 
[no] mrouter-port
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>vxlan>mld-snooping mrouter-port)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls vxlan mld-snooping mrouter-port
Description 

This command enables all VXLAN binds to be mrouter ports, indicating that a multicast router is attached behind each VXLAN binding. Configuring these objects as an mrouter-port has two effects. Firstly, all multicast traffic received on another object is copied to each VXLAN binding. Secondly, MLD reports generated by the system as a result of a router joining or leaving a multicast group is sent to all VXLAN bindings.

Default 

no mrouter-port

mrouter-port

Syntax 
[no] mrouter-port
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sap>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sdp>igmp-snooping mrouter-port)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sap>mld-snooping mrouter-port)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>pbb>bvpls>sdp>mld-snooping mrouter-port)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sap igmp-snooping mrouter-port
configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sap mld-snooping mrouter-port
configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sdp igmp-snooping mrouter-port
configure service vpls pbb backbone-vpls sdp mld-snooping mrouter-port
Description 

This command specifies whether a multicast router is attached behind this SAP or spoke-SDP.

Configuring a SAP or spoke-SDP as an mrouter-port will have a double effect. Firstly, all multicast traffic received on another SAP or spoke-SDP will be copied to this SAP or spoke-SDP. Secondly, IGMP or MLD reports generated by the system as a result of someone joining or leaving a multicast group, will be sent to this SAP or SDP.

If two multicast routers exist in the local area network, one of them will become the active querier. The other multicast router (non-querier) stops sending IGMP or MLD queries, but it should still receive reports to keep its multicast trees up to date. To support this, the mrouter-port should be enabled on all SAPs or spoke-SDPs connecting to a multicast router.

The IGMP version to be used for the reports (v1, v2 or v3) or MLD version (v1 or v2) can only be determined after an initial query has been received. Until such time no reports are sent on the SAP, even if mrouter-port is enabled.

If the send-queries command is enabled on this SAP or spoke-SDP, the mrouter-port parameter cannot be set.

Default 

no mrouter-port

17.340. mrp

mrp

Syntax 
mrp
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls mrp)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap mrp)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp mrp)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp mrp)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mesh-sdp mrp
configure service vpls mrp
configure service vpls sap mrp
configure service vpls spoke-sdp mrp
Description 

This command configures Multiple Registration Protocol (MRP) parameters. MRP is valid only under B-VPLS.

mrp

Syntax 
mrp
Context 
[Tree] (config>service mrp)
Full Contexts 
configure service mrp
Description 

This command configures a Multi-service Route Processor (MRP).

mrp

Syntax 
[no] mrp
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id mrp)
Full Contexts 
debug service id mrp
Description 

This command enables and configures MRP debugging.

17.341. mrp-policy

mrp-policy

Syntax 
mrp-policy policy-name [create]
no mrp-policy policy-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>mrp mrp-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure service mrp mrp-policy
Description 

This command enables the context for a MRP policy. The mrp-policy specifies either a forward or a drop action for the Group B-MAC attributes associated with the ISIDs specified in the match criteria. The mrp-policy can be applied to multiple BVPLS services as long as the scope of the policy is template.

Any changes made to the existing policy, using any of the sub-commands, will be applied immediately to all services where this policy is applied. For this reason, when many changes are required on a mrp-policy, Nokia recommends that the policy be copied to a work area. That work-in-progress policy can be modified until complete and then written over the original mrp-policy. Use the config mrp-policy copy command to maintain policies in this manner.

The no form of this command deletes the mrp-policy. An MRP policy cannot be deleted until it is removed from all the SAPs or SDPs where it is applied.

Default 

no mrp-policy

Parameters 
policy-name—
Specifies the redirect policy name. Allowed values are any string up to 32 characters long composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, etc.), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
create—
This keyword is required when first creating the configuration context. When the context is created, it is possible to navigate into the context without the create keyword.

mrp-policy

Syntax 
mrp-policy policy-name
no mrp-policy
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mrp mrp-policy)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sd>mrp mrp-policy)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>mrp mrp-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mesh-sdp mrp mrp-policy
configure service vpls sap mrp mrp-policy
configure service vpls spoke-sd mrp mrp-policy
Description 

This command instructs MMRP to use the mrp-policy specified in the command to control which Group B-MAC attributes will be declared and registered on the egress SAP/Mesh-SDP/Spoke-SDP. The Group B-MACs will be derived from the ISIDs using the procedure used in the PBB solution. The Group MAC is standard OUI with the last 24 bits being the ISID value. If the policy-name refers to a non-existing mrp-policy the command should return error. Changes to a mrp-policy are allowed and applied to the SAP/SDPs under which the policy is referenced.

Default 

no mrp-policy

Parameters 
policy-name—
Specifies the redirect policy name. Allowed values are any string up to 32 characters long composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

17.342. mrpdu

mrpdu

Syntax 
[no] mrpdu
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>mrp mrpdu)
Full Contexts 
debug service id mrp mrpdu
Description 

This command enables debugging of the MRP PDUs that are received or transmitted.

The no form of this command disables debugging of MRP PDUs.

17.343. mrru

mrru

Syntax 
mrru mrru
no mrru
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>multilink-bundle mrru)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle mrru
Description 

This command specifies the maximum received reconstructed unit (MRRU), similar to a maximum transmission unit (MTU), but applies only to MLPPP multilink bundles. The MRRU is the maximum frame size that can be reconstructed from multilink fragments. This command is only valid for MLPPP bundles.

The no form of this command resets the MRRU to the default.

Default 

mrru 1524

Parameters 
mrru —
Specifies the maximum received reconstructed unit size, in bytes.
Values—
1500 to 9206

 

17.344. mru

mru

Syntax 
mru mru-bytes
no mru
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>pppoe-client-policy mru)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt pppoe-client-policy mru
Description 

This command defines which Maximum Receive Unit (MRU) value is signaled by the PPPoE client.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

mru 1492

Parameters 
mru-bytes—
Specifies the MRU value in octets.
Values—
512 to 9154

 

17.345. msap

msap

Syntax 
[no] msap msap-id
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>ppp msap)
Full Contexts 
debug service id ppp msap
Description 

This command enables debugging for specific PPP MSAPs.

The no form of this command disables debugging.

msap

Syntax 
[no] msap msap-id
Context 
[Tree] (debug>service>id>ppp msap)
Full Contexts 
debug service id ppp msap
Description 

This command enable PPP debug for the specified managed SAP.

Multiple msap filters could be specified in the same debug command.

The no form of this command disables debugging.

Parameters 
msap-id—
Specifies the managed SAP ID.

17.346. msap-defaults

msap-defaults

Syntax 
msap-default
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap msap-defaults)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ipoe>host msap-defaults)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>loc-user-db>ppp>host msap-defaults)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap msap-defaults
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ipoe host msap-defaults
configure subscriber-mgmt local-user-db ppp host msap-defaults
Description 

This command configures MSAP authentication defaults.

17.347. msap-policy

msap-policy

Syntax 
msap-policy msap-policy-name [create]
no msap-policy msap-policy-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt msap-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy
Description 

This command configures a managed SAP policy. Managed SAPs allow the use of policies and a SAP template for the creation of a SAP.

The no form of this command removes the MSAP policy from the configuration.

Parameters 
msap-policy-name—
Specifies the managed SAP policy name, up to 32 characters, composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
create—
Keyword used to create the managed SAP policy. The create keyword requirement can be enabled or disabled in the environment>create context.

17.348. msdp

msdp

Syntax 
[no] msdp
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn msdp)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn msdp
Description 

This command enables a Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) instance. When an MSDP instance is created, the protocol is enabled. To start or suspend execution of the MSDP protocol without affecting the configuration, use the [no] shutdown command.

For the MSDP protocol to function, at least one peer must be configured.

When MSDP is configured and started, an appropriate event message should be generated.

When the no form of this command is executed, all sessions must be terminated and an appropriate event message should be generated.

When all peering sessions are terminated, an event message per peer is not required.

The no form of this command deletes the MSDP protocol instance, removing all associated configuration parameters.

Default 

no msdp

msdp

Syntax 
[no] msdp
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router msdp)
Full Contexts 
debug router msdp
Description 

This command enables debugging for Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP).

The no form of the command disables MSDP debugging.

msdp

Syntax 
[no] msdp
Context 
[Tree] (config>router msdp)
Full Contexts 
configure router msdp
Description 

This command enables a Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) instance. When an MSDP instance is created, the protocol is enabled. To start or suspend execution of the MSDP protocol without affecting the configuration, use the [no] shutdown command.

For the MSDP protocol to function, at least one peer must be configured.

When MSDP is configured and started an appropriate event message should be generated.

When the no form of the command is executed, all sessions must be terminated and an appropriate event message should be generated.

When all peering sessions are terminated, an event message per peer is not required.

The no form of the command deletes the MSDP protocol instance, removing all associated configuration parameters.

Default 

no msdp

17.349. msg

msg

Syntax 
[no] msg
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>pim msg)
Full Contexts 
debug router pim msg
Description 

This command enables debugging for PIM messaging.

The no form of this command disables debugging for PIM messaging.

17.350. msg-pacing

msg-pacing

Syntax 
[no] msg-pacing
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>rsvp msg-pacing)
Full Contexts 
configure router rsvp msg-pacing
Description 

This command enables RSVP message pacing in which the specified number of RSVP messages, specified in the max-burst command, are sent in a configured interval, specified in the period command. A count is kept of the messages that were dropped because the output queue for the interface used for message pacing was full.

Default 

no msg-pacing

17.351. msisdn

msisdn

Syntax 
[no] msisdn
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>acct-plcy>include-radius-attribute msisdn)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>auth-plcy>include-radius-attribute msisdn)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt radius-accounting-policy include-radius-attribute msisdn
configure subscriber-mgmt authentication-policy include-radius-attribute msisdn
Description 

This command enables the inclusion of the MSISDN in AAA protocols as signaled in the incoming GTP setup message.

The no form of this command disables the inclusion of the attribute.

17.352. mss-adjust-group

mss-adjust-group

Syntax 
mss-adjust-group bb-group-id segment-size segment-size
no mss-adjust-group
Context 
[Tree] (config>router mss-adjust-group)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn mss-adjust-group)
Full Contexts 
configure router mss-adjust-group
configure service vprn mss-adjust-group
Description 

This command associates the MSS adjust group consisting of multiple ISAs with the routing context in which the application requiring TCP MSS adjust resides.

Parameters 
bb-group-id—
Specifies the group used for TCP MSS adjust
segment-size—
Specifies the value to put into the TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) option if it is not already present, or if the present value is higher
Values—
160 to 10240

 

17.353. mst-instance

mst-instance

Syntax 
mst-instance mst-inst-number
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>stp mst-instance)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap stp mst-instance
Description 

This command enters the context to configure MSTI related parameters at SAP level. This context can be open only for existing mst-instances defined at the service level (see ).

Parameters 
mst-inst-number—
Specifies an existing Multiple Spanning Tree Instance number
Values—
1 to 4094

 

mst-instance

Syntax 
mst-instance mst-inst-number [create]
no mst-instance [mst-inst-number]
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp mst-instance)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls stp mst-instance
Description 

This command creates the context to configure MST instance (MSTI) related parameters. Up to 16 instances will be supported by MSTP. The instance 0 is mandatory by protocol and therefore, it cannot be created by the CLI. The software will maintain this instance automatically.

Parameters 
mst-inst-number—
Specifies the Multiple Spanning Tree instance
Values—
1 to 4094

 

17.354. mst-max-hops

mst-max-hops

Syntax 
mst-max-hops hops-count
no mst-max-hops
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp mst-max-hops)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls stp mst-max-hops
Description 

This command specifies the number of hops in the region before BPDU is discarded and the information held for the port is aged out. The root bridge of the instance sends a BPDU (or M-record) with remaining-hop-count set to configured <max-hops>. When a bridge receives the BPDU (or M-record), it decrements the received remaining-hop-count by 1 and propagates it in BPDU (or M-record) it generates.

The no form of this command sets the hops-count to its default value.

Default 

mst-max-hops 20

Parameters 
hops-count—
Specifies the maximum number of hops
Values—
1 to 40

 

17.355. mst-name

mst-name

Syntax 
mst-name region-name
no mst-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp mst-name)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls stp mst-name
Description 

This command defines an MST region name. Two bridges are considered as a part of the same MST region as soon as their configuration of the MST region name, the MST-revision and VLAN-to-instance assignment is identical.

The no form of this command removes region-name from the configuration.

Default 

no mst-name

Parameters 
region-name—
Specifies an MST-region name up to 32 characters in length

17.356. mst-path-cost

mst-path-cost

Syntax 
mst-path-cost inst-path-cost
no mst-path-cost
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>stp>mst-instance mst-path-cost)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap stp mst-instance mst-path-cost
Description 

This commands specifies path-cost within a specified instance, expressing probability that a specified port will be put into the forwarding state in case a loop occurs (the highest value expresses lowest priority).

The no form of this command sets port-priority to its default value.

Default 

The path-cost is proportional to link speed.

Parameters 
inst-path-cost—
Specifies the contribution of this port to the MSTI path cost of paths toward the spanning tree regional root which include this port
Values—
1 to 200000000

 

17.357. mst-port-priority

mst-port-priority

Syntax 
mst-port-priority stp-priority
no mst-port-priority
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>stp>mst-instance mst-port-priority)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls sap stp mst-instance mst-port-priority
Description 

This commands specifies the port priority within a specified instance, expressing probability that a specified port will be put into the forwarding state if a loop occurs.

The no form of this command sets port-priority to its default value.

Default 

mst-port-priority 128

Parameters 
stp-priority—
Specifies the value of the port priority field.

17.358. mst-priority

mst-priority

Syntax 
mst-priority bridge-priority
no mst-priority
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp>mst-instance mst-priority)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls stp mst-instance mst-priority
Description 

This command specifies the bridge priority for this specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance for this service. The bridge-priority value reflects likelihood that the switch will be chosen as the regional root switch (65535 represents the least likely). It is used as the highest 4 bits of the Bridge ID included in the MSTP BPDUs generated by this bridge.

The priority can only take on values that are multiples of 4096 (4k). If a value is specified that is not a multiple of 4K, then the value will be replaced by the closest multiple of 4K, which is lower than the value entered.

The no form of this command sets the bridge-priority to its default value.

Default 

mst-priority 32768 — All instances created by the config>service>vpls>stp>mst-instance vlan-range command and not having explicit definition of bridge-priority will inherit default value

Parameters 
bridge-priority—
Specifies the priority of this specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance for this service
Values—
0 to 65535

 

17.359. mst-revision

mst-revision

Syntax 
mst-revision revision-number
no mst-revision
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>stp mst-revision)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls stp mst-revision
Description 

This command defines the MST configuration revision number. Two bridges are considered as a part of the same MST region as soon as their configuration of MST-region name, MST-revision and VLAN-to-instance assignment is identical.

The no form of this command returns MST configuration revision to its default value.

Default 

mst-revision 0

Parameters 
revision-number—
Specifies the MSTP region revision number to define the MSTP region
Values—
0 to 65535

 

17.360. mstat

mstat

Syntax 
mstat source [ip-address |dns-name] group {ip-address |dns-name} [destination ip-address |dns-name] [hop hop] [router router-instance |service-name service-name] [wait-time wait-time]
Context 
[Tree] (global mstat)
Full Contexts 
global mstat
Description 

This command traces a multicast path from a source to a receiver and displays multicast packet rate and loss information.

Parameters 
source ip-address—
Specifies the ip-address of the multicast capable target router.
Values—
ipv4 address (a.b.c.d)

 

dns-name—
Specifies the DNS name (if DNS name resolution is configured), up to 63 characters.
group ip-address
Specifies the multicast address or DNS name of the group that resolves to the multicast group address that will be used. If the group is not specified, address 224.2.0.1 (the MBone audio) is used. This will suffice if packet loss statistics for a particular multicast group are not needed.
destination ip-address
Specifies either the IP address or the DNS name of the unicast destination. If this parameter is omitted the IP address of the system where the command is entered will be used. The receiver parameter can also be used to specify a local interface address as the destination address for sending the trace query. The response is also returned to the address specified as the receiver.
hop—
Specifies the maximum number of hops that will be traced from the receiver back toward the source.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
32 hops (infinity for the DVMRP routing protocol)
router-instance
Specifies the router name or service ID used to identify the router instance.
Values—

router-name:

Base

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

 

Default—
Base
service-name
Specifies the service name up to 64 characters in length.
wait-time
Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the response.
Values—
1 to 60

 

Output 
Table 102:  Mstat Output Fields

Label

Description

hop

The number of hops from the source to the listed router.

router name

The number of the router for this hop or “?” when not reverse DNS translated.

address

The address of the router for this hop.

protocol

The protocol used.

ttl

The forward TTL threshold. TTL that a packet is required to have before it is forwarded over the outgoing interface.

forwarding code

Forwarding information/error code for this hop.

For each interface between two nodes a line is printed, following the same layout as other routers with an implementation derived from mrouted. Consider the following:

  1. The forwarding information/error code is only displayed when different from “No Error”.
  2. “?” means there is no reverse DNS translation.
  3. There is no “Overall Mcast Pkt Rate” available in the PE for the VPRN case.
Output Sample
  Source          Response Dest     Overall       Packet Statistics for Traffic From
10.10.16.9        10.20.1.6        Mcast Pkt       10.10.16.9 to 239.5.6.7
     |         __/  rtt   29 ms      Rate          Lost/Sent = Pct Rate
     v        /                    ---------       --------------------
10.10.16.3
10.10.2.3         ?
     |       ^      ttl   2          1pps             0/0   = --     0 pps
     v       |
10.10.2.1
10.10.1.1         ?
     |       ^      ttl   3          1pps             0/0   = --     0 pps
     v       |
10.10.1.2
10.10.4.2         ?             Reached RP/Core
     |       ^      ttl   4          1pps             0/0   = --     0 pps
     v       |
10.10.4.4
10.10.6.4         ?
     |       ^      ttl   5          1pps             0/0   = --     0 pps
     v       |
10.10.6.5
10.10.10.5        ?
     |       \__    ttl   6          1pps             0/0   = --     0 pps
     v          \
10.10.10.6       10.20.1.6
Receiver         Query Source

17.361. mstat2

mstat2

Syntax 
mstat2 source [ip-address |dns-name |starg] group {ip-address |dns-name} [destination ip-address |dns-name] [hop hop] [router router-instance |service-name vprn-service-name] [wait-time seconds]
Context 
[Tree] (global mstat2)
Full Contexts 
global mstat2
Description 

This command traces a multicast path from a source to a receiver and displays multicast packet rate and loss information.

Parameters 
source ip-address—
Specifies the ip-address of the multicast capable target router.
Values—
ipv4-prefix:
  1. a.b.c.d
ipv6-address:
  1. x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)
  2. x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d
  3. x: [0 to FFFF]H
  4. d: [0 to 255]D

 

dns-name—
Specifies the DNS name (if DNS name resolution is configured), up to 63 characters.
starg—
Specifies a static (*,G) entry. This command can only be enabled if no existing source addresses for this source is specified.
group ip-address
Specifies the multicast address or DNS name of the group that resolves to the multicast group address that will be used. If the group is not specified, address 224.2.0.1 (the MBone audio) is used. This will suffice if packet loss statistics for a particular multicast group are not needed.
Values—
ipv4-prefix:
  1. a.b.c.d
ipv6-address:
  1. x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)
  2. x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d
  3. x: [0 to FFFF]H
  4. d: [0 to 255]D

 

destination ip-address
Specifies either the IP address or the DNS name of the unicast destination. If this parameter is omitted the IP address of the system where the command is entered will be used. The receiver parameter can also be used to specify a local interface address as the destination address for sending the trace query. The response is also returned to the address specified as the receiver.
Values—
ipv4-prefix:
  1. a.b.c.d
ipv6-address:
  1. x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)
  2. x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d
  3. x: [0 to FFFF]H
  4. d: [0 to 255]D

 

hop—
Specifies the maximum number of hops that are traced from the receiver back toward the source.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
32
router-instance
Specifies the router name or service ID used to identify the router instance.
Values—

router-name:

Base

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

 

Default—
Base
vprn-service-name
Specifies the service name, up to 64 characters.
seconds
Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the response.
Values—
1 to 60

 

Default—
3
Output 
Table 103:  Mstat2 Output Fields

Label

Description

hop

Number of hops from the source to the listed router.

router name

Name of the router for this hop or “?” when not reverse DNS translated.

address

Address of the router for this hop.

protocol

Protocol used.

ttl

Forward TTL threshold. TTL that a packet is required to have before it will be forwarded over the outgoing interface.

forwarding code

Forwarding information/error code for this hop.

For each interface between two nodes a line is printed, following the same layout as other routers with an implementation derived from mrouted. Consider the following:

  1. The forwarding information/error code is only displayed when different from “No Error”.
  2. “?” means there is no reverse DNS translation.
  3. There is no “Overall Mcast Pkt Rate” available in the PE for the VPRN case.
Output Sample
*A:Dut-A# mstat2 group 239.225.6.1 source 10.0.1.66
Mtrace2 from 150.0.1.66 via group 225.6.6.1 Querying full reverse path...
Waiting to accumulate statistics...Results after 10 seconds:
 Source        Response Dest    Overall     Packet Statistics For 
Traffic From
10.0.1.66      10.0.0.1         Mcast Pkt    10.10.1.66 To 239.5.6.7
      |       __/  rtt 24.0ms     Rate       Lost/Sent = Pct  Rate
      v      /                    -------     ---------------------
10.0.1.6
10.0.1.6       ?
      |     ^      ttl    2        10 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v     |
10.0.1.4
10.10.4.4       usilhc03-hb2.ndc.lucent.com Reached RP/Core
      |     ^      ttl    3        10 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v     |
10.10.4.2
10.0.1.2       10.1.0.110.ap.yournet.ne.jp
      |      \__   ttl    4        10 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v         \
10.0.1.1       10.0.0.1
   Receiver      Query Source
 
*A:Dut-A# mstat2  group ff05::225:6:6:1 source 3ffe::150:0:1:66
Mtrace2 from source
<S> = 3ffe::150:0:1:66
via group
<G> = ff05::225:6:6:1
Querying full reverse path...
Waiting to accumulate statistics...Results after 10 seconds:
Destination <D> = 3ffe::120:0:1:1
Response Destination <RD> = 3ffe::1
   Source        Response Dest    Overall     Packet Statistics For 
Traffic From
<S>             <RD>            Mcast Pkt    Source <S> To Group <G>
      |       __/  rtt 23.0ms     Rate       Lost/Sent = Pct  Rate
      v      /                    -------     ---------------------
Remote Address ::
Incoming IF 4
3ffe::6 ?
Outgoing IF 3
      |     ^      ttl    2        20 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v     |
Remote Address fe80::a248:1ff:fe01:2
Incoming IF 2
3ffe::5 ? Reached RP/Core
Outgoing IF 3
      |     ^      ttl    3        20 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v     |
Remote Address fe80::a246:1ff:fe01:1
Incoming IF 3
3ffe::3 ?
Outgoing IF 2
      |      \__   ttl    4        30 pps        0/100  =  0%   10 pps
      v         \
<D>             <RD>
   Receiver      Query Source

17.362. mt

mt

Syntax 
mt {ipv4-unicast |ipv4-multicast |ipv6-unicast |ipv6-multicast}
no mt
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bier>template>sub-domain mt)
Full Contexts 
configure router bier template sub-domain mt
Description 

This command specifies the multi-topology for this sub-domain.

The no form of this command removes the multi-topology from this sub-domain.

Parameters 
ipv4-unicast—
Specifies that the sub-domain uses IPv4 unicast topology. IPv4 unicast imports routes into the unicast RTM.
ipv4-multicast—
Specifies that the sub-domain uses IPv4 multicast topology. IPv4 multicast imports routes into the multicast RTM.
ipv6-unicast—
Specifies that the sub-domain uses IPv6 unicast topology. IPv6 unicast imports routes into the unicast RTM.
ipv6-multicast—
Specifies that the sub-domain uses IPv6 multicast topology. IPv6 multicast imports routes into the multicast RTM.

17.363. mtrace

mtrace

Syntax 
mtrace source [ip-address |dns-name] group {ip-address |dns-name} [destination ip-address |dns-name] [hop hop] [router router-instance |service-name service-name] [wait-time wait-time]
Context 
[Tree] (global mtrace)
Full Contexts 
global mtrace
Description 

This command traces a multicast path from a source to a receiver.

Parameters 
source ip-address—
Specifies the ip-address of the multicast capable target router.
Values—
ipv4 address (a.b.c.d)

 

dns-name—
Specifies the DNS name (if DNS name resolution is configured). 63 characters maximum.
group ip-address
Specifies the multicast address or DNS name of the group that resolves to the multicast group address that will be used. If the group is not specified, address 224.2.0.1 (the MBone audio) will be used. This will suffice if packet loss statistics for a particular multicast group are not needed.
destination ip-address
Specifies either the IP address or the DNS name of the unicast destination. If this parameter is omitted the IP address of the system where the command is entered will be used. The receiver parameter can also be used to specify a local interface address as the destination address for sending the trace query. The response will also be returned to the address specified as the receiver.
hop
Specifies the maximum number of hops that will be traced from the receiver back toward the source.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
32 hops (infinity for the DVMRP routing protocol)
router-instance
Specifies the router name or service ID used the identify the router instance.
Values—

router-name:

“Base”

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

 

Default—
Base
service-name
Specifies the service name up, to 64 characters.
wait-time
Specifies the time, in seconds, to wait for the response.
Values—
1 to 60

 

Output 
Table 104:  Mtrace Output Fields 

Label

Description

hop

The number of hops from the source to the listed router.

router name

The name of the router for this hop. If a DNS name query is not successful a “?” displays

address

The address of the router for this hop

protocol

The protocol used

ttl

The forward TTL threshold. TTL that a packet is required to have before it will be forwarded over the outgoing interface.

forwarding code

The forwarding information/error code for this hop

Output Sample
A:Dut-F# mtrace source 10.10.16.9 group 239.5.6.7
 
Mtrace from 10.10.16.9 via group 239.5.6.7
Querying full reverse path...
 
 0 ? (10.10.10.6)
-1 ? (10.10.10.5) PIM thresh^ 1 No Error
-2 ? (10.10.6.4) PIM thresh^ 1 No Error
-3 ? (10.10.4.2) PIM thresh^ 1 Reached RP/Core
-4 ? (10.10.1.1) PIM thresh^ 1 No Error
-5 ? (10.10.2.3) PIM thresh^ 1 No Error
-6 ? (10.10.16.9)
 
Round trip time 29 ms; total ttl of 5 required.

mtrace

Syntax 
[no] mtrace
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router mtrace)
Full Contexts 
debug router mtrace
Description 

This command configures debugging for mtrace.

17.364. mtrace2

mtrace2

Syntax 
mtrace2
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn mtrace2)
[Tree] (config>router mtrace2)
Full Contexts 
configure router mtrace2
configure service vprn mtrace2
Description 

This command traces a multicast path from a source to a receiver.

mtrace2

Syntax 
mtrace2 source [ip-address |dns-name |starg] group {ip-address |dns-name} [destination ip-address |dns-name] [hop hop-count] [router router-instance |service-name service-name] [wait-time wait-time]
Context 
[Tree] (global mtrace2)
Full Contexts 
global mtrace2
Description 

This command traces a multicast path from a source to a receiver.

Parameters 
source ip-address—
Specifies the IP address of the multicast capable target router.
Values—
ipv4-prefix:
  1. a.b.c.d
ipv6-address:
  1. x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)
  2. x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d
  3. x: [0 to FFFF]H
  4. d: [0 to 255]D

 

dns-name—
Specifies the DNS name (if DNS name resolution is configured), up to 63 characters.
starg—
Specifies a static (*,G) entry. This command can only be enabled if no existing source addresses for this source is specified.
group ip-address
Specifies the multicast address or DNS name of the group that resolves to the multicast group address that is used. If the group is not specified, address 224.2.0.1 (the MBone audio) is used. This suffices if packet loss statistics for a particular multicast group are not needed.
Values—
ipv4-prefix:
  1. a.b.c.d
ipv6-address:
  1. x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)
  2. x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d
  3. x: [0 to FFFF]H
  4. d: [0 to 255]D

 

destination ip-address
Specifies either the IP address or the DNS name of the unicast destination. If this parameter is omitted, the IP address of the system where the command is entered is used. The receiver parameter can also be used to specify a local interface address as the destination address for sending the trace query. The response is returned to the address specified as the receiver.
Values—
ipv4-prefix:
  1. a.b.c.d
ipv6-address:
  1. x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)
  2. x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d
  3. x: [0 to FFFF]H
  4. d: [0 to 255]D

 

hop-count
Specifies the maximum number of hops that are traced from the receiver back toward the source.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
32 hops (infinity for the DVMRP routing protocol)
router-instance
Specifies the router name or service ID used the identify the router instance.
Values—

router-name:

“Base”

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

 

Default—
Base
service-name
Specifies the service name, up to 64 characters.
wait-time
Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the response.
Values—
1 to 60

 

Output 
Table 105:  Mtrace2 Output Fields 

Label

Description

hop

The number of hops from the source to the listed router

router name

The name of the router for this hop. If a DNS name query is not successful a “?” displays.

address

The address of the router for this hop

protocol

The protocol used

ttl

The forward TTL threshold. TTL that a packet is required to have before it will be forwarded over the outgoing interface.

forwarding code

The forwarding information/error code for this hop

Output Sample
*A:Dut-A# mtrace2 group 239.225.6.1 source 192.0.1.66
Mtrace2 from 192.0.1.66 via group 239.225.6.1 Querying full reverse path...
   0  1.1.0.110.ap.yournet.ne.jp (110.0.1.1)
  -1  2.1.0.110.ap.yournet.ne.jp (110.0.1.2)  rtg=ospf mrtg=pimSparseMode  thresh^ 1
  No Error
  -2  usilhc03-hb2.ndc.lucent.com(10.10.4.4)rtg=ospf mrtg=pimSparseMode thresh^ 1 Reached RP/ Core
  -3  ? (10.0.1.6)  rtg=local mrtg=pimSparseMode  thresh^ 1  No Error
  -4  ? (10.0.1.66)
Round trip time 23.3 ms; total ttl of 3 required.
 
*A:Dut-A# mtrace2 group ff05::225:2:6:1 source 3ffe::255:0:1:66
Mtrace2 from source
<S> = 3ffe::255:0:1:66
via group
<G> = ff05::225:6:6:1
Querying full reverse path...
   0  ? (3ffe::120:0:1:1)
  -1  ? (3ffe::3)  IIF=3 OIF=2  rtg=ospf mrtg=pimSparseMode thresh^ N/A No Error
  -2  ? (3ffe::5)  IIF=2 OIF=3  rtg=ospf mrtg=pimSparseMode thresh^ N/A Reached RP/
Core
  -3  ? (3ffe::6)  IIF=4 OIF=3  rtg=local mrtg=pimSparseMode thresh^ N/A  No Error
  -4  ? (3ffe::150:0:1:66)
Round trip time 46.5 ms; total ttl of 3 required.

mtrace2

Syntax 
[no] mtrace2
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router mtrace2)
Full Contexts 
debug router mtrace2
Description 

This command configures debugging for mtrace2.

17.365. mtu

mtu

Syntax 
mtu mtu-bytes
no mtu
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>ppp mtu)
[Tree] (config>router>l2tp>group>tunnel>ppp mtu)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>ppp mtu)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>l2tp>group>tunnel>ppp mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure router l2tp group ppp mtu
configure router l2tp group tunnel ppp mtu
configure service vprn l2tp group ppp mtu
configure service vprn l2tp group tunnel ppp mtu
Description 

This command configures the maximum PPP MTU size.

Default 

mtu 1500

Parameters 
mtu-bytes—
Specifies, in bytes, the maximum PPP MTU size.
Values—
512 to 9212

 

mtu

Syntax 
mtu bytes
no mtu
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>router-advert>if mtu)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv mtu)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 mtu)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv mtu)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>router-advert>if mtu)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>ipv6>rtr-adv mtu)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6 mtu)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>ipv6>rtr-adv mtu)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>rtr-adv-plcy mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure router router-advertisement interface mtu
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 mtu
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu
configure service ies subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu
configure service vprn router-advertisement interface mtu
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 mtu
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu
configure service vprn subscriber-interface ipv6 router-advertisements mtu
configure subscriber-mgmt router-advertisement-policy mtu
Description 

This command specifies the value to be placed in link MTU options sent by the router on this interface.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

no mtu — The MTU option is not sent in the router advertisement messages.

Parameters 
bytes—
Specifies the advertised MTU value in bytes for this interface.
Values—
1280 to 9800 (for config>router>router-advert>if and config>service>vprn>router-advert>if contexts only)
1280 to 9212 (for subscriber management context, ies and vprn service subscriber-interface contexts)

 

mtu

Syntax 
mtu mtu-bytes
no mtu
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>pppoe-client-policy mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt pppoe-client-policy mtu
Description 

This command defines which Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) is applied, by default, for packets egressing the PPP link. If a lower MRU is sent during PPP link establishment, the MRU value is used.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

mtu 1492

Parameters 
mtu-bytes—
Specifies the MTU value in octets.
Values—
512 to 9154

 

mtu

Syntax 
mtu mtu-bytes
no mtu
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet mtu)
[Tree] (config>port>sonet-sdh>path mtu)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group mtu)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>ds3 mtu)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group mtu)
[Tree] (config>port>tdm>e3 mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure port ethernet mtu
configure port sonet-sdh path mtu
configure port tdm ds1 channel-group mtu
configure port tdm ds3 mtu
configure port tdm e1 channel-group mtu
configure port tdm e3 mtu
Description 

This command configures the maximum payload MTU size for an Ethernet port, PPP-enabled port or sub-port and Frame Relay-enabled port or subport. The Ethernet port level MTU parameter indirectly defines the largest physical packet the port can transmit or the far-end Ethernet port can receive. Packets that cannot be fragmented at egress and exceed the MTU are discarded.

The value specified for the MTU includes the destination MAC address, source MAC address, the Ethertype or Length field and the complete Ethernet payload. The MTU value does not include the preamble, start of frame delimiter or the trailing CRC.

PoS channels use the MTU to define the largest PPP payload a PoS frame may contain. A significant difference between SONET/SDH PoS channel and Ethernet physical MTU values the overhead considered part of the framing method and the overhead considered to be part of the application using the frame. In Ethernet, the preamble, start of frame delimiter and the CRC are considered part of the framing overhead and not part of the frame payload. For a PoS channel, the HDLC framing overhead is not included in the physical MTU; only the PPP and PPP payload are included. If the port mode or encapsulation type is changed, the MTU assumes the default values of the new mode or encapsulation type.

The no form of this command restores the default values.

Default 

The default MTU value depends on the (sub-)port type, mode and encapsulation and are listed in Table 106:

Table 106:  Default MTU Values

Type

Mode

Encap Type

Default (Bytes)

10/100, Gig, or 10GigE

Access

null

1514

10/100, Gig, or 10GigE

Access

dot1q

1518

10/100, Gig, or 10GigE

Access

q-in-q

1522

SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

mpls

1506

SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

bcp-null

1518

SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

bcp-dot1q

1522

SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

ipcp

1502

SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

frame-relay

1578

ATM, SONET/SDH or TDM

Access

atm

1524

10/100 or 100FX Ethernet

Network

null

1514

10/100 or 100FX Ethernet

Network

dot1q

1518

SONET/SDH

Network

ppp-auto

1524

Parameters 
mtu-bytes —
Sets the maximum allowable size of the MTU, expressed as an integer.
Values—

512 to 9212

config>port>ethernet

512 to 9800

config>port>ethernet (for FP4-based connector ports)

512 to 9208

config>port>sonet-sdh>path

512 to 9208

config>port>tdm>ds1>channel-group

512 to 9208

config>port>tdm>ds3

512 to 9208

config>port>tdm>e1>channel-group

512 to 9208

config>port>tdm>e3

 

mtu

Syntax 
mtu mtu-bytes
no mtu
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf>area>if mtu)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3>area>if mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn ospf area interface mtu
configure service vprn ospf3 area interface mtu
Description 

This command configures the OSPF packet size used on this interface. If this parameter is not configured, OSPF derives the MTU value from the MTU configured (default or explicitly) in the following contexts:

config>port>ethernet, config>port>sonet-sdh>path, config>port>tdm>t3-e3, config>port>tdm>t1-e1>channel-group

If this parameter is configured, the smaller value between the value configured here and the MTU configured (default or explicitly) in an above-mentioned contexts is used.

To determine the actual packet size, add 14 bytes for an Ethernet packet and 18 bytes for a tagged Ethernet packet to the size of the OSPF (IP) packet MTU configured in this command.

The no form of this command reverts to default value derived from the MTU configured in the config>port context.

Default 

no mtu

Parameters 
mtu-bytes—
Specifies the MTU to be used by OSPF for this logical interface, in bytes.
Values—
512 to 9786

 

mtu

Syntax 
mtu value
no mtu
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>nat>outside mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn nat outside mtu
Description 

This command configures the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) for downstream traffic flowing through this router (as outside NAT router). The system fragments IP datagrams exceeding the MTU.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default 

no mtu

Parameters 
value
Specifies the MTU for downstream traffic.
Values—
512 to 9000

 

mtu

Syntax 
mtu mtu-size
no mtu
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>nat>outside mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure router nat outside mtu
Description 

This command configures the MTU for downstream traffic flowing through this router (as outside NAT router). The system fragments IP datagrams exceeding the MTU.

Default 

no mtu

Parameters 
mtu-size—
Specifies the MTU for downstream traffic.
Values—
512 to 9000

 

mtu

Syntax 
mtu mtu
no mtu
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ipfix>export-policy>collector mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure service ipfix ipfix-export-policy collector mtu
Description 

This command sets the MTU size of the UDP packet containing IPFIX records destined for the collector node. Multiple records will be stuffed into a single IP packet until stuffing an additional data record would exceed MTU or the internal timer of 250 ms expires.

Default 

mtu 1500

Parameters 
mtu—
Specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit range.
Values—
512 to 9212

 

mtu

Syntax 
mtu mtu-size
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>nat>syslog>syslog-export-policy mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure service nat syslog syslog-export-policy mtu
Description 

The command defines the MTU, the maximum size of the IP frame that can be transmitted. The size of the frame includes the syslog message and the IP header. This is an IP-MTU value.

When aggregation is enabled (the max-tx-delay command), generation of a syslog frame carrying multiple flow logs is triggered by one of the two events (whichever occurs first):

  1. Expiry of the max-tx-delay timer
  2. Exceeding MTU size
Default 

mtu 1500

Parameters 
mtu-size—
Specifies the MTU size in bytes.
Values—
512 to 9000

 

mtu

Syntax 
mtu mtu-size
no mtu
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>nat>map-domain mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure service nat map-domain mtu
Description 

This command configures the IPv6 MTU in a MAP domain. The configured MTU applies to traffic in the downstream direction, towards the CE. The configured MTU value must be lower than the MTU of the outgoing port for the traffic, which includes L2 overhead.

Default 

mtu 8686

Parameters 
mtu-size—
Specifies the IPMTU size of the translated IPv6 packet.
Values—
160 to 8686

 

mtu

Syntax 
mtu bytes
no mtu
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ospf>area>interface mtu)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3>area>interface mtu)
Full Contexts 
configure router ospf area interface mtu
configure router ospf3 area interface mtu
Description 

This command configures the OSPF packet size used on this interface. If this parameter is not configured OSPF derives the MTU value from the MTU configured (default or explicitly) in the following contexts:

  1. config>port>ethernet
  2. config>port>sonet-sdh>path
  3. config>port>tdm>t3-e3
  4. config>port>tdm>t1-e1>channel-group

If this parameter is configured, the smaller value between the value configured here and the MTU configured (default or explicitly) in an above-mentioned context is used.

To determine the actual packet size, add 14 bytes for an Ethernet packet and 18 bytes for a tagged Ethernet packet to the size of the OSPF (IP) packet MTU configured in this command.

The no form of this command reverts to the default derived from the MTU configured in the config>port context.

Default 

no mtu

Parameters 
bytes—
Specifies the MTU to be used by OSPF for this logical interface in bytes.
Values—
512 to 9786 in the config>router>ospf>area>interface context.
1280 to 9786 in the config>router>ospf3>area>interface context.

 

17.366. mtu-over-head

mtu-over-head

Syntax 
mtu-over-head mtu-value
no mtu-over-head
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim mtu-over-head)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn pim mtu-over-head
Description 

This commands subtracts the specified value from the MVPN MTU to allow a BIER header to be added without exceeding the network MTU.

Default 

no mtu-over-head

Parameters 
mtu-value
Specifies the value subtracted from the MVPN MTU.
Values—
44, 76, 140, 268, 536

 

17.367. multi-access

multi-access

Syntax 
[no] multi-access
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>access multi-access)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>ranges>range>vrgw>lanext>access multi-access)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext access multi-access
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw vlan-tag-ranges range vrgw lanext access multi-access
Description 

This command enables access from multiple APs into a per-tenant BD and the associated vRGW (BRG) instance.

The no form of this command disables access from multiple APs and limits access from a single AP into per tenant bridge domain (BD) and the associated vRGW (BRG) instance.

17.368. multi-active

multi-active

Syntax 
[no] multi-active
Context 
[Tree] (config>isa>tunnel-grp multi-active)
Full Contexts 
configure isa tunnel-group multi-active
Description 

This command enables configuring multiple active MS-ISA in the tunnel-group. IPsec traffic will be load balanced to configured active MS-ISAs.

Operational notes:

  1. A shutdown of group and removal of all existing configured tunnels of the tunnel-group are needed before provisioning command “multi-active”.
  2. If the tunnel-group is admin-up with “multi-active” configured then the configuration of “primary” and “backup” are not allowed.
  3. The active-mda-number must be =< total number of ISA configured.
    1. If active-mda-number is less than total number of ISA configured then the delta number of ISA will become backup ISA.
Default 

no multi-active

17.369. multi-chassis

multi-chassis

Syntax 
multi-chassis
Context 
[Tree] (config>redundancy multi-chassis)
Full Contexts 
configure redundancy multi-chassis
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multi-chassis parameters.

17.370. multi-chassis-redundancy

multi-chassis-redundancy

Syntax 
multi-chassis-redundancy seconds
no multi-chassis-redundancy
Context 
[Tree] (config>python>py-pol>cache>minimum-lifetimes multi-chassis-redundancy)
Full Contexts 
configure python python-policy cache minimum-lifetimes multi-chassis-redundancy
Description 

This command specifies the minimum lifetime for a cache entry to be synchronized with the MCS peer.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the multi-chassis redundancy time in second.
Values—
1 to 600

 

17.371. multi-homing

multi-homing

Syntax 
multi-homing single-active [no-esi-label]
multi-homing all-active
no multi-homing
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>system>bgp-evpn>ethernet-segment multi-homing)
Full Contexts 
configure service system bgp-evpn ethernet-segment multi-homing
Description 

This command configures the multi-homing mode for the Ethernet-Segment as single-active or all-active multi-homing, as defined in RFC7432.

By default, the use of esi-label is enabled for all-active and single-active as defined in RFC7432 (for single-active multi-homing, the esi-label is used to avoid transient loops).

When single-active no-esi-label is specified, the system will not allocate a label for the esi and hence advertise esi label 0 to peers. Even if the esi is configured to not send the esi-label, upon reception of an esi-label from a peer, the PE will always send traffic to that peer using the received esi-label.

Default 

no multi-homing

Parameters 
single-active—
Configures single-active mode for the Ethernet-Segment.
all-active—
Configures the system to not send an esi-label for single-active mode.
no-esi-label—
Configures single-active mode for the Ethernet-Segment.

17.372. multi-instance

multi-instance

Syntax 
[no] multi-instance
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ospf multi-instance)
Full Contexts 
configure router ospf multi-instance
Description 

This command enables OSPF multi-instance RFC 6549, OSPFv2 Multi-Instance Extensions, support in the BASE router. This support is enabled per instance and allows flexibility when migrating a particular instance from classic OSPFv2 to a multi-instance OSPFv2.

The no form of the command reverts to the default.

Default 

no multi-instance

17.373. multi-path

multi-path

Syntax 
multi-path
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp multi-path)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn bgp multi-path
Description 

This command configures ECMP multipath parameters to apply to address families that support BGP multipath.

multi-path

Syntax 
multi-path
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp multi-path)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp multi-path
Description 

This command configures ECMP multipath parameters to apply to address families that support BGP multipath.

17.374. multi-service-site

multi-service-site

Syntax 
[no] multi-service-site customer-site-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap multi-service-site)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap multi-service-site)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap multi-service-site)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface sap multi-service-site
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap multi-service-site
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap multi-service-site
Description 

This command creates a new customer site or edits an existing customer site with the customer-site-name parameter. A customer site is an anchor point to create an ingress and egress virtual scheduler hierarchy. When a site is created, it must be assigned to a chassis slot or port. When scheduler policies are defined for ingress and egress, the scheduler names contained in each policy are created according to the parameters defined in the policy. Multi-service customer sites exist for the sole purpose of creating a virtual scheduler hierarchy and making it available to queues on multiple Service Access Points (SAPs).

The scheduler policy association with the customer site normally prevents the scheduler policy from being deleted until after the scheduler policy is removed from the customer site. The multi-service-site object generates a log message indicating that the association was deleted due to scheduler policy removal.

When the multi-service customer site is created, an ingress and egress scheduler policy association does not exist. This does not prevent the site from being assigned to a chassis slot or prevent service SAP assignment. After the site has been created, the ingress and egress scheduler policy associations can be assigned or removed at any time.

The no form of this command removes the value from the configuration.

Default 

n/a — Each customer site must be explicitly created.

Parameters 
customer-site-name—
Each customer site must have a unique name within the context of the customer. If customer-site-name already exists for the customer ID, the CLI context changes to that site name for the purpose of editing the site scheduler policies or assignment. Any modifications made to an existing site affects all SAPs associated with the site. Changing a scheduler policy association may cause new schedulers to be created and existing policers and queues on the SAPs to no longer be orphaned. Existing schedulers on the site may cease to exist, causing policers and queues relying on that scheduler to be orphaned.

If the customer-site-name does not exist, it is assumed that an attempt is being made to create a site of that name in the customer ID context. The success of the command execution depends on the following:

The maximum number of customer sites defined for the chassis slot has not been met.

The customer-site-name is valid.

The create keyword is included in the command line syntax (if the system requires it).

When the maximum number of customer sites has been exceeded a configuration error occurs, the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

If the customer-site-name is invalid, a syntax error occurs, the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

Values—
Valid names consist of any string, up to 32 characters, composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters excluding double quotes. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

 

multi-service-site

Syntax 
multi-service-site customer-site-name
no multi-service-site
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sap multi-service-site)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap multi-service-site)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap multi-service-site)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies sap multi-service-site
configure service vpls sap multi-service-site
configure service vprn interface sap multi-service-site
Description 

This command associates the SAP with a customer-site-name. If the specified customer-site-name does not exist in the context of the service customer ID an error occurs and the command is not executed. If customer-site-name exists, the current and future defined queues on the SAP (ingress and egress) attempts to use the scheduler hierarchies created within customer-site-name as parent schedulers.

This command is mutually exclusive with the SAP ingress and egress scheduler policy commands. If a scheduler policy has been applied to either the ingress or egress nodes on the SAP, the multi-service-site command fails without executing. The locally applied scheduler policies must be removed prior to executing the multi-service-site command.

The no form of this command removes the SAP from any multi-service customer site the SAP belongs to. Removing the site can cause existing or future policers and queues to enter an orphaned state.

Parameters 
customer-site-name—
Specifies an existing customer site name, up to 32 characters. If the customer-site-name exists and local scheduler policies have not been applied to the SAP, the current and future policers queues defined on the SAP looks for their parent schedulers within the scheduler hierarchies defined in the customer-site-name.

multi-service-site

Syntax 
multi-service-site customer-site-name
no multi-service-site customer-site-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap multi-service-site)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn interface sap multi-service-site
Description 

This command creates a new customer site or edits an existing customer site with the customer-site-name parameter. A customer site is an anchor point to create an ingress and egress virtual scheduler hierarchy. When a site is created, it must be assigned to a chassis slot or port on the 7750 SR. When scheduler policies are defined for ingress and egress, the scheduler names contained in each policy are created according to the parameters defined in the policy. Multi-service customer sites exist for the sole purpose of creating a virtual scheduler hierarchy and making it available to queues on multiple Service Access Points (SAPs).

The scheduler policy association with the customer site normally prevents the scheduler policy from being deleted until after the scheduler policy is removed from the customer site. The multi-service-site object will generate a log message indicating that the association was deleted due to scheduler policy removal.

When the multi-service customer site is created, an ingress and egress scheduler policy association does not exist. This does not prevent the site from being assigned to a chassis slot or prevent service SAP assignment. After the site has been created, the ingress and egress scheduler policy associations can be assigned or removed at any time.

Parameters 
customer-site-name—
Each customer site must have a unique name within the context of the customer. If customer-site-name already exists for the customer ID, the CLI context changes to that site name for the purpose of editing the site scheduler policies or assignment. Any modifications made to an existing site will affect all SAPs associated with the site. Changing a scheduler policy association may cause new schedulers to be created and existing policers and queues on the SAPs to no longer be orphaned. Existing schedulers on the site may cease to exist, causing policers and queues relying on that scheduler to be orphaned.

If the customer-site-name does not exist, it is assumed that an attempt is being made to create a site of that name in the customer ID context. The success of the command execution depends on the following:

  1. The maximum number of customer sites defined for the chassis slot has not been met.
  2. The customer-site-name is valid.
  3. The create keyword is included in the command line syntax (if the system requires it).

When the maximum number of customer sites has been exceeded a configuration error occurs; the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

If the customer-site-name is invalid, a syntax error occurs; the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

Values—
Valid names consist of any string up to 32 characters composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed between double quotes.

 

multi-service-site

Syntax 
multi-service-site customer-site-name
no multi-service-site
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>apipe>sap multi-service-site)
[Tree] (config>service>cpipe>sap multi-service-site)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap multi-service-site)
[Tree] (config>service>fpipe>sap multi-service-site)
[Tree] (config>service>ipipe>sap multi-service-site)
Full Contexts 
configure service apipe sap multi-service-site
configure service cpipe sap multi-service-site
configure service epipe sap multi-service-site
configure service fpipe sap multi-service-site
configure service ipipe sap multi-service-site
Description 

This command associates the SAP with a customer-site-name. If the specified customer-site-name does not exist in the context of the service customer ID an error occurs and the command will not execute. If customer-site-name exists, the current and future defined queues on the SAP (ingress and egress) will attempt to use the scheduler hierarchies created within customer-site-name as parent schedulers.

The no form of this command removes the SAP from any multi-service customer site the SAP belongs to. Removing the site can cause existing or future queues to enter an orphaned state.

Parameters 
customer-site-name—
The customer-site-name must exist in the context of the customer-id defined as the service owner. If customer-site-name exists and local scheduler policies have not been applied to the SAP, the current and future queues defined on the SAP will look for their parent schedulers within the scheduler hierarchies defined on customer-site-name.
Values—
Any valid customer-site-name created within the context of the customer-id.

 

multi-service-site

Syntax 
multi-service-site customer-site-name [create]
no multi-service-site customer-site-name
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>cust multi-service-site)
Full Contexts 
configure service customer multi-service-site
Description 

This command creates a new customer site or edits an existing customer site with the customer-site-name parameter. A customer site is an anchor point to create an ingress and egress virtual scheduler hierarchy. When a site is created, it must be assigned to a chassis slot or port. When scheduler policies are defined for ingress and egress, the scheduler names contained in each policy are created according to the parameters defined in the policy. Multi-service customer sites exist for the sole purpose of creating a virtual scheduler hierarchy and making it available to queues on multiple Service Access Points (SAPs).

The scheduler policy association with the customer site normally prevents the scheduler policy from being deleted until after the scheduler policy is removed from the customer site. The multi-service-site object will generate a log message indicating that the association was deleted due to scheduler policy removal.

When the multi-service customer site is created, an ingress and egress scheduler policy association does not exist. This does not prevent the site from being assigned to a chassis slot or prevent service SAP assignment. After the site has been created, the ingress and egress scheduler policy associations can be assigned or removed at any time.

Parameters 
customer-site-name—
Specifies the customer site name. Each customer site must have a unique name within the context of the customer. If customer-site-name already exists for the customer ID, the CLI context changes to that site name for the purpose of editing the site scheduler policies or assignment. Any modifications made to an existing site will affect all SAPs associated with the site. Changing a scheduler policy association may cause new schedulers to be created and existing policers and queues on the SAPs to no longer be orphaned. Existing schedulers on the site may cease to exist, causing policers and queues relying on that scheduler to be orphaned.

If the customer-site-name does not exist, it is assumed that an attempt is being made to create a site of that name in the customer ID context. The success of the command execution depends on the following:

  1. The maximum number of customer sites defined for the chassis has not been met.
  2. The customer-site-name is valid.
  3. The create keyword is included in the command line syntax (if the system requires).

When the maximum number of customer sites has been exceeded a configuration error occurs; the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

If the customer-site-name is invalid, a syntax error occurs; the command will not execute and the CLI context will not change.

Values—
Valid names consist of any string up to 32 characters long composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

 

17.375. multi-session-id

multi-session-id

Syntax 
[no] multi-session-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>aaa>isa-radius-plcy>acct-include-attributes multi-session-id)
Full Contexts 
configure aaa isa-radius-policy acct-include-attributes multi-session-id
Description 

This command enables the inclusion of the multi-session-id attributes.

The no form of the command excludes the multi-session-id attributes.

Default 

no multi-session-id

17.376. multi-sub-sap

multi-sub-sap

Syntax 
multi-sub-sap [subscriber limit]
no multi-sub-sap
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap
Description 

This command defines the maximum number of subscribers (dynamic + static) that can be simultaneously active on an MSAP.

If the limit is reached, a new host is denied access and the corresponding DHCP ACK is dropped.

The no form of this command reverts back to the default setting.

Default 

multi-sub-sap 1

Parameters 
limit—
Specifies the maximum number of subscribers allowed.
Note:

The operational maximum value may be smaller due to equipped hardware dependencies.

Values—
1 to 131071

 

multi-sub-sap

Syntax 
multi-sub-sap subscriber-limit
no multi-sub-sap
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap
configure service vpls sap sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap sub-sla-mgmt multi-sub-sap
Description 

This command defines the maximum number of subscribers (dynamic and static) that can be simultaneously active on this SAP.

If the limit is reached, a new host is denied access and the corresponding DHCP ACK is dropped.

The no form of this command reverts back to the default setting.

Parameters 
subscriber-limit—
Specifies the maximum number of subscribers allowed for this SAP. The operational maximum value may be smaller than the configured value due to equipped hardware dependencies.
Values—
2 to 131071

 

17.377. multi-topology

multi-topology

Syntax 
[no] multi-topology
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis multi-topology)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn isis multi-topology
Description 

This command enables IS-IS multi-topology support.

The no form of this command disables IS-IS multi-topology.

Default 

no multi-topology

multi-topology

Syntax 
[no] multi-topology
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>isis multi-topology)
Full Contexts 
configure router isis multi-topology
Description 

This command enables IS-IS multi-topology support.

Default 

no multi-topology

17.378. multi-tunnel-type

multi-tunnel-type

Syntax 
[no] multi-tunnel-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>mobility multi-tunnel-type)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>wlan-gw>mobility multi-tunnel-type)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw mobility multi-tunnel-type
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface wlan-gw mobility multi-tunnel-type
Description 

This command enables terminating multiple types of tunnels.

The no form of this command disables terminating multiple types of tunnels.

no multi-tunnel-type

17.379. multicast

multicast

Syntax 
multicast
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>bonding-parameters multicast)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>bonding-parameters multicast)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface bonding-parameters multicast
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface bonding-parameters multicast
Description 

This command enables the context to configure multicast in a bonding environment.

multicast

Syntax 
multicast [key-id key-id] [version version]
no multicast
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>time>ntp multicast)
Full Contexts 
configure system time ntp multicast
Description 

This command configures NTP the node to transmit multicast packets on the CPM/CCM MGMT port. Broadcast and multicast messages can easily be spoofed; authentication is strongly recommended.

The no form of this command removes the multicast address from the configuration.

Parameters 
key-id
Specifies the configured authentication key and authentication type used by this version to transmit NTP packets. If this command is omitted from the configuration, packets are sent unencrypted.
Values—
1 to 255

 

Default—
None
version
Specifies the NTP version number that is generated by this node. This parameter does not need to be configured when in client mode in which case all three versions are accepted.
Values—
2 to 4

 

Default—
4

17.380. multicast-fast-failover

multicast-fast-failover

Syntax 
[no] multicast-fast-failover
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>pim multicast-fast-failover)
Full Contexts 
configure router pim multicast-fast-failover
Description 

This command configures the option to enable Multicast-Only Fast Reroute (MoFRR) functionality for IPv4 PIM-SSM interfaces in the global routing table instance.

The no form of this command disables MoFRR for IPv4 PIM-SSM interfaces.

Default 

no multicast-fast-failover

17.381. multicast-import

multicast-import

Syntax 
[no] multicast-import
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>isis multicast-import)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn isis multicast-import
Description 

This command enables ISIS to submit routes into the multicast Route Table Manager (RTM).

The no form of this command disables the submission of routes into the multicast RTM.

Default 

no multicast-import

multicast-import

Syntax 
[no] multicast-import
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf multicast-import)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>ospf3 multicast-import)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn ospf multicast-import
configure service vprn ospf3 multicast-import
Description 

This command enables the submission of routes into the multicast Route Table Manager (RTM) by OSPF.

The no form of this command disables the submission of routes into the multicast RTM.

Default 

no multicast-import

multicast-import

Syntax 
[no] multicast-import [{both |ipv4 |ipv6}]
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>isis multicast-import)
Full Contexts 
configure router isis multicast-import
Description 

This command enables the submission of routes into the multicast Route Table Manager (RTM) by IS-IS.

The no form of this command disables the submission of routes into the multicast RTM.

Default 

no multicast-import

Parameters 
both—
Allows submission of both IPv4 and IPv6 routes.
ipv4—
Allows submission of IPv4 routes only.
ipv6—
Allows submission of IPv6 routes only.

multicast-import

Syntax 
[no] multicast-import
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ospf multicast-import)
[Tree] (config>router>ospf3 multicast-import)
Full Contexts 
configure router ospf multicast-import
configure router ospf3 multicast-import
Description 

This command enables the submission of routes into the multicast Route Table Manager (RTM) by OSPF.

The no form of this command disables the submission of routes into the multicast RTM.

Default 

no multicast-import

17.382. multicast-info-policy

multicast-info-policy

Syntax 
multicast-info-policy policy-name [create]
no multicast-info-policy
Context 
[Tree] (config>mcast-management multicast-info-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure mcast-management multicast-info-policy
Description 

This command configures a multicast information policy. Multicast information policies are used to manage parameters associated with Layer 2 and Layer 3 multicast records. Multiple features use the configured information within the policy. The multicast ingress path manager uses the policy to decide the inactive and active state behavior for each multicast record using the ingress paths to the switch fabric. The system’s multicast ECMP join decisions are influenced by the channel information contained within the policy.

Multicast Bundles:

A multicast information policy consists of one or multiple named bundles. Multicast streams are mapped to a bundle based on matching the destination address of the multicast stream to configured channel ranges defined within the bundles. Each policy has a bundle named ‘default’ that is used when a destination address does not fall within any of the configured channel ranges.

Each bundle has a set of default parameters used as the starting point for multicast channels matching the bundle. The default parameters may be overridden by optional exception parameters defined under each channel range. Further optional parameter overrides are possible under explicit source address contexts within each channel range.

Default Multicast Information Policy

A multicast information policy always exists with the name ‘default’ and cannot be edited or deleted. The following parameters are contained in the default multicast information policy:

Policy Description:

Default policy, cannot be edited or deleted.

Bundle:

default

Bundle Description:

Default Bundle, cannot be edited or deleted.

Congestion-Priority-Threshold:

4

ECMP-Optimization-Limit-Threshold:

7

Bundle Defaults:

Administrative Bandwidth:

0 (undefined)

Preference:

0

CAC-Type:

Optional

Bandwidth Activity:

Dynamic with no black-hole rate

Explicit Ingress SF Path:

None (undefined)

Configured Channel Ranges:

None

The default multicast information policy is applied to all VPLS and VPRN services and all routing contexts until an explicitly defined multicast information policy has been mapped.

Explicit Multicast Information Policy Associations

Each VPLS service and each routing context (including VPRN routing contexts) supports an explicit association with an pre-existing multicast information policy. The policy may need to be unique per service or routing context since that each context has its own multicast address space. The same multicast channels may be and most likely be used for completely different multicast streams and applications in each forwarding context.

Interaction with Ingress Multicast Path Management

When ingress multicast path management is enabled on an MDA, the system automatically creates a bandwidth manager context that manages the multicast path bandwidth into the switch fabric used by the ingress ports on the MDA. As routing or snooping protocols generate Layer 2 or Layer 3 multicast FIB records that are populated on the MDA’s forwarding plane, they are processed though the multicast information policy that is associated with the service or routing context associated with the record. The policy returns the following information for the record to be used by the ingress bandwidth manager:

  1. The records administrative bandwidth (0 if undefined)
  2. Preference level (0 to 7 with 7 being highest)
  3. Bandwidth activity monitoring setting (use admin bw or dynamic monitoring) If admin bw is indicated, also returns active and inactive thresholds
  4. Initial switch fabric multicast path (primary or secondary)
  5. Explicit switch fabric multicast path (primary, secondary, or none)

Interaction with Multicast ECMP Optimization

The multicast information policy is used by the multicast ECMP optimization function to derive each channels administrative bandwidth. The ECMP function tallies all bandwidth information for channels joined and attempts to equalize the load between the various paths to the sender. The multicast information policy returns the following information to the ECMP path manager:

  1. Administrative bandwidth (0 if undefined)
  2. Preference (0 to 7 with 7 the highest preference value)
Default 

multicast-info-policy “default”

Parameters 
policy-name—
Identifies the name of the policy to be either created or edited. Each multicast information policy must be uniquely named within the system. Names of up to 32 ASCII characters are supported with the normal character restrictions.
create—
The create keyword is required if creating a new multicast information policy when the system is configured to require the explicit use of the keyword to prevent accidental object creation. Objects may be accidentally created when this protection is disabled and an object name is mistyped when attempting to edit the object. This keyword is not required when the protection is disabled. The keyword is ignored when the multicast information policy name already exists.

multicast-info-policy

Syntax 
multicast-info-policy policy-name
no multicast-info-policy
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies multicast-info-policy)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls multicast-info-policy)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn multicast-info-policy)
[Tree] (config>router multicast-info-policy)
Full Contexts 
configure router multicast-info-policy
configure service ies multicast-info-policy
configure service vpls multicast-info-policy
configure service vprn multicast-info-policy
Description 

This command overrides the default multicast information policy on a service or routing context. When the policy association is changed, all multicast channels in the service or routing context must be reevaluated.

If a multicast information policy is not explicitly associated with the service or routing context, the default multicast information policy is used when ingress multicast path management is enabled.

While a multicast information policy is associated with a service or routing context, the policy cannot be deleted from the system.

The no form of the command removes an explicit multicast information policy from the service or routing context and restores the default multicast information policy.

Parameters 
policy-name—
Specifies the policy name, up to 32 characters. The policy-name parameter is required and specifies an existing multicast information policy that should be associated with the service or routing context.

17.383. multicast-leave-sync-propagation

multicast-leave-sync-propagation

Syntax 
multicast-leave-sync-propagation time
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>system>bgp-evpn multicast-leave-sync-propagation)
Full Contexts 
configure service system bgp-evpn multicast-leave-sync-propagation
Description 

This command configures the additional amount of time that the system waits before removing a multicast state that was synchronized in an Ethernet Segment via Multicast Join or Leave Synch routes. This value represents a delta corresponding to the time it takes for a BGP advertisement to propagate to ES peers.

The node triggering the route computes the maximum response time as the product of the locally configured values, Last Member Query Count and Last Member Query Interval (this value is taken from the config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping>last-member-query-interval or config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>igmp-snooping>last-member-query-interval commands depending on the Ethernet Segment being used), and adds the delta value to the Maximum Response Time. Increasing the Maximum Response Time by this value can help minimize the churn of removing and recreating the state on the node.

The maximum response time value should be configured consistently in all ES peers. For example, in a scenario where a maximum response time of five seconds is advertised by PE-A and there is a delay of four seconds in the BGP propagation to PE-B, the timer could already expire on PE-A while PE-B is still in LMQ time and can still receive joins (which would recreate state in A after a join synch route from B). To minimize this situation, adding an extra delta timer on PE-A, reduces the potential churn of PE-A removing and recreating the state.

Default 

multicast-leave-sync-propagation 5

Parameters 
time—
Specifies the multicast leave sync propagation delay time, in seconds.
Values—
0 to 300

 

Default—
5

17.384. multicast-lsp

multicast-lsp

Syntax 
multicast-lsp lsp-name
no multicast-lsp
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>sdp>class-forwarding multicast-lsp)
Full Contexts 
configure service sdp class-forwarding multicast-lsp
Description 

This command specifies the RSVP or static LSP in this SDP to use to forward VPLS multicast and broadcast packets. The LSP name must exist and must have been associated with this SDP using the command config>service>sdp>lsp. In the absence of an explicit configuration by the user, the default LSP is used.

Default 

no multicast-lsp — traffic mapped to default-lsp name

Parameters 
lsp-name—
Specifies the RSVP or static LSP to use.

17.385. multicast-network-domain

multicast-network-domain

Syntax 
multicast-network-domain multicast-network-domain
no multicast-network-domain
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if multicast-network-domain)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies interface multicast-network-domain
Description 

This command is used to enable efficient multicast replication over a spoke SDP. Multicast traffic is copied to only a subset of network interfaces that may be used as egress for a spoke SDP. A network domain is defined by associating multiple interfaces to a logical group that may participate in multicast replication for a spoke SDP.

The no form of command disables efficient multicast replication to a network domain for a spoke SDP and traffic is replicated to all forwarding complexes.

Default 

no multicast-network-domain

17.386. multicast-policer

multicast-policer

Syntax 
multicast-policer policer-id [fp-redirect-group]
no multicast-policer
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>fc multicast-policer)
Full Contexts 
configure qos sap-ingress fc multicast-policer
Description 

Within a sap-ingress QoS policy forwarding class context, the multicast-policer command is used to map packets that match the forwarding class and are considered multicast in nature to the specified policer-id. The specified policer-id must already exist within the sap-ingress QoS policy. While the system is determining the forwarding class of a packet, it is also looking up its forwarding destination based on the ingress service type and the service instance forwarding records. Two basic types of services support multicast packets: routed services (IES and VPRN) and L2 multipoint services (VPLS, I-VPLS, and B-VPLS). For the routed service types, a multicast packet is destined to an IPv4 or IPv6 multicast address. For the L2 multipoint services, a multicast packet is a packet destined to a multicast MAC address (multicast bit set in the destination MAC address but not the ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff broadcast address). The VPLS services also support two other multipoint forwarding types (broadcast and unknown), which are considered separate from the multicast forwarding type.

If ingress forwarding logic has resolved a packet to the multicast forwarding type within the forwarding class, it will be mapped to either an ingress multipoint queue (using the multicast queue-id or multicast queue-id group ingress-queue-group commands) or an ingress policer (multicast-policer policer-id). The multicast and multicast-policer commands within the forwarding class context are mutually exclusive. By default, the multicast forwarding type is mapped to the SAP ingress default multipoint queue. If the multicast-policer policer-id command is executed, any previous policer mapping or queue mapping for the multicast forwarding type within the forwarding class is overridden if the policer mapping is successful.

A policer defined within the sap-ingress policy is not actually created on an ingress SAP or a subscriber using an sla-profile where the policy is applied until at least one forwarding type (unicast, broadcast, unknown, or multicast) from one of the forwarding classes is mapped to the policer. If insufficient policer resources exist to create the policer for a SAP or subscriber or multiservice site, or ingress policing is not supported on the port associated with the SAP or subscriber or multiservice site, the initial forwarding class forwarding type mapping will fail.

The multicast-policer command is ignored for instances of the policer applied to SAPs subscribers or multiservice site where broadcast packets are not supported.

When the multicast forwarding type within a forwarding class is mapped to a policer, the multicast packets classified to the subclasses within the forwarding class are also mapped to the policer.

The no form of this command is used to restore the mapping of the multicast forwarding type within the forwarding class to the default multipoint queue. If all forwarding class forwarding types had been removed from the default multipoint queue, the queue will not exist on the SAPs subscribers or multiservice site associated with the QoS policy, and the no multicast-policer command will cause the system to attempt to create the default multipoint queue on each object. If the system cannot create the queue on each instance, the no multicast-policer command will fail and the multicast forwarding type within the forwarding class will continue its mapping to the existing policer-id. If the no multicast-policer command results in a policer without any current mappings, the policer will be removed from the SAPs and subscribers associated with the QoS policy. All statistics associated with the policer on each SAP and subscriber will be lost.

Parameters 
policer-id—
When the forwarding class multicast-policer command is executed, a valid policer-id must be specified. The parameter policer-id references a policer-id that has already been created within the sap-ingress QoS policy.
Values—
1 to 63

 

fp-redirect-group—
Redirects a forwarding class to a forwarding plane queue-group as specified in a SAP QoS policy.

17.387. multicast-queue

multicast-queue

Syntax 
multicast-queue queue-id [group queue-group-name]
no multicast-queue
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>sap-ingress>fc multicast-queue)
Full Contexts 
configure qos sap-ingress fc multicast-queue
Description 

This command overrides the default multicast forwarding type queue mapping for fc fc-name. The specified queue-id must exist within the policy as a multipoint queue before the mapping can be made. When the forwarding class mapping is executed, all multicast traffic on a SAP using this policy is forwarded using the queue-id.

The multicast forwarding type includes the unknown unicast forwarding type and the broadcast forwarding type unless each is explicitly defined to a different multipoint queue. When the unknown and broadcast forwarding types are left as default, they will track the defined queue for the multicast forwarding type.

The no form of this command sets the multicast forwarding type queue-id back to the default queue for the forwarding class. If the broadcast and unknown forwarding types were not explicitly defined to a multipoint queue, they will also be set back to the default multipoint queue (queue 11).

Parameters 
queue-id—
The queue-id parameter specified must be an existing, multipoint queue defined in the config>qos>sap-ingress context.
Values—
Any valid multipoint queue-ID in the policy including 2 through 32.

 

Default—
11
group queue-group-name
This optional parameter is used to redirect the forwarding type within the forwarding class to the specified queue-id within the queue-group-name. When the policy is applied, all packets matching the forwarding class and forwarding type will be redirected to the queue within the specified queue group. The queue-group-name are configured in the config>qos>queue-group-templates egress and ingress contexts.

multicast-queue

Syntax 
multicast-queue queue-id
no multicast-queue
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>network-queue>fc multicast-queue)
Full Contexts 
configure qos network-queue fc multicast-queue
Description 

This command overrides the default multicast forwarding type queue mapping for fc fc-name. The specified queue-id must exist within the policy as a multipoint queue before the mapping can be made. When the forwarding class mapping is executed, all multicast traffic using this policy is forwarded using the queue-id.

The multicast forwarding type includes the unknown unicast forwarding type and the broadcast forwarding type, unless each is explicitly defined to a different multipoint queue. When the unknown and broadcast forwarding types are left as default, they will track the defined queue for the multicast forwarding type.

The no form of this command sets the multicast forwarding type queue-id back to the default queue for the forwarding class. If the broadcast and unknown forwarding types were not explicitly defined to a multipoint queue, they will also be set back to the default multipoint queue (queue 11).

Resource Utilization

When a multipoint queue is created and at least one forwarding class is mapped to the queue using the multipoint-queue command, a single ingress multipoint hardware queue is created per instance of the applied network-queue policy, using the queue-policy command at the ingress network FP level. Multipoint queues are not created at egress and the multipoint queues defined in the network-queue policy are ignored when the policy is applied to an egress port.

Parameters 
queue-id—
Specifies any valid multipoint queue-ID in the policy. The queue-id parameter specified must be an existing, multipoint queue defined in the config>qos>network-queue>queue context.
Values—
1 to 16

 

Default—
11

multicast-queue

Syntax 
multicast-queue queue-id
Context 
[Tree] (config>qos>shared-queue>fc multicast-queue)
Full Contexts 
configure qos shared-queue fc multicast-queue
Description 

This command configures the multicast forwarding type queue mapping for fc fc-name. The specified queue-id must exist within the policy as a multipoint queue before the mapping can be made. When the forwarding class mapping is executed, all multicast traffic on a SAP using this policy is forwarded using the queue-id.

The multicast forwarding type includes the unknown unicast forwarding type and the broadcast forwarding type unless each is explicitly defined to a different multipoint queue. When the unknown and broadcast forwarding types are left as default, they will track the defined queue for the multicast forwarding type.

The no form of this command sets the multicast forwarding type queue-id back to the default queue for the forwarding class. If the broadcast and unknown forwarding types were not explicitly defined to a multipoint queue, they will also be set back to the default multipoint queue (queue 11).

Parameters 
queue-id—
The queue-id parameter specified must be an existing, multipoint queue defined in the config>qos>sap-ingress context policer-output-queues profile. For the 7950 XRS, this is not configurable in the policer-output-queues profile.
Values—
9 to 16

 

Default—
11

17.388. multicast-redirection

multicast-redirection

Syntax 
multicast-redirection [fwd-service service-id] ip-int-name
no multicast-redirection
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>action multicast-redirection)
Full Contexts 
configure router policy-options policy-statement entry action multicast-redirection
Description 

This command configures the interface where to redirect IGMP multicast traffic to.

multicast-redirection

Syntax 
multicast-redirection [fwd-service service-id] ip-int-name
no multicast-redirection
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>default-action multicast-redirection)
Full Contexts 
configure router policy-options policy-statement default-action multicast-redirection
Description 

This command enables a redirection under a filtering policy. The filtering policy in this case becomes a redirection policy and it is defined under the router>policy-option hierarchy.

After the redirection policy is applied to the subscriber, all IGMP messages will be processed per subscriber host before they get redirected to the referenced interface (and possibly service). However, multicast traffic will not be replicated directly per subscriber host but instead it will be forwarded on the interface that is referenced in the redirection policy. The redirected interface must have IGMP enabled.

Currently all traffic is redirected and there is no ability to selectively redirect multicast traffic based on match conditions (such as, multicast-groups, source IP address of IGMP messages). Multicast redirection is supported between VPRN services and also between interfaces within the Global Routing Context. Multicast redirection is not supported between the VPRN services and the Global Routing Context. Multicast redirection is supported in the wholesale/retail VPRN context.

Note:

Redirecting from a VPRN instance to the GRT is not supported. Redirecting from a VPRN to a different VPRN is supported and redirecting from an IES to another IES is also supported.

Default 

no multicast-redirection

Parameters 
fwd-service service-id
Specifies the service to which traffic should be redirected. This option is applied only in the VPRN context. It is possible to redirect the multicast group into another service instance routing interface.
ip-int-name—
specifies the alternate interface to which IGMP messages are redirected.

17.389. multicast-senders

multicast-senders

Syntax 
multicast-senders {auto |always |never}
no multicast-senders
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>pim>if multicast-senders)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn pim interface multicast-senders
Description 

This command configures the way subnet matching is done for incoming data packets on this interface. An IP multicast sender is an user entity to be authenticated in a receiving host.

Parameters 
auto—
Subnet matching is automatically performed for incoming data packets on this interface.
always—
Subnet matching is always performed for incoming data packets on this interface.
never—
Subnet matching is never performed for incoming data packets on this interface.

multicast-senders

Syntax 
multicast-senders {auto |always |never}
no multicast-senders
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>pim>interface multicast-senders)
Full Contexts 
configure router pim interface multicast-senders
Description 

This command configures how traffic from directly-attached multicast sources should be treated on broadcast interfaces. It can also be used to treat all traffic received on an interface as traffic coming from a directly-attached multicast source. This is particularly useful if a multicast source is connected to a point-to-point or unnumbered interface.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

multicast-senders auto

Parameters 
auto—
Specifies that, on broadcast interfaces, the forwarding plane performs subnet-match check on multicast packets received on the interface to determine if the packet is from a directly-attached source. On unnumbered/point-to-point interfaces, all traffic is implicitly treated as coming from a remote source.
always—
Treats all traffic received on the interface as coming from a directly-attached multicast source.
never—
Specifies that, on broadcast interfaces, traffic from directly-attached multicast sources will not be forwarded; however, traffic from a remote source will still be forwarded if there is a multicast state for it. On unnumbered/point-to-point interfaces, it means that all traffic received on that interface must not be forwarded.

17.390. multicast-service

multicast-service

Syntax 
multicast-service service-id
no multicast-service
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>ies>video-interface multicast-service)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>video-interface multicast-service)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>video-interface multicast-service)
Full Contexts 
configure service ies video-interface multicast-service
configure service vpls video-interface multicast-service
configure service vprn video-interface multicast-service
Description 

This command adds a multicast service association to the video interface. This parameter is not required on the video interface when the service carries both unicast and multicast traffic.

When multicast and unicast are carried in separate service instances, the operator can set this parameter on the unicast video interface to form an association with the multicast service when replies need to be sent in the multicast service instance.

When multicast and unicast are carried in separate services when a downstream device (such as a DSLAM) can perform a service cross connect between the services and performs multicast replication.

The no form of the command removes the multicast service association.

Default 

none

Parameters 
service-id—
The service ID of the associated multicast service.
Values—

service-id:

1 to 2147483647

svc-name:

64 characters maximum

 

17.391. multicast6-fast-failover

multicast6-fast-failover

Syntax 
[no] multicast6-fast-failover
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>pim multicast6-fast-failover)
Full Contexts 
configure router pim multicast6-fast-failover
Description 

This command enables Multicast-Only Fast Reroute (MoFRR) functionality for IPv6 PIM-SSM interfaces in the global routing table instance.

The no form of this command disables MoFRR for IPv6 PIM-SSM interfaces.

Default 

no multicast6-fast-failover

17.392. multicastclient

multicastclient

Syntax 
multicastclient [authenticate]
no multicastclient
Context 
[Tree] (config>system>time>ntp multicastclient)
Full Contexts 
configure system time ntp multicastclient
Description 

This command configures the node to receive multicast NTP messages on the CPM MGMT port. If multicastclient is not configured, received NTP multicast traffic will be ignored. Use the show command to view the state of the configuration.

The no construct of this message removes the multicast client for the specified interface from the configuration.

Parameters 
authenticate—
Specifies to make authentication a requirement (optional). If authentication is required, the authentication key-id received must have been configured in the authentication-key command, and that key-id type and key value must also match.

17.393. multiclass

multiclass

Syntax 
multiclass count
no multiclass
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ml-bundle>mlpp multiclass)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle mlppp multiclass
Description 

This command enables multi-class MLPPP as defined by RFC 2686, The Multi-Class Extension to Multi-Link PPP, on a MLPPP bundle (including MLPPP bundle protection groups) with 2, 3 or 4 classes. For multiclass MLPPP bundles with a non-zero count, the class index takes valid values from 0 to one less than the maximum number of classes inclusive. For example a 4-class MLPPP bundle has 4 classes with indexes 0, 1, 2, and 3. A bundle must be shutdown with no links for this value to be changed.

Entries are created and deleted by the system depending on the number of classes being used by a given MLPPP bundle.

The no form of this command disables multi-class MLPPP.

Default 

multiclass 4

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the number of classes in a MLPPP bundle.
Values—
2 to 4

 

17.394. multihop

multihop

Syntax 
multihop ttl-value
no multihop
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>bgp-prng-plcy multihop)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt bgp-peering-policy multihop
Description 

This command configures the time to live (TTL) value entered in the IP header of packets sent to an EBGP peer multiple hops away.

This parameter is meaningful only when configuring EBGP peers. It is ignored if set for an IBGP peer.

The no form of this command is used to convey to the BGP instance that the EBGP peers are directly connected.

The no form of this command reverts to default values.

Default 

multihop 1 (EBGP peers are directly connected)

multihop 64 (IBGP)

Parameters 
ttl-value—
Specifies the TTL value, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

multihop

Syntax 
multihop ttl-value
no multihop
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp multihop)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group multihop)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group>neighbor multihop)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn bgp group multihop
configure service vprn bgp group neighbor multihop
configure service vprn bgp multihop
Description 

This command configures the time to live (TTL) value entered in the IP header of packets sent to an EBGP peer multiple hops away.

This parameter is meaningful only when configuring EBGP peers. It is ignored if set for an IBGP peer.

The no form of this command is used to convey to the BGP instance that the EBGP peers are directly connected.

The no form of this command reverts to default values.

Default 

multihop 1 (EBGP peers are directly connected)

multihop 64 (IBGP)

Parameters 
ttl-value—
Specifies the TTL value, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

multihop

Syntax 
multihop ttl-value
no multihop
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp multihop)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group multihop)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor multihop)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp group multihop
configure router bgp group neighbor multihop
configure router bgp multihop
Description 

This command configures the time to live (TTL) value entered in the IP header of packets sent to an EBGP peer multiple hops away.

The no form of this command is used to convey to the BGP instance that the EBGP peers are directly connected.

The no form of this command used at the global level reverts to default.

The no form of this command used at the group level reverts to the value defined at the global level.

The no form of this command used at the neighbor level reverts to the value defined at the group level.

Default 

multihop 1 — EBGP peers are directly connected.

multihop 64 — IBGP

Parameters 
ttl-value—
Specifies the TTL value, expressed as a decimal integer.
Values—
1 to 255

 

17.395. multilink-bundle

multilink-bundle

Syntax 
[no] multilink-bundle
Context 
[Tree] (config>port multilink-bundle)
Full Contexts 
configure port multilink-bundle
Description 

This command creates the context to configure bundle properties for this bundle port.

17.396. multipath-eligible

multipath-eligible

Syntax 
[no] multipath-eligible
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>group multipath-eligible)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>bgp>neighbor multipath-eligible)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn bgp group multipath-eligible
configure service vprn bgp neighbor multipath-eligible
Description 

This command specifies that a BGP neighbor or the set of BGP neighbors in a peer group should be part of a selective multipath set. Selective multipaths are only supported by the ipv4, label-ipv4, ipv6, and label-ipv6 address families.

If no candidate multipath route for an IP prefix came from a multipath-eligible peer then multipaths are selected without further constraints.

If the best route for an IP prefix is received from a neighbor marked as multipath-eligible, then other routes for the same prefix are not eligible to be used as multipaths unless they also came from peers marked as multipath-eligible.

If the best route for an IP prefix did not come from a multipath-eligible peer but there is at least one candidate multipath route for the same prefix from a multipath-eligible peer then multipath is not used.

The no form of this command marks a neighbor or group as non-multipath eligible. The effect of this depends on whether other neighbors and groups are marked as multipath eligible.

Default 

no multipath-eligible

multipath-eligible

Syntax 
[no] multipath-eligible
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group multipath-eligible)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor multipath-eligible)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp group multipath-eligible
configure router bgp group neighbor multipath-eligible
Description 

This command specifies that a BGP neighbor or the set of BGP neighbors in a peer group should be part of a selective multipath set. Selective multipaths are only supported by the ipv4, label-ipv4, ipv6, and label-ipv6 address families.

If no candidate multipath route for an IP prefix came from a multipath-eligible peer then multipaths are selected without further constraints.

If the best route for an IP prefix is received from a neighbor marked as multipath-eligible, then other routes for the same prefix are not eligible to be used as multipaths unless they also came from peers marked as multipath-eligible.

If the best route for an IP prefix did not come from a multipath-eligible peer but there is at least one candidate multipath route for the same prefix from a multipath-eligible peer then multipath is not used.

The no form of this command marks a neighbor or group as non-multipath eligible. The effect of this depends on whether other neighbors and groups are marked as multipath eligible.

Default 

no multipath-eligible

17.397. multiple-option

multiple-option

Syntax 
multiple-option {true |false}
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>ingr-ip>entry>match multiple-option)
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>cat-map>category>exh-lvl>egr-ip>entry>match multiple-option)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level egress-ip-filter-entries entry match multiple-option
configure subscriber-mgmt category-map category exhausted-credit-service-level ingress-ip-filter-entries entry match multiple-option
Description 

This command configures the multiple-option match condition.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
true —
Enables checking the number of IP options in the IP header.
false—
Disables checking the number of IP options in the IP header.

multiple-option

Syntax 
multiple-option {true |false}
no multiple-option
Context 
[Tree] (config>filter>ip-filter>entry>match multiple-option)
Full Contexts 
configure filter ip-filter entry match multiple-option
Description 

This command configures matching packets that contain one or more than one option fields in the IP header as an IP filter match criterion.

The no form of the command removes the checking of the number of option fields in the IP header as a match criterion.

Default 

no multiple-option

Parameters 
­true—
Specifies matching on IP packets that contain more than one option field in the header.
false—
Specifies matching on IP packets that do not contain multiple option fields present in the header.

multiple-option

Syntax 
multiple-option {true |false}
no multiple-option
Context 
[Tree] (config>sys>sec>cpm>ip-filter>entry>match multiple-option)
Full Contexts 
config sys sec cpm ip-filter entry match multiple-option
Description 

This command configures matching packets that contain more than one option fields in the IP header as an IP filter match criterion.

The no form of this command removes the checking of the number of option fields in the IP header as a match criterion.

Default 

no multiple-option

Parameters 
­true—
Specifies matching on IP packets that contain more than one option field in the header.
false—
Specifies matching on IP packets that do not contain multiple option fields present in the header.

17.398. multiplier

multiplier

Syntax 
multiplier [multiplier]
no multiplier
Context 
[Tree] (config>lag>bfd>family multiplier)
Full Contexts 
configure lag bfd family multiplier
Description 

This command specifies the detect multiplier used for a micro-BFD session over the associated LAG links. If a BFD control packet is not received for a period of multiplier X receive-interval then the session is declared down.

The no form of this command removes multiplier from the configuration.

Default 

multiplier 3

Parameters 
multiplier—
Specifies the multiplier value.
Values—
3 to 20

 

multiplier

Syntax 
multiplier multiplier-value
no multiplier
Context 
[Tree] (config>port>ethernet>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>lag>eth-cfm-mep>csf-enable multiplier)
Full Contexts 
configure lag eth-cfm-mep csf-enable multiplier
configure port ethernet eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
Description 

This command configures the multiplier used for timing out the CSF.

Parameters 
multiplier-value—
Specifies the multiplier used for timing out CSF.
Values—
0.0, 2.0 to 30.0

 

Default—
3.5

multiplier

Syntax 
multiplier multiplier-value
no multiplier
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>sap>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>epipe>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>ies>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm>mep multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mesh-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>if>spoke-sdp>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>sub-if>grp-if>sap>eth-cfm>mep>csf-enable multiplier)
Full Contexts 
configure service epipe sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
configure service epipe spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
configure service ies interface sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
configure service ies interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm csf-enable multiplier
configure service ies subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep multiplier
configure service vpls mesh-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
configure service vpls sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
configure service vpls spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
configure service vprn interface sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
configure service vprn interface spoke-sdp eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
configure service vprn subscriber-interface group-interface sap eth-cfm mep csf-enable multiplier
Description 

This command configures the multiplication factor applied to the receive time that is used to clear the CSF condition.

The no form of this command disables the multiplier used for timing out CSF.

Default 

multiplier 3.5

Parameters 
multiplier-value—
Specifies the multiplication factor applied to the receive time that is used to clear the CSF condition. This value can only be configured in increments of 0.5. Configuring a value of 0.0 means that the CSF condition is cleared only when C-DCI is received.
Values—
0.0, 2.0 to 30.0

 

multiplier

Syntax 
multiplier multiplier
no multiplier
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bfd>bfd-template multiplier)
Full Contexts 
configure router bfd bfd-template multiplier
Description 

This command specifies the detect multiplier for a BFD session. If a BFD control packet is not received for a period of multiplier x receive-interval (the parameter value of the receive-interval command), the session is declared down.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

multiplier 3

Parameters 
multiplier—
Specifies the multiplier.
Values—
3 to 20

 

Default—
3

17.399. multipliers

multipliers

Syntax 
multipliers sample-multiplier num1 adjust-multiplier num2
no multipliers
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp>auto-bandwidth multipliers)
[Tree] (config>router>mpls>lsp-template>auto-bandwidth multipliers)
Full Contexts 
configure router mpls lsp auto-bandwidth multipliers
configure router mpls lsp-template auto-bandwidth multipliers
Description 

This command configures the sample-multiplier and adjust-multiplier applicable to one particular LSP.

The sample-multiplier configures the number of collection intervals between measurements of the number of bytes that have been transmitted on the LSP. The byte counts include the layer 2 encapsulation of MPLS packets and represent traffic of all forwarding classes and priorities (in-profile vs, out-of-profile) belonging to the LSP. The router calculates the average data rate in each sample interval. The maximum of this average data rate over multiple sample intervals is the measured bandwidth input to the auto-bandwidth adjustment algorithms.

The adjust-multiplier is the number of collection intervals between periodic evaluations by the ingress LER about whether to adjust the LSP bandwidth. The router keeps track of the maximum average data rate of each LSP since the last reset of the adjust-count.

The adjust-multiplier is not allowed to be set to a value less than the sample-multiplier. It is recommended that the adjust-multiplier be a multiple of the sample-multiplier.

The no form of this command instructs the system to take the value from the auto-bandwidth-multipliers command.

Default 

no multipliers

Parameters 
number1 —
Specifies the number of collection intervals in a sample interval.
Values—
1 to 511

 

number2 —
Specifies the number of collection intervals in an adjust interval.
Values—
1 to 16383

 

17.400. multistream-spmsi

multistream-spmsi

Syntax 
multistream-spmsi index [create]
no multistream-spmsi index
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn>mvpn>pt>selective multistream-spmsi)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn mvpn provider-tunnel selective multistream-spmsi
Description 

This command creates a multi-stream S-PMSI policy. Having multiple multi-stream S-PMSIs per MVPN creates a link list, in which the first match (lowest index) will be chosen for a multicast stream. The number of configured multi-stream S-PMSIs cannot exceed the configured maximum S-PMSI for a given MVPN.

Parameters 
index—
Specifies the index number.
Values—
1 to 1024

 

17.401. mvpn

mvpn

Syntax 
mvpn
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vprn mvpn)
Full Contexts 
configure service vprn mvpn
Description 

This command enters the context to configure MVPN-related parameters for the IP VPN.

mvpn

Syntax 
[no] mvpn
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ldp>import-pmsi-routes mvpn)
Full Contexts 
configure router ldp import-pmsi-routes mvpn
Description 

This command specifies that the SR OS is to cache inter-as MVPN PMSI AD routes for option B.

The no form of this command disables caching of MVPN PMSI AD routes. The default is disabled, however when an upgrade from a software load that does not supports this command is performed, this command will be enabled after the upgrade.

This command is not enabled if the user is using an older config file.

Default 

no mvpn

mvpn

Syntax 
[no] mvpn
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>gtm mvpn)
Full Contexts 
configure router gtm mvpn
Description 

This command enables and disables the context to configure MVPN-related parameters.

17.402. mvpn-ipv4

mvpn-ipv4

Syntax 
mvpn-ipv4 send send-limit receive [none]
mvpn-ipv4 send send-limit
no mvpn-ipv4
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>add-paths mvpn-ipv4)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>add-paths mvpn-ipv4)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>add-paths mvpn-ipv4)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp add-paths mvpn-ipv4
configure router bgp group add-paths mvpn-ipv4
configure router bgp group neighbor add-paths mvpn-ipv4
Description 

This command configures the add-paths capability for multicast VPN IPv4 routes. By default, add-paths is not enabled for multicast VPN IPv4 routes.

The maximum number of multicast VPN paths per IPv4 prefix to send is the configured send-limit, which is a mandatory parameter. The capability to receive multiple multicast paths per prefix from a peer is configurable using the receive keyword, which is optional. If the receive keyword is not included in the command, receive capability is enabled by default. The none option disables the receive capability.

The no form of this command disables add-paths support for multicast VPN IPv4 routes, causing sessions established using add-paths for multicast VPN IPv4 to go down and come back up without the add-paths capability.

Default 

no mvpn-ipv4

Parameters 
send-limit—
Specifies the maximum number of paths per multicast VPN IPv4 prefix that are allowed to be advertised to add-paths peers. The actual number of advertised routes may be less. If the value is none, the router does not negotiate the send capability with respect to multicast VPN IPv4 AFI/SAFI.
Default—
1 to 16, none
receive—
Specifies that the router negotiates to receive multiple multicast VPN routes per IPv4 prefix.
none—
Specifies that the router does not negotiate to receive multiple multicast VPN routes per IPv4 prefix.

17.403. mvpn-ipv6

mvpn-ipv6

Syntax 
mvpn-ipv6 send send-limit receive [none]
mvpn-ipv6 send send-limit
no mvpn-ipv6
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>add-paths mvpn-ipv6)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>add-paths mvpn-ipv6)
[Tree] (config>router>bgp>group>neighbor>add-paths mvpn-ipv6)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp add-paths mvpn-ipv6
configure router bgp group add-paths mvpn-ipv6
configure router bgp group neighbor add-paths mvpn-ipv6
Description 

This command configures the add-paths capability for multicast VPN IPv6 routes. By default, add-paths is not enabled for multicast VPN IPv6 routes.

The maximum number of multicast VPN paths per IPv6 prefix to send is the configured send-limit, which is a mandatory parameter. The capability to receive multiple multicast VPN paths per prefix from a peer is configurable using the receive keyword, which is optional. If the receive keyword is not included in the command, receive capability is enabled by default. The none option disables the receive capability.

The no form of this command disables add-paths support for multicast VPN IPv6 routes, causing sessions established using add-paths for multicast VPN IPv6 to go down and come back up without the add-paths capability.

Default 

no mvpn-ipv6

Parameters 
send-limit—
Specifies the maximum number of paths per multicast VPN IPv6 prefix that are allowed to be advertised to add-paths peers. The actual number of advertised routes may be less. If the value is none, the router does not negotiate the send capability with respect to multicast VPN IPv6 AFI/SAFI.
receive—
Specifies that the router negotiates to receive multiple multicast VPN routes per IPv6 prefix.
none—
Specifies that the router does not negotiate to receive multiple multicast VPN routes per IPv6 prefix.

17.404. mvpn-no-export

mvpn-no-export

Syntax 
[no] mvpn-no-export
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>ldp>import-pmsi-routes mvpn-no-export)
Full Contexts 
configure router ldp import-pmsi-routes mvpn-no-export
Description 

This command specifies that the SR OS is to cache intra-as MVPN PMSI AD routes for option B.

The no form of this command disables caching of intra-as MVPN PMSI AD routes. The default is disabled, however when an upgrade from a software load that does not supports this command is performed, this command will be enabled after the upgrade.

This command is enabled if the user is using an older config file.

Default 

no mvpn-no-export

17.405. mvpn-rtcache

mvpn-rtcache

Syntax 
mvpn-rtcache [group grp-ip-address] [peer ip-address]
no mvpn-rtcache
Context 
[Tree] (debug>router>pim mvpn-rtcache)
Full Contexts 
debug router pim mvpn-rtcache
Description 

This command enables debugging for the PIM MVPN route cache.

The no form of this command disables debugging for the PIM MVPN route cache.

Parameters 
grp-ip-address
Debugs information associated with the specified group.
Values—
multicast group address (ipv4, ipv6) or zero

 

peer-ip-address
Debugs information associated with the specified peer.
Values—
peer address (ipv4, ipv6)

 

17.406. mvpn-type

mvpn-type

Syntax 
mvpn-type {1 |2 |3 |4 |5 |6 |7}
no mvpn-type
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>policy-options>policy-statement>entry>from mvpn-type)
Full Contexts 
configure router policy-options policy-statement entry from mvpn-type
Description 

This command allows match on ng-MVPN BGP route type when the policy is used for VRF-import/VRF-export/BGP global export policy. The policy will only be applied to multicast routes.

The no form of this command disables mvpn-type in the policy evaluation.

Default 

no mvpn-type

Parameters 
1 |2 |3 |4 |5 |6 |7 —
BGP MVPN route-type as per RFC 6514.

17.407. mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new

mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new

Syntax 
[no] mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new
Context 
[Tree] (config>router>bgp mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new)
Full Contexts 
configure router bgp mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new
Description 

When enabled, the type/subtype in advertised routes is encoded as 0x010b.

The no form of this command (the default) encodes the type/subtype as 0x010a (to preserve backwards compatibility).

Default 

no mvpn-vrf-import-subtype-new

17.408. mvr

mvr

Syntax 
mvr
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>igmp-snooping mvr)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mld-snooping mvr)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>igmp-snooping mvr)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mld-snooping mvr)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls igmp-snooping mvr
configure service vpls mld-snooping mvr
configure service vpls sap igmp-snooping mvr
configure service vpls sap mld-snooping mvr
Description 

This command enables the context to configure Multicast VPLS Registration (MVR) parameters.

mvr

Syntax 
mvr
Context 
[Tree] (config>subscr-mgmt>msap-policy>vpls-only>igmp-snp mvr)
Full Contexts 
configure subscriber-mgmt msap-policy vpls-only-sap-parameters igmp-snooping mvr
Description 

This command enables the context to configure Multicast VPLS Registration (MVR) parameters.

17.409. mvrp

mvrp

Syntax 
mvrp
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>mrp mvrp)
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>sap>mrp mvrp)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls mrp mvrp
configure service vpls sap mrp mvrp
Description 

This object consolidates the MVRP attributes. MVRP is only supported initially in the management VPLS so the object is not supported under BVPLS, IVPLS or regular VPLS not marked with the m-vpls tag.

17.410. mvrp-control

mvrp-control

Syntax 
[no] mvrp-control
Context 
[Tree] (config>service>vpls>vpls-group mvrp-control)
Full Contexts 
configure service vpls vpls-group mvrp-control
Description 

This command enables MVRP control in the VPLS instances instantiated using the templates for the specified vpls-group. That means the flooding FDB will be created empty and will be populated with endpoints whenever MVRP receives a declaration and a registration on a specific endpoint. Also the VLAN ID associated by the control VPLS with the instantiated VPLS will be declared on service activation by MVRP on all virtual MVRP ports in the control VPLS. Service activation takes place when at least one other SAP is provisioned and brought up under the data VPLS. This is usually a customer facing SAP or a SAP leading outside of the MVRP controlled domain.

The no form of this command disallows MVRP control over this VPLS. The VPLS will be created with a regular FDB and will become as a result active upon creation time. Command change is allowed only when the related vpls-group is in shutdown state.

Default 

no mvrp-control